1
20
5444
-
https://s3.us-east-1.amazonaws.com/sjcdigitalarchives/original/82479d77493d92d664483eb72c13151e.pdf
bb111a5bf80a58dd6ea120ff69a446e9
PDF Text
Text
S!JOHN'S
College
ANNAPOLIS • SANTA FE
Charter and Polity of the Colle ge
ANNAPOLIS, MARYLAND ~ SANTA FE, NEW MEXICO
Amended and Restated
October 2011
Founded as King William' s School, 1696
Chartered as St. John's College, 1784
�Since this Polity can be amended between printings, the current official Polity is kept in the
offices of the Presidents of St. John's College.
HISTORY
St. John's College was founded in I 696 as King William's School in accordance with a
Petitionary Act for free-schools of the General Assembly of the Colony of Maryland. Following
the Revolutionary War, the General Assembly of the new State of Maryland granted a Charter to
St. John's College pursuant to and as a part of Chapter 37 of the Laws of Maryland of 1784. This
Charter was subsequently amended by the General Assembly through Resolution No. 41 of
1832.
The Visitors and Governors of St. John's College in 1950 revised the Charter to eliminate
extraneous and obsolete matter and to make certain other amendments consistent with present
requirements and conditions. It was the opinion of the Attorney General of Maryland that the
original Charter of the College was subject to the general Corporation Laws of Maryland and
might accordingly be amended by the Visitors and Governors, pursuant to these laws, without
legislative action by the General Assembly. Subsequent amendments were made in 1961, in
1963, in 1965, in 1970, and in 1975.
CHARTER OF ST. JOHN'S COLLEGE
WHEREAS, institutions for the liberal education of youth in the principles of virtue, knowledge
and useful literature are of the highest benefit to society, in order to train up and perpetuate a
succession of able and honest men for discharging the various offices and duties of life, both
civil and religious, with usefulness and reputation, and such institutions of learning have
accordingly been promoted and encouraged by the wisest and best regulated States; And
whereas, it appears to this General Assembly that many public spirited individuals, from an
earnest desire to promote the founding a college or seminary of learning on the Western Shore of
this State have subscribed and procured subscriptions to a considerable amount, and there is
reason to believe that very large additions will be obtained to the same throughout the different
counties of the said Shore, if they were made capable in law to receive and apply the same
towards founding and carrying on a college or general seminary of learning with such salutary
plan and with such legislative assistance and direction as the General Assembly might think fit,
and this General Assembly, highly approving those generous exertions of individuals, are
desirous to embrace the present favorable occasion of peace and prosperity for making lasting
provision for the encouragement and advancement of all useful knowledge and literature through
every part of this State;
BE IT ENACTED:
When the decision was reached to establish a second St. John's College in Santa Fe, New
Mexico, amendments were made to the Charter to authorize branches or extensions of the
College. The Charter was then filed with the Corporations Commission of the State of New
Mexico as a foreign corporation. The College was thus empowered to grant degrees in New
Mexico under the provisions of its Maryland Charter.
A Polity for the College was first suggested at a faculty meeting in 1943 by the Dean. A faculty
committee was elected and drafted a Polity, which was then promulgated by the President. In
April 1949 the Faculty elected a committee to revise the Polity. The resulting document was
approved by the Faculty on April 9, 1950, and was adopted by the Board of Visitors and
Governors on July 8, 1950. Subsequent quinquennial reviews were made by elected faculty
committees, and desired amendments were recommended by the Faculty to the Board of Visitors
and Governors. The Polity was thus amended at regular meetings of the Board held on May 14,
1955; May 21, 1960; May 15, 1965; June 6, 1970; April 19, 1975; January 16, 1982; April 19,
1986; and October 19, 1991. Other amendments were adopted by the Board at regular meetings
on February 22 and December 9, 1961; February 23 and September 28, 1963; October 3, 1970;
February 18, 1972;0ctober25, 1975;January24, 1976;November6, 1982;July21, 1984;April
20, 1985; October 25, 1986; April 11, 1987; October 19, 1991; July 18, 1992; April 17, 1993;
April 22, 1995; April 19, 1996; April 24, 1999, and November 6, 1999; January 27, 2001, April
26, 2003; April 24, 2004; January 27, 2006; April 22, 2006; April 25, 2009; April 24, 2010, and
October 29, 2011.
II. That a college or general seminary of learning by the name of "St. John's College" be
established on the said Western Shore upon the following fundamental and inviolable principles;
namely, first, the said college shall be founded and maintained forever upon a most liberal plan
for the benefit of youth of every religious denomination, who shall be freely admitted to equal
privileges and advantages of education and to all the literary honors of the college, according to
their merit without requiring or enforcing any religious or civil test, or urging their attendance
upon any particular religious worship or service other than what they have been educated in or
have the consent and approbation of their parents or guardians to attend; nor shall any preference
be given in the choice of a Principal, Vice-Principal or other Professor, Master or Tutor in said
college on account of his particular religious profession, having regard solely to his moral
character and literary abilities and other necessary qualifications to fill the place for which he
shall be chosen.
IV. That the governing body or board of said College shall consist of not more than sixty nor less
than thirteen Visitors and Governors, to be chosen and to hold office in such manner as the said
Visitors and Governors may determine and prescribe by their fundamental ordinances; provided,
however, that the Governors of the States of Maryland and New Mexico shall act ex officio as
two of the total number of Visitors and Governors of said college during their respective terms in
said offices; and that the said Visitors and Governors and their successors duly chosen shall be
and are hereby declared to be one community, corporation and body politic to have continuance
forever by the name of and by the same name they shall have perpetual succession.
�ST. JOHN'S COLLEGE
VII. That if the City of Annapolis should be fixed upon as a proper place for establishing the
said intended college, this General Assembly give and grant, and upon that condition do hereby
give and grant to the Visitors and Governors of the said College by the name of "The Visitors
and Governors of Saint John's College in the State of Maryland," and their successors all that
four acres within the City of Annapolis purchased for the use by the public and conveyed on the
2nd day of October, 1744, by Stephen Bordley, Esq., to Thos. Bladen, Esq., then Governor, to
have and to hold the said four acres of land with the appurtenances to the said Visitors and
Governors and their successors for the only use, benefit and behoof of the said college and
seminary of universal learning forever.
VIII. That the said Visitors and Governors and their successors by the same name shall be able
and capable in law to purchase, have and enjoy to them and their successors in fee, or for any
other less estate or estates, any lands, tenements, rents, annuities, pensions or other hereditaments
by the gift, grant, bargain, sale, alienation, enfeoffment, release, confirmation, or devise of any
person or persons, bodies politic or corporate capable to make the same, and such lands,
tenements, rents, annuities, pensions or other hereditaments or any less estates, rights or interests
of or in the same at their pleasure to grant, alien, sell and transfer in such manner and form as
they shall think meet and convenient for the furtherance of the said college; And also that they
may take and receive any sum or sums of money, and any kind, manner or portion of goods and
chattels that shall be given, sold or bequeathed to them by any person or persons, bodies politic
or corporate capable to make a gift, sale or bequest thereof and employ the same towards
erecting, setting up and maintaining the said college in such manner as they shall judge most
necessary and convenient for the instruction, improvement and education of youth in the
vernacular and learned languages, and generally in any kind of literature, arts and sciences,
which they shall think proper to be taught for training up good, useful and accomplished men fo r
the service of their country, in church and state.
IX. That the said Visitors and Governors and their successors by the name aforesaid shall be able
in law to sue and be sued, plead and be impleadable in any court or courts, before any judge,
judges, or justices within this State and elsewhere in all and all manner of suits, complaints,
pleas, causes, matters and demands of whatsoever kind, nature or form they be and all and every
other matter and thing therein to do in as full and effectual a manner as any other person or
persons, bodies politic or corporate within this State or any of the United States of America in
like cases may or can do.
X. That the said Visitors and Governors and their successors shall have full power and authority
to have, make and use one common and public seal and likewise one privy seal with such
devices and inscriptions as they shall think proper, and to ascertain, fix and regulate the uses of
both seals, by their own laws and the same seals or either of them to change, break, alter and
renew at their pleasure.
XI. That the said Visitors and Governors and their successors from time to time and at all times
hereafter, forever, shall have full power and authority to constitute and appoint in such manner as
they shall think best and most convenient, a principal, a vice-principal of the said college and
professors with proper tutors and assistants for instructing the students and scholars of the said
seminary in all the liberal arts and sciences, and in the ancient and modem tongues and
languages; and the said principal, vice-principal and professors so constituted and appointed
from time to time shall be known and distinguished forever as one learned body or faculty by the
name of "The Principal, Vice-Principal and Professors of St. John's College"; and by that name
shall be capable of exercising such powers and authorities as the Visitors and Governors of the
said college and their successors shall by their ordinances think necessary to delegate to them for
the instruction, discipline and government of the said seminary and of all the students, scholars,
ministers and servants belonging to the same.
XIV. That a majority of the said Visitors and Governors for the time being and duly assembled at
any meeting upon due notice given to the whole body of Visitors and Governors shall have full
power and authority to make fundamental ordinances for the government of the said college and
the instruction of youth as aforesaid, and by these ordinances to appoint such a number of their
own body not less than seven, as they may think proper for transacting all general and necessary
business of the said seminary and making temporary rules for the government of the same; and
also by the said fundamental ordinances to delegate to the principal, vice-principal and
professors such powers and authorities as they may think best for the standing government of the
said seminary and of the execution of the ordinances and rules of the same; provided always that
they be not repugnant to the form of government of any law of this State.
XV. And for animating and encouraging the students of said college to a laudable diligence,
industry and progress in useful literature and science, be it enacted that the said Visitors and
Governors and their successors shall by a written mandate under their privy seal and the hand of
someone of the Visitors and Governors to be chosen annually as their President, according to the
ordinance to be made for that purpose, have full power and authority to direct the principal, viceprincipal and professors to hold public commencements either on stated annual days, or
occasionally as the future ordinances of the said seminary may direct and at such
commencements to admit any of the students in the said college or any other persons meriting
the same (whose names shall be severally inserted in the same mandate) to any degree or degrees
in any of the faculties, arts and sciences and liberal professions to which persons are usually
admitted in other colleges or universities in America or Europe; And it is hereby enacted that the
principal , or in the case of his death or absence, the vice-principal , and in case of the death or
absence of both, the senior professor who may be present, shall make out and sign with his name
diplomas or certificates of the admission to such degree or degrees, which shall be sealed with
the public or greater seal of the said corporation or college and delivered to the graduates as
honorable and perpetual testimonials of such admission; which diplomas, if thought necessary
for doing greater honor to such graduates, shall also be signed with the names of the different
professors or as many of them as can conveniently sign the same; provided always that no
student or students within the said college shall ever be admitted to any such degree or degrees,
or have their name inserted in any mandate for a degree, until such student or students have been
first duly examined, and thought worthy of the same.
XVI. That the ordinances which shall be from time to time made by the Visitors and Governors
of the said college and their successors with an account of their other proceedings and of the
management of the estate and moneys committed to their trust, shall when required be laid
�before the General Assembly for their inspection and examination, but in case at any time
hereafter through oversight, or otherwise through misapprehension and mistaken constructions of
the powers, liberties and franchises in this Charter or Act of Incorporation granted, or intended to
be granted, any ordinance should be made by the said corporation of Visitors and Governors or
any matters done and transacted by the corporation contrary to the tenor hereof, it is enacted that
although such ordinances, acts and doings shall in themselves be null and void, yet they shall
not, however, in any courts of law, or by the General Assembly, be deemed, taken, interpreted or
adjudged into an avoidance or forfeiture of this Charter and Act of Incorporation, but the same
shall be and remain unhurt, inviolate and entire unto the said corporation of Visitors and
Governors in perpetual succession; and all their acts conformable to the powers, true intent and
meaning hereof shall be and remain in full force and validity, the nullity and avoidance of such
illegal acts to the contrary in any wise notwithstanding.
XVII. That this Charter and Act of Incorporation and every part thereof shall be good and
available in all things in the law according to the true intent and meaning thereof, and shall be
construed, reputed and adjudged in all cases most favorably on the behalf and for the best benefit
and be hoof of the said Visitors and Governors and their successors, so as most effectually to
answer the valuable end of this Act of Incorporation towards the general advancement and
promotion of useful knowledge, science and virtue.
Polity of St. John's College
Preamble
Education is the making of men and women out of children by bringing them into the world of
inherited customs, intellectual traditions, and spiritual ties. Institutions of learning are set up for
this purpose. Beyond this they should also seek to develop the moral and intellectual powers of
their students to enable them to fulfill best their freely chosen tasks and thus to take their own
responsible part in shaping the future. St. John's College is a community of learning committed
to holding these ends constantly in sight and to seeking the best means of attaining them.
St. John's College strives to illuminate the common heritage of humanity in a persisting study of
the great documents in which that heritage can be found. It is concerned with the unity of
knowledge, an understanding of the great issues, and the moral foundations on which men and
women may conduct their lives. To provide proper conditions for the pursuit of these ends, we,
the Board of Visitors and Governors, after consultation with the Faculty, do ordain and establish
this Polity for St. John's College.
Article I
XVIII. That the College may establish and operate one or more branches in one or more states of
the United States.
THE COLLEGE
(1) St. John's College is by its Charter a legal entity, carrying on its functions from its campuses
in Annapolis, Maryland, and in Santa Fe, New Mexico. Under the Charter of the College, all
power, authority, and responsibility pertaining to the College are vested in the Visitors and
Governors.
(2) The College consists of the following: The Board of Visitors and Governors, the Faculty, the
Graduate and Undergraduate Students, the Alumni and the Staff, and other members who
may be named from time to time by the Board of Visitors and Governors.
(3) Under the Charter, "the said Visitors and Governors, and their successors, from time to time,
and at all times hereafter, forever, shall have full power and authority to constitute and
appoint, in such manner as they shall think best and most convenient, a principal and viceprincipal of the said College, and professors, with proper tutors and assistants, for instructing
the students and scholars of the said seminary in all the liberal arts and sciences, and in the
ancient and modern tongues and languages; and the said principal, vice-principal, and
professors, so constituted and appointed from time to time shall be known and distinguished
forever as one learned body or faculty, by the name of 'The Principal, Vice-Principal, and
Professors of St. John's College;' and by that name shall be capable of exercising such
powers and authorities as the Visitors and Governors of the said college and their successors
shall by their ordinances think necessary to delegate to them for the instruction, discipline,
and government of the said seminary and of all the students, scholars, ministers and servants
belonging to the same."
�(a) The "principal" shall be the Presidents. When 'President' is used in this Polity it shall
mean:
(i) with respect to membership on the Board of Visitors and Governors, in the Faculty,
on committees of the Board, and sitting ex officio with the Instruction Committee,
and for presentation of, and response to, the Statement of Educational Policy and
Program (Article V (l)(c)), the President of the Annapolis campus and the President
of the Santa Fe campus;
(ii) with respect to membership on committees or sitting ex officio with committees, and
actions or procedures relating to one campus, the President of that campus;
who have been designated as honorary members of the Alumni Association of St. John's
College shall be called Alumni. All who have ever been Alumni shall continue to be.
(k) The Staff shall consist of all persons appointed by the President who are not members of
the Faculty of St. John's College or the Faculty of the Graduate Institute.
(I) There shall be no discrimination at St. John's College in appointments, conditions of
employment, admissions, educational policy, financial aid programs, athletics, or other
activities, on the basis of race, religion, age, sex, national origin, color, disability and/or
handicap, sexual orientation, or other characteristic protected by any applicable federal,
state or local law.
(iii) with respect to actions under Article [I (12)(b) or actions or procedures involving the
entire College under Article X (l)(a)(i) and Article X (l)(a)(iii), either President.
Article II
VISITORS AND GOVERNORS
(b) The "vice-principal" shall be the Dean who is serving as the Chair of the Instruction
Committee.
(c) There shall be a Dean of St. John's College in Annapolis and a Dean of St. John's College
in Santa Fe.
(d) The "professors, tutors and assistants" shall bear the title Tutor or Tutor Emeritus. Tutors
who have completed their tenure appointments shall be Tutors Emeriti.
(e) There shall be Vice-Presidents for College Advancement and Treasurers.
(f) There shall be Associate members of the Faculty, hereinafter called Associates, as
provided in Article VIII.
(g) The "one learned body or faculty," composed of the President, the Deans, the other
Tutors, the Tutors Emeriti, the Vice-Presidents for College Advancement, the Treasurers,
and the Associates, shall bear the title the Faculty of St. John's College.
(h) All who have formally matriculated, are at the present enrolled, and are in good standing
shall be called Students of St. John's College.
(i) The Directors and the Tutors of the Graduate Institute shall be called the Faculty of the
Graduate Institute.
(j) All who have been awarded a degree by the College shall be called Alumni. In addition,
all who have completed at least one semester of undergraduate study or at least one
segment of Graduate Institute study, but who are not currently enrolled, shall be called
Alumni either a) in the case of undergraduate students, when the class with which they
matriculated has graduated, orb) in the case of Graduate Institute students, at the end of
three full sessions of the Graduate Institute after the one in which they last enrolled. All
(l) Qualifications for Membership. Persons shall be eligible for membership on the Board of
Visitors and Governors who are concerned for the maintenance, progress, and vitality of St.
John ' s College' s educational program and who are willing and able to discharge the
responsibilities of trusteeship with devotion and energy.
(2) Members. The Board of Visitors and Governors shall consist of not more than thirty four
members, comprising the Presidents, the Deans, the Governors of Maryland and New
Mexico, and the President of the St. John' s College Alumni Association, ex officio, twentyseven members, of whom not more than twenty-four shall be elected by the entire Board, and
of whom not more than three shall be elected by the Alumni of the College, all in the manner
and for the terms hereinafter provided. In recognition of meritorious service to the College,
Visitors Emeriti may be elected to the Board who may attend all meetings of the Board, with
voice in deliberation, but without vote. Retired members of the Board who have served six
(6) terms on the Board as members in good standing may be designated as Honorary Board
Members upon election by the Board. Honorary Board Members will receive minutes of the
Plenary Sessions of the Board, may, as a guest, attend the Plenary Sessions of all regular
meetings of the Board, and may be asked to assist on Board Committees.
(3) Elections by the Board. At each annual meeting, the Board shall elect a class of members for
a term of three years, to succeed those members whose term expires at the conclusion of said
meeting. Those members elected shall begin their term upon the conclusion of the meeting of
their election. The procedure for nomination and election shall be as follows:
There shall be a Trustee and Governance Committee of the Board appointed by the Chair.
The Chair and the Presidents shall sit with the committee, ex officio, when nominations to
Board membership are being considered. The Trustee and Governance Committee shall
recommend to each member of the Board in writing, not later than thirty days prior to the
annual meeting at which the election is to be held, at least one candidate for each of the
places to be filled by such election, including each position as an officer of the Board.
Additional nominations may be made in writing, addressed to the Chair, signed by at least
�five members of the Board, prior to the date above provided for the report of the Trustee and
Governance Committee, and any such additional nominations shall be reported to the Board
by the Committee at the time of its report.
Voting on nominations at annual meetings may be by ballot, each member present to vote on
said nominations. In case the balloting results in a tie for one or more positions, the Board
shall determine the procedure to resolve the tie. No nominee for member or officer of the
Board shall be deemed elected who has not received the affirmative votes of at least a
majority of the members present at the meeting.
Jf there should be fewer than eight members in any class prior to the end of the term for such
class, any vacancy may be filled pursuant to the procedure provided above for regular
elections, except that the election may take place at any regular meeting. A member elected
to fill any such vacancy shall hold office for the remainder of the term of the class in which
such vacancy occurred.
(4) Elections by the Alumni . The voice of alumni being of particular value to the Board, each
year one of the college' s alumni shall be elected to membership for a term of three years, in
such manner that there shall be three members of the Board elected by the alumni, consisting
of three classes of one member each. Outgoing members so elected shall continue to serve
until their successors' term of office begins.
Such elections shall be conducted in accordance with the By-laws of the Alumni Association
of St. John ' s College. A representative of the Alumni Association Board shall consult w ith
the Chair of the Trustee and Governance Committee of the Board of Visitors and Governors
concerning the Association's nominees and shall advise the Trustee and Governance
Committee of its nominees in advance of the Board of Visitors and Governors' mid-year
meeting so that the organizations ' respective nominations can reasonably be coordinated. In
the event that for any reason there should be fewer than one member so elected in any class
prior to the end of the term of that class, the vacancy may be filled by the Alumni
Association of St. John ' s College. Newly elected alumni shall begin their terms immediately
following the annual meeting of the Board.
(5) Faculty Representation at Board Meetings. Three members of the Faculty shall be elected by
the Faculty on each campus to attend all regular sessions of the Board on the campus to
which they belong, with voice in deliberation, but without vote.
(6) Student Representation at Board Meetings. Two students shall be elected by the Students on
each campus to attend all regular sessions of the Board on the campus to which they belong,
with voice in deliberation, but without vote.
(7) Graduate Institute Director Representation at Board Meetings. Each Director of the Graduate
Institute may attend all regular sessions of the Board on such Director' s campus, with voice
in deliberation, but without vote.
(8) Graduate Institute Student Representation at Board Meetings. A student of the Graduate
Institute shall be elected by the Students of the Graduate Institute on each campus to attend
all regular sessions of the Board on such student's campus, with voice in deliberation, but
without vote.
(9) Staff Representation at Board Meetings. The Staff on each campus shall be invited to send
two representatives to all regular sessions of the Board at that campus, with voice in
deliberation, but without vote.
(10) Reelection. A member of the Board elected by the Board or by the Alumni may be elected
for not more than two consecutive terms, but may, after a second consecutive term, be
reelected to membership at the annual meeting in the year following the expiration of the
member's second term . Notwithstanding the foregoing, in extraordinary circumstances, the
Trustee and Governance Committee may recommend the reelection of the Chair of the Board
fo r up to two additional consecutive terms.
(11 ) Meetings of the Board.
(a) The Board shall hold at least three regular meetings annually, at least one of which shall
be held on each campus. The last meeting of the academic year shall be called the annual
meeting. The time and place of regular meetings shall be determined by the Chair, in
consultation with the President, and notice of regular meetings shall be given not less
than fifteen days prior to such meetings.
(b) Special meetings of the Board may be called by the President, the Chair, the Executive
Committee, or any nine members of the Board, not less than seven days after the dispatch
of written, faxed, or e-mail notice of the time, place, and purposes of the meeting. Such
notice may be dispensed with if waived in writing by all members of the Board either
before or after the meeting.
(c) Any business may be conducted at a regular meeting without specific notice of such
business (except that which is required by law or as provided herein as to elections and
amendments), but no business shall be conducted at any special meeting unless notice of
such business has been given, or has been waived as above provided.
(d) One third of the members of the Board shall constitute a quorum for the transaction of
business.
(e) The Board in regular session is open to elected and ex officio members, to Visitors
Emeriti, to Honorary Board Members as guests, to Associates and others invited by the
President, and to official representatives of the Faculty, Students, Graduate Institute, and
Staff. Attendance at Executive sessions shall be limited to voting members and Visitors
Emeriti. Public sessions shall be open without restriction. The Chair of the Board, in
consultation with the Presidents, shall determine whether any meeting or portion of a
meeting shall be in regular, executive, or public session.
�(12) Officers of the Board. At each annual meeting the Board shall elect a Chair, Vice-Chair,
and Secretary, to hold office until the next annual meeting or until their successors are
elected. Vacancies in any such offices may be filled at any regular meeting, or any special
meeting called for that purpose. Such officers shall perform the customary duties of such
offices, and such other duties as the Board may from time to time direct.
auditors, unattended by employees of the College. The Committee shall recommend to
the Board the appointment or reappointment of independent auditors to conduct the audit
for the next fiscal year. The Committee shall report to the Board annually on its review of
the audit, shall bring to the attention of the Board any matters related thereto requiring
Board action, and shall have such other responsibilities as the Chair of the Board shall
determine. The Treasurers shall serve as non-voting Staff to the committee.
(13) Committees of the Board.
(a) Executive Committee. The Chair, Vice-Chair, Secretary, Presidents, Deans, Chairs of the
Finance, Advancement, Visiting, and Trustee and Governance Committees, and two other
members chosen annually by the Board at the annual meeting shall comprise the
Executive Committee of the Board. In intervals between meetings of the Board, the
Executive Committee may act for the Board, except in those matters expressly delegated
to some other committee, person, or persons. Eight members of the Executive Committee
present at a meeting shall constitute a quorum for the transaction of business. The
Executive Committee shall determine the compensation of the Vice Presidents and
Treasurers. The Executive Committee shall recommend to the Board the compensation of
the Presidents and shall also recommend annually to the Board the Chair of the
Management Committee.
(b) Presidential Search Committee. There shall be a Presidential Search Committee to
recommend the appointment of a President as provided in Article IV(2).
(c) Trustee and Governance Committee. There shall be a Trustee and Governance
Committee which shall be responsible for the nomination, orientation, and assessment of
members of the Board as provided in Article ll(3), and shall have such other
responsibilities as the Chair of the Board shall charge.
(g) Polity Review Committee. There shall be a Polity Review Committee appointed by the
Chair every fifth year. The Chair of the Board shall appoint one of the members to be
Chair of the Committee. The Committee shall receive the report of the Faculty
Committee and after appropriate study shall make recommendations to the Board for
consideration at the annual meeting when the final review of the Polity is consummated.
The respective Chairs of the Board and Faculty Review Committees shall make such
arrangements as they deem appropriate for joint consultation prior to and after the
adoption of the report by the Faculty.
(h) Advancement Committee. There shall be an Advancement Committee which shall be
responsible for the oversight of the College's fundraising, communications, and alumni
relations functions, and shall have such other responsibilities as the Chair of the Board
shall determine. The Vice Presidents for College Advancement shall be members of the
Committee, ex officio.
(i) Other Committees. The Chair may appoint such other standing or special committees of
the Board as the Chair deems desirable or which the Board may request.
(j) Former members of the Board and Visitors Emeriti may be appointed by and at the
discretion of the Chair to serve on committees.
(d) Visiting Committee. There shall be a Visiting Committee, which shall meet at least once
annually with the Instruction Committee on one of the campuses. The Visiting
Committee shall discuss the Statement of Educational Policy and Program of the Chair of
the Instruction Committee and become acquainted with the aims of the College and how
they are being realized, and shall have such other responsibilities as the Chair of the
Board shall charge. The Deans shall be members of the Committee, ex officio.
(e) Finance Committee. There shall be a Finance Committee which shall be responsible for
recommending to the Board the annual budgets, policies for the expenditures from
endowments, major capital expenditures, and policies for the investment of College
assets. It shall be responsible for the oversight of the College's financial matters, physical
plant and compensation policies for faculty and staff, and shall have such other
responsibilities as the Chair of the Board shall charge. The Presidents, Treasurers, and
Chair of the Board shall sit on the Committee, ex officio.
(f) Audit Committee. There shall be an Audit Committee, including a Chair, appointed by
the Chair of the Board. The Committee shall be responsible for the review in detail of the
annual report of the independent auditors and the discussion of audit findings with the
(k) Except for the Presidential Search Committee and the Polity Review Committee,
committee appointments shall be made annually. Members of the Committees serve until
their successors have been appointed.
(I) Any member of the Board may, without invitation, attend any Board committee meeting,
except those of the Presidential Search, Trustee and Governance, and Executive
Committees, but without vote.
(m)Whenever a Capital Campaign is in progress, its Chair shall be an ex-officio voting
member of the Finance and Executive Committees.
(14) Execution of Contracts, Transfer of Securities, Etc. All contracts of $50,000 or more, notes,
deeds, leases, mortgages, releases, bonds for security or indemnity, negotiable instruments,
stock certificates, transfers, and powers, and like papers and documents on behalf of the
College or the Endowment Funds shall be executed by two persons, of whom one shall be the
President, the Chair, or a Vice-Chair, and of whom the other shall be the Secretary of the
Board or the Treasurer of the campus concerned.
�(3) The President shall concurrently be a Tutor, but the provisions of Article VI need not apply.
( 15) Signing of checks, drafts, etc. All checks, drafts, acceptances, and similar orders for the
payment of money on behalf of the College may be signed by the same persons authorized to
execute contracts, etc., pursuant to Section (14) hereof, but may also be signed by such
persons, and in such manner, as the Board may from time to time direct by appropriate
resolution.
(16) The College shall indemnify, to the full extent permitted by law, any current or former
member of the Board or officer of the College or any person who, while a member of the
Board or an officer of the College, may have served at the College's request as a director,
officer, partner or trustee of another entity, against any judgments, penalties, fines,
settlements and reasonable expenses actually and necessarily incurred by him or her in
connection with the defense of any action, suit or proceeding to which he or she is made a
party by reason of being or having been such member of the Board or officer of the College.
Article III
THE FACULTY
The Visitors and Governors by these ordinances hereby delegate to the Faculty of St. John's
College the President, the Deans, the other Tutors, the Tutors Emeriti, the Vice-Presidents for
College Advancement, the Treasurers, and the Associates "powers and authorities" for the
"instruction, discipline, and government" of the College.
Article IV
THE FACULTY: THE PRESIDENT
(1) There shall be a President for the Annapolis campus and a President for the Santa Fe campus,
each appointed as provided in Article IV (2). There is delegated to each President by the
Visitors and Governors executive responsibility and authority for the instruction, discipline,
and government of the President's campus, and the President, in turn, may delegate such
authority. In the interest of the orderly conduct of business and of maintaining and promoting
the unity of the College, the Presidents shall regularly consult and communicate with each
other and, as appropriate, with other College officials, on matters of common concern.
(2) The President shall be appointed by the Board of Visitors and Governors on the
recommendation of a Committee composed of five members of the Board of Visitors and
Governors appointed by the Chair of the Board, at least one of whom is an alumnus the
'
Deans, and one Tutor having tenure from each campus elected by the Faculty on that
campus. This Committee shall be known as the Presidential Search Committee. It shall
consult with the continuing President in a regular and timely fashion. Prior to making its final
recommendation, it shall, on both campuses, consult with all other appropriate persons and
shall arrange for the final candidates to meet with the Faculty and the Instruction Committee.
(4) The President and persons to whom the President delegates authority shall consult with the
Deans, other appropriate persons, and appropriate Faculty committees in matters of policy,
initiation of programs, and setting of priorities affecting the general welfare of the College.
(5) There shall be a Financial Committee on each campus consisting of the President as Chair,
the Dean and Treasurer of the campus, and other members the President may appoint. It will
review proposed budgets prior to their being presented to the Finance Committee of the
Board. It will also meet prior to Board meetings to review performance in the fiscal year to
date and emerging budgetary strengths and weaknesses.
(6) The President shall appoint, or delegate the power to appoint, other committees as may be
necessary for the carrying out of the President's duties for which no provision is made under
Article IX.
(7) If in the judgment of the Board of Visitors and Governors, the College is facing a financial
exigency at either or both of its campuses which could call for a reduction in the number of
Faculty positions, both Presidents shall immediately advise the Faculty of the nature and
extent of the financial difficulty and consult with them concerning the best way to address
the situation. The Faculty may then make a formal recommendation to the Presidents on
ways to meet the problem, or, if the Faculty fails so to act, the Deans and the Instruction
Committee shall propose a plan to the Presidents. The Presidents shall jointly then determine
a plan which specifies a preferred course of action to be taken. All necessary steps must be
taken in timely fashion as prescribed by the Board. Nothing herein provided shall limit the
power of the Board to act otherwise in the event of need to reduce or eliminate Faculty
positions.
Article V
THE FACULTY: THE CHAIR OF THE INSTRUCTION COMMITTEE AND THE DEANS
(1) The Chair of the Instruction Committee.
(a) There is delegated to the Chair of the Instruction Committee responsibility and authority
for the organization of the program of instruction in the liberal arts that is followed by the
Tutors and the Students.
(b) The Deans shall serve alternately, for a term of one year, as Chair of the Instruction
Committee.
(c) Each year the Chair of the Instruction Committee shall, after consultation with the
Instruction Committee on the Chair's campus, and after discussion with the Instruction
Committee of the College, submit a Statement of Educational Policy and Program to the
Faculty as a whole for discussion. The Presidents shall present the Statement, together
�with an account of the Faculty discussion of it, and their responses to it, as a report to the
Board of Visitors and Governors for its consideration.
(d) Should the Chair of the Instruction Committee•or the Chair of the Board of Visitors and
Governors deem it appropriate, the Chair of the Instruction Committee shall report to the
Board on instructional matters, and shall respond to such questions as the Board, through
its Chair, may ask.
(2) The Deans.
(a) There is delegated to the Deans on their respective campuses responsibility and authority
for the supervision of the program of instruction and for the general welfare of the
students and for whatever government of the students be necessary for the greatest
possible attainment of aims of the program. Each Dean shall be the Chair of the
Instruction Committee on such Dean's campus. In carrying out the Dean's duties, each
Dean shall consult regularly with the President and with the Instruction Committee and
the other appropriate Faculty committees on that campus.
(b) The Deans shall be appointed for terms of five years from among the Tutors by the
Visitors and Governors on the recommendation of the President after consultation with a
special committee of seven, four from the campus for which the Dean is being chosen
and three from the other campus, selected from among themselves by the Tutors having
tenure.
(c) A Dean shall be appointed from among the tutors who have themselves been appointed in
accord with Article VI(3). If non-tenured, the appointee shall acquire tenure upon
becoming Dean, in which case the provisions of Article VI(3)(a) regarding reappointment
schedules shall not apply.
(d) To assist them in carrying out their duties, the Deans shall recommend one or more
Tutors to be appointed by the President with the title of Assistant Dean.
(e) During the absence of the President from either campus, the Dean on that campus shall if
necessary exercise the President's prerogative of final decision.
(f) During the absence of either Dean from the campus a Tutor with tenure named by the
Dean shall act for the Dean.
(g) The Dean on each campus shall appoint such committees as may be necessary for the
carrying out of the Dean's duties for which no other provision is made.
Article VI
TlIE FACULTY: TlIE TUTORS
(1) The primary responsibilities of the Tutors are to teach and to make themselves as competent
as possible in all parts of the St. John's Program.
(2) The Tutors shall have authority to recommend to the Visitors and Governors candidates for
degrees of their respective campuses.
(3) Appointment and Reappointment of Tutors. Tutors shall be appointed by the Visitors and
Governors upon recommendation of the President in accordance with the recommendation of
the Dean and the Instruction Committee on that campus where the Tutors so appointed shall
teach.
(a) The schedule of regular appointment of Tutors on each campus shall be either (i)(A) or
(i)(B) below, to be decided by the President in accordance with the recommendation of
the Dean and the Instruction Committee on that campus where the Tutors so appointed
shall teach:
(i)(A) New Tutors shall be appointed for one year unless they are appointed at mid-year,
in which case the initial appointment shall be for a year and a half. First
reappointments shall be for one year. Second and third reappointments shall be
for two and three years respectively.
(i)(B) New Tutors shall be appointed for two years unless they are appointed at midyear, in which case the initial appointment shall be for a year and a half. First and
second reappointments shall be for two and three years respectively.
(ii) A Tutor who has completed a three-year appointment must either be given a tenure
appointment or not be reappointed as Tutor. A Tutor may, however, be given a tenure
appointment as early as the conclusion of the first year of a three-year appointment.
Procedures leading to a recommendation for an early tenure appointment shall be
initiated by the Dean and Instruction Committee, but not without the consent of the
appointee, and shall not prejudice subsequent consideration for a tenure appointment.
Tenure appointments shall not continue beyond retirement. Tutors Emeriti shall retain
their privileges and responsibilities in voting at Faculty meetings.
(iii) Before making recommendations to the President on tenure appointments the Dean
on each campus shall consult with the Instruction Committee on that campus, after
seeking the advice of the Tutors on that campus.
(iv) A Tutor, to be recommended for a tenure appointment, must have served full-time at
the campus where the recommendation is to be made for the two years immediately
preceding the year in which that recommendation is made, the provisions of (ii) above
�notwithstanding. In ordinary cases, these two years of service will be the second year
of a two-year appointment and the first year of a three-year appointment. These
requirements may be waived by the President on the recommendation of the Dean
and instruction Committee on that campus.
(b) A non-tenure appointment as Tutor establishes the possibility, but not the presumption, of
its renewal and the granting of a tenure appointment. Procedures for considering nontenure appointments differ from those for considering tenure appointments. Satisfaction
of appointment criteria admits of degree. With each successive reappointment, the criteria
are applied more rigorously. For a tenure appointment the application is especially strict.
(c) For the purpose of temporary transfer between campuses, special appointments of one or
two years may be granted to a Tutor in addition to his or her regular appointments. The
Tutor may ask that such an appointment be counted as a regular appointment for the
purpose of (a) above. In the case of a permanent transfer a Tutor may ask that years of
service at the other campus be counted toward tenure according to the provisions of (a)
above. Nevertheless, the provisions of (3)(a)(iv) prevail.
(d) Special one-year appointments and reappointments may be given to Tutors who intend to
teach on a part-time basis only. Such a Tutor may subsequently apply for and receive a
regular appointment. Special part-time appointments may then be counted on a fractional
basis toward eligibility for tenure, subject to the provisions of (3)(a)(iv). In establishing
eligibility for sabbatical leave, special part-time appointments shall be computed
proportionate! y.
(e) Visiting Tutors may be appointed for a term or a year.
(4) Notification.
(a) A Tutor under consideration for a non-tenure appointment to begin in a certain calendar
year shall be notified by the President no later than December 15th of the preceding
calendar year whether reappointment will be recommended to the Board of Visitors and
Governors. A Tutor who is reappointed shall be notified by the President by March 1st
of the calendar year in which the new appointment is to begin.
(b) A Tutor under consideration for a tenure appointment to begin in a certain calendar year
shall be notified by the President no later than May 31st of the preceding calendar year
whether the appointment will be recommended to the Board of Visitors and Governors. A
Tutor who is appointed shall be notified by the President by July 31st of that same
preceding year.
(5) A Tutor may apply to the instruction Committee of the College not later than January 15th
for a transfer of campus for the next academic year. Transfers shall require approval of both
Deans after consultation with their Instruction Committees.
(6) (a) A Tutor's appointment may be terminated by the Board of Visitors and Governors for
one of the following reasons only:
(i) failure or inability to perform teaching duties in a satisfactory manner, or
(ii) moral turpitude.
The President shall make such a recommendation to the Board of Visitors and Governors
only with the concurrence of the Dean and the Instruction Committee of the campus
concerned. Before making such a recommendation, the President shall advise the Tutor
affected, and the Tutor shall have the right to be heard by the Instruction Committee or, at
the Tutor' s option, by another committee to be designated by the President for this
purpose.
(b) Either Dean, with the approval of the Instruction Committee on the campus concerned,
may recommend to the President that in the interest of instruction a Tutor be temporarily
relieved of duties in whole or in part at any time. When such action is taken, the Tutor's
salary shall be continued for the remainder of the current academic year.
(7) The sabbatical leave program is designed to provide Tutors with an opportunity for study,
rest, and renewal of spirit, in anticipation of future teaching. It is the objective of the program
to grant all applications for sabbatical leave meeting the conditions for eligibility set out in
(a) of this section. It is understood that Tutors on such leave will not undertake full-time
remunerative employment elsewhere and will return to the College.
(a) Eligibility for sabbatical leave shall be upon the following conditions:
(i) A Tutor who has received a tenure appointment may apply for a full year of
sabbatical leave at full salary, to be taken upon completion of the equivalent of seven
full years of service to the College since the original appointment, or the equivalent of
six full years of service since any previous sabbatical leave.
(ii) Such a Tutor may apply for an earlier sabbatical leave of a full year at partial salary,
or a partial year at full salary. The fractional salary or fractional year shall be
determined by the number of years of teaching completed in relation to the prescribed
total for either an initial or a subsequent sabbatical leave, as the case may be. ln no
case shall a Tutor be paid more than the Tutor's regular salary.
(iii) Upon completion of sabbatical leave, a Tutor is expected to return to the College for
at least two more years.
(b) If, in the judgment of the President, financial or academic needs at a campus should
require that fewer sabbatical leaves be granted there in a given year than there are
qualified applicants, and if the number that can be granted there should be smaller than
one-sixth of the number of Tutors at that campus having tenure and not on full-time leave
under the provisions of section (8) below, the President shall so notify the Board of
�Visitors and Governors and seek its approval for delaying a sabbatical leave for one or
more of the applicants.
(c) If in a year there are more qualified applicants for sabbatical leave at any one campus
than there are leaves to be granted at that campus, then those members shall have
precedence who meet the following conditions in the order set forth:
(i) Those who have served for the greater number of years since their first appointment
as Tutor or since their last sabbatical leave, whichever is more recent;
(ii) Those whose service has been continuous throughout those years;
(iii) Those whose last sabbatical leave was postponed because of the financial or academic
needs of the College;
(iv) Those who have seniority of appointment.
When there is a conflict of precedence, the Dean and the Instruction Committee on the
campus concerned shall be consulted.
(d) A Tutor eligible for sabbatical leave shall make application to the President before
November 1st for leave to begin the following July 1st, and shall be informed of the
action upon the application not later than January 1st.
(8) The President, with the concurrence of the Dean after consultation with the Instruction
Committee on the campus concerned, may grant leaves of absence to Tutors for a period of
one year or less. At that time it shall be determined whether the leave shall be counted as
service to the College with respect to eligibility for sabbatical leave and, if so, how. The
decision with respect to a request for leave of absence shall be made in the light of the
requirements both of the applicant Tutor and of the whole College.
(a) Leave of absence may be renewed upon request but not more than twice in succession
except in extraordinary circumstances.
(b) A request for a leave of absence shall be submitted to the President as early as possible in
the academic year before the year in which the leave is to be taken, but not later than
January 15th of that year. Requests for leaves of absence may be withdrawn at any time
prior to April 1st of the year in which the request is submitted. Requests for leaves of
absence for the second semester must be submitted no later than October 15th.
(c) Tutors on sabbatical leave or leave of absence remain members of the Faculty with the
right of full participation in Faculty meetings and all other College exercises.
Article VII
THE FACULTY: THE VICE-PRESIDENTS FOR COLLEGE ADVANCEMENT AND THE
TREASURERS
(I) The Vice-Presidents for College Advancement shall be responsible to the President for the
supervision and development of all programs in fund-raising, public relations, and alumni
relations on their respective campuses.
(2) The Vice-President for College Advancement on each campus shall be appointed by the
Board of Visitors and Governors on the recommendation of the President made after
consultation with the Dean on that campus and a committee constituted by resolution of the
Faculty on that campus.
(3) The Treasurers shall have charge, on their respective campuses, under the supervision of the
President, of all funds and property, and shall have authority to carry out fiscal and property
transactions, and to receive and disburse funds , subject to the provisions of this Polity and
other directions and arrangements pursuant thereto.
(4) The Treasurer on each campus shall be appointed by the Board of Visitors and Governors on
the recommendation of the President made after consultation with the Dean on that campus
and a committee constituted by resolution of the Faculty on that campus.
(5) The Vice-Presidents for College Advancement and Treasurers may be appointed Tutors
under the provisions of Article Vl(3)(d).
Article VIII
THE FACULTY: THE ASSOCIATES
(I) Associate members of the Faculty on each campus shall be appointed by the Board of
Visitors and Governors on the recommendation of the President in consultation with the
Dean of that campus. On each campus, the President shall have ultimate executive authority
over the Associates.
(2) Associates may be appointed Tutors under the provisions of Article Vl(3)(d).
(3) The Associates on either campus may establish for themselves an Associates' Council for the
purpose of considering College matters of concern to them and communicating with other
members of the College.
(4) The Associates' Councils may establish such committees as they deem appropriate.
�Article IX
(5) There shall be the following Associates, as deemed necessary by the President on each
campus, with the powers and responsibilities provided.
(a) The Registrars. The Registrars shall be responsible to the Deans on their respective
campuses. They shall prepare and supervise the registration of students and shall be
responsible for the academic records and schedules of students.
THE FACULTY: FACULTY COMMITTEES
(1) College-wide Committees
(a) The Instruction Committee
(b) The Librarians. The Librarians shall be responsible to the Deans on their respective
campuses for the operation of the library. Appointments of professional members of the
Library Staff shall be made upon the recommendation of the Librarian to the Dean on
each campus.
(i) The Instruction Committee shares with its Chairs responsibility for the program of
instruction of the College. It shall consist of twelve Tutors in addition to the
Deans. The Presidents shall sit with the Committee ex officio. Six of the Tutors
shall be elected from each campus of the College. The Instruction Committee
shall meet annually. On each campus the members of the Instruction Committee
and the Dean as Chair constitute the Instruction Committee of the College
on that campus. The President sits ex officio with the lnstruction Committee on
each campus.
(c) The Director of Student Activities and the Director of Athletics. The Director of Student
Activities and the Director of Athletics, as the case may be, shall be responsible to the
Deans on their respective campuses for devising and directing programs of recreational
activities.
(ii) Each of the members of the Instruction Committee shall serve for a term of three
years, and the terms shall be arranged in such a way that each year the terms of
two members at each campus shall expire. Terms begin and end the day following
commencement exercises. Annually, and separately at each campus, the President
with the Dean on his campus, after consulting with the Instruction Committee and
seeking the advice of the other Tutors on that campus, shall at the last regular
Faculty meeting on that campus nominate four Tutors of whom two shall be
elected by the Tutors to membership on the Instruction Committee. The Faculty
shall be informed of the names of the nominees prior to the meeting at which the
election occurs. At the expiration of the three-year term a member of the
Instruction Committee shall for one year be ineligible for reelection.
(d) The Directors of Admissions. The Directors of Admissions shall be responsible to the
Deans on their respective campuses for the annual enrollment of qualified freshmen.
(e) The Directors of Alumni Activities. The Directors of Alumni Activities shall be
responsible to the Vice-Presidents for College Advancement. Their primary duty is to
enable the College and the Alumni Association to be of service to alumni.
(f) The Directors of Financial Aid. The Directors of Financial Aid shall be responsible to the
Deans on their respective campuses for the administration of financial aid programs.
(g) The Directors of Career Services. The Directors of Career Services shall be responsible to
the Deans on their respective campuses for helping and counseling students with respect
to graduate and professional schools and careers.
(iii) If for any reason a member of the Instruction Committee is unable to serve for a
part of his or her term, another Tutor shall be chosen to serve for that part of the
term. For this purpose the President and the Dean, in consultation with the
Instruction Committee on the campus where the vacancy occurs, shall nominate
two Tutors of whom the Tutors shall elect one in a regular Faculty meeting.
(h) The Director of College Information Technology Services. The Director of College
Information Technology Services shall be responsible to both Presidents for the
development and management of information services college-wide.
(iv) If the Instruction Committee resigns with the Deans on a matter of confidence and
the resignations are accepted, the President, in consultation with the new Deans
and after seeking the advice of the other Tutors, shall nominate nine Tutors for the
six vacancies on each campus in such a manner that two out of each three
nominees shall be elected by the Tutors for each of the three classes to fill the
unexpired terms.
(i) The Directors of Laboratories. The Directors of Laboratories shall be responsible to the
Dean, in consultation with the Laboratory archons, for training and directing the student
laboratory assistants, designing experiments for the laboratory program, and purchasing
and maintaining laboratory equipment.
(b)
The Tutors' Compensation Committee
(i) There shall be a Tutors' Compensation Committee of six Tutors, three to be
elected by the Tutors on each campus, and the chair shall annually alternate
�between campuses. The Committee shall advise the President concerning Tutors'
compensation and related matters; it shall make annual reviews of the College's
statement of Tutors' salaries and other compensation of Tutors and report
to the Tutors and the President recommendations consequent upon the review.
(ii) Members of the Committee shall be elected annually on each campus for terms of
three years in such a manner that the term of one member on each campus
terminates each year. The Tutors' Compensation Committee on each campus shall
provide the Tutors on that campus with two nominations for each vacancy on the
Committee on that campus. Additional nominations may be made at the Faculty
meeting when election shall be made.
(2) Campus-specific Committees
(a)
The Campus Planning Committees. The Faculty on each campus shall elect five of its
members as a Campus Planning Committee. Two members shall be elected to the
Committee annually except in every third year, when one member shall be chosen.
The President, the Dean, one of the Assistant Deans, and the Treasurer on each
campus shall sit ex officio with the Committee on that campus. It shall be the duty of
the respective committees to advise the President on the construction of new
buildings, the renovation of old buildings, landscaping of grounds, and all matters
relating to the maintenance and development of the campus.
(b)
The Library Committees. The President on each campus, in consultation with the
Librarian and the Dean, shall appoint three Tutors on each campus to serve as a
Library Committee. The President, the Dean, and the Librarian shall themselves be ex
officio members of the Committee, and the Librarian shall serve as Chair. It shall be
the duty of the Library Committees to assist the Librarians in making the Libraries
serve the ends of the College and its program; it shall be their duty to advise the
Librarians in regard to Library policy and acquisitions.
(c)
The Information Technology Committees. The Dean on each campus shall appoint
three Tutors to serve as an Information Technology Committee, one of whom shall
serve as Chair. Each Tutor shall serve a three-year term. The Dean, the Director of
College Information Technology Services, and the Librarian shall be ex officio
members. lt shall be the duty of the Information Technology Committees to advise
the Director of College Information Technology Services in regard to the needs of the
College and its Program.
(d)
The Prize Committees. Every three years the President shall appoint Tutors on each
campus to supervise the awarding of prizes on the respective campuses. The
Committees shall have full authority to decide what prizes shall be awarded and to
name the recipients of the prizes.
(e)
The Fellowship Committees. On each campus there shall be a Fellowship Committee
appointed by the President. It shall be the duty of this Committee to inform students
of fellowships for which they may be eligible, to assist them in applying for
fellowships, and to act on behalf of the College in any matter relating to application
for fellowships.
(f)
Other Committees. The Faculty on each campus shall have authority to elect, or to
request the President to appoint, additional committees that may from time to time
become necessary.
Article X
THE FACULTY: FACULTY PROCEDURE
(1) Procedure for Instructional Proposals.
(a) (i) Any proposal concerning matters of instruction that may affect the College as a
whole shall originate with the Dean and the Instruction Committee on either
campus. A decision as to whether a proposal is college-wide or campus-specific
shall be made by the Deans and Instruction Committee of the College. They shall
make this decision after notifying the Faculty on both campuses and inviting their
comment.
Written statements of college-wide instructional proposals shall be distributed to
the Faculty at least two weeks before the Faculty meeting at which they are to be
presented; the proposal shall be presented to the whole Faculty by the Chair of the
Instruction Committee, either in person or through the other Dean. If, after full
discussion of any proposal so presented, there be no objection on the part of any
Tutor, the measure stands approved and becomes effective as of the date specified
therefore. If, after full discussion, a Tutor objects to the proposal and holds to the
objection, the proposal shall be submitted to vote of the Tutors at special Faculty
meetings called by the Presidents within a month. Any objections that have been
made and held to and submitted in writing shall be transmitted immediately in
writing to the whole faculty. Any objections that have been made and held to but
not submitted in writing shall be reported immediately in writing to the whole
Faculty. If, after discussion, any objection has been made and held to, the
Presidents, in calling special Faculty meetings, shall report the statement of the
Chair of the Instruction and the Dean on the other campus as to whether it be a
matter of confidence; and in submitting the proposal to vote, the Chair of the
Instruction Committee and the Dean on the other campus shall, at the special
Faculty meetings, repeat their statement as to whether it be a matter of
confidence. The vote may then be taken and tallied by the Presidents in such a
fashion that the Tutors shall have recorded their decision acting as a whole. If the
proposal be one that the Chair of the Instruction Committee and the other Dean
have declared a matter of confidence and if it be defeated by majority vote, the
Deans and the Instruction Committee shall immediately resign. If it be passed by
majority vote, it shall become effective as of the date specified therefore. For the
�confidence procedure a quorum shall consist of three-fourths of all resident Tutors
on each campus.
(d) A quorum shall consist of a majority of the Faculty in residence except as otherwise
provided.
(ii) Any instructional proposal that has been deemed campus-specific shall be subject
to the procedure set forth above, except that, if an objection is made and held to
on either campus, voting shall proceed only on the campus were the proposal is
intended to be put into effect. Any objections that have been made and held to and
submitted in writing on the other campus shall be transmitted immediately to the
voting Faculty. Any objections that have been made and held to but not submitted
in writing shall be reported immediately in writing to the voting Faculty. If the
confidence procedure is invoked, it shall be only by the Dean on the voting
campus, and it shall affect the Dean and the Instruction Committee only on that
campus.
(e) Only Tutors may vote on instructional matters. All Faculty members may vote on all
other matters not specifically restricted in the Polity.
(iii) The President may refuse to accept the resignation of the Deans or the Instruction
Committee, any or all of them, whenever in the judgment of the President such
resignation would be detrimental to the proper functioning of the College;
provided, however, that if any six or more Tutors shall petition the Visitors and
Governors, the latter shall review the President's decision within four weeks
'
during which time the Deans and the Instruction Committee shall continue in
office.
(iv) In the event that the proposal be defeated and the resignations be accepted, the
President shall proceed to the choice of new Deans in accordance with the
provisions of Article V (2)(b ).
(b) Upon either a petition of not less than one-tenth of the Tutors on either campus or a
request from the President, the Dean and Instruction Committee on that campus shall
consider any recommendation concerning instruction and shall report to the Faculty
within one year their proposal concerning it. They shall decide whether their proposal is a
college-wide or campus-specific proposal , and the procedure of Article X(l) shall apply.
(2) Faculty Meetings.
(a) Regular monthly meetings of the Faculty shall be called upon due notice by the President;
except that in the period comprising the months of December and January only one
regular meeting need be called. The President or, in his absence, the Dean, shall preside.
In the absence of the President and the Dean, the Faculty shall elect one of its members to
preside.
(b) Special meetings of the Faculty may be called upon due notice by the President alone or
at the request of five Faculty members.
(c) Due notice shall be construed to mean no less than three days notice, except in cases of
emergency.
(3) The Secretary of the Faculty. At the last regular meeting of an academic year, the Faculty on
each campus shall elect one of its members, then in at least his or her third year at the
College, as Secretary. The Secretary shall assist in the preparation and circulation of the
agenda for Faculty meetings, shall keep the minutes of such meetings, and shall collect and
circulate reports of Faculty committees.
Article XI
THE SCHOLARS-IN-RESIDENCE AND THE ARTISTS-IN-RESIDENCE
The Scholars-in-Residence and the Artists-in-Residence shall be appointed from time to time by
the Board of Visitors and Governors on the recommendation of the President after consultation
with the Dean and the Instruction Committee on the campus where the Scholars and Artists shall
reside.
Article XII
THE STUDENTS
(1) The primary responsibilities of the Students are to study and to make themselves as
competent as possible in all parts of the St. John's Program. Their advice and service shall be
sought by the Faculty in such matters and in such ways as may best serve the general welfare
of the College.
(2) The Students of St. John's College shall constitute the Student Polity of St. John's College in
Annapolis and in Santa Fe.
(3) The Student Polity in Annapolis or Santa Fe may establish for itself a government which is
representative of all polity members. The Dean on each campus may delegate to the Student
government a share of the responsibility for the general welfare of the Students and whatever
government of the Students may be necessary for the greatest possible attainment of the aims
of the program. The duties of the Student Government may include:
(a) the management of funds available to the Student Polity;
(b) the sanctioning of all student clubs, organizations, and activities, and their regulation, if
necessary;
�(c) the representation of the Students of St. John's College to the community outside the
College;
(d) the establishment and maintenance of formal channels of communication between the
Students and the Faculty; and
(e) any other duties agreed upon by the Students and the Dean.
Article XIII
THE GRADUATE INSTITUTE
(l) The Directors.
(a) There shall be a Director of the Graduate Institute on each campus to whom shall be
delegated responsibility and authority, under the Chair of the Instruction Committee, for
the organization and supervision on the Director' s campus of the graduate program of
instruction in the liberal arts and for matters concerning the general welfare of the
students. Concerning matters that affect the Graduate Institute as a whole the Director
shall, in consultation with the other Director, be responsible to the Chair of the
Instruction Committee. Concerning matters limited to one campus, the Director on that
campus shall be responsible to the Dean on that campus.
(b) The Directors shall be appointed for terms of four years from among the Tutors by the
Board of Visitors and Governors on the recommendation of the President, after
consultation with the Deans and a special committee consisting of five members, three
from the campus on which the new Director will serve, and two from the other campus,
selected from among themselves by the Tutors having tenure. The Directors shall be
Tutors of the Graduate Institute.
(c) Every three years, on an alternating basis, one of the Directors shall write a Statement of
Educational Policy and Program for the Graduate Institute. The Director who writes the
Statement, after consulting with the Committee for the Graduate Institute on his or her
campus, and with the other Director, shall submit the Statement to the Instruction
Committee for discussion at its joint meeting.
(2) The Faculty Teaching in the Graduate Institute.
(a) Each Director, after consultation with the Committee for the Graduate Institute on that
campus, and in accordance with the recommendation of the Instruction Committee on the
same campus, shall recommend to the President Tutors for appointment in the summer
session of the Graduate Institute.
(b) During the summer term the Tutors teaching in the Graduate Institute on each campus
shall have the authority to recommend to the Board of Visitors and Governors candidates
for degrees.
(3) Committees for the Graduate Institute.
(a) On each campus the Committee for the Graduate Institute shares with the Director on the
same campus responsibility for carrying out the program of instruction of the Graduate
Institute and for the general welfare of the students.
(b) Each Committee shall consist of three Tutors who have experience in the Institute in
addition to the Director, who shall serve as Chair.
'
(c) Members of each Committee shall be appointed by the Director with the concurrence of
the Dean on the same campus after consultation with the Committee for the Graduate
Institute on that campus.
(4) Proposals concerning matters of instruction or policy shall originate with one of the
Directors, after consultation with the other Director and with the Committee for the
Graduate _Institute, and shall be submitted to the Dean on the originating campus for
handlmg m accordance with Article X(l)(a)(i).
Article XIV
THE ALUMNI
(1) Alumni shall be life-Iong members of the College, since St. John's College is a community
not limited by geographical location or fixed periods of time.
(2) The Alumni Association is the formal means by which Alumni participate in the life of the
College. Through the election of alumni members of the Board of Visitors and Governors
Alumni share in the direction of that life. ln these and other ways, Alumni shall be given the
opportumty to serve the College.
(3) The College shall cooperate with the Alumni Association to enable Alumni to assist in
providing services such as recruiting and interviewing prospective students, placing
graduates m appropnate employment, and advising students concerning careers and
adm1ss10n to graduate and professional schools.
(4) The College, in cooperation with the Alumni Association, shall provide seminars and other
appropriate educational activities in Annapolis, in Santa Fe, and in other places.
Article XV
THE STAFF
(1) Members of the Staff assist with the administration and maintenance of the College,
performing duties necessary to its well-being. They are subject to appropriate Staff rules and
regulatrons.
�Article XVII
(2) Members of the Staff on either campus may establish for themselves a Staff Council for the
purpose of better communication and understanding of College policies as a benefit to the
College as a whole. The Staff Council shall seek to establish and maintain formal channels of
communication among the whole Staff and between the Staff and the appropriate College
Officers. The Treasurer on each campus shall review Staff employment regulations with the
Staff Council and discuss with them any changes proposed.
COMPLIANCE WITH LAW
No provision of this Polity shall be construed to contravene any applicable federal or state law. If
any provision is determined to contravene any such law, that provision shall be deemed not a
part of this Polity, and this Polity's remaining provisions shall remain in full force and effect.
Article XVIII
(3) The Staff Council may establish such committees as it deems appropriate.
Article XVI
AMENDMENTS AND REVIEW
(1) Amendments to this Polity may be proposed by a majority of the Polity Review Committee,
or by a petition submitted by not fewer than ten percent of the members of the Board, or by
the Faculty as provided for in section (2) and (3) below. Written notice of a proposed
amendment must be provided to the Board and to the Faculty not less than 30 days prior to
the date of the Board meeting at which the amendment is to be considered. The Faculty shall
have the right to inform the Board in writing of its recommendation with respect to the
proposed amendment by the time of that meeting. This Polity may be amended by a twothirds vote of those members voting at any regular or special meeting of the Board, provided
that the votes of no fewer than one-third of the members of the entire Board eligible to vote
are in favor of such amendment.
(2) Amendments may be proposed at any regular meeting of either the Faculty in Annapolis or
the Faculty in Santa Fe upon petition of not less than ten percent of the members on either
campus. No such proposal shall be acted upon earlier than the next regular meeting of the
Faculty, whether in Annapolis or in Santa Fe. A two-thirds vote of the entire Faculty in
residence, including at least a simple majority vote of the Faculty in residence on each of the
campuses, shall be required for approval and the amendment shall not become effective
unless approved by the Board in the manner set forth in Section (1) above.
(3) Every five years this Polity shall be reviewed by a committee of six, three to be elected by
the Faculty on each campus. The report of the Committee shall be submitted to one regular
Faculty meeting and voted upon at the next regular Faculty meeting. A two-thirds vote of the
entire Faculty in residence, including at least a simple majority vote of the Faculty in
residence on each of the campuses, shall be required for approval of any proposed
amendments.
Whatever action is thus recommended by the Faculty shall be submitted to the Board for
final decision in the manner set forth in Section (1) above.
MANAGEMENT COMMITTEE
There shall be a Management Committee for the college composed of the Presidents and Deans
of both campuses. The Chair of the Management Committee will report to and be appointed
annually by the Board of Visitors and Governors. With the advice of the Committee and in a
collegial manner, the Chair shall exercise executive authority over the College as a whole with
respect to:
( 1) college-wide strategic planning, including defining the processes for strategic thinking,
leading conversations regarding strategic decisions, and presentation of and planning for
the strategic goals of the college and their accomplishment;
(2) college-wide advancement, including capital campaigns, external relations and
publications, common college-wide donor information and databases, oversight and
1mplementat1on of ongoing development initiatives, and oversight of alumni relations
efforts, including the work of the Alumni Relations directors and that portion of the work
of Career Services directors pertaining to alumni;
(3) budgeting and resource planning, including approval of campus-specific budgets,
preparation of college-wide budgets, oversight and implementation of a college-wide
information management system, and oversight and implementation of consistent
accounting, audit, and financial reporting processes;
(4) approval and monitoring of admissions and financial aid policies for both campuses; and
(5) such other matters as may be assigned to the Chair from time to time.
The Management Committee shall not have executive authority over instructional matters
assigned to the Instruction Committee and its Chair under Articles V and IX(l) of the Polity.
�ARTICLE XIX
TRANSITION SCHEDULE
The reduction in size contemplated by the October 2011 amendments to the Polity is intended to
take place over a period of time. No member is to have his or her term shortened by virtue of this
change, which will be accomplished through the normal expiration of members' current terms.
�
Dublin Core
The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/.
Title
A name given to the resource
Charter and Polity of the College
Description
An account of the resource
Revised and amended editions of the St. John's College Charter and Polity.<br /><br />The College's first Charter and Polity was published as the <a href="https://digitalarchives.sjc.edu/items/show/3768">September 1950</a> issue of the <em><a href="https://digitalarchives.sjc.edu/collections/show/37">Bulletin of St. John's College in Annapolis</a></em>. Revised and amended versions were published as individual issues of the <em>Bulletin</em> in <a href="https://digitalarchives.sjc.edu/items/show/3746">1951</a>, <a href="https://digitalarchives.sjc.edu/items/show/7844">1960</a>, <a href="https://digitalarchives.sjc.edu/items/show/7845">1963</a>, and <a href="https://digitalarchives.sjc.edu/items/show/7846">1965</a>. <br /><br />The Charter and Polity was published as a separate document in <a href="https://digitalarchives.sjc.edu/items/show/7850">1955</a> and again from <a href="https://digitalarchives.sjc.edu/items/show/7851">1970</a> forward. The most recent version of the Charter and Polity is also available on the College's <a href="https://www.sjc.edu/about/leadership/board-visitors-governors/charter-polity">website</a>. <br /><br />Click on <strong><a title="Items in the Charter and Polity of the College Collection" href="https://digitalarchives.sjc.edu/items/browse?collection=62&sort_field=Dublin+Core%2CDate">Items in the Charter and Polity of the College Collection</a></strong> to view and sort all items in the collection.
Creator
An entity primarily responsible for making the resource
St. John's College
Publisher
An entity responsible for making the resource available
St. John's College
Contributor
An entity responsible for making contributions to the resource
St. John's College Greenfield Library
Text
A resource consisting primarily of words for reading. Examples include books, letters, dissertations, poems, newspapers, articles, archives of mailing lists. Note that facsimiles or images of texts are still of the genre Text.
Original Format
The type of object, such as painting, sculpture, paper, photo, and additional data
PDF
Page numeration
Number of pages in the original item.
32 pages
Dublin Core
The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/.
Title
A name given to the resource
Charter and Polity of the College, 2011
Description
An account of the resource
Charter and Polity of the College, amended and restated October 2011.
Creator
An entity primarily responsible for making the resource
St. John's College
Publisher
An entity responsible for making the resource available
St. John's College
Coverage
The spatial or temporal topic of the resource, the spatial applicability of the resource, or the jurisdiction under which the resource is relevant
Annapolis, MD
Santa Fe, NM
Date
A point or period of time associated with an event in the lifecycle of the resource
2011-10
Type
The nature or genre of the resource
text
Format
The file format, physical medium, or dimensions of the resource
PDF
Subject
The topic of the resource
St. John's College (Annapolis, Md.)
Legal instruments
Language
A language of the resource
English
Identifier
An unambiguous reference to the resource within a given context
Charter_and_Polity_2011_ac
Charter and Polity
-
https://s3.us-east-1.amazonaws.com/sjcdigitalarchives/original/79cc78b755f0534f5346b8373d1b202c.pdf
7c70420c850139287ba7a07f79577ad9
PDF Text
Text
S!JOHN'S
College
ANNAPOLIS • SANTA FE
CHARTER AND POLITY OF THE COLLEGE
ANNAPOLIS, MARYLAND (\\,, SANTA FE, NEW MEXICO
Amended and Restated
as of April 2006
FOUNDED AS KING WILLIAM'S SCHOOL,
CHARTERED AS ST. JOHN'S COLLEGE,
1696
1784
�Since this Polity can be amended between printings, the current official Polity is kept in the offices of the
Presidents ofSt. John's College.
HISTORY
St. John's College was founded in 1696 as King William's School in accordance with a Petitionary Act for freeschools of the General Assembly of the Colony of Maryland. Following the Revolutionary War, the General
Assembly of the new State of Maryland granted a Charter to St. John's College pursuant to and as a part of
Chapter 37 of the Laws of Maryland of 1784. This Charter was subsequently amended by the General Assembly
through Resolution No. 41 of 1832.
The Visitors and Governors of St. John's College in 1950 revised the Charter to eliminate extraneous and
obsolete matter and to make certain other amendments consistent with present requirements and conditions. It
was the opinion of the Attorney General of Maryland that the original Charter of the College was subject to the
general Corporation Laws of Maryland and might accordingly be amended by the Visitors and Governors,
pursuant to these laws, without legislative action by the General Assembly. Subsequent amendments were made
in 1961, in 1963, in 1965, in 1970, and in 1975.
When the decision was reached to establish a second St. John's College in Santa Fe, New Mexico, amendments
were made to the Charter to authorize branches or extensions of the College. Toe Charter was then filed with
the Corporations Commission of the State of New Mexico as a foreign corporation. The College was thus
empowered to grant degrees in New Mexico under the provisions of its Maryland Charter.
A Polity for the College was first suggested at a faculty meeting in 1943 by the Dean. A faculty committee was
elected and drafted a Polity, which was then promulgated by the President. In April 1949 the Faculty elected a
committee to revise the Polity. The resulting document was approved by the Faculty on April 9, 1950, and was
adopted by the Board of Visitors and Governors on July 8, 1950. Subsequent quinquennial reviews were made
by elected faculty committees, and desired amendments were recommended by the Faculty to the Board of
Visitors and Governors. The Polity was thus amended at regular meetings of the Board held on May 14, 1955;
May 21, 1960; May 15, 1965; June 6, 1970; April 19, 1975; January 16, 1982; April 19, 1986; and October 19,
1991. Other amendments were adopted by the Board at regular meetings on February 22 and December 9, 1961;
February 23 and September 28, 1963; October 3, 1970; February 18, 1972; October 25, 1975; January 24, 1976;
November 6, 1982; July 21, 1984; April 20, 1985; October 25, 1986; April 11, 1987; October 19, 1991; July 18,
1992; April 17, 1993; April 22, 1995; April 19, 1996; April 24, 1999, and November 6, 1999; January 27, 2001,
April 26, 2003; April 24, 2004; January 27, 2006; and April 22, 2006.
1
�CHARTER OF ST. JOHN'S COLLEGE
WHEREAS, institutions for the liberal education of youth in the principles of virtue, knowledge and useful
literature are of the highest benefit to society, in order to train up and perpetuate a succession of able and honest
men for discharging the various offices and duties oflife, both civil and religious, with usefulness and
reputation, and such institutions of learning have accordingly been promoted and encouraged by the wisest and
best regulated States; And whereas, it appears to this General Assembly that many public spirited individuals,
from an earnest desire to promote the founding a college or seminary oflearning on the Western Shore of this
State have subscribed and procured subscriptions to a considerable amount, and there is reason to believe that
very large additions will be obtained to the same throughout the different counties of the said Shore, if they
were made capable in law to receive and apply the same towards founding and carrying on a college or general
seminary of learning with such salutary plan and with such legislative assistance and direction as the General
Assembly might think fit, and this General Assembly, highly approving those generous exertions of individuals,
are desirous to embrace the present favorable occasion of peace and prosperity for making lasting provision for
the encouragement and advancement of all useful knowledge and literature through every part of this State;
BE IT ENACTED:
II. That a college or general seminary oflearning by the name of "St. John's College" be established on the said
Western Shore upon the following fundamental and inviolable principles; namely, first, the said college shall be
founded and maintained forever upon a most liberal plan for the benefit of youth of every religious
denomination, who shall be freely admitted to equal privileges and advantages of education and to all the
literary honors of the college, according to their merit without requiring or enforcing any religious or civil test,
or urging their attendance upon any particular religious worship or service other than what they have been
educated in or have the consent and approbation of their parents or guardians to attend; nor shall any preference
be given in the choice ofa Principal, Vice-Principal or other Professor, Master or Tutor in said college on
account of his particular religious profession, having regard solely to his moral character and literary abilities
and other necessary qualifications to fill the place for which he shall be chosen.
IV. That the governing body or board of said College shall consist of not more than forty-nine nor less than
thirteen Visitors and Governors, to be chosen and to hold office in such manner as the said Visitors and
Governors may determine and prescribe by their fundamental ordinances; provided, however, that the
Governors of the States of Maryland and New Mexico shall act ex officio as two of the total number of Visitors
and Governors of said college during their respective terms in said offices; and that the said Visitors and
Governors and their successors duly chosen shall be and are hereby declared to be one community, corporation
and body politic to have continuance forever by the name of
ST. JOHN'S COLLEGE
and by the same name they shall have perpetual succession.
VII. That if the City of Annapolis should be fixed upon as a proper place for establishing the said intended
college, this General Assembly give and grant, and upon that condition do hereby give and grant to the Visitors
and Governors of the said College by the name of "The Visitors and Governors of Saint John's College in the
State of Maryland," and their successors all that four acres within the City of Annapolis purchased for the use
by the public and conveyed on the 2nd day of October, 1744, by Stephen Bordley, Esq., to Thos. Bladen, Esq.,
then Governor, to have and to hold the said four acres of land with the appurtenances to the said Visitors and
Governors and their successors for the only use, benefit and behoof of the said college and seminary of
universal learning forever.
VIII. That the said Visitors_and Governors and their successors by the same name shall be able and capable in
law to purchase, have and enjoy to them and their successors in fee, or for any other less estate or estates, any
lands, tenements, rents, annuities, pensions or other hereditaments by the gift, grant, bargain, sale, alienation,
enfeoffment, release, confirmation, or devise of any person or persons, bodies politic or corporate capable to
2
make the same, and such lands, tenements, rents, annuities, pensions or other hereditaments or any less estates,
rights or interests of or in the same at their pleasure to grant, alien, sell and transfer in such manner and form as
they shall think meet and convenient for the furtherance of the said college; And also that they may take and
receive any sum or sums of money, and any kind, manner or portion of goods and chattels that shall be given,
sold or bequeathed to them by any person or persons, bodies politic or corporate capable to make a gift, sale or
bequest thereof and employ the same towards erecting, setting up and maintaining the said college in such
manner as they shall judge most necessary and convenient for the instruction, improvement and education of
youth in the vernacular and learned languages, and generally in any kind of literature, arts and sciences, which
they shall think proper to be taught for training up good, useful and accomplished men for the service of their
country, in church and state.
IX. That the said Visitors and Governors and their successors by the name aforesaid shall be able in law to sue
and be sued, plead and be impleadable in any court or courts, before any judge, judges, or justices within this
State and elsewhere in all and all manner of suits, complaints, pleas, causes, matters and demands of whatsoever
kind, nature or form they be and all and every other matter and thing therein to do in as full and effectual a
manner as any other person or persons, bodies politic or corporate within this State or any of the United States
of America in like cases may or can do.
X. That the said Visitors and Governors and their successors shall have full power and authority to have, make
and use one common and public seal and likewise one privy seal with such devices and inscriptions as they
shall think proper, and to ascertain, fix and regulate the uses of both seals, by their own laws and the same seals
or either of them to change, break, alter and renew at their pleasure.
XI. That the said Visitors and Governors and their successors from time to time and at all times hereafter,
forever, shall have full power and authority to constitute and appoint in such manner as they shall think best and
most convenient, a principal, a vice-principal of the said college and professors with proper tutors and assistants
for instructing the students and scholars of the said seminary in all the liberal arts and sciences, and in the
ancient and modem tongues and languages; and the said principal, vice-principal and professors so constituted
and appointed from time to time shall be known and distinguished forever as one learned body or faculty by the
name of "The Principal, Vice-Principal and Professors of St. John's College"; and by that name shall be capable
of exercising such powers and authorities as the Visitors and Governors of the said college and their successors
shall by their ordinances think necessary to delegate to them for the instruction, discipline and government of
the said seminary and of all the students, scholars, ministers and servants belonging to the same.
XIV. That a majority of the said Visitors and Governors for the time being and duly assembled at any meeting
upon due notice given to the whole body of Visitors and Governors shall have full power and authority to make
fundamental ordinances for the government of the said college and the instruction of youth as aforesaid, and by
these ordinances to appoint such a number of their own body not less than seven, as they may think proper for
transacting all general and necessary business of the said seminary and making temporary rules for the
government of the same; and also by the said fundamental ordinances to delegate to the principal, vice-principal
and professors such powers and authorities as they may think best for the standing government of the said
seminary and of the execution of the ordinances and rules of the same; provided always that they be not
repugnant to the form of government of any law of this State.
XV. And for animating and encouraging the students of said college to a laudable diligence, industry and
progress in useful literature and science, be it enacted that the said Visitors and Governors and their successors
shall by a written mandate under their privy seal and the hand of someone of the Visitors and Governors to be
chosen annually as their President, according to the ordinance to be made for that purpose, have full power and
authority to direct the principal, vice-principal and professors to hold public commencements either on stated
annual days, or occasionally as the future ordinances of the said seminary may direct and at such
commencements to admit any of the students in the said college or any other persons meriting the same (whose
names shall be severally inserted in the same mandate) to any degree or degrees in any of the faculties, arts and
sciences and liberal professions to which persons are usually admitted in other colleges or universities in
America or Europe; And it is hereby enacted that the principal, or in the case of his death or absence, the viceprincipal, and in case of the death or absence of both, the senior professor who may be present, shall make out
and sign with his name diplomas or certificates of the admission to such degree or degrees, which shall be
3
�sealed with the public or greater seal of the said corporation or college and delivered to the graduates as
honorable and perpetual testimonials of such admission; which diplomas, if thought necessary for doing greater
honor to such graduates, shall also be signed with the names of the different professors or as many of them as
can conveniently sign the same; provided always that no student or students within the said college shall ever be
admitted to any such degree or degrees, or have their name inserted in any mandate for a degree, until such
student or students have been first duly examined, and thought worthy of the same.
XVI. That the ordinances which shall be from time to time made by the Visitors and Governors of the said
college and their successors with an account of their other proceedings and of the management of the estate and
moneys committed to their trust, shall when required be laid before the General Assembly for their inspection
and examination, but in case at any time hereafter through oversight, or otherwise through misapprehension and
mistaken constructions of the powers, liberties and franchises in this Charter or Act of Incorporation granted, or
intended to be granted, any ordinance should be made by the said corporation of Visitors and Governors or any
matters done and transacted by the corporation contrary to the tenor hereof, it is enacted that although such
ordinances, acts and doings shall in themselves be null and void, yet they shall not, however, in any courts of
law, or by the General Assembly, be deemed, taken, interpreted or adjudged into an avoidance or forfeiture of
this Charter and Act of Incorporation, but the same shall be and remain unhurt, inviolate and entire unto the said
corporation of Visitors and Governors in perpetual succession; and all their acts conformable to the powers, true
intent and meaning hereof shall be and remain in full force and validity, the nullity and avoidance of such illegal
acts to the contrary in any wise notwithstanding.
XVII. That this Charter and Act of Incorporation and every part thereof shall be good and available in all things
in the law according to the true intent and meaning thereof, and shall be construed, reputed and adjudged in all
cases most favorably on the behalf and for the best benefit and behoof of the said Visitors and Governors and
their successors, so as most effectually to answer the valuable end of this Act of Incorporation towards the
general advancement and promotion of useful knowledge, science and virtue.
XVIlI. That the College may establish and operate one or more branches in one or more states of the United
States.
In the Polity as hereinafter set forth the nouns "alumnus" and "alumni" and "man" and "men," either alone or in
compounds such as "chairman" and "chairmen," and the pronouns "he," "him," and "his," are to be taken as
referring to persons whether male or female.
Polity of St. John's College
Preamble
Education is the making ofmen and women out of children by bringing them into the world of inherited
customs, intellectual traditions, and spiritual ties. Institutions of learning are set up for this purpose. Beyond
this they should also seek to develop the moral and intellectual powers of their students to enable them to fulfill
best their freely chosen tasks and thus to take their own responsible part in shaping the future. St. John's
College is a community of learning committed to holding these ends constantly in sight and to seeking the best
means of attaining them.
St. John's College strives to illuminate the common heritage of humanity in a persisting study of the great
documents in which that heritage can be found. It is concerned with the unity of knowledge, an understanding of
the great issues, and the moral foundations on which men and women may conduct their lives. To provide
proper conditions for the pursuit of these ends, we, the Board of Visitors and Governors, after consultation with
the Faculty, do ordain and establish this Polity for St. John's College.
Article I
THE COLLEGE
(1) St. John's College is by its Charter a legal entity, carrying on its functions from its campuses in Annapolis,
Maryland, and in Santa Fe, New Mexico. Under the Charter of the College, all power, authority, and
responsibility pertaining to the College are vested in the Visitors and Governors.
(2) The College consists of the following: The Board of Visitors and Governors, the Faculty, the Graduate and
Undergraduate Students, the Alumni and the Staff, and other members who may be named from time to
time by the Board of Visitors and Governors.
(3) Under the Charter, "the said Visitors and Governors, and their successors, from time to time, and at all
times hereafter, forever, shall have full power and authority to constitute and appoint, in such manner as
they shall think best and most convenient, a principal and vice-principal of the said College, and professors,
with proper tutors and assistants, for instructing the students and scholars of the said seminary in all the
liberal arts and sciences, and in the ancient and modern tongues and languages; and the said
principal, vice-principal, and professors, so constituted and appointed from time to time shall be known and
distinguished forever as one learned body or faculty, by the name of'The Principal, Vice-Principal, and
Professors of St. John's College;' and by that name shall be capable of exercising such powers and
authorities as the Visitors and Governors of the said college and their successors shall by their ordinances
think necessary to delegate to them for the instruction, discipline, and government of the said seminary and
of all the students, scholars, ministers and servants belonging to the same."
(a) The "principal" shall be the Presidents. When 'President' is used in this Polity it shall mean:
(i) with respect to membership on the Board of Visitors and Governors, in the Faculty, on committees
of the Board, and sitting ex officio with the Instruction Committee, and for presentation of, and
response to, the Statement of Educational Policy and Program (Article V (l)(c)), the President of
the Annapolis campus and the President of the Santa Fe campus;
(ii) with respect to membership on committees or sitting ex officio with committees, and actions or
procedures relating to one campus, the President of that campus;
4
5
�(iii) with respect to actions under Article II (12)(b) or actions or procedures involving the entire
College under Article X (l)(a)(i) and Article X (l)(a)(iii), either President.
(b) The "vice-principal" shall be the Dean who is serving as the Chair of the Instruction Committee.
( c) There shall be a Dean of St. John's College in Annapolis and a Dean of St. John's College in Santa Fe.
(d) The "professors, tutors and assistants" shall bear the title Tutor or Tutor Emeritus. Tutors who have
completed their tenure appointments shall be Tutors Emeriti.
(e) There shall be Vice-Presidents for College Advancement and Treasurers.
(f) There shall be Associate members of the Faculty, hereinafter called Associates, who shall be on either
campus, as the offices may be deemed necessary, the Registrar, the Librarian, the Director of Athletics,
the Director of Student Activities, the Director of Admissions, the Director of Alumni Activities, the
Director of Financial Aid, and the Director of Career Services.
(g) The "one learned body or faculty," composed of the President, the Deans, the other Tutors, the Tutors
Emeriti, the Vice-Presidents for College Advancement, the Treasurers, and the Associates, shall bear
the title the Faculty of St. John's College.
(h) All who have formally matriculated, are at the present enrolled, and are in good standing shall be
called Students of St. John's College.
(i) The Directors and the Tutors of the Graduate Institute shall be called the Faculty of the Graduate
Institute.
j)
All who have been awarded a degree by the College shall be called Alumni. In addition, all who have
completed at least one semester of undergraduate study or at least one segment of Graduate Institute
study, but who are not currently enrolled, shall be called Alumni either a) in the case of
undergraduate students, when the class with which they matriculated has graduated, or b) in the case of
Graduate Institute students, at the end of three full sessions of the Graduate Institute after the one in
which they last enrolled. All who have been designated as honorary members of the Alumni
Association of St. John's College shall be called Alumni. All who have ever been Alumni shall
continue to be.
(k) The Staff shall consist of all persons appointed by the President who are not members of the Faculty of
St. John's College or the Faculty of the Graduate Institute.
(1) There shall be no discrimination at St. John's College in appointments, conditions of employment,
admissions, educational policy, financial aid programs, athletics, or other activities, on the basis of
race, religion, age, sex, national origin, color, disability and/or handicap, sexual orientation, or other
characteristic protected by any applicable federal, state or local law.
Article II
VISITORS AND GOVERNORS
(1) Qualifications for Membership. Persons shall be eligible for membership on the Board of Visitors and
Governors who are concerned for the maintenance, progress, and vitality of St. John's College's educational
program and who are willing and able to discharge the responsibilities of trusteeship with devotion and
energy.
(2) Members. The Board of Visitors and Governors shall consist of not more than sixty members, comprising
the Presidents, the Deans, the Governors of Maryland and New Mexico, ex officio, and fifty-four members,
6
of whom forty-five shall be elected by the entire Board and nine shall be elected by the Alumni of the
College, in the manner and for the terms hereinafter provided. In recognition of meritorious service to the
College, Visitors Emeriti may be elected to the Board who may attend all meetings of the Board, with voice
in deliberation, but without vote. Retired members of the Board who have served six (6) terms on the Board
as members in good standing shall be designated as Honorary Board Members upon election by the Board.
Honorary Board Members will receive minutes of the Plenary Sessions of the Board, may, as a guest,
attend the Plenary Sessions of all regular meetings of the Board, and may be asked to assist on Board
Committees.
(3) Elections by the Board. At each annual meeting, the Board shall elect a class ofno more than fifteen
members for a term of three years, to succeed those members whose term expires at the conclusion of said
meeting. Those members elected shall begin their term at the meeting next following their election. The
procedure for nomination and election shall be as follows :
There shall be a Nominating Committee of seven members of the Board appointed by the Chair. The Chair
and the Presidents shall sit with the committee, ex officio, when nominations to Board membership are
being considered. The Nominating Committee shall recommend to each member of the Board in writing,
not later than thirty days prior to the annual meeting at which the election is to be held, at least one
candidate for each of the places to be filled by such election, including each position as an officer of the
Board. Additional nominations may be made in writing, addressed to the Chair, signed by at least five
members of the Board, prior to the date above provided for the report of the Nominating Committee, and
any such additional nominations shall be reported to the Board by the Committee at the time of its report.
Voting on nominations at annual meetings may be by ballot, each member present to vote for fifteen of the
said nominees. In case the balloting results in a tie for one or more positions, the Board shall determine the
procedure to resolve the tie. No nominee for member or officer of the Board shall be deemed elected who
has not received the affirmative votes of at least a majority of the members present at the meeting.
If there should be fewer than fifteen members in any class prior to the end of the term for such class, any
vacancy may be filled pursuant to the procedure provided above for regular elections, except that the
election may take place at any regular meeting. A member elected to fill any such vacancy shall hold office
for the remainder of the term of the class in which such vacancy occurred.
(4) Elections by the Alumni. Each year in the spring, three alumni shall be elected to membership for a term of
three years, in such manner that there shall be nine members of the Board elected by the alumni, consisting
of three classes of three members each. Outgoing members so elected shall continue to serve until their
successors are elected.
Such elections shall be conducted in accordance with the By-laws of the Alumni Association of St. John's
College. In the event that for any reason there should be fewer than three members so elected in any class
prior to the end of the term of that class, the vacancy shall be filled by the Alumni Association of St. John's
College. Newly elected alumni shall begin their term at the meeting next following the annual meeting of
the Board.
(5) Faculty Representation at Board Meetings. Three members of the Faculty shall be elected by the Faculty on
each campus to attend all regular sessions of the Board on the campus to which they belong, with voice in
deliberation, but without vote.
(6) Student Representation at Board Meetings. Two students shall be elected by the Students on each campus
to attend all regular sessions of the Board on the campus to which they belong, with voice in deliberation,
but without vote.
(7) Graduate Institute Director Representation at Board Meetings. Each Director of the Graduate Institute may
attend all regular sessions of the Board on such Director's campus, with voice in deliberation, but without
vote.
7
�for the transaction of business. The Executive Committee shall determine the compensation of the Vice
Presidents and Treasurers, upon receiving the recommendations of the Compensation Review
Committee. The Executive Committee shall recommend to the Board the compensation of the
Presidents, upon receiving the recommendations of the Compensation Review Committee.
(8) Graduate Institute Student Representation at Board Meetings. A student of the Graduate Institute shall be
elected by the Students of the Graduate Institute on each campus to attend all regular sessions of the Board
on such student's campus, with voice in deliberation, but without vote.
(9) Alumni Association Representation at Board Meetings. The President of the Alumni Association shall be
invited to attend all regular sessions of the Board, with voice in deliberation, but without vote.
b)
(10) Staff Representation at Board Meetings. The Staff on each campus shall be invited to send two
representatives to all regular sessions of the Board at that campus, with voice in deliberation, but without
vote.
(c) Nominating Committee. There shall be a nominating Committee for membership of the Board and for
officers of the Board as provided in Article ll(3).
(11) Reelection. A member of the Board elected by the Board or by the Alumni may be elected for not more
than two consecutive terms, but may, after a second consecutive term, be reelected to membership at the
annual meeting in the year following the expiration of the member's second term. Notwithstanding the
foregoing, in extraordinary circumstances, the Nominating Committee may recommend the reelection of
the Chair of the Board for up to two additional consecutive terms.
(12) Meetings of the Board.
(a) Regular meetings of the Board shall be held quarterly in either Annapolis or Santa Fe. The spring
meeting shall be called the annual meeting. The time and place of regular meetings shall be determined
by the Chair, in consultation with the President, and notice ofregular meetings shall be given not less
than fifteen days prior to such meetings.
(b) Special meetings of the Board may be called by the President, the Chair, the Executive Committee, or
any ten members of the Board, not less than seven days after the dispatch of written, faxed, or e-mail
notice of the time, place, and purposes of the meeting. Such notice may be dispensed with if waived in
writing by all members of the Board either before or after the meeting.
(c) Any business may be conducted at a regular meeting without specific notice of such business (except
that which is required by law or as provided herein as to elections and amendments), but no business
shall be conducted at any special meeting unless notice of such business has been given, or has been
waived as above provided.
(d) One third of the members of the Board shall constitute a quorum for the transaction of business.
(e) The Board in regular session is open to elected and ex officio members, to Visitors Emeriti, to
Honorary Board Members as guests, to Associates invited by the President, and to official
representatives of the Faculty, Students, Graduate Institute, Alumni Association and Staff. Attendance
at Executive sessions shall be limited to voting members and Visitors Emeriti. Public sessions shall be
open without restriction. The Chair of the Board, in consultation with the President, shall determine
whether any meeting or portion of a meeting shall be in regular, executive, or public session.
(13) Officers of the Board. At each annual meeting the Board shall elect a Chair, two Vice-Chairs, and a
Secretary, to hold office until the next annual meeting or until their successors are elected. Vacancies in any
such offices may be filled at any regular meeting, or any special meeting called for that purpose. Such
officers shall perform the customary duties of such offices, and such other duties as the Board may from
time to time direct.
(14) Committees ofthe Board.
(a) Executive Committee. Toe Chair, the Vice-Chairs, the Secretary, the Presidents, the Deans, and four
other members chosen annually by the Board at the annual meeting shall comprise the Executive
Committee of the Board. In intervals between meetings of the Board, the Executive Committee may
act for the Board, except in those matters expressly delegated to some other committee, person, or
persons. Seven members of the Executive Committee present at a meeting shall constitute a quorum
8
Presidential Search Committee. There shall be a Presidential Search Committee to recommend the
appointment of a President as provided in Article IV(2).
(d) Visiting Committee. There shall be a Visiting Committee, including a Chair, appointed by the Chair of
the Board. The Visiting Committee shall meet at least once annually with the Instruction Committee on
each campus. The Visiting Committee shall discuss the Statement of Educational Policy and Program
of the Chair of the Instruction Committee and become acquainted with the aims of the College and
how they are being realized.
(e) Finance Committee. There shall be a Finance Committee consisting of the Chair, the Presidents, and
the Treasurers of the College, ex officio, and such additional members as may be appointed by the
Chair of the Board. The Chair of the Board shall appoint one of the members to be the Chair of the
Committee.
The Finance Committee shall have the following powers and duties:
(i) The Finance Committee shall, after consultation with the Investment Committee, make
recommendations to the Board concerning the appropriate policies for annual or periodic
expenditures from each of the college's endowments.
(ii) The Finance Committee shall review the proposed annual budgets of the College prior to their
presentation for approval by the Board and shall make recommendations to the Board with respect
to the budgets at the meeting at which they are presented.
(iii) The Finance Committee shall study, and periodically advise the Board with respect to, the
financial business policies and practices of the College, and shall make such special studies and
reports as the Board may from time to time request.
(f) Audit Committee. There shall be an Audit Committee, including a Chair, appointed by the Chair of the
Board. The Treasurers shall serve as non-voting Staff to the committee.
(i) The Committee shall review in detail the annual report of the independent auditors and discuss
audit findings with the auditors, unattended by employees of the College.
(ii) The Committee shall meet with representatives of the independent auditors to the next audit to
discuss scope and procedures and any other matters requiring special attention.
(iii) The Committee shall discuss with College personnel any corrective action required as a result of
the audit report.
(iv) The Committee shall recommend to the Board the appointment or reappointment of independent
auditors to conduct the audit for the next fiscal year.
(v) The Committee shall report to the Board annually on its review of the audit and shall bring to the
attention of the Board any matters related thereto requiring Board action.
(g) Compensation Review Committee. There shall be a Compensation Review Committee, including a
Chair, appointed by the Chair of the Board.
9
�(i) The Committee shall recommend to the Board policies for direct and indirect compensation of
Tutors, Associate members of the Faculty, other Faculty members, and Staff at the College. It
shall annually review the compensation policies and performance with respect to them and report
the findings of this review to the Board.
(ii) The Committee shall recommend to the Executive Committee the compensation of the Presidents,
Vice-Presidents for College Advancement, and Treasurers of the College
(iii) In matters of policy and compensation, the Committee shall consult with the Presidents and the
Chair of the Finance Committee.
(h) Polity Review Committee. There shall be a Polity Review Committee appointed by the Chair every
fifth year. The Chair of the Board shall appoint one of the members to be Chair of the Committee. The
Committee shall receive the report of the Faculty Committee and after appropriate study shall make
recommendations to the Board for consideration at the annual meeting when the final review of the
Polity is consummated. The respective Chairs of the Board and Faculty Review Committees shall
make such arrangements as they deem appropriate for joint consultation prior to and after the adoption
of the report by the Faculty.
(i) Investment Committee. There shall be an Investment Committee consisting of at least one member of
the Finance Committee (appointed by the Chair of the Board), the Treasurers of the college, ex officio,
and such additional members as may be appointed by the Chair. The Chair of the Board shall appoint
one of the members to be Chair of the Committee. The Investment Committee shall have the following
powers and duties:
(i) The Investment Committee shall have full power to direct the investment and reinvestment of all
funds of the College, including endowment and restricted funds, and the proper officers of the
Board and the College are authorized to carry out all written directions, signed by the Chair of the
Committee, with respect to such investments and reinvestments. The Committee shall report at
each regular meeting any action taken hereunder since the previous meeting.
(ii) The Committee shall advise the Finance Committee on the question of the appropriate endowment
spending policies for the College, and shall consult with the Finance Committee on any matter that
it judges may affect the financial condition of the College that may need action by the Finance
Committee.
(j)
(k)
Buildings and Grounds Committee. There shall be a Buildings and Grounds Committee appointed by
the Chair of the Board. The Committee shall meet with the Treasurers on each campus and review
issues and plans relating to the maintenance and development of the campuses. Two members shall
be named, by the Chair of the Board, to serve as Chairs of the subcommittees for each campus, with
one to be designated as Chair of the full Committee.
Development Committee. There shall be a Development Committee consisting of the Vice
Presidents for College Advancement, ex officio, and such additional members as may be appointed
by the Chair of the Board, who shall appoint one member to be Chair of the Committee. The
Development Committee shall have the following powers and duties:
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
The Committee shall review all policies and programs for fund- raising on each campus and
report on same.
The Committee shall advise the Board with respect to the need for capital campaigns or other
special fund-raising projects.
The Committee shall be responsible for seeking contributions to the Annual Campaigns from
each Board Member.
At the discretion of the Chair of the Board, the Committee may be suspended during the
pendency of a capital campaign.
10
(1) Alumni Relations Committee. There shall be an Alumni Relations Committee consisting of the
President of the Alumni Association, the Vice Presidents for College Advancement, ex officio, and
such additional members as may be appointed by the Chair of the Board. The Chair of the Board shall
appoint one of the Alumni-elected Board members to serve as Chair of the Committee. The
Committee shall review all policies and programs for alumni and report on same.
(m) Other Committees. The Chair may appoint such other standing or special committees of the Board as
the Chair deems desirable or which the Board may request.
(n) Former members of the Board and Visitors Emeriti may be appointed by and at the discretion of the
Chair to serve on committees.
(o) Except for the Presidential Search Committee and the Polity Review Committee, committee
appointments shall be made annually. Members of the Committees serve until their successors have
been appointed.
(p) Any member of the Board may, without invitation, attend any Board committee meeting, except those
of the Presidential Search, Nominating and Executive Committees, but without vote.
(q) Whenever a Capital Campaign is in progress, its Chair shall be an ex-officio voting member of the
Finance and Executive Committees.
(15) Execution of Contracts, Transfer of Securities, Etc. All contracts of $50,000 or more, notes, deeds, leases,
mortgages, releases, bonds for security or indemnity, negotiable instruments, stock certificates, transfers,
and powers, and like papers and documents on behalf of the College or the Endowment Funds shall be
executed by two persons, of whom one shall be the President, the Chair, or a Vice-Chair, and of whom the
other shall be the Secretary of the Board or the Treasurer of the campus concerned.
( 16) Signing of checks, drafts, etc. All checks, drafts, acceptances, and similar orders for the payment of money
on behalf of the College may be signed by the same persons authorized to execute contracts, etc., pursuant
to Section (15) hereof, but may also be signed by such persons, and in such manner, as th_e Board may
from time to time direct by appropriate resolution.
(17) The College shall indemnify, to the full extent permitted by law, any current or former member of the
Board or officer of the College or any person who, while a member of the Board or an officer of the
College, may have served at the College's request as a director, officer, partner or trustee of another entity,
against any judgments, penalties, fines, settlements and reasonable expenses actually and necessanly
incurred by him or her in connection with the defense of any action, suit or proceeding to which he or she
is made a party by reason of being or having been such member of the Board or officer of the College.
Article
m
THE FACULTY
The Visitors and Governors by these ordinances hereby delegate to the Faculty of St. John's College the
President, the Deans, the other Tutors, the Tutors Emeriti, the Vice-Presidents for College Advancement, the
Treasurers, and the Associates "powers and authorities" for the "instruction, discipline, and government" of the
College.
11
�(b) The Deans shall serve alternately, for a term of one year, as Chair of the Instruction Committee.
Article IV
THE FACULTY: THE PRESIDENT
...--
I •
(1) There shall be a President for the Annapolis campus and a President for the Santa Fe campus, each
appointed as provided in Article IV (2). There is delegated to each President by the Visitors and Governors
executive responsibility and authority for the instruction, discipline, and government of the President's
campus, and the President, in tum, may delegate such authority. In the interest of the orderly conduct of
business and of maintaining and promoting the unity of the College, the Presidents shall regularly consult
and communicate with each other and, as appropriate, with other College officials, on matters of common
concern.
(2) The President shall be appointed by the Board of Visitors and Governors on the recommendation of a
Committee composed of five members of the Board of Visitors and Governors appointed by the Chair of
the Board, at least one of whom is an alumnus, the Deans, and one Tutor having tenure from each campus
elected by the Faculty on that campus. This Committee shall be known as the Presidential Search
Committee. It shall consult with the continuing President in a regular and timely fashion. Prior to making
its final recommendation, it shall, on both campuses, consult with all other appropriate persons and shall
arrange for the final candidates to meet with the Faculty and the Instruction Committee.
(3) The President shall concurrently be a Tutor, but the provisions of Article VI need not apply.
(4) The President and persons to whom the President delegates authority shall consult with the Deans, other
appropriate persons, and appropriate Faculty committees in matters of policy, initiation of programs, and
setting of priorities affecting the general welfare of the College.
(5) There shall be a Financial Committee on each campus consisting of the President as Chair, the Dean and
Treasurer of the campus, and other members the President may appoint. It will review proposed budgets
prior to their being presented to the Finance Committee of the Board. It will also meet prior to Board
meetings to review performance in the fiscal year to date and emerging budgetary strengths and
weaknesses.
(6) The President shall appoint, or delegate the power to appoint, other committees as may be necessary for the
carrying out of the duties of the President or other duties for which no provision is made under Article IX.
(7) Ifin the judgment of the Board of Visitors and Governors, the College is facing a financial exigency at
either or both of its campuses which could call for a reduction in the number of Faculty positions, both
Presidents shall immediately advise the Faculty of the nature and extent of the financial difficulty and
consult with them concerning the best way to address the situation. The Faculty may then make a formal
recommendation to the Presidents on ways to meet the problem, or, if the Faculty fails so to act, the Deans
and the Instruction Committee shall propose a plan to the Presidents. The Presidents shall jointly then
determine a plan which specifies a preferred course of action to be taken. All necessary steps must be taken
in timely fashion as prescribed by the Board. Nothing herein provided shall limit the power of the Board to
act otherwise in the event of need to reduce or eliminate Faculty positions.
(c) Each year the Chair of the Instruction Committee shall, after consultation with the Instruction
Committee on the Chair's campus, and after discussion with the Instruction Committee of the College,
submit a Statement of Educational Policy and Program to the Faculty as a whole for discussion. The
President shall present the Statement, together with an account of the Faculty discussion of it and the
President's response to it, as a report to the Board of Visitors and Governors for its consideration.
(d) The Chair of the Instruction Committee shall, as such chair or the Chair of the Board of Visitors and
Governors may deem appropriate, report to the Board on instructional matters, and shall respond to
such questions as the Board, through its Chair, may ask.
(2) The Deans.
(a) There is delegated to the Deans on their respective campuses responsibility and authority for the
supervision of the program of instruction and for the general welfare of the students and for whatever
government of the students be necessary for the greatest possible attainment of aims of the program.
Each Dean shall be the Chair of the Instruction Committee on such Dean's campus. In carrying out his
duties, each Dean shall consult regularly with the President and with the Instruction Committee and the
other appropriate Faculty committees on that campus.
(b) The Deans shall be appointed for terms of five years from among the Tutors by the Visitors and
Governors on the recommendation of the President after consultation with a special committee of
seven, four from the campus for which the Dean is being chosen and three from the other campus,
selected from among themselves by the Tutors having tenure.
(c) A Dean shall be appointed from among the tutors who have themselves been appointed in accord with
Article VI(3). If non-tenured, the appointee shall acquire tenure upon becoming Dean, in which case
the provisions of Article VI(3)(a) regarding reappointment schedules shall not apply.
(d) To assist them in carrying out their duties, the Deans shall recommend one or more Tutors to be
appointed by the President with the title of Assistant Dean.
(e) During the absence of the President from either campus, the Dean on that campus shall if necessary
exercise the President's prerogative of final decision.
(f) During the absence of either Dean from the campus a Tutor with tenure named by the Dean shall act
for the Dean.
(g) The Dean on each campus shall appoint such committees as may be necessary for the carrying out of
duties of the Dean and duties for which no other provision is made.
Article VI
THE FACULTY: THE TUTORS
Article V
THE FACULTY: THE CHAIR OF THE INSTRUCTION COMMITTEE AND THE DEANS
(1) The primary responsibilities of the Tutors are to teach and to make themselves as competent as
possible in all parts of the St. John's Program.
(2) The Tutors shall have authority to recommend to the Visitors and Governors candidates for degrees of their
respective campuses.
(1) The Chair of the Instruction Committee.
(a) There is delegated to the Chair of the Instruction Committee responsibility and authority for the
organization of the program of instruction in the liberal arts that is followed by the Tutors and the
Students.
12
(3) Appointment and Reappointment of Tutors. Tutors shall be appointed by the Visitors and Governors upon
recommendation of the President in accordance with the recommendation of the Dean and the Instruction
13
�Committee on that campus where the Tutors so appointed shall teach.
(a) The schedule ofregular appointment of Tutors on each campus shall be either (i)(A) or (i)(B) below, to
be decided by the President in accordance with the recommendation of the Dean and the Instruction
Committee on that campus where the Tutors so appointed shall teach:
(i)(A)
(i)(B)
New Tutors shall be appointed for one year unless they are appointed at mid-year, in which
case the initial appointment shall be for a year and a half. First reappointments shall be for
one year. Second and third reappointments shall be for two and three years respectively.
New Tutors shall be appointed for two years unless they are appointed at mid-year, in which
case the initial appointment shall be for a year and a half. First and second reappointments
shall be for two and three years respectively.
(ii) A Tutor who has completed a three-year appointment must either be given a tenure appointment or
not be reappointed as Tutor. A Tutor may, however, be given a tenure appointment as early as the
conclusion of the first year of a three-year appointment. Procedures leading to a recommendation
for an early tenure appointment shall be initiated by the Dean and Instruction Committee, but not
without the consent of the appointee, and shall not prejudice subsequent consideration for a tenure
appointment. Tenure appointments shall not continue beyond retirement. Tutors Emeriti shall
retain their privileges and responsibilities in voting at Faculty meetings.
(iii) Before making recommendations to the President on tenure appointments the Dean on each
campus shall consult with the Instruction Committee on that campus, after seeking the advice of
the Tutors on that campus.
•
(iv) A Tutor, to be recommended for a tenure appointment, must have served full-time at the campus
where the recommendation is to be made for the two years immediately preceding the year in
which that recommendation is made, the provisions of (ii) above notwithstanding . In ordinary
cases, these two years of service will be the second year of a two-year appointment and the first
year of a three-year appointment. These requirements may be waived by the President on the
recommendation of the Dean and Instruction Committee on that campus.
(b) A non-tenure appointment as Tutor establishes the possibility, but not the presumption, of its renewal
and the granting of a tenure appointment. Procedures for considering non-tenure appointments differ
from those for considering tenure appointments. Satisfaction of appointment criteria admits of degree.
With each successive reappointment, the criteria are applied more rigorously. For a tenure appointment
the application is especially strict.
( c) For the purpose of temporary transfer between campuses, special appointments of one or two years
may be granted to a Tutor in addition to his or her regular appointments. The Tutor may ask that such
an appointment be counted as a regular appointment for the purpose of (a) above. In the case of a
permanent transfer a Tutor may ask that years of service at the other campus be counted toward
tenure according to the provisions of (a) above. Nevertheless, the provisions of (3) (a)(iv) prevail.
(d) Special one-year appointments and reappointments may be given to Tutors who intend to teach on a
part-time basis only. Such a Tutor may subsequently apply for and receive a regular appointment.
Special part-time appointments may then be counted on a fractional basis toward eligibility for tenure,
subject to the provisions of (3)(a)(iv). In establishing eligibility for sabbatical leave, special part-time
appointments shall be computed proportionately.
(e) Visiting Tutors may be appointed for a term or a year.
(4) Notification.
(a) A Tutor under consideration for a non-tenure appointment to begin in a certain calendar year shall be
notified by the President no later than December 15th of the preceding calendar year whether
reappointment will be recommended to the Board of Visitors and Governors. If the Tutoris
reappointed, the President shall notify him or her by March 1st of the calendar year in which the new
appointment is to begin.
(b) A Tutor under consideration for a tenure appointment to begin in a certain calendar year shall be
notified by the President no later than May 31st of the preceding calendar year whether the
.
appointment will be recommended to the Board of Visitors and Gove_mors. If the Tutor 1s appomted,
the President shall notify him or her by July 31st of that same precedmg year.
(5) A Tutor may apply to the Instruction Committee of the College not later than January 15th for a transfer of
campus for the next academic year. Transfers shall require approval of both Deans after consultation with
their Instruction Committees.
(6) (a)
A Tutor' s appointment may be terminated by the Board of Visitors and Governors for one of the
following reasons only:
(i) failure or inability to perform teaching duties in a satisfactory manner, or
(ii) moral turpitude.
The President shall make such a recommendation to the Board of Visitors and Governors only with the
concurrence of the Dean and the Instruction Committee of the campus concerned. Before the
President makes such a recommendation, he or she shall advise the Tutor affected, and the Tutor
shall have the right to be heard by the Instruction Committee or, at the Tutor's option, by another
committee to be designated by the President for this purpose.
(b) Either Dean with the approval of the Instruction Committee on the campus concerned, may
recommend 'to the President that in the interest of instruction a Tutor be temporarily relieved of duties
in whole or in part at any time. When such action is taken, the Tutor's salary shall be continued for the
remainder of the current academic year.
(7) The sabbatical leave program is designed to provide Tutors with an opportunity for study, rest, and renewal
of spirit, in anticipation of future teaching. It is the objective of the program to grant all applications for
sabbatical leave meeting the conditions for eligibility set out in (a) of this section. It 1s understood that
Tutors on such leave will not undertake full-time remunerative employment elsewhere and will return to
the College.
(a) Eligibility for sabbatical leave shall be upon the following conditions:
(i) A Tutor who has received a tenure appointment may apply for a full year of sabbatical leave at full
salary, to be taken upon completion of the equivalent of seven full years of service to the College
since his or her original appointment, or the equivalent of six full years of service since any
previous sabbatical leave.
(ii) Such a Tutor may apply for an earlier sabbatical leave of a full year at partial salary, or a partial
year at full salary. The fractional salary or fractional year shall be determined by the number of
years of teaching completed in relation to the prescribed total for either an initial or a subsequent
sabbatical leave, as the case may be. In no case shall a Tutor be paid more than the Tutor's regular
salary.
(iii) Upon completion of sabbatical leave, a Tutor is expected to return to the College for at least two
more years.
14
15
�(b) If, in the judgment of the President, financial or academic needs at a campus should require that fewer
sabbatical leaves be granted there in a given year than there are qualified applicants, and if the number
that can be granted there should be smaller than one-sixth of the number of Tutors at that campus
having tenure and not on full-time leave under the provisions of section (8) below, the President shall
so notify the Board of Visitors and Governors and seek its approval for delaying a sabbatical leave for
one or more of the applicants.
( c) If in a year there are more qualified applicants for sabbatical leave at any one campus than there are
leaves to be granted at that campus, then those members shall have precedence who meet the following
conditions in the order set forth:
(i) Those who have served for the greater number of years since their first appointment as Tutor or
since their last sabbatical leave, whichever is more recent;
(ii) Those whose service has been continuous throughout those years;
(iii) Those whose last sabbatical leave was postponed because of the financial or academic needs of the
College;
(iv) Those who have seniority of appointment.
When there is a conflict of precedence, the Dean and the Instruction Committee on the campus
concerned shall be consulted.
(d) A Tutor eligible for sabbatical leave shall make application to the President before November 1st for
leave to begin the following July 1st, and shall be informed of the action upon the application not later
than January 1st.
Article VII
THE FACULTY: THE VICE-PRESIDENTS FOR COLLEGE ADVANCEMENT AND THE
TREASURERS
(1) The Vice-Presidents for College Advancement shall be responsible to the President for the supervision and
development of all programs in fund-raising, public relations, and alumni relations on their respective
campuses.
(2) Tue Vice-President for College Advancement on each campus shall be appointed by the Board of Visitors
and Governors on the recommendation of the President made after consultation with the Dean on that
campus and a committee constituted by resolution of the Faculty on that campus.
(3) The Treasurers shall have charge, on their respective campuses, under the supervision of the President, of
all funds and property, and shall have authority to carry out fiscal and property transactions, and to receive
and disburse funds, subject to the provisions of this Polity and other directions and arrangements pursuant
thereto.
(4) The Treasurer on each campus shall be appointed by the Board of Visitors and Governors on the
.
recommendation of the President made after consultation with the Dean on that campus and a committee
constituted by resolution of the Faculty on that campus.
(5) The Vice-Presidents for College Advancement and Treasurers may be appointed Tutors under the
provisions of Article VI(3)(d).
Article VIlI
(8) The President, with the concurrence of the Dean after consultation with the Instruction Committee on the
campus concerned, may grant leaves of absence to Tutors for a period of one year or less. At that time it
shall be determined whether the leave shall be counted as service to the College with respect to eligibility
for sabbatical leave and, if so, how. The decision with respect to a request for leave of absence shall be
made in the light of the requirements both of the applicant Tutor and of the whole College.
(a) Leave of absence may be renewed upon request but not more than twice in succession except in
extraordinary circumstances.
(b) A request for a leave of absence shall be submitted to the President as early as possible in the academic
year before the year in which the leave is to be taken, but not later than January 15th of that year.
Requests for leaves of absence may be withdrawn at any time prior to April 1st of the year in which the
request is submitted. Requests for leaves of absence for the second semester must be submitted no later
than October 15th.
(c) Tutors on sabbatical leave or leave of absence remain members of the Faculty with the right of full
participation in Faculty meetings and all other College exercises.
THE FACULTY: THE ASSOCIATES
(1) Associate members of the Faculty on each campus shall be appointed by the Board of Visitors and
Governors on the recommendation of the President in consultation with the Dean of that campus. The
President shall have ultimate executive authority over the Associates.
(2) Associates may be appointed Tutors under the provisions of Article VI (3)(d).
(3) The Associates on either campus may establish for themselves an Associates' Council for the purpose of
considering College matters of concern to them and communicating with other members of the College,
(4) The Associates' Council may establish such committees as it deems appropriate.
(5) There shall be the following Associates, as deemed necessary by the President on each campus, with the
powers and responsibilities provided.
(a) The Registrars. The Registrars shall be responsible to the Deans on their respective campuses. They
shall prepare and supervise the registration of students and shall be responsible for the acadermc
records and schedules of students.
(b) The Librarians. The Librarians shall be responsible to the Deans on their respective campuses for the
operation of the library. Appointments of professional members of the Library Staff shall be made
upon the recommendation of the Librarian to the Dean on each campus.
16
17
�( c) The Directors of Student Activities and the Directors of Athletics. The Directors of Student Activities
and the Directors of Athletics shall be responsible to the Deans on their respective campuses for
devising and directing programs of recreational activities.
(d) The Directors of Admissions. The Directors of Admissions shall be responsible to the Deans on their
respective campuses for the annual enrollment of qualified freshmen.
(e) The Directors of Alumni Activities. The Directors of Alumni Activities shall be responsible to the
Vice-Presidents for College Advancement. Their primary duty is to enable the College and the Alumni
Association to be of service to alumni.
(t) The Directors ofFinancial Aid. The Directors of Financial Aid shall be responsible to the Deans on
their respective campuses for the administration of financial aid programs.
(g) The Directors of Career Services. The Directors of Career Services shall be responsible to the Deans
on their respective campuses for helping and counseling students with respect to graduate and
professional schools and careers.
(h) The Director of College Information Technology Services. The Director of College Information
Technology Services shall be responsible to both Presidents for the development and management of
information services college-wide.
(i) Persons designated Associates under the provisions of Article 1(3)(f) or of Article VII(3)(k) ofthis
Polity as amended through April 20, 1985, whose offices are not specifically named in this Article,
shall continue to be Associates until the expiration of their appointments to those offices.
Article IX
THE FACULTY: FACULTY COMMITTEES
(1) The Instruction Committee
(a) The Instruction Committee shares with its Chairs responsibility for the program of instruction of the
College. It shall consist of twelve Tutors in addition to the Deans. The Presidents shall sit with the
Committee ex officio. Six of the Tutors shall be elected from each campus of the College. The
Instruction Committee shall meet annually. On each campus the members of the Instruction Committee
and the Dean as Chair constitute the Instruction Committee of the College on that campus. The
President sits ex officio with the Instruction Committee on each campus.
(b) Each of the members of the Instruction Committee shall serve for a term of three years, and the terms
shall be arranged in such a way that each year the terms of two members at each campus shall expire.
Terms begin and end the day following commencement exercises. Annually, and separately at each
campus, the President with the Dean on his campus, after consulting with the Instruction Committee
and seeking the advice of the other Tutors on that campus, shall at the last regular Faculty meeting
on that campus nominate four Tutors of whom two shall be elected by the Tutors to membership on the
Instruction Committee. The Faculty shall be informed of the names of the nominees prior to the
meeting at which the election occurs. At the expiration of the three-year term a member of the
Instruction Committee shall for one year be ineligible for reelection.
(c) If for any reason a member of the Instruction Committee is unable to serve for a part of his or her term,
another Tutor shall be chosen to serve for that part of the term. For this purpose the President and the
Dean, in consultation with the Instruction Committee on the campus where the vacancy occurs, shall
nominate two Tutors of whom the Tutors shall elect one in a regular Faculty meeting.
18
(d) If the Instruction Committee resigns with the Deans on a matter of confidence and the resignations are
accepted, the President, in consultation with the new Deans and after seeking the advice of the other
Tutors shall nominate nine Tutors for the six vacancies on each campus in such a manner that two out
of each three nominees shall be elected by the Tutors for each of the three classes to fill the unexpired
terms.
(2) The Tutors' Compensation Committee
(a) There shall be a Tutors' Compensation Committee of six Tutors, three to be elected by the Tutors on
each campus, and the chair shall annually alternate between campuses. The Committee shall advise the
President concerning Tutors' compensation and related matters; it shall make annual reviews of the
College's statement of Tutors' salaries and other compensation of Tutors and report to the Tutors and
the President recommendations consequent upon the review.
(b) Members of the Committee shall be elected annually on each campus for terms of three years in such a
manner that the term of one member on each campus terminates each year. The Tutors' Compensation
Committee on each campus shall provide the Tutors on that campus with two nominations for each
vacancy on the Committee on that campus. Additional nominations may be made at the Faculty
meeting when election shall be made.
(3) The Library Committees. The President, in consultation with the Librarian and the Dean, shall appoint
three Tutors on each campus to serve as a Library Committee. The President, the Dean, and the L1branan
shall themselves be ex officio members of the Committee, and the Librarian shall serve as Chair. It
shall be the duty of the Library Committees to assist the Librarians in making the Libraries serve the ends
of the College and its program; it shall be their duty to advise the Librarians in regard to Library policy and
acquisitions. The Managers of the Bookstores may be invited to sit with the Committees.
(4) The Campus Planning Committees. The Faculty on each campus shall elect five of its members as a
Campus Planning Committee. Two members shall be elected to the Committee annually except in every
third year, when one member shall be chosen. The President, the Dean, one of the Assistant Deans, and the
Treasurer on each campus shall sit ex officio with the Committee on that campus. It shall be the duty of the
respective committees to advise the President on the construction of new buildings, the renovation of old
buildings, landscaping of grounds, and all matters relating to the maintenance and development of the
campus.
(5) The Prize Committees. Every three years the President shall appoint Tutors on each campus to supervise
the awarding of prizes on the respective campuses. The Committees shall have full authority to decide what
prizes shall be awarded and to name the recipients of the prizes.
(6) The Fellowship Committees. On each campus there shall be a Fellowship Committee appointed by the
President. It shall be the duty of this Committee to inform students of fellowships for which they may be
eligible, to assist them in applying for fellowships, and to act on behalf of the College in any matter
relating to application for fellowships.
(7) Other Committees. The Faculty on each campus shall have authority to elect, or to request the President to
appoint, additional committees that may from time to time become necessary.
Article X
THE FACULTY: FACULTY PROCEDUR E
(1) Procedure for Instructional Proposals.
(a) (i) Any proposal concerning matters of instruction that may affect the College as a whole shall
originate with the Dean and the Instruction Committee on either campus. A decision as to
19
�whether a proposal is college-wide or campus-specific shall be made by the Deans and
Instruction Committee of the College. They shall make this decision after notifying the
Faculty on both campuses and inviting their comment.
Written statements of college-wide instructional proposals shall be distributed to the Faculty
at least two weeks before the Faculty meeting at which they are to be presented; the proposal
shall be presented to the whole Faculty by the Chair of the Instruction Committee, either in
person or through the other Dean. If, after full discussion of any proposal so presented, there
be no objection on the part of any Tutor, the measure stands approved and becomes effective
as of the date specified therefore. If, after full discussion, a Tutor objects to the proposal and
holds to the objection, the proposal shall be submitted to vote of the Tutors at special Faculty
meetings called by the Presidents within a month. Any objections that have been made and
held to and submitted in writing shall be transmitted immediately in writing to the whole
faculty. Any objections that have been made and held to but not submitted in writing shall be
reported immediately in writing to the whole Faculty. If, after discussion, any objection has
been made and held to, the Presidents, in calling special Faculty meetings, shall report the
statement of the Chair of the Instruction and the Dean on the other campus as to whether it be
a matter of confidence; and in submitting the proposal to vote, the Chair of the Instruction
Committee and the Dean on the other campus shall, at the special Faculty meetings, repeat
their statement as to whether it be a matter of confidence. The vote may then be taken and
tallied by the Presidents in such a fashion that the Tutors shall have recorded their decision
acting as a whole. If the proposal be one that the Chair of the Instruction Committee and the
other Dean have declared a matter of confidence and if it be defeated by majority vote, the
Deans and the Instruction Committee shall immediately resign. If it be passed by majority
vote, it shall become effective as of the date specified therefore. For the confidence procedure
a quorum shall consist of three-fourths of all resident Tutors on each campus.
(ii) Any instructional proposal that has been deemed campus-specific shall be subject to the
procedure set forth above, except that, if an objection is made and held to on either campus,
voting shall proceed only on the campus were the proposal is intended to be put into effect.
Any objections that have been made and held to and submitted in writing on the other campus
shall be transmitted immediately to the voting Faculty. Any objections that have been made
and held to but not submitted in writing shall be reported immediately in writing to the voting
Faculty. If the confidence procedure is invoked, it shall be only by the Dean on the voting
campus, and it shall affect the Dean and the Instruction Committee only on that campus.
(iii) The President may refuse to accept the resignation of the Deans or the Instruction Committee,
any or all of them, whenever in the judgment of the President such resignation would be
detrimental to the proper functioning of the College; provided, however, that if any six or
more Tutors shall petition the Visitors and Governors, the latter shall review the President's
decision within four weeks, during which time the Deans and the Instruction Committee shall
continue in office.
(iv) In the event that the proposal be defeated and the resignations be accepted, the President shall
proceed to the choice of new Deans in accordance with the provisions of Article V (2)(b).
(b) Upon either a petition of not less than one-tenth of the Tutors on either campus or a request from the
President, the Dean and Instruction Committee on that campus shall consider any recommendation
concerning instruction and shall report to the Faculty within one year their proposal concerning it.
They shall decide whether their proposal is a college-wide or campus-specific proposal, and the
procedure of Article X(l) shall apply.
(a) Regular monthly meetings of the Faculty shall be called upon due notice by the President; except that
in the period comprising the months of December and January
only one regular meetmg need be
called. The President or, in his absence, the Dean, shall preside. In the absence of the President and the
Dean, the Faculty shall elect one of its members to preside.
(b) Special meetings of the Faculty may be called upon due notice by the President alone or at the request
of five Faculty members.
(c) Due notice shall be construed to mean no less than three days notice, except in cases of emergency.
(d) A quorum shall consist of a majority of the Faculty in residence except as otherwise provided.
(e) Only Tutors may vote on instructional matters. All Faculty members may vote on all other matters not
specifically restricted in the Polity.
(3) The Secretary of the Faculty. At the last regular meeting of an academic year the Faculty on each campus
shall elect one of its members, then in at least his or her third year at the College, as Secretary. The
Secretary shall assist in the preparation and circulation of the agenda for Faculty meetings, shall keep the
minutes of such meetings, and shall collect and circulate reports of Faculty committees.
Article XI
THE SCHOLARS-IN-RESIDENCE AND THE ARTISTS-IN-RESIDENCE
The Scholars-in-Residence and the Artists-in-Residence shall be appointed from time to time by the Board of
Visitors and Governors on the recommendation of the President after consultation with the Dean and the
Instruction Committee on the campus where the Scholars and Artists shall reside.
Article XII
THE STUDENTS
(1) The primary responsibilities of the Students are to study and to make themselves as competent as possible
in all parts of the St. John's Program. Their advice and service shall be sought by the Faculty in such
matters and in such ways as may best serve the general welfare of the College.
(2) The Students of St. John's College shall constitute the Student Polity of St. John's College in Annapolis and
in Santa Fe.
(3) The Student Polity in Annapolis or Santa Fe may establish for itself a government which is representative
of all polity members. The Dean on each campus may delegate to the Student government a share of the
responsibility for the general welfare of the Students and whatever government of the Students may be
necessary for the greatest possible attainment of the aims of the program. The duties of the Student
Government may include:
(a) the management of funds available to the Student Polity;
(b) the sanctioning of all student clubs, organizations, and activities, and their regulation, if necessary;
(c) the representation of the Students of St. John's College to the community outside the College;
(d) the establishment and maintenance of formal channels of communication between the Students and
the Faculty; and
(2) Faculty Meetings.
20
21
�(e) any other duties agreed upon by the Students and the Dean.
Article XIV
Article XIlI
THE GRADUATE INSTITUTE
THEALUMNI
(1) Alumni shall be life-long members of the College, since St. John's College is a community not limited by
geographical location or fixed periods of time.
(1) The Directors.
(a) There shall be a Director of the Graduate Institute on each campus to whom shall be delegated
responsibility and authority, under the Chair of the Instruction Committee, for the organization and
supervision on his or her campus of the graduate program of instruction in the liberal arts and for
matters concerning the general welfare of the students. Concerning matters that affect the Graduate
Institute as a whole the Director shall, in consultation with the other Director, be responsible to the
Chair of the Instruction Committee. Concerning matters limited to the Director's campus he or she
shall be responsible to the Dean on that campus.
(b) The Directors shall be appointed for terms of four years from among the Tutors by the Board of
Visitors and Governors on the recommendation of the President, after consultation with the Deans and
a special committee consisting of four members, two from each campus, selected from among
themselves by the Tutors having tenure. The Directors shall be Tutors of the Graduate Institute.
(c) Every three years, after consultation with the other Director and the Committee for the Graduate
Institute on such Director's campus, one of the Directors shall submit a Statement of Educational
Policy and Program for the Graduate Institute to the Instruction Committee for discussion at its joint
meeting. The Director may, thereafter, revise the Statement and the Statement then shall be submitted
to the Faculty as a whole for discussion.
(2) The Faculty of the Graduate Institute.
(a) Each Director, after consultation with the Committee for the Graduate Institute on that campus, and in
accordance with the recommendation of the Instruction Committee on the same campus, shall
recommend to the President Tutors of the Graduate Institute for summer appointment to teach in the
Graduate Institute for one session.
(2) The Alumni Association is the formal means by which Alumni participate in the life of the College.
Through the election of alumni members of the Board of Visitors and Governors, Alumni share in the
direction of that life. In these and other ways, Alumni shall be given the opportunity to serve the College.
(3) The College shall cooperate with the Alumni Association to enable Alumni to assist in providing services
such as recruiting and interviewing prospective students, placing graduates in appropriate employment, and
advising students concerning careers and admission to graduate and professional schools.
(4) The College, in cooperation with the Alumni Association, shall provide seminars and other appropriate
educational activities in Annapolis, in Santa Fe, and in other places.
Article XV
THE STAFF
(1) Members of the Staff assist with the administration and maintenance of the College, performing duties
necessary to its well-being. They are subject to appropriate Staff rules and regulations.
(2) Members of the Staff on either campus may establish for themselves a Staff Council for the purpose of
better communication and understanding of College policies as a benefit to the College as a whole. The
Staff Council shall seek to establish and maintain formal channels of communication among the whole
Staff and between the Staff and the appropriate College Officers. The Treasurer on each campus shall
review Staff employment regulations with the Staff Council and discuss with them any changes proposed.
(3) The Staff Council may establish such committees as it deems appropriate.
(b) During the summer term the Tutors of the Graduate Institute on each campus shall have the authority
to recommend to the Board of Visitors and Governors candidates for degrees.
(3) Committees for the Graduate Institute.
Article XVI
AMENDMENTS AND REVIEW
(a) On each campus the Committee for the Graduate Institute shares with the Director on the same campus
responsibility for carrying out the program of instruction of the Graduate Institute and for the general
welfare of the students.
(c) Members of each Committee shall be appointed by the Director with the concurrence of the Dean on
the same campus after consultation with the Committee for the Graduate Institute on that campus.
(1) Amendments to this Polity may be proposed by a majority of the Polity Review Committee, or by a petition
submitted by not fewer than ten percent of the members of the Board, or by the Faculty as provided for in
section (2) and (3) below. Written notice of a proposed amendment must be provided to the Board and to
the Faculty not less than 30 days prior to the date of the Board meeting at which the amendment is to be
considered. The Faculty shall have the right to inform the Board in writing of its recommendation with
respect to the proposed amendment by the time of that meeting. This Polity may be amended by a twothirds vote of those members voting at any regular or special meeting of the Board, provided that the votes
ofno fewer than one-third of the members of the entire Board eligible to vote are in favor of such
amendment.
(4) Proposals concerning matters of instruction or policy shall originate with one of the Directors, after
consultation with the other Director and with the Committee for the Graduate Institute, and shall be
submitted to the Dean on the originating campus for handling in accordance with Article X(l)(a)(i).
(2) Amendments may be proposed at any regular meeting of either the Faculty in Annapolis or the Faculty in
Santa Fe upon petition of not less than ten percent of the members on either campus. No such proposal
shall be acted upon earlier than the next regular meeting of the Faculty, whether in Annapolis or in Santa
(b) Each Committee shall consist of three Tutors who have experience in the Institute, in addition to the
Director, who shall serve as Chair.
22
23
�Fe. A two-thirds vote of the entire Faculty in residence, including at least a simple majority vote of the
Faculty in residence on each of the campuses, shall be required for approval and the amendment shall not
become effective unless approved by the Board in the manner set forth in Section (1) above.
(3) Every five years this Polity shall be reviewed by a committee of six, three to be elected by the Faculty on
each campus. The report of the Committee shall be submitted to one regular Faculty meeting and voted
upon at the next regular Faculty meeting. A two-thirds vote of the entire Faculty in residence, including at
least a simple majority vote of the Faculty in residence on each of the campuses, shall be required for
approval of any proposed amendments.
Whatever action is thus recommended by the Faculty shall be submitted to the Board for final decision in
the manner set forth in Section (1) above.
Article XVII
COMPLIANCE WITH LAW
No provision of this Polity shall be construed to contravene any applicable federal or state law. If any provision
is determined to contravene any such law, that provision shall be deemed not a part of this Polity, and this
Polity's remaining provisions shall remain in full force and effect.
Article XVIII
MANAGEMENT COMMITTEE
There shall be a Management Committee for the college composed of the Presidents and Deans of both
campuses. The Chair of the Management Committee will report to and be appointed annually by the Board of
Visitors and Governors. With the advice of the Committee, and in a collegial manner, the Chair shall exercise
executive authority over the College as a whole with respect to:
(1) college-wide strategic planning, including defining the processes for strategic thinking, leading
conversations regarding strategic decisions, and presentation of and planning for the strategic goals of
the college and their accomplishment;
(2) college-wide advancement, including capital campaigns, external relations and publications, common
college-wide donor information and databases, oversight and implementation of ongoing development
initiatives, and oversight of alumni relations efforts, including the work of the Alumni Relations
directors and that portion of the work of Career Services directors pertaining to alumni;
(3) budgeting and resource planning, including approval of campus-specific budgets, preparation of
college-wide budgets, oversight and implementation of a college-wide information management
system, and oversight and implementation of consistent accounting, audit, and financial reporting
processes;
(4) approval and monitoring of admissions and financial aid policies for both campuses; and
(5) such other matters as may be assigned to the Chair from time to time.
The Management Committee shall not have executive authority over instructional matters assigned to the
Instruction Committee and its Chair under Articles V and IX(l) of the Polity.
24
��
Dublin Core
The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/.
Title
A name given to the resource
Charter and Polity of the College
Description
An account of the resource
Revised and amended editions of the St. John's College Charter and Polity.<br /><br />The College's first Charter and Polity was published as the <a href="https://digitalarchives.sjc.edu/items/show/3768">September 1950</a> issue of the <em><a href="https://digitalarchives.sjc.edu/collections/show/37">Bulletin of St. John's College in Annapolis</a></em>. Revised and amended versions were published as individual issues of the <em>Bulletin</em> in <a href="https://digitalarchives.sjc.edu/items/show/3746">1951</a>, <a href="https://digitalarchives.sjc.edu/items/show/7844">1960</a>, <a href="https://digitalarchives.sjc.edu/items/show/7845">1963</a>, and <a href="https://digitalarchives.sjc.edu/items/show/7846">1965</a>. <br /><br />The Charter and Polity was published as a separate document in <a href="https://digitalarchives.sjc.edu/items/show/7850">1955</a> and again from <a href="https://digitalarchives.sjc.edu/items/show/7851">1970</a> forward. The most recent version of the Charter and Polity is also available on the College's <a href="https://www.sjc.edu/about/leadership/board-visitors-governors/charter-polity">website</a>. <br /><br />Click on <strong><a title="Items in the Charter and Polity of the College Collection" href="https://digitalarchives.sjc.edu/items/browse?collection=62&sort_field=Dublin+Core%2CDate">Items in the Charter and Polity of the College Collection</a></strong> to view and sort all items in the collection.
Creator
An entity primarily responsible for making the resource
St. John's College
Publisher
An entity responsible for making the resource available
St. John's College
Contributor
An entity responsible for making contributions to the resource
St. John's College Greenfield Library
Text
A resource consisting primarily of words for reading. Examples include books, letters, dissertations, poems, newspapers, articles, archives of mailing lists. Note that facsimiles or images of texts are still of the genre Text.
Original Format
The type of object, such as painting, sculpture, paper, photo, and additional data
PDF
Page numeration
Number of pages in the original item.
25 pages
Dublin Core
The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/.
Title
A name given to the resource
Charter and Polity of the College, 2006
Description
An account of the resource
Charter and Polity of the College, amended and restated April 2006.
Creator
An entity primarily responsible for making the resource
St. John's College
Publisher
An entity responsible for making the resource available
St. John's College
Coverage
The spatial or temporal topic of the resource, the spatial applicability of the resource, or the jurisdiction under which the resource is relevant
Annapolis, MD
Santa Fe, NM
Date
A point or period of time associated with an event in the lifecycle of the resource
2006-04
Type
The nature or genre of the resource
text
Format
The file format, physical medium, or dimensions of the resource
PDF
Subject
The topic of the resource
St. John's College (Annapolis, Md.)
Legal instruments
Language
A language of the resource
English
Identifier
An unambiguous reference to the resource within a given context
Charter_and_Polity_2006_ac
Charter and Polity
-
https://s3.us-east-1.amazonaws.com/sjcdigitalarchives/original/a07206d7674d0a659b9d5cba73b1bbaf.mp4
b4087987691c40aa114bd196d3308567
Dublin Core
The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/.
Description
An account of the resource
Items in this collection are part of a series of lectures given every year at St. John's College. During the Fall and Spring semesters, lectures are given on Friday nights. Items include audio and video recordings and typescripts.<br /><br />For more information, and for a schedule of upcoming lectures, please visit the <strong><a href="http://www.sjc.edu/programs-and-events/annapolis/formal-lecture-series/" target="_blank" rel="noreferrer noopener">St. John's College website</a></strong>. <br /><br />Click on <strong><a title="Formal Lecture Series" href="http://digitalarchives.sjc.edu/items/browse?collection=5">Items in the St. John's College Formal Lecture Series—Annapolis Collection</a></strong> to view and sort all items in the collection.<br /><br />A growing number of lecture recordings are also available on the St. John's College (Annapolis) Lectures podcast. Visit <a href="https://anchor.fm/greenfieldlibrary" title="Anchor.fm">Anchor.fm</a>, <a href="https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/st-johns-college-annapolis-lectures/id1695157772">Apple Podcasts</a>, <a href="https://podcasts.google.com/feed/aHR0cHM6Ly9hbmNob3IuZm0vcy84Yzk5MzdhYy9wb2RjYXN0L3Jzcw" title="Google Podcasts">Google Podcasts</a>, or <a href="https://open.spotify.com/show/6GDsIRqC8SWZ28AY72BsYM?si=f2ecfa9e247a456f" title="Spotify">Spotify</a> to listen and subscribe.
Contributor
An entity responsible for making contributions to the resource
St. John's College Greenfield Library
Title
A name given to the resource
St. John's College Formal Lecture Series—Annapolis
Identifier
An unambiguous reference to the resource within a given context
formallectureseriesannapolis
Sound
A resource primarily intended to be heard. Examples include a music playback file format, an audio compact disc, and recorded speech or sounds.
Original Format
The type of object, such as painting, sculpture, paper, photo, and additional data
wav
Duration
Length of time involved (seconds, minutes, hours, days, class periods, etc.)
01:07:10
Dublin Core
The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/.
Title
A name given to the resource
On Parts and Wholes in Living Things: Harvey, Descartes, and the Heartbeat
Description
An account of the resource
Video recording of a lecture delivered on August 25, 2023, by Suzy Paalman as part of the Formal Lecture Series.
Ms. Paalman describes her lecture: "William Harvey and René Descartes famously disagreed in their accounts of what the heart is doing as it gives its characteristic beat. Both authors recognize that the heart alternates between squeezing and opening up. Harvey posits that the beat occurs as the heart squeezes closed while Descartes believes the beat happens as the heart opens up. Both have access to similar observations. How is it that they come to opposite conclusions? I’ll discuss how their differing views of how to think about living things likely play a role in this disagreement. I'll examine what we have learned since their time about how the heart beats. Finally, given what we’ve learned, I'll ask the question: What can we say about the nature of living things?"
Ms. Paalman's lecture is the first formal lecture of the academic year. Previously referred to as the Dean's Lecture, this lecture is now called the Christopher B. Nelson Lecture.
Creator
An entity primarily responsible for making the resource
Paalman, Susan R.
Publisher
An entity responsible for making the resource available
St. John's College
Coverage
The spatial or temporal topic of the resource, the spatial applicability of the resource, or the jurisdiction under which the resource is relevant
Annapolis, MD
Date
A point or period of time associated with an event in the lifecycle of the resource
2023-09-25
Rights
Information about rights held in and over the resource
Permission has been given to make this available online.
Type
The nature or genre of the resource
sound
Format
The file format, physical medium, or dimensions of the resource
mp3
Subject
The topic of the resource
Heart beat
Descartes, René, 1596-1650
Harvey, William, 1578-1657
Language
A language of the resource
English
Identifier
An unambiguous reference to the resource within a given context
LEC_Paalman_Susan_2023-08-25_ac
Christopher B. Nelson Lecture
Deans
Friday night lecture
Tutors
-
https://s3.us-east-1.amazonaws.com/sjcdigitalarchives/original/c3e6a7bbb9255c371202a702448fb48f.mp3
ec289b819046893bf146fcf4f143b196
Dublin Core
The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/.
Description
An account of the resource
Items in this collection are part of a series of lectures given every year at St. John's College. During the Fall and Spring semesters, lectures are given on Friday nights. Items include audio and video recordings and typescripts.<br /><br />For more information, and for a schedule of upcoming lectures, please visit the <strong><a href="http://www.sjc.edu/programs-and-events/annapolis/formal-lecture-series/" target="_blank" rel="noreferrer noopener">St. John's College website</a></strong>. <br /><br />Click on <strong><a title="Formal Lecture Series" href="http://digitalarchives.sjc.edu/items/browse?collection=5">Items in the St. John's College Formal Lecture Series—Annapolis Collection</a></strong> to view and sort all items in the collection.<br /><br />A growing number of lecture recordings are also available on the St. John's College (Annapolis) Lectures podcast. Visit <a href="https://anchor.fm/greenfieldlibrary" title="Anchor.fm">Anchor.fm</a>, <a href="https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/st-johns-college-annapolis-lectures/id1695157772">Apple Podcasts</a>, <a href="https://podcasts.google.com/feed/aHR0cHM6Ly9hbmNob3IuZm0vcy84Yzk5MzdhYy9wb2RjYXN0L3Jzcw" title="Google Podcasts">Google Podcasts</a>, or <a href="https://open.spotify.com/show/6GDsIRqC8SWZ28AY72BsYM?si=f2ecfa9e247a456f" title="Spotify">Spotify</a> to listen and subscribe.
Contributor
An entity responsible for making contributions to the resource
St. John's College Greenfield Library
Title
A name given to the resource
St. John's College Formal Lecture Series—Annapolis
Identifier
An unambiguous reference to the resource within a given context
formallectureseriesannapolis
Sound
A resource primarily intended to be heard. Examples include a music playback file format, an audio compact disc, and recorded speech or sounds.
Original Format
The type of object, such as painting, sculpture, paper, photo, and additional data
wav
Duration
Length of time involved (seconds, minutes, hours, days, class periods, etc.)
00:56:38
Dublin Core
The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/.
Title
A name given to the resource
Frederick Douglass on Force and Persuasion
Description
An account of the resource
Audio recording of a lecture delivered on November 21, 1997, by Steven Crockett as part of the Formal Lecture Series.
Creator
An entity primarily responsible for making the resource
Crockett, Steven
Publisher
An entity responsible for making the resource available
St. John's College
Coverage
The spatial or temporal topic of the resource, the spatial applicability of the resource, or the jurisdiction under which the resource is relevant
Annapolis, MD
Date
A point or period of time associated with an event in the lifecycle of the resource
1997-11-21
Rights
Information about rights held in and over the resource
A signed permission form has been received stating, "I hereby grant St. John's College permission make an audio recording of my lecture, and retain copies for circulation and archival preservation at the St. John's College Greenfield Library. Make an audio recording of my lecture available online. Make typescript copies of my lecture available for circulation and archival preservation at the St. John's College Greenfield Library. Make a copy of my typescript available online."
Type
The nature or genre of the resource
sound
Format
The file format, physical medium, or dimensions of the resource
mp3
Subject
The topic of the resource
Douglass, Frederick, 1818-1895
Lincoln, Abraham, 1809-1865
Oratory
Antislavery movements
Language
A language of the resource
English
Identifier
An unambiguous reference to the resource within a given context
LEC_Crocket_Steven_1997-11-21_ac
Friday night lecture
Tutors
-
https://s3.us-east-1.amazonaws.com/sjcdigitalarchives/original/d1838e14bb6445246e0086bd6436c397.pdf
2d810bad947307597eb0e31960333780
PDF Text
Text
K N OW T H YSE LF
A Presidential
Conversation
on the
State of
the College
�K N OW T H YSE LF
What is the state of St. John’s College in
2024? This “report,” done in characteristically
contrarian St. John’s style, is really a
conversation and attempts to answer that
question with honesty and complexity.
To do so, one must frst look back to the year
2016, when the college faced an existential
fnancial crisis. President Roosevelt had just
been appointed to the collegewide presidency
and together with the Board of Visitors
and Governors, the college launched the
$300 million Freeing Minds campaign alongside
a signifcant reduction in tuition. Now, eight
years later, President Roosevelt will soon retire
and President Demleitner will assume the
collegewide presidency. To help the college
community understand the last eight years,
the two presidents sat down in conversation
to discuss how the college has changed during
this time, how it has remained the same,
what challenges and opportunities lie ahead—
and how the college’s alumni, donors, and
friends can contribute to the continuing vitality
of St. John’s.
2
�K N OW T H YSE LF
NORA DEMLEITNER: Mark, when you began your presidency in 2016, the college was in fnancial turmoil. One of the
frst publications I read when I came to St. John’s was the
2017 report on the state of the college. When I compare
the St. John’s of then to the St. John’s of today, I’m struck
by how much is different and how much remains the
same. Tuition is signifcantly lower, not higher, which is an
almost unbelievable feat. There is a stronger support system for students overall, better career development, and
more resources for student health and well-being. These
changes surround and strengthen our beautiful center of
gravity, the Program, which is very much the same.
MARK ROOSEVELT: There is no question that what is constant is the academic Program. There have been small
changes, and there always should be small changes, but
anybody from the college’s past could come to campus
today and recognize the college, recognize our Program,
immediately. That’s a truth about St. John’s that I want to
emphasize. The college’s heart is still in the classroom.
Externally, we’ve made progress on a variety of fronts,
and to do that we had to acknowledge the changes that
have been happening in higher education, how they impact
all colleges except for the richest, and certainly how they
impact us. The reason we got into the fnancial trouble
you mentioned is that we misunderstood those changes.
We thought the 2008 recession was a temporary anomaly.
What we were experiencing was actually a sea change in
fnancial conditions for colleges and universities. Simply
put, students cannot pay as much as earlier generations.
This means we get about $10 million less from students
than we did in the early 2000s.
With infation that would be closer to $14 or $15 million, and when you have a $50 million operating budget,
which is essentially what we spend to run the college, the
loss of so much student-derived revenue is extraordinarily challenging. Once we came to terms with that, we were
able to accept what we had to do about it. I take great pride
in how the community responded. It meant cuts in staff
and compensation. It meant we had to hold steady for a
3
�K N OW T H YSE LF
few years with the number of faculty we had, because we
could not afford to replace those who retired. It was diffcult and painful, but there was widespread acceptance that
all these things had to be done to protect the college, so
we could get our feet back on the ground and move from a
structural defcit to a balanced budget—which is still precarious, very precarious. In fact, unfortunately, we are
moving back toward defcits.
At the same time, we had to confront the fact that we
had at least $150 million in deferred maintenance that
needed to be addressed and not enough supports in place
for student success. I am very proud of the progress we
have made in both areas. We’ve been able to renovate
three of our largest buildings, and we have secured fnancing for a fourth. Our students also have far more robust
support along the continuum, from the time they apply
to when they graduate—and even after in terms of career
support.
ND: We know that the number of high school students is
expected to decline rather precipitously in many parts of
the United States, beginning in 2026. In your view, how
prepared is St. John’s for what is likely to be a protracted
period of very intense competition among colleges?
“We have a tremendous
advantage in knowing
who we are and believing
in who we are.”
MR: I want to emphasize something important: we have a
tremendous advantage in knowing who we are and believing in who we are.
Recruiting our students will be more diffcult now, with
fewer young people going to college, but our audience has
always been a small one. Finding the right students has
always been a challenge. But we know who we are, and we
know we are different from every other college.
You have heard me say in my convocation speech that
we are as different from Oberlin, Pomona, and Middlebury
as they are from Ohio State. I believe that, and I think our
differences are important. We ask students to work outside
their comfort zone, to do advanced work in math, science,
literature, and philosophy. Nobody else does that. We ask
our faculty to teach across the curriculum. God knows
4
�K N OW T H YSE LF
“We ask students to work
outside their comfort zone,
to do advanced work in
math, science, literature,
and philosophy. Nobody
else does that. We ask our
faculty to teach across
the curriculum. God knows
nobody else does that.”
nobody else does that. I think our position is clear, and I
think our differences are clear.
Now does that mean we aren’t taking proactive steps
to safeguard the college? No. We are much better prepared
for a competitive environment than we were in 2016. For
one thing, we are spending less time on recruitment strategies that don’t bring students to the college and focusing
on those that do. For example, our most reliable pipeline is
Summer Academy, our immersive program for high school
students, so we expanded its capacity and saw record
participation this year. On the other hand, the U.S. News
& World Report and all the other spurious ratings systems
don’t bring students to St. John’s. It’s a priority for other
colleges to boost their ratings. It isn’t for us.
ND: We must also acknowledge the public drumbeat
against higher education itself. We are starting to see it
in job ads, with employers—and billionaires—telling prospective students they don’t need a degree, just skills and
expertise. The low unemployment rate and higher minimum wage and starting salaries also make it easier, and
tempting, for people to forego college and go straight into
the labor market.
Add to that the challenge of people thinking the liberal arts won’t get them, career-wise, where they want to
be. There is a perception that a liberal education is very
impractical and doesn’t bring the immediate fnancial
returns people expect after four years in college. Now we
know this isn’t true mid- and long-term because we know
our alumni, and we see the impact they have and their
accomplishments, but that misperception persists.
“I frmly believe that people,
or at least a sizeable subset of
people, are going to rebel
against the commodifcation
of education.”
MR: There are going to be times of disquiet and change,
times of questioning the value of higher education, and we
are living in one of those times. But let me say this: I am
convinced the pendulum—the thinking about the liberal
arts and the desire for civil conversation—will swing back
in our direction, not that St. John’s would change even if
it didn’t. I frmly believe that people, or at least a sizeable
5
�K N OW T H YSE LF
subset of people, are going to rebel against the commodifcation of education.
ND: There is a stirring for civil conversation. Stringfellow
Barr made that observation back in 1968 in his Notes on
Dialogue. He was bemoaning the absence of serious and
deep conversation in the media when he wrote that “a
lonely crowd hungers for dialogue.”
MR: He was right, and I think the days ahead will prove
that once again. In the meantime, we aren’t going to waver.
We aren’t going to change based on the sentiments of a
given moment in time. We believe that the liberal arts are
very much of value, as they always were and ever will be.
I believe people will always want to fnd meaning in
their lives, to fnd meaning in the world, to ask the big
questions, to ask what the heck we are doing here and how
we can understand ourselves as best as possible. Those
conversations are what St. John’s is about, so we have, and
this bears repeating, a huge advantage in knowing who we
are, loving who we are, respecting and believing in who
we are. When you believe in who you are and have alumni
who support you, the shifting tides of public opinion on the
liberal arts matter less. They matter a lot less.
ND: I would double down on this. We need to step into our
leadership as a college that offers a truly liberal education.
Most people have a very inchoate and often incoherent sense of what the liberal arts and sciences are. It’s not
about leading people into believing something or drawing certain conclusions but making it possible for them to
draw conclusions for themselves through deep thinking
and conversation. Our alumni chose Freeing Minds as the
name of our fundraising campaign because that is what we
are doing, we are creating independent minds.
What is especially relevant about Barr’s comment is
that when he talks about genuine dialogue, he envisions
this college as the place where it can be found. That is
exactly what I see on this campus today, and it is remarkable. At a time that’s domestically and internationally
6
“There is a stirring for
civil conversation.
Stringfellow Barr made
that observation back in
1968 in his Notes on Dialogue.
He was bemoaning the
absence of serious
and deep conversation in
the media when he wrote
that ‘a lonely crowd hungers
for dialogue.’”
�K N OW T H YSE LF
fraught, our students have civil conversations about consequential issues. Those conversations aren’t always perfect, emotions sometimes get the better of students—and
the rest of us—but there’s no screaming, there’s no sloganeering. There is thoughtful conversation. That is not
what we’re seeing in corners of higher education and other parts of society.
MR: It certainly isn’t what comes across the airwaves.
And you’re right, it isn’t what we are seeing on some college campuses.
ND: That means how we educate students is profoundly transformative. Our discussion-based seminars force
people to think deeply and critically, to form their opinions in a collaborative way, and to disagree without being
disagreeable. Their opinions might be about Plato, or about
the values of justice and rationality, or they might be about
the broader societal and economic issues of the day.
I learned this early on, at the end of my second
month at the college, when Russia invaded Ukraine, and
I received a heartbreaking email from a student who had
begun to tie seminar readings and conversations to a world
event that impacted him directly. Suddenly the questions
posed by the texts became very personal: What is worth
dying for? When, if ever, should your belief in nationhood,
in democracy, be more important than your own life? The
readings and the conversations anchored his insights
into those questions and provided the tools to think them
through. Hearing all of that was incredibly moving for me
and a stark demonstration of the power of our education.
It was also a reminder of this education’s fundamental
purpose. More people should be aware that Stringfellow
Barr and Scott Buchanan conceived of this curriculum and
way of teaching as a bulwark against fascism, which was
on the rise globally in 1937. They visualized St. John’s as
offering the kind of education that would lay the foundation for participation in a free and democratic society—and
it does. It produces citizens who have thoughtfully formed
their values and their positions, and when they are called
7
�K N OW T H YSE LF
“There’s no
screaming,
there’s no
sloganeering.
There is
thoughtful
conversation.
That is not what
we’re seeing in
corners of
higher education
and other parts
of society.”
— NORA DE M LEIT N E R
8
�K N OW T H YSE LF
upon by society to make decisions, they can do so in an
educated manner. I want more people to hear this message
because it is crucial. For democracy to work, we need an
educated citizenry, and no college offers a better education
than St. John’s.
MR: We help people begin the process of developing a personal philosophy, a way of looking at the world that reduces the risk of reckless opinions. I hear that from students.
They tell me they’ve begun to make some sense of the
world and their place in the world. I view this as something
essential that the college does for students.
ND: What is also essential, and very beautiful, is that this is
not an elite education. It is an education for all.
“I don’t understand that type
of elitism, that arrogance,
and I am proud that St. John’s
is not like that.”
MR: I would take offense if I heard someone describe
St. John’s as elite. I think that’s an insult masquerading as
a compliment. St. John’s is such a different place, and we
have a different understanding of what it means to be elite
and what it means to be prestigious, and we are not very
interested in the common understanding of those terms.
Most other schools of our quality wouldn’t take some
of the students we accept, students who have struggled
in high school, who didn’t feel at home in high school or
didn’t feel challenged. We take students who are searching
for something very different than the traditional approach
to learning.
And when we accept students other institutions deem
“risky,” we frequently fnd they are excellent citizens of the
college. They found their home. They found their tribe.
They found a place that honors who they are and what they
want from their education.
I would never want to turn away those students. I don’t
even understand the world some institutions live in where
they proudly reject 96 percent of their applicants. I don’t
understand that type of elitism, that arrogance, and I am
proud that St. John’s is not like that.
9
�K N OW T H YSE LF
ND: It is still incredible to me that we have students who
come to us from other schools and are willing to start
over, to begin again as freshmen, despite the social and
fnancial costs. Imagine giving up a year of tuition, maybe more, when you get no advanced standing for doing so.
That says a lot to me about the kind of education St. John’s
offers and the kind of students who choose it. They want
to be challenged. They want to work hard, both individually and together, and we know they will because our academic strength is unsurpassed. They want to be engaged,
so they come to St. John’s and often fnd they don’t want to
leave the classroom or the conversation. I am mesmerized
by that because it just doesn’t happen anywhere else.
MR: It all goes back to knowing and appreciating who we
are and what makes us different.
Like I said before, I think the pendulum will swing back
in our direction, and I think, or at least I hope, that there
will be a redefning of terms like “prestigious” and “elite.”
Now I will admit that the college succumbed for far too
long to prestige pricing, which is an unjustifably high tuition price meant to signal worth. Our tuition doesn’t convey our worth, so we rejected that concept, and I’m very
grateful that our community gave us the means to do that
through their extraordinary philanthropy. We’ve had to
raise tuition a little since the pandemic because of the
related infation, but as you pointed out, it is still substantially lower today than it was a decade ago.
ND: I think the college’s rejection of prestige pricing
reveals just how seriously we take the idea of an education
for all.
When Roosevelt Montás visited St. John’s in 2022 to
talk about his book, Rescuing Socrates, he remarked on how
the kind of education we offer can touch anyone of any
race, any gender, any income, any background. We have
been living that mission over time. It’s not something we
simply talk about, and it’s not something we acted on just
once. In the last ten years especially, we have expanded
10
“When Roosevelt Montás
visited St. John’s in 2022
to talk about his book,
Rescuing Socrates, he
remarked on how the kind
of education we offer
can touch anyone of any race,
any gender, any income,
any background.”
�K N OW T H YSE LF
access to the college in ways we hadn’t been able to do
before. We have more international students, more students of color, more students at every step on the socioeconomic ladder. We have more students in the Graduate
Institute, taking part in conversations from around the
world and across generations.
I want us to be proud of that, but at the same time be
mindful of the ongoing impact of economic inequality. It is
a deeply entrenched problem, nationally and globally, and
despite our incredible tuition cut, we are still expensive to
most of our applicants.
“Not only are we facing the
ramifcations of inequality,
but we’re also dealing
with the fact that families
have fewer resources
to contribute to college
than they used to.”
MR: You raise a good point. Not only are we facing the ramifcations of inequality, but we’re also dealing with the fact
that families have fewer resources to contribute to college
than they used to. Something that surprises a lot of people is that our students are less affuent than most. Many
people still imagine our curriculum as being more attractive to upper-income students. It simply isn’t true. About
95 percent of our students receive fnancial aid. That’s an
extraordinary number. More than 20 percent of our students are eligible for Federal Pell Grants. The college is
very fortunate to have received a campaign gift from the
Jay Pritzker Foundation that allows us to match those
grants, dollar for dollar.
Nevertheless, we are still not able to meet full need,
and we lose a lot of good students to other colleges because
they can get more fnancial support.
It was crucial that we shift from a fnancial model that
is based on student-derived revenue to one where philanthropy is at the center. We were right to make that change
and to launch a campaign that would allow us to do it.
Donors have told me, individually, that they gave a heck
of a lot more to the campaign than they planned on, and I
know that would not be the case if we weren’t such a distinctive place and had not taken the bold step to cut our
tuition by one-third.
11
�K N OW T H YSE LF
ND: Now that the campaign is complete, what do you
think our alumni need to know about the status of our
fnancial model?
“Alumni need to know that
the college requires,
and will always require,
very signifcant philanthropy.”
MR: Alumni need to know that the college requires, and
will always require, very signifcant philanthropy. Is it
because the college is spending too much money? Not at
all. We have controlled costs very well. If we look at the
last ten years, our expenses have gone up an average of
1.3 percent a year, which is far below the rate of infation.
If we look at our revenues, however, we are getting $10 million less from students. To make up for that, we needed to
add at least $200 million to our endowment. Freeing Minds
added $80 million, along with a $35 million gift that was
not counted toward the campaign. This is wonderful and
certainly impactful, but it’s just over half of what we need,
so we still have a long way to go. We’re going to get there
but will likely run defcits until we do.
ND: You probably have an idea of the question I’m about to
ask next, don’t you?
M R : I’m guessing it ’s this one: How on earth could
St. John’s raise $325 million and still have fnancial challenges? That’s the question we’re hearing, and it deserves
a clear answer.
ND: That’s exactly the question I had in mind.
MR: Let me start by acknowledging that Freeing Minds
was a huge success. For a college the size of St. John’s to
raise $325 million is remarkable. It really is. Some fne
colleges that are much larger and have more alumni than
St. John’s have raised less. And that says a lot, a whole lot,
about the depth of the love our alumni and friends have for
this education.
What people need to understand is that only $200 million has been received at this point because $125 million
came in as pledged gifts. In other words, we will receive
those gifts in the future. Some of it will arrive over the
12
�K N OW T H YSE LF
“How on earth
could
St. John’s
raise
$325 million
and still have
fnancial
challenges?”
— MARK ROOSEVELT
13
�K N OW T H YSE LF
next few years, and some of it will come later from estate
plans. Not all of it will go into the endowment, but $82 million will. We also received some commitments outside of
the campaign that will raise that fgure to $100 million or
more. That gets us closer to where we need to be. It’s just
going to take time to get there.
ND: Let’s talk about the money that has come in the door,
because our alumni are curious about where that money
has gone. We’ve added $80 million to the endowment, and
that leaves $120 million we need to account for, right?
MR: Right.
ND: I’d like to start with the $50 million that went toward
campus improvements, because as we speak I am enjoying
our beautifully renovated Mellon Hall, and watching students stream by, absorbed in conversation. Mellon is our
main academic building and the social and creative heart
of the Annapolis campus. At 70 years of age, it is also relatively young, so you can only imagine the work required
to bring our older facilities up to modern standards.
A few years ago, we repaired our most historic building,
McDowell, and we are almost done renovating our largest residence hall, Edensword Hall, formerly known as
Campbell Hall.
MR: Work is now beginning on Santa Fe’s largest building,
the Pritzker Student Center, which hasn’t had any major
improvements in six decades. The $50 million we invested
in our campuses might raise some eyebrows, but the reality is that we had, and still have, a lot of deferred maintenance to address. So the college is very fortunate to have
supporters who chose to direct their campaign gifts to
these improvements—which are by no means plush. I want
to stress that. I also want to stress that we have more work
to do, and new gifts will be crucial. Thankfully the Jay
Pritzker Foundation has given us a vehicle, the Pritzker
Challenge, for getting this work done.
14
�K N OW T H YSE LF
ND: So that’s $50 million. And then there were the defcits.
MR: Exactly. I’d ask people to remember the year 2016,
when we realized just how high our defcits were. $12 million annually. We were staring into what seemed like an
abyss. And we began to envision a campaign that would
help us steer the ship into calmer waters. So we struck a
deal. Our board—and in particular two magnanimous
donors, Ron Fielding and Warren Spector—would agree
to seed the campaign with their gifts if management
pledged to get the defcit to zero by year fve. We did it, and
it took about $25 million to get there, with the gifts from
Ron and Warren accounting for about half that fgure. It
might not be a fashy way to spend money, but it was absolutely imperative that we climb out of the hole we were
in and assure other donors that their gifts would go to
better things.
N D : And here is where the story gets more exciting
because the remaining gifts allowed us to do all the things
we have been talking about and celebrating over the past
eight years, like expanding our student supports.
“Before we launched the
campaign, we had extensive
conversations with our alumni,
and they were very consistent
and clear. They wanted us to
fx what they saw as an
unsupportive environment.”
MR: Before we launched the campaign, we had extensive
conversations with our alumni, and they were very consistent and clear. They wanted us to fx what they saw
as an unsupportive environment. They told us that students needed more academic and mental health supports,
they needed better career development and pathways to
internships and jobs, and they needed to know that they
belonged at the college regardless of their gender, race,
religion, or economic situations. And so we got to work on
those things, building up the scaffolding that would support our very rigorous Program.
ND: About $25 million came from gifts to the Annual Fund,
which feed into our operating budget and beneft every
student’s fnancial, emotional, academic, and professional needs. Another $20 million came from donors who
15
�K N OW T H YSE LF
earmarked their gifts for specifc initiatives that our budget couldn’t accommodate.
“We are waiting on
$125 million from pledges
and planned gifts.
Until that money arrives,
there will be years when
we run defcits.”
MR: That’s right. We could have asked our donors to direct
all their gifts to the endowment, which would give us longterm stability, but then we wouldn’t have been able to
address the support issues that so badly needed addressing. And so instead, we built out the programs we needed
like the Pritzker Bridge Program. We built out the Santa
Fe Offce of Personal and Professional Development, something the Santa Fe campus desperately needed. And we
grew our academic and mental health supports. Some
of this work was expensive, but luckily we found donors
who were willing to get these initiatives off the ground so
we could work on growing our endowment and balancing
our budget.
And that gets us to where we are today. The campaign
is over, we’ve invested much of the money we received
into student support programs, and we invested much of
the money into the endowment. We are seeing the impact,
which is tremendous—but now we have these programs
that we need to continue supporting, and we are waiting
on $125 million from pledges and planned gifts. Until that
money arrives, there will be years when we run defcits.
ND: I would add that we hope to see more consistent participation in our Annual Fund. We all have a stake in preserving St. John’s in perpetuity, but it is important that we
balance the need to grow our endowment with the need to
support existing students.
I also want to reiterate what you said about the impact
of giving, because it is indeed tremendous, and it is not
something you and I can talk about too much. Our alumni
and friends need to know that it is their gifts that allow us
to fulfll our mission and to live up to who we say we are.
By practically every metric we measure, our current freshman class is the most diverse in years, and without consistent giving, the cultural and socioeconomic makeup of the
class would look very different.
16
�K N OW T H YSE LF
MR: I’ve already mentioned how proud I am of our students,
but I’ll say it again. They are seekers. They want something
different in an education, and they want something different in a college. Fewer and fewer students have the means
to afford St. John’s, which is why we had to ask for support
and why we must continue to ask.
ND: I’d like to shift the conversation at this point, because
I don’t want to ignore the fact that fnancial barriers aren’t
the only ones our students face, and they aren’t the only
ones we need to address. There are social and cultural barriers, perceived barriers related to career choices, and barriers to completing an application.
I’m going to single out the latter because our discussion-based application, which we launched this year as a
supplement to the traditional application, is such a wonderful example of how we are removing barriers in ways
that are true to who we are. It is already yielding some very
strong applicants who are attracted to a college where the
application refects the ethos of the institution. This new
format can also help students avoid the crazy rat race of
the college application process, which often tells us very
little about what a student can bring to the classroom.
MR: It really is appalling that we have colleges and universities that reject almost everyone who wants to go there
and are proud of that, and these same institutions are then
held up to the public as being the best. They aren’t necessarily the best. I went to one of those universities. I think
St. John’s is far more rigorous.
ND: As I said earlier, no college offers a better education
than St. John’s. That is why I would like to see the college gain more self-assurance. We need to step out of the
shadows and into the limelight. The college deserves that.
The college deserves to take its place in higher education proudly, rightfully, and strongly. We are a gem. Our
local Maryland state senator referred to us as “a gem in
Annapolis and in Maryland.”
17
�K N OW T H YSE LF
I want there to be more people who have heard of this
college as a beacon of American education and a place
where civil discourse is not just practiced but lived. I
want people to know about all the opportunities that are
available to the larger community, including Summer
and Winter Classics and of course the Graduate Institute.
No longer should we encounter scores of people who
begin their sentences with, “If only I had known about
St. John’s ….” Our alumni, especially, could be—and often
are—vocal ambassadors. So many of our students say
they came to St. John’s because the best teacher they ever
had or the most interesting person they ever met went to
St. John’s and was willing to talk about it.
Prospective students aren’t the only ones listening. We
are also seeing some top-tier universities take a closer
look at what our students can bring to their graduate programs. Over the past few years, we have formed partnerships with some highly regarded—I am not going to use the
word elite—institutions that will guarantee our students a
tuition discount and, in some cases, offer early admission
or other benefts. Among them are Boston University’s
School of Public Health, the University of Maryland’s Carey
School of Law, and Notre Dame of Maryland University’s
School of Education. We are working on some other relationships, and what is notable is that some of these institutions approached us, not the other way around. They asked
to be our partners, to help get our students into their graduate programs, because they are starting to hear about
St. John’s, and they appreciate what our students offer.
And what our students offer are the things modern
society needs most, including the ability to communicate
at a time when everyone uses emojis.
“I would like to see the college
gain more self-assurance.
We need to step out of the
shadows and into the limelight.
I want there to be more
people who have heard
of this college as a beacon of
American education and a
place where civil discourse is
not just practiced but lived.”
MR: I’m not entirely sure what an emoji is or why anyone
would want to use it. It sounds dangerous to me.
ND: Now let’s not get carried away, Mark! I’ll plead guilty to
using them. They are a part of what passes for communication in modern society, although that isn’t the communication skill employers ask for. There was a recent study
18
�K N OW T H YSE LF
in which employers stated that what they miss in new
employees is their ability to communicate orally. Now, if
there’s one thing you learn at St. John’s, it’s to communicate orally. Collaborating, getting to the core of a problem,
leading a group around the seminar table, doing it calmly
and rationally, these are the kinds of abilities our society
needs and employers want.
We are producing future-proof alumni, and that is particularly important when we are increasingly impacted by
the growth of artifcial intelligence.
“I really believe that
when you’ve got a situation
where the world has
gone so far in the wrong
direction, there must
be people and institutions
that question what passes
for ‘progress.’”
MR: I’m not sure how I feel about artifcial intelligence,
but I am convinced that people should question it, along
with the rest of modern technology-driven culture,
more deeply.
I was looking at Zero at the Bone: 50 Entries Against
Despair by the poet and Yale professor Christian Wiman,
who is a fascinating character to me. He says, “One grows
so tired in American public life of the certitudes and platitudes, the megaphone mouths and stadium praise, infuencers and effuencers and the whole tsunami of slop that
comes pouring into our lives like toxic sludge.”
I really believe that when you’ve got a situation where
the world has gone so far in the wrong direction, there
must be people and institutions that question what passes
for “progress.” You’ve tapped into it with AI and this amazing burst of technology that will have so many negatives
and, yes, some positives as well. Somebody needs to ask
why we are going in that direction, is it right to go in that
direction, and do I want my life to go in that direction?
Among the many things I love about this college is that
so many people are willing to ask those questions. I think
we have more people on our faculty here in Santa Fe who
don’t own cell phones than any other institution I know of,
except perhaps a rabbinical college. It’s more complicated for our students because the sway and the pull and the
demands of modern culture are astronomical and resisting them is diffcult. If we help them think through that,
they can make choices about what they want to participate
19
�K N OW T H YSE LF
in and what they do not want to participate in, and that is
of enormous value.
ND: I think we share some of the same visceral reactions
and anxieties. Maybe there’s a slightly different way to look
at it though, and that’s to recognize that the kind of education we offer, one that helps students to clarify their own
values, is the best preparation for creating a meaningful
life in the modern world.
MR: I very much believe that St. John’s helps students
make choices that are consistent with their own values and
not the values imposed on them by others.
I would even go one step further and say that we help
students resist trends, resist mainstream notions of progress, resist mainstream notions of what it means to build a
“successful” life. That’s very diffcult to do, and I think our
students are better able to do it than most.
ND: Can I point out a word choice you made? You said,
“resist” trends. I would say that we help students to “question” trends. They should be critically examined like
everything else, and the ability to do that is what makes
this education ideally suited for modern times. It is why,
and people outside of St. John’s would probably be quite
surprised to hear this, we have a lot of alumni who have
gone into emerging industries, including the tech feld, and
excel at many different levels.
Regardless of how you and I feel about the rise of AI,
this generation will have to ask what it means to be human,
what it means to think or create or imagine. I am comforted by the fact that it will be our students and alumni who
shape those answers, and they will do it thoughtfully, with
all the tools the college has given them. That will be good
for all of us.
MR: I do think a major mistake we have made as a species
is thinking that what is good for us is good for the world.
ND: You don’t think that’s true?
20
�K N OW T H YSE LF
MR: No, it isn’t true. We need to reverse that paradigm. Do
you think it’s true?
ND: Not when considering how great we are at damaging
the planet. I think this is the kind of question, the kind
of humbling question, that more people need to ask. And
St. John’s is the right college in which to ask it.
MR: I’m glad you raised the topic of humility. If we’re going
to solve the problems we face, I’m convinced we need a
fundamental shift in human psychology from arrogance
and hubris to humility.
My years at St. John’s have helped me refect very differently on education and its purpose. And it has made me
value what I think a liberal arts education is supposed to
inculcate, differently. I deeply believe that the major outcome of a liberal arts education should be humility.
We know we can have glimmers of understanding. We
also know that what we don’t know dwarfs what we do
know. We don’t know why we’re on this planet. We don’t
know what our lives were intended to be or what our species is intended to be. One of the best things St. John’s does
for students is help them understand how important it is
to increase our knowledge, and how limited it is even at
its peak.
ND: I agree with you completely, but I’m going to throw
open a door at this point because I think that’s true for
St. John’s as well. As a college, we need to accept the limits
of our own understanding and continue asking questions
about who we are and how we can stay true to who we are.
In some respects, it’s a rhetorical question. The obvious
answer is to do exactly what we intend to do, and that is
to stay on the path we have been on for 90 years, the path
that produces independent, rational thinkers. But staying
true to who we are can also mean strengthening some other areas that are important.
MR: What would be some examples?
21
�K N OW T H YSE LF
“One question
we need to ask
is whether we
are truly a studentcentered college.
Do we have
a culture that
attracts students to
liberal education
and helps
them flourish?”
— NORA DE M LEIT N E R
22
�K N OW T H YSE LF
ND: Well, one question we need to ask is whether we are
truly a student-centered college. Do we have a culture that
attracts students to liberal education and helps them fourish at the college and beyond?
MR: How would you answer that?
ND: I would say that we aren’t at the point where we can
answer those questions with a fat out “yes.”
For starters, we need to make sure that our campuses and our classrooms are places that our students feel
comfortable calling home for four years, places they want
to return to as alumni. Our students want to be challenged academically, but they also want to be in a place
that accepts who they are and the backgrounds they bring
with them.
I think we can take heart in how well we already do in
this respect. When our students dress differently or wear
their hair differently than what fashion dictates, nobody
turns around, nobody points fngers, and that is empowering. But the college cannot be complacent. A diverse student body in a small community can leave some students
feeling excluded. Like you said, we have students who tell
us they found their tribe here. It’s going to take an ongoing effort to ensure this remains the case, regardless of
one’s background.
We also need to get students thinking about how a
meaningful life can include meaningful work and explain
how the college can help them prepare to make that a
reality. I mentioned earlier that students face barriers to
enrollment that go beyond the fnancial and this is one of
them. Some of our students have a clear idea of what they
want to do for a career and will look to other colleges if
they don’t think St. John’s will give them a practical start.
My hope, my plan, is that we can open more doors to specifc careers and increase the information we provide to
students about the opportunities they have while they are
here. They need to know, for example, that we can guarantee them at least one paid internship, and we will help
23
“We also need to get
students thinking about
how a meaningful life
can include meaningful
work and explain how
the college can help
them prepare to make
that a reality.”
�K N OW T H YSE LF
them pay for at least some of the prerequisite courses they
might need for graduate or professional school.
Now we all understand that many of those students are
going to completely change their minds, and that is okay.
That is the beauty of this education. It encourages you to
experiment with life and with ways of living. Because we
are encouraging students to examine themselves so deeply,
some will inevitably make career choices they would not
have made at a college where they would have been asked
to specialize early.
I do want to acknowledge that these are areas where
the college has really turned things around over the
past few years, but we need to keep asking where we
can improve.
MR: Thanks. I think we have made a great deal of progress. And the college has gotten better at asking our alumni for input.
ND: Our alumni know full well what ails the college. We
still see that today. There might be slight variations on certain positions, but as a core, our alumni have frm opinions
on what needs to change and what doesn’t.
MR: And this isn’t new work. It’s work we have been doing
for the past eight years.
ND: Right. The Pritzker Bridge Program is a good example. We’ve long known that the college loses more students in their freshman year than at any other time, so we
launched a program to help incoming students adapt better to the rigors of the college. Now the percentage of freshmen who return as sophomores is trending higher.
Health and wellness would be another example—and
this goes back to our earlier discussion of trends and how
to thoughtfully assess them. We did not have particularly
good wellness or mental health offerings in place before
2016, and by that point we already knew that ever more
young people were struggling with mental health issues.
24
�K N OW T H YSE LF
This was not a passing fad but a societal problem. The college needed to make changes and did.
Thoughtful improvements are a necessary part of
ensuring that the Program is not just preserved but
kept strong.
MR: This conversation raises a serious issue, because we
cannot be a student-centered college, and we certainly
cannot be a strong college, without tutors. Alumni probably don’t realize this, but right now the starting salary for
faculty at St. John’s is only $58,000. Think about that for a
moment. That is lower than almost all the liberal arts colleges we like to consider our peers.
ND: And that isn’t a reasonable salary for anyone who
hopes to live in Annapolis or Santa Fe, which are very
expensive cities.
MR: It really isn’t, and it’s terribly unfair to ask our faculty
and staff to buy into what we do at St. John’s, to believe in
and love what we do, and then have them make unreasonable sacrifces to work here.
ND: But we do have a plan.
MR: We do. Some board members and other generous folks
were kind enough to tell me they wanted to do something
to honor my retirement, and together we realized that if
we didn’t use this opportunity to create a fund for salary
increases, then there probably wouldn’t be any. This fund
will allow St. John’s to increase our starting faculty salaries to $70,000 this year and to increase all salaries by
about 2.5 percent every year for six years thereafter for a
total increase of 18 percent, without adding to our operating budget, which is running a defcit again.
ND: I believe we have about $8 million raised so far, correct?
M R: That’s right, and we’re aiming for $10 million.
Remember this is what is called an “expiring” fund, so all
25
�K N OW T H YSE LF
the money in it will be expended. Our belief is that by the
time the fund is depleted in seven years, our operating
budget will be able to absorb these raises. Why do we think
that? Because we have over $100 million in gifts coming to
the endowment and we have a community of supporters
who have shown a willingness to use their philanthropy to
get things done. It just needs to continue. We’ve been successful, but we can’t declare victory. Very few colleges can,
except the wealthiest. And St. John’s is not a wealthy college, although we are by no means a poor one either.
ND: What we are is a grateful college.
MR: Well said. Deeply grateful. We’ve asked people to do
a lot of hard things during my time here. And I’m just
amazed at how they have responded. I’m amazed at the
goodwill of the faculty and staff toward reductions we had
to make and the generosity of donors who have made it a
priority to care for the college they love. It’s been a real
community effort.
ND: This would be the right time to mention your retirement portrait, which I understand is … different.
“I’m amazed at the goodwill
of the faculty and staff
toward reductions we had
to make and the generosity
of donors who have made it
a priority to care for the
college they love. It’s been a
real community effort.”
MR: It is, and I couldn’t be happier with it. Anyone who has
ever been to our campuses has probably seen the portraits
of our longer-serving past presidents in McDowell Hall
in Annapolis and in the Weigle Hall stairwell in Santa Fe.
When I was asked how I wanted my portrait done, I knew
that I did not want to go the oil painting route. What I got
was a group photograph of me amongst many of my colleagues, taken on the grassy knoll here in Santa Fe with a
drone. Everyone in the picture has contributed to putting
this college on stronger footing. Of course there are also a
lot of people, a lot, who should be in that photo and aren’t.
That includes faculty and staff who could not make it, and
our alumni, friends, and donors who give, who continue to
give, to ensure that we can offer this transformative education to many future generations.
26
�K N OW T H YSE LF
ND: If you had to give the college one parting message as
you head into retirement, what would it be?
MR: Well retirement is just a form of commencement, isn’t
it? I don’t think I could do any better than to repeat the best
commencement advice I have ever heard. It came from
tutor Eva Brann, who retired from St. John’s this year after
a remarkable 66-year career with the college.
Her advice? Find a place you love and make it better.
Looking back on my time here, I have grown to love
this place very much. And all I can hope is that during
my eight and a half years here, I made it a stronger and
more supportive place. I love the ethos of this place. I love
what the college stands for, and I love the kind of students
we attract.
To our friends and alumni, all I can ask is that they continue to show their love for the college and understand that
St. John’s is a strong place but also a fragile place. Please
continue with your gifts and your volunteerism. Please
know that you should place great faith in Santa Fe’s incoming president, Walter Sterling, who has been the campus’s
longest serving dean, an alum, a true friend, and one of
the hardest workers and most passionate Johnnies I have
ever known. I know that he would agree with Nora and me
when I share my parting thought:
A lonely crowd really does hunger for dialogue,
and this college needs to be here, always, for exactly
that reason.
27
�K N OW T H YSE LF
“The major
outcome
of a
liberal arts
education
should be
humility.”
— MARK ROOSEVELT
28
�60 College Avenue
Annapolis, Maryland 21401
410–263–2371
1160 Camino de Cruz Blanca
Santa Fe, New Mexico 87505
505–984–6000
SJC.E DU
�
Dublin Core
The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/.
Title
A name given to the resource
Annual Reports
Description
An account of the resource
Annual reports for St. John's College. The collection includes Reports of the President. <br /><br />Reports for the years 1933-1968 were published in <a href="https://digitalarchives.sjc.edu/collections/show/37"><em>The Bulletin of St. John's College</em></a>. Reports for the years 1969-1979/80 were published in <a href="https://digitalarchives.sjc.edu/collections/show/12"><em>The College</em></a>. <br /><br />Click on <a href="https://digitalarchives.sjc.edu/items/browse?collection=61" title="Items in the Annual Reports Collection">Items in the Annual Reports Collection</a> to view and sort all items in the collection.
Contributor
An entity responsible for making contributions to the resource
St. John's College Greenfield Library
Text
A resource consisting primarily of words for reading. Examples include books, letters, dissertations, poems, newspapers, articles, archives of mailing lists. Note that facsimiles or images of texts are still of the genre Text.
Original Format
The type of object, such as painting, sculpture, paper, photo, and additional data
pdf
Page numeration
Number of pages in the original item.
29 pages
Dublin Core
The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/.
Title
A name given to the resource
Know Thyself: A Presidential Conversation on the State of the College
Description
An account of the resource
Know Thyself: A Presidential Conversation on the State of the College. Annual report for St. John's College, 2024.
Creator
An entity primarily responsible for making the resource
St. John's College (Annapolis, Md.)
St. John's College (Santa Fe, N.M.)
Publisher
An entity responsible for making the resource available
St. John's College (Annapolis, Md.)
St. John's College (Santa Fe, N.M.)
Coverage
The spatial or temporal topic of the resource, the spatial applicability of the resource, or the jurisdiction under which the resource is relevant
Annapolis, MD
Santa Fe, NM
Date
A point or period of time associated with an event in the lifecycle of the resource
2024-03
Rights
Information about rights held in and over the resource
St. John's College owns the rights to this publication.
Type
The nature or genre of the resource
text
Format
The file format, physical medium, or dimensions of the resource
pdf
Subject
The topic of the resource
Universities and colleges--United States--Administration
St. John's College (Santa Fe, N.M.)
St. John's College (Annapolis, Md.)
Language
A language of the resource
English
Identifier
An unambiguous reference to the resource within a given context
SJC_AnnualReport_2024
-
https://s3.us-east-1.amazonaws.com/sjcdigitalarchives/original/537f96923e9a47ca5c1400553c5bd447.mp3
ccee2ab93cf46890b51fb849e4f85c31
Dublin Core
The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/.
Description
An account of the resource
Items in this collection are part of a series of lectures given every year at St. John's College. During the Fall and Spring semesters, lectures are given on Friday nights. Items include audio and video recordings and typescripts.<br /><br />For more information, and for a schedule of upcoming lectures, please visit the <strong><a href="http://www.sjc.edu/programs-and-events/annapolis/formal-lecture-series/" target="_blank" rel="noreferrer noopener">St. John's College website</a></strong>. <br /><br />Click on <strong><a title="Formal Lecture Series" href="http://digitalarchives.sjc.edu/items/browse?collection=5">Items in the St. John's College Formal Lecture Series—Annapolis Collection</a></strong> to view and sort all items in the collection.<br /><br />A growing number of lecture recordings are also available on the St. John's College (Annapolis) Lectures podcast. Visit <a href="https://anchor.fm/greenfieldlibrary" title="Anchor.fm">Anchor.fm</a>, <a href="https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/st-johns-college-annapolis-lectures/id1695157772">Apple Podcasts</a>, <a href="https://podcasts.google.com/feed/aHR0cHM6Ly9hbmNob3IuZm0vcy84Yzk5MzdhYy9wb2RjYXN0L3Jzcw" title="Google Podcasts">Google Podcasts</a>, or <a href="https://open.spotify.com/show/6GDsIRqC8SWZ28AY72BsYM?si=f2ecfa9e247a456f" title="Spotify">Spotify</a> to listen and subscribe.
Contributor
An entity responsible for making contributions to the resource
St. John's College Greenfield Library
Title
A name given to the resource
St. John's College Formal Lecture Series—Annapolis
Identifier
An unambiguous reference to the resource within a given context
formallectureseriesannapolis
Sound
A resource primarily intended to be heard. Examples include a music playback file format, an audio compact disc, and recorded speech or sounds.
Original Format
The type of object, such as painting, sculpture, paper, photo, and additional data
wav
Duration
Length of time involved (seconds, minutes, hours, days, class periods, etc.)
00:55:34
Dublin Core
The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/.
Title
A name given to the resource
Finding Perspective and Staying in One’s Room: Thoughts on Several of Pascal’s <em>Pensées</em> and Latour’s <em>Repentant Magdalene</em>
Description
An account of the resource
Audio recording of a lecture delivered on September 9, 2005, by Thomas May as part of the Formal Lecture Series.
Creator
An entity primarily responsible for making the resource
May, Thomas
Publisher
An entity responsible for making the resource available
St. John's College
Coverage
The spatial or temporal topic of the resource, the spatial applicability of the resource, or the jurisdiction under which the resource is relevant
Annapolis, MD
Date
A point or period of time associated with an event in the lifecycle of the resource
2005-09-09
Rights
Information about rights held in and over the resource
A signed permission form has been received stating, "I hereby grant St. John's College permission make an audio recording of my lecture, and retain copies for circulation and archival preservation at the St. John's College Greenfield Library. Make an audio recording of my lecture available online. Make typescript copies of my lecture available for circulation and archival preservation at the St. John's College Greenfield Library. Make a copy of my typescript available online."
Type
The nature or genre of the resource
sound
Format
The file format, physical medium, or dimensions of the resource
mp3
Subject
The topic of the resource
Pascal, Blaise, 1623-1662. Pensées
La Tour, Georges du Mesnil de, 1593-1652. Repentant Magdalene.
Language
A language of the resource
English
Identifier
An unambiguous reference to the resource within a given context
May_Thomas_2005-09-09_ac
Friday night lecture
Tutors
-
https://s3.us-east-1.amazonaws.com/sjcdigitalarchives/original/aa41fd0cebf43010b9125133581253b8.pdf
6c050fa315837444c6205730760fc2ec
PDF Text
Text
S!JOHN' S
College
ANNAPOLIS • SANTA FE
CHARTER AND POLITY OF THE COLLEGE
ANNAPOLIS, MARYLAND
~
SANTA FE, NEW MEXICO
Amended and Restated
as of April 2003
I696
I784
FOUNDED AS KING WILLIAM'S SCHOOL,
CHARTERED AS ST. JOHN'S COLLEGE,
��•
•
•
•
•
•
Since this Polity can be amended between printings, the current official Polity is kept in the offices of the
Presidents of St. John's College .
HISTORY
St. John's College was founded in 1696 as King William's School in accordance with a Petitionary Act for freeschools of the General Assembly of the Colony of Maryland. Following the Revolutionary War, the General
Assembly of the new State of Maryland granted a Charter to St. John's College pursuant to and as a part of
Chapter 37 of the Laws of Maryland of 1784. This Charter was subsequently amended by the General Assembly
through Resolution No. 41 of 1832.
The Visitors and Governors of St. John's College in 1950 revised the Charter to eliminate extraneous and
obsolete matter and to make certain other amendments consistent with present requirements and conditions. It
was the opinion of the Attorney General of Maryland that the original Charter of the College was subject to the
general Corporation Laws of Maryland and might accordingly be amended by the Visitors and Governors,
pursuant to these laws, without legislative action by the General Assembly. Subsequent amendments were made
in 1961, in 1963, in 1965, in 1970, and in 1975.
•
•Ill
When the decision was reached to establish a second St. John's College in Santa Fe, New Mexico, amendments
were made to the Charter to authorize branches or extensions of the College. The Charter was then filed with
the Corporations Commission of the State of New Mexico as a foreign corporation. The College was thus
empowered to grant degrees in New Mexico under the provisions of its Maryland Charter.
A Polity for the College was first suggested at a faculty meeting in 1943 by the Dean. A faculty committee was
elected and drafted a Polity, which was then promulgated by the President. In April 1949 the Faculty elected a
committee to revise the Polity. The resulting document was approved by the Faculty on April 9, 1950, and was
adopted by the Board of Visitors and Governors on July 8, 1950. Subsequent quinquennial reviews were made
by elected faculty committees, and desired amendments were recommended by the Faculty to the Board of
Visitors and Governors. The Polity was thus amended at regular meetings of the Board held on May 14, 1955;
May 21, 1960; May 15, 1965; June 6, 1970; April 19, 1975; January 16, 1982; April 19, 1986; and October 19,
1991. Other amendments were adopted by the Board at regular meetings on February 22 and December 9, 1961;
February 23 and September 28, 1963; October 3, 1970;February 18, 1972; October 25, 1975; January 24, 1976;
November 6, 1982; July 21, 1984; April 20, 1985; October 25, 1986; April 11, 1987; October 19, 1991; July 18,
1992, April 17, 1993, April 22, 1995, April 19, 1996, April 24, 1999, and November 6, 1999, January 27, 2001,
and April 26, 2003.
�CHARTER OF ST. JOHN'S COLLEGE
WHEREAS, institutions for the liberal education of youth in the principles of virtue, knowledge and useful
literature are of the highest benefit to society, in order to train up and perpetuate a succession of able and honest
men for discharging the various offices and duties of life, both civil and religious, with usefulness and
reputation, and such institutions oflearning have accordingly been promoted and encouraged by the wisest and
best regulated States; And whereas, it appears to this General Assembly that many public spirited individuals,
from an earnest desire to promote the founding a college or seminary of learning on the Western Shore of this
State have subscribed and procured subscriptions to a considerable amount, and there is reason to believe that
very large additions will be obtained to the same throughout the different counties of the said Shore, if they
were made capable in law to receive and apply the same towards founding and carrying on a college or general
seminary of learning with such salutary plan and with such legislative assistance and direction as the General
Assembly might think fit, and this General Assembly, highly approving those generous exertions of individuals
are desirous to embrace the present favorable occasion of peace and prosperity for making lasting provision for'
the encouragement and advancement of all useful knowledge and literature through every part of this State;
BE IT ENACTED:
II. That a college or general seminary of learning by the name of "St. John's College" be established on the said
Western Shore upon the following fundamental and inviolable principles; namely, first, the said college shall be
founded and maintained forever upon a most liberal plan for the benefit of youth of every religious
denomination, who shall be freely admitted to equal privileges and advantages of education and to all the
literary honors of the college, according to their merit without requiring or enforcing any religious or civil test,
or urgmg their attendance upon any particular religious worship or service other than what they have been
educated in or have the consent and approbation of their parents or guardians to attend; nor shall any preference
be given in the choice of a Principal, Vice-Principal or other Professor, Master or Tutor in said college on
account of his particular religious profession, having regard solely to his moral character and literary abilities
and other necessary qualifications to fill the place for which he shall be chosen.
IV.That thegoverning body or board of said College shall consist ofnot more than forty-nine nor less than
thirteen Visitors and Governors, to be chosen and to hold office in such manner as the said Visitors and
Governors may determine and prescribe by their fundamental ordinances; provided, however, that the
Governors of the States of Maryland and New Mexico shall act ex officio as two of the total number of Visitors
and Governors of said college during their respective terms in said offices; and that the said Visitors and
Governors and their successors duly chosen shall be and are hereby declared to be one community corporation
'
and body politic to have continuance forever by the name of
ST. JOHN'S COLLEGE
and by the same name they shall have perpetual succession.
VII. That if the City of Annapolis should be fixed upon as a proper place for establishing the said intended
college, this General Assembly give and grant, and upon that condition do hereby give and grant to the Visitors
and Governors of the said College by the name of "The Visitors and Governors of Saint John's College in the
State of Maryland," and their successors all that four acres within the City of Annapolis purchased for the use
by the public and conveyed on the 2nd day of October, 1744, by Stephen Bordley, Esq., to Thos. Bladen, Esq.,
then Governor, to have and to hold the said four acres of land with the appurtenances to the said Visitors and
Governors and their successors for the only use, benefit and behoof of the said college and seminary of
universal learning forever.
VIII. That the said Visitors and Governors and their successors by the same name shall be able and capable in
law to purchase, have and enjy to themand their successors in fee, or for any other less estate or estates, any
lands, tenements, rents, annuities, pensionsor other hereditaments by the gift, grant, bargain, sale, alienation,
enfeoffment, release, confirmation, or devise of any person or persons, bodies politic or corporate capable to
•
•
make the same, and such lands, tenements, rents, annuities, pensions or other hereditaments or any less estates,
rights or interests of or in the same at their pleasure to grant, alien, sell and transfer in such manner and form as
they shall think meet and convenient for the furtherance of the said college; And also that they may take and
receive any sum or sums of money, and any kind, manner or portion of goods and chattels that shall be given,
sold or bequeathed to them by any person or persons, bodies politic or corporate capable to make a gift, sale or
bequest thereof and employ the same towards erecting, setting up and maintaining the said college in such
manner as they shall judge most necessary and convenient for the instruction, improvement and education of
youth in the vernacular and learned languages, and generally in any kind of literature, arts and sciences, which
they shall think proper to be taught for training up good, useful and accomplished men for the service of their
country, in church and state.
IX. That the said Visitors and Governors and their successors by the name aforesaid shall be able in law to sue
and be sued, plead and be impleadable in any court or courts, before any judge, judges, or justices within this
State and elsewhere in all and all manner of suits, complaints, pleas, causes, matters and demands of whatsoever
kind, nature or form they be and all and every other matter and thing therein to do in as full and effectual a
manner as any other person or persons, bodies politic or corporate within this State or any of the United States
of America in like cases may or can do.
X . That the said Visitors and Governors and their successors shall have full power and authority to have, make
and use one common and public seal and likewise one privy seal with such devices and inscriptions as they
shall think proper, and to ascertain, fix and regulate the uses of both seals, by their own laws and the same seals
or either of them to change, break, alter and renew at their pleasure.
XI. That the said Visitors and Governors and their successors from time to time and at all times hereafter,
forever, shall have full power and authority to constitute and appoint in such manner as they shall think best and
most convenient, a principal, a vice-principal of the said college and professors with proper tutors and assistants
for instructing the students and scholars of the said seminary in all the liberal arts and sciences, and in the
ancient and modem tongues and languages; and the said principal, vice-principal and professors so constituted
and appointed from time to time shall be known and distinguished forever as one learned body or faculty by the
name of "The Principal, Vice-Principal and Professors of St. John's College"; and by that name shall be capable
of exercising such powers and authorities as the Visitors and Governors of the said college and their successors
shall by their ordinances think necessary to delegate to them for the instruction, discipline and government of
the said seminary and of all the students, scholars, ministers and servants belonging to the same.
XIV. That a majority of the said Visitors and Governors for the time being and duly assembled at any meeting
upon due notice given to the whole body of Visitors and Governors shall have full power and authority to make
fundamental ordinances for the government of the said college and the instruction of youth as aforesaid, and by
these ordinances to appoint such a number of their own body not less than seven, as they may think proper for
transacting all general and necessary business of the said seminary and making temporary rules for the
government of the same; and also by the said fundamental ordinances to delegate to the principal, vice-principal
and professors such powers and authorities as they may think best for the standing government of the said
seminary and of the execution of the ordinances and rules of the same; provided always that they be not
repugnant to the form of government of any law of this State.
XV. And for animating and encouraging the students of said college to a laudable diligence, industry and
progress in useful literature and science, be it enacted that the said Visitors and Governors and their successors
shall by a written mandate under their privy seal and the hand of someone of the Visitors and Governors to be
chosen annually as their President, according to the ordinance to be made for that purpose, have full power and
authority to direct the principal, vice-principal and professors to hold public commencements either on stated
annual days, or occasionally as the future ordinances of the said seminary may direct and at such
commencements to admit any of the students in the said college or any other persons meriting the same (whose
names shall be severally inserted in the same mandate) to any degree or degrees in any of the faculties, arts and
sciences and liberal professions to which persons are usually admitted in other colleges or universities in
America or Europe; And it is hereby enacted that the principal, or in the case of his death or absence, the viceprincipal, and in case of the death or absence of both, the senior professor who may be present, shall make out
and sign with his name diplomas or certificates of the admission to such degree or degrees, which shall be
�sealed with the public or greater seal of the said corporation or college
and delivered to the graduates_as
honorable and perpetual testimonials of such admission; which diploma
s, if thought necessary for domg greater
honor to such graduates, shall also be signed with the names of the differen
t profess ors or_ as many of them as
can conveniently sign the same; provide d always that no student or student
s within the said college s_hall ever be
admitted to any such degree or degrees, or have their name inserted in
any mandate for a degree, until such
student or students have been first duly examined, and thought worthy
of the same.
XVI. That the ordinances which shall be from time to time made by the
Visitors and Governors of the said
college and their successors with an account of their other proceedings
and of the management of the estate and
moneys committed to their trust, shall when required be laid before the
General Assembly for their inspection
and examination but in case at any time hereafter through oversight,
or otherwise through misapprehension and
mistaken connec tions of the powers, liberties and franchises in this
Charter or Act of Incorporation granted, or
intended to be granted, any ordinance should be made by the said corpora
tion of Visitors and Governors or any
matters done and transacted by the corporation contrary to the tenor hereof,
it is enacted that although such
ordinances acts and doings shall in themselves be null and void, yet
they shall not, however, in any courts of
law, or by the General Assembly, be deemed, taken, interpreted or adjudge
d into an avoidance or forfeiture of.
this Charter and Act of Incorporation, but the same shall be and remain
unhurt, inviolate and entire unto the said
corporation of Visitors and Governors in perpetual succession; and all
their acts conformable to the power~, true
intent and meaning hereof shall be and remain in full force and validity
, the nullity and avoidance of such illegal
acts to the contrary in any wise notwithstanding.
XVII. That this Charter and Act of Incorporation and every part thereof
shall be good and available in all things
in the law according to the true intent and meaning thereof, and shall
be construed, reputed and adjudged in all
cases most favorably on the behalf and for the best benefit and behoof
of the said Visitors and Governors and
their successors, so as most effectually to answer the valuable end of
this Act oflncor poratio n towards the
general advancement and promotion of useful knowledge, science and
virtue.
Polity of St. John's College
Preamble
Education is the making of men and women out of children by bringin
g them into the world of inherited
customs, intellectual traditions, and spiritual ties. Institutions of learning
are set up for this purpose. Beyond
this they should also seek to develop their moral and intellectual powers
to enable them to fulfill best their
freely chosen tasks and thus to take their own responsible part in shaping
the future. St. John's College is a
community of learnin g committed to holding these ends constantly in
sight and to seeking the best means of
attaining them.
St. John's College strives to illuminate the common heritage of humani
ty in a persisting study of the great
documents in which that heritage can be found. It is concerned with the
unity of knowledge, an understanding of
the great issues, and the moral foundations 011 which conduct can be
based. To provide proper conditions for
the pursuit of these ends, we, the Board of Visitors and Governors, after
consultation with the Faculty, do
ordain and establish this Polity for St. John's College .
.
Article I
THE COLLE GE
XVIII. That the College may establish and operate one or more branche
s in one or more states of the United
States.
(1) St. John's College is by its Charter a legal entity, carrying on its function
s from its campuses in Annapolis,
Maryland, and in Santa Fe, New Mexico. Under the Charter of the College
, all power, authority, and
responsibility pertaining to the College are vested in the Visitors and
Governors.
In the Polity as hereinafter set forth the nouns "alumnus" and "alumn
i" and "man" and "men," either alone or in
compounds such as "chairman" and "chairmen," and the pronouns "he,"
"him," and "his," are to be taken as
referring to persons whether male or female.
(2) The College consists of the following: The Board of Visitors and
Governors, the Faculty, the Graduate and
Undergraduate Students, the Alumni and the Staff, and other member
s who may be named from time to
time by the Board of Visitors and Governors.
(3) Under the Charter, "the said Visitors and Governors, and their success
ors, from time to time, and at all
times hereafter, forever, shall have full power and authority to constitu
te and appoint, in such manner as
they shall think best and most convenient, a principal and vice-principal
of the said College, and professors,
with proper tutors and assistants, for instructing the students and scholars
of the said seminary in all the
liberal arts and sciences, and in the ancient and modern tongues and languag
es; and the said
principal, vice-principal, and professors, so constituted and appointed
from time to time shall be known and
distinguished forever as one learned body or faculty, by the name of'The
Principal, Vice-Principal, and
Professors of St. John's College;' and by that name shall be capable of
exercising such powers and
authorities as the Visitors and Governors of the said college and their
successors shall by their ordinances
think necessary to delegate to them for the instruction, discipline, and
government of the said seminary and
of all the students, scholars, ministers and servants belonging to the same. 11
(a) The "principal" shall be the Presidents. When 'President' is used
in this Polity it shall mean:
(i) with respect to membership on the Board of Visitors and Govern
ors, in the Faculty, on committees
of the Board, and sitting ex officio with the Instruction Committee, and
for presentation of, and
response to, the Statement of Educational Policy and Program (Article
V (1)( c)), the President of
the Annapolis campus and the President of the Santa Fe campus;
(ii) with respect to membership on committees or sitting ex officio with
committees, and actions or
procedures relating to one campus, the President of that campus;
5
�(iii) with respect to actions under Article II (12)(6) or actions or
procedures involving the entire
College under Article X (l)(a)(i) and Article X (l)(a)(iii), either
President.
(b) The "vice-principal" shall be the Dean who is serving as the
Chair of the Instruction Committee.
(c) There shall be a Dean of St. John's College in Annapolis and
a Dean of St. John's College in Santa Fe.
( d) The "professors, tutors and assistants" shall bear the title Tutor
or Tutor Emeritus. Tutors who have
completed their tenure appointments shall be Tutors Emeriti.
( e) There shall be Vice-Presidents for College Advancement
and Treasurers.
(f) There shall be Associate members of the Faculty, hereina
fter called Associates, who shall be on either
campus, as the offices may be deemed necessary, the Registrar,
the Librarian, the Director of Athletics,
the Director of Student Activities, the Director of Admissions,
the Director of Alumni Activities, the
Director of Financial Aid, and the Director of Career Services.
(g) The "one learned body or faculty," composed of the Preside
nt, the Deans, the other Tutors, the Tutors
Emeriti, the Vice-Presidents for College Advancement, the Treasu
rers, and the Associates, shall bear
the title the Faculty of St. John's College.
(h) All who have formally matriculated, are at the present enrolle
d, and are in good standing shall be
called Students of St. John's College.
(I) The Directors and the Tutors of the Graduate Institute shall
be called the Faculty of the Graduate
Institute.
(j) All who have been awarded a degree by the College shall be
called Alumni. In addition, all who have
completed at least one semester of undergraduate study or at least
one segment of Graduate Institute
study, but who are not currently enrolled, shall be called Alumn
i either a) in the case of
undergraduate students, when the class with which they matric
ulated has graduated, orb) in the case of
Graduate Institute students, at the end of three full sessions of
the Graduate Institute after the one in
which they last enrolled. All who have been designated as honora
ry members of the Alumni
Association of St. John's College shall be called alumni. All
who
have ever been Alumni shall
continue to be.
~
(k) The Staff shall consist of all persons appointed by the Preside
nt who are not members of the Faculty of
St. John's College or the Faculty of the Graduate Institute.
( 1) There shall be no discrimination at St. John's College in appoin
tments, conditions of employment,
admissions, educational policy, financial aid programs, athletic
s, or other activities, on the basis of race,
religion, age, sex, national origin, color, disability and/or handic
ap, sexual orientation, or other
characteristic protected by any applicable federal, state or local
law.
Article II
VISITORS AND GOVERNORS
(1) Qualifications for Membership. Persons shall be eligible
for membership on the Board of Visitors and
Governors who are concerned for the maintenance, progress,
and vitality of St. John's College's educational
progra m and who are willing and able to discharge the respon
sibilities of trusteeship with devotion and
energy.
(2) Members . The Board of Visitors and Governors shall consist
of not more than sixty members, comprising
the Presidents, the Deans, the Governors of Maryland and New
Mexic o, ex officio, and fifty-four members,
6
of whom forty-five shall be elected by the entire Board and nine
shall be elected by the Alumni of the
College, in the manner and for the terms hereinafter provided.
In recognition of meritorious service_to the
College, Visitors Emeriti may be elected to the Board who may
attend all meetmgs_ of the Board, with voice
in deliberation, but without vote. Retired members of the Board
who have served six (6) terms on the Board
as members in good standing shall be designated as Honorary
Board Members upon election by the Board.
Honorary Board Members will receive minutes of the Plenary
Sessions of the Board, may as a guest,
attend the Plenary Sessions of all regular meetings of the Board,
and may be asked to assist on Board
Committees.
(3) Elections by the Board. At each annual meeting, the Board
shall elect a class ofno more than fifteen
members for a term of three years, to succeed those members
whose term expires at the conclusion of said
meeting. Those members elected shall begin their term at the meetin
g next following their election. The
procedure for nomination and election shall be as follows:
There shall be a Nominating Committee of seven members of
the Board appointed by the Chair. The Chair
and the Presidents shall sit with the committee, ex officio, when
nominations to Board membership are
being considered. The Nominating Committee shall recommend
to each member of the Board in writing,
not later than thirty days prior to the annual meeting at which
the election is to be held, at least one
candidate for each of the places to be filled by such election, includi
ng each position as an officer of the
Board. Additional nominations may be made in writing, address
ed to the Chair, signed
by at least five members of the Board, prior to the date above
provided for the report of the Nominating
Committee, and any such additional nominations shall be reporte
d to the Board by the Committee at the
time of its report.
Voting on nominations at annual meetings may be by ballot, each
member present to vote for fifteen_ of the
said nominees. In case the balloting results in a tie for one or more
positions, the Board shall deterrnme the
procedure to resolve the tie. No nominee for membe r or officer
of the Board shall be deemed e_lected who
has not received the affirmative votes of at least a majority of
the members present at the meetmg.
If there should be fewer than fifteen members in any class prior
to the end of the term for such class, any
vacancy may be filled pursuant to the procedure provided above
for regular elections, except that the
election may take place at any regular meeting. A member elected
to fill any such vacanc y shall hold office
for the remainder of the term of the class in which such vacanc
y occurred.
(4) Elections by the Alumni. Each year in the spring, three alumni
shall be elected to membership for a termof
three years, in such manne r that there shall be nine members of
the Board elected by the alumni, consisting
of three classes of three members each. Outgoing members so
elected shall continue to serve until their
successors are elected.
Such elections shall be conducted in accordance with the By-law
s of the Alumni Association of St. John's
College. In the event that for any reason there should be fewer
than three members so elected in any class prior
to the end of the term of that class, the vacancy shall be filled
by the Alumni Association of St. John's College.
Newly elected alumni shall begin their term at the meeting next
following the annual meeting of the Board.
(5) Faculty Representation at Board Meetings. Three members
of the Faculty shall be elected by the Facult yon
each campus to attend all regular sessions of the Board on the
campus to which they belong, with voice m
deliberation, but without vote.
(6) Student Representation at Board Meetings. Two students
shall be elected by the Students on each campus
to attend all regular sessions of the Board on the campus to which
they belong, with voice m deliberation,
but without vote.
(7) Graduate Institute Director Representation at Board Meetin
gs. Each Director of the Graduate Institute may
attend all regular sessions of the Board on such Direct or's campu
s, with voice in deliberation, but without
vote.
7
�(8) Graduate Institute Student Representation at Board
Meetings. A student of the Graduate Institute shall be
elected by the Students of the Graduate Institute on each
campus to attend all regular sessions of the Board
on such student's campus, with voice in deliberation, but
without vote.
(9) Alumn i Association Representation at Board Meetin
gs. The President of the Alumni Association shall be
invited to attend all regular sessions of the Board, with voice
in deliberation, but without vote.
( I0) Staff Representation at Board Meetings. The Staff
on each campus shall be invited to send two
representatives to all regular sessions of the Board at that
campus, with voice in deliberation, but without
vote.
(11) Reelection. A member of the Board elected by
the Board or by the Alumn i may be elected for not more
than
two consecutive terms, but may, after a second consecutive
term, be reelected to membership at the
annual meeting in the year following the expiration of the
member's second term. In extraordinary
circumstances, notwithstanding the foregoing,the Nomin
ating
the Chair of the Board for up to two additional consecutive Committee may recommend the reelection of
terms.
(12) Meetings of the Board.
( a) Regular meetings of the Board shall be held quarterly
in either Annapolis or Santa Fe. The spring
meeting shall be called the annual meeting. The time and
place of regular meetings shall be determined
by the Chair, in consultation with the President, and notice
of regular meetings shall be given not less
than fifteen days prior to such meetings.
(b) Special meetings of the Board may be called by the
President, the Chair, the Executive Committee, or
any ten members of the Board, not less than seven days
after the dispatch of written, faxed, or e-mail
notice of the time, place, and purposes of the meeting. Such
notice may be dispensed with if waived in
writing by all members of the Board either before or after
the meeting.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
for the transaction of business. The Executive Committee
shall determine the compensation of the Vice
Presidents and Treasurers, upon receiving the recommenda
tions of the Compensation Review
Committee. The Executive Committee shall recommend
to the Board the compensation of the
Presidents, upon receiving the recommendations of the Comp
ensation Review Committee.
b) Presidential Search
Committee. There shall be a Presidential Search Committee
to recommend the
appointment of a President as provided in Article IV(2) .
(c) Nominating
Committee. There shall be a nominating Committee for memb
ership of the Board and for
officers of the Board as provided in Article II(3) .
(d) Visiting Comm
ittee. There shall be a Visiting Committee, including a Chair,
appointed by the Chair of
the Board . The Visiting Committee shall meet at least once
annually with the Instruction Committee on
each campus. The Visiting Committee shall discuss the Statem
ent of Educational Policy and Program
of the Chair of the Instruction Committee and become acqua
inted
with the aims of the College and
how they are
being realized.
(e) Finance
Committee. There shall be a Finance Committee consisting
of the Chair, the Presidents, and
the Treasurers of the College, ex officio, and such additio
nal members as may be appointed by the
Chair of the Board. The Chair of the Board shall appoin
t one of the members to be the Chair of the
Committee.
The Finance Committee shall have the following powers
and duties:
(i) The Finance Committee shall, after consultation with
the Investment Committee, make
recommendations to the Board concerning the appropriate
policies for annual or periodic
expenditures from each of the college's endowments.
( c) Any business may be conducted at a regular meetin
g without specific notice of such business (except
that which is required by law or as provided herein as to
elections and amendments), but no business
shall be conducted at any special meeting unless notice of
such business has been given, or has been
waived as above provided.
(ii) The Finance Committee shall review the proposed annua
l budgets of the College prior to their
presentation for approval by the Board and shall make recom
mendations to the Board with respect
to the budgets at the meeting at which they are presented.
(d) One third of the members of the Board shall constitute
a quorum for the transaction of business.
(iii) The Finance Committee shall study, and periodically
advise the Board with respect to, the
financial business policies and practices of the College,
and shall make such special studies and
reports as the Board may from time to time request.
( e) The Board in regular session is open to elected and
ex officio members, to Visitors Emeriti, to
Honorary Board Members as guests, to Associates invited
by the President, and to official
representatives of the Faculty, Students, Graduate Institu
te, Alumn i Association and Staff. Attendance
at Executive sessions shall be limited to voting members
and Visitors Emeriti. Public sessions shall be
open without restriction. The Chair of the Board, in consu
ltation with the President, shall determine
whether any meeting or portio n of a meeting shall be in
regular, executive, or public session.
(13) Officers of the Board . At each annual meeting the Board
shall elect a Chair, two Vice-Chairs, and a
Secretary, to hold office until the next annual meeting or
until their successors are elected. Vacancies in any
such offices may be filled at any regular meeting, or any
special meeting called for that purpose. Such
officers shall perform the custom ary duties of such offices
, and such other duties as the Board may from
time to time direct.
(14) Committees of the Board .
(a) Executive Committee. The Chair, the Vice-Chairs, the
Secretary, the Presidents, the Deans, and four
other members chosen annually by the Board at the annual
meetin g shall comprise the Executive
Committee of the Board. In intervals between meetings
of the Board, the Executive Committee may
act for the Board, except in those matters expressly delega
ted to some other committee, person, or
persons. Seven members of the Executive Committee presen
t at a meeting shall constitute a quorum
(f) Audit Committee. There shall be an Audit Committee,
including a Chair, appointed by the Chair of the
Board . The Treasurers shall serve as non-voting Staff to
the committee.
(i) The Committee shall review in detail the annual report
of the independent auditors and discuss
audit findings with the auditors, unattended by employees
of the College.
(ii) The Committee shall meet with represematives of the
independent auditors to the next audit to
discuss scope and procedures and any other matters requir
ing special attention.
(iii) The Committee shall discuss with College personnel
any corrective action required as a result of
the audit report.
(iv) The Committee shall recommend to the Board the appoin
tment or reappointment of independent
auditors to condu ct the audit for the next fiscal year.
(v) The Committee shall report to the Board annually on
its review of the audit and shall bring to the
attention of the Board any matters related thereto requiring
Board action .
(g) Compensation Revie w Committee. There shall be a
Compensation Review Committee, including a
Chair, appointed by the Chair of the Board.
8
9
�(i) The Committee shall recommend to the Board policie
s for direct and indirect compensation of
Tutors, Associate members of the Faculty, other Faculty memb
ers, and Staff at the College. It
shall annually review the compensation policies and perfor
mance with respect to them and report
the findings of this review to the Board.
(ii) The Committee shall recommend to the Executive Comm
ittee the compensation of the Presidents,
Vice-Presidents for College Advancement, and Treasurers
of the College
(iii) In matters of policy and compensation, the Committee
shall consult with the Presidents and the
Chair of the Finance Committee.
(h) Polity Review Committee. There shall be a Polity Review
Committee appointed by the Chair every
fifth year. The Chair of the Board shall appoint one of the
members to be Chair of the Committee. The
Committee shall receive the report of the Faculty Committee
and after appropriate study shall make
recommendations to the Board for consideration at the annual
meeting when the final review of the
Polity is consummated. The respective Chairs of the Board
and Faculty Review Committees shall
make such arrangements as they deem appropriate for joint
consultation prior to and after the adoption
of the report by the Faculty.
(i) Investment Committee. There shall be an Investment
Committee consisting of at least one member of
the Finance Committee (appointed by the Chair of the Board
), the Treasurers of the college, ex officio,
and such additional members as may be appointed by the
Chair. The Chair of the Board shall appoint
one of the members to be Chair of the Committee. The Invest
ment Committee shall have the following
powers and duties:
(i) The Investment Committee shall have full power to
direct the investment and reinvestment of all
funds of the College, including endowment and restricted
funds, and the proper officers of the
Board and the College are authorized to carry out all writte
n directions, signed by the Chair of the
Committee, with respect to such investments and reinvestmen
ts. The Committee shall report at
each regular meeting any action taken hereunder since the
previous meeting.
(ii) The Committee shall advise the Finance Committee
on the question of the appropriate endowment
spending policies for the College, and shall consult with
the Finance Committee on any matter that
it judges may affect the financial condition of the College
that may need action by the Finance
Committee.
(j) Buildings and Grounds Committee. There shall be a Build
ings and Grounds Committee
appointed by the Chair of the Board. The Committee shall
meet with the Treasurers on
each campus and review issues and plans relating to the maint
enance and development of
the campuses. Two members shall be named, by the Chair
of the Board, to serve as Chairs
of the subcommittees for each campus, with one to be desig
nated as Chair of the full
Committee.
(k)
Development Committee. There shall be a Development
Committee consisting of at least
one member of each of the Finance Committee and the Inves
tment Committee (appointed
by the Chair of the Board), the Vice Presidents for College
Advancement, ex officio, and
such additional members as may be appointed by the Chair
of the Board, who shall appoint
one member to be Chair of the Committee. The Developme
nt Committee shall have the
following powers and duties:
1.
The Committee shall review all policies and programs for
fund raising, on each
campus and report on same.
10
11.
•
•
111 .
IV.
The Committee shall advise the Board with respect to the
need for capital campaigns
or other special fund-raising projects.
The Committee shall be responsible for seeking contribution
s to the Annual
Campaigns from each Board Member.
At the discretion of the Chair of the Board, the Committee
may be suspended during
the pendency of a capital campaign .
(1) Alumni Relations Committee. There shall be an Alumn
i Relations Committee consisting of the
President of the Alumni Association, the Vice Presidents
for College Advancement, ex officio and
such additional members as mayb e appointed by the Chair
of the Board. The Chair of the Board shall
appoint one of the Alumni-elected Board members to serve
as Chair of the Committee. The
Committee shall review all policies and programs for alumn
i and report on same.
(m) Other Committees. The Chair may appoint such other
standing or special committees of the Board as
the Chair deems desirable or which the Board may reques
t.
(n) Former members of the Board and Visitors Emeriti may
be appointed by and in the discretion of the
Chair to serve on committees.
(o) Except for the Presidential Search Committee and the Polity
Review Committee, committee
appointments shall be made annually. Members of the Comm
ittees serve until their successors have
been appointed.
(p) Any member of the Board may, without invitation, attend
any Board committee meeting, except those
of the Presidential Search, Nominating and Executive Comm
ittees, but without vote.
( q) Whenever a Capital Campaign is in progress, its Chair
shall be an ex-officio voting member of the
Finance and Executive Committees.
( 15) Execution of Contracts, Transfer of Securities, Etc. All
contracts of $50,000 or more, notes, deeds, leases,
mortgages, releases, bonds for security or indemnity, negoti
able instruments, stock certificates, transfers,
and powers, and like papers and documents on behalf of
the College or the Endowment Funds shall be
executed by two persons, of whom one shall be the Presid
ent, the Chair, or a Vice-Chair, and of whom the
other shall be the Secretary of the Board or the Treasurer
of the campus concerned.
( 16) Signing of checks, drafts, etc. All checks, drafts, accept
ances, and similar orders for the payment of
money on behal f of the College may be signed by the same
persons authorized to execute contracts,
etc., pursuant to Section (15) hereof, but may also be signed
by such persons, and in such manner, as
the Board may from time to time direct by appropriate resolu
tion.
(l 7)The College shall indemnify, to the full extent permi
tted by law,any current or former member of the
Board or officer of the College or any person who, while
a member of the Board or officer of the
College, may have served, at the College's request, as a directo
r, officer, partner or trustee of another
entity, against any judgments, penalties, fines, settlements
and reasonable expenses actually and
necessarily incurred by him or her in connection with the
defense of any action, suit or proceeding to
which he or she is made a party by reason of being or having
been such member of the Board or officer
of the College.
Article III
THE FACULTY
The Visitors and Governors by these ordinances hereby delega
te to the Faculty of St. John's College the
President, the Deans, the other Tutors, the Tutors Emeriti,
the Vice-Presidents for College Advancement, the
Treasurers, and the Associates "powers and authorities" for
the "instruction, discipline, and government" of the
11
�College.
Students.
Article IV
(b) The Deans shall serve alternately, for a term of one
year, as Chair of the Instruction Committee.
THE FACULTY: THE PRES IDEN T
(1) There shall be a President for the Annapolis campu
s and a President for the Santa Fe campus, each
appointed as provided in Article IV (2). There is delega
ted to each President by the Visitors and Governors
executive responsibility and authority for the instruction,
discipline, and government of the President's
campus, and the President, in turn, may delegate such
authority. In the interest of the orderly conduct of
business and of maintaining and promoting the unity
of the College, the Presidents shall regularly consult
and communicate with each other and, as appropriate
,
with other College officials, on matters of common
concern.
(2) The President shall be appointed by the Board of
Visitors and Governors on the recommendation of a
Committee composed of five members of the Board
of Visitors and Governors appointed by the Chair of
the Board, at least one of whom is an alumnus, the Deans
, and one Tutor having tenure from each campus
elected by the Faculty on that campus. This Committee
shall be known as the Presidential Search
Committee. It shall consult with the continuing Presid
ent in a regular and timely fashion. Prior to making
its final recommendation, it shall, on both campuses,
consult with all other appropriate persons and shall
arrange for the final candidates to meet with the Facul
ty and the Instruction Committee.
(3) The President shall concurrently be a Tutor, but
the provisions of Article VI need not apply.
(4) The President and persons authorized to exercise
presidential authority shall consult with the Deans, other
appropriate persons, and appropriate Faculty committees
in matters of policy, initiation of programs, and
settin g of priorities affecting the general welfare of
the College.
(5) There shall be a Financial Committee on each campu
s consisting of the President as Chair, the Dean and
Treas urer of the campus, and other members the Presid
ent may appoint. It will review proposed budgets
prior to their being presented to the Finance Committee
of the Board. It will also meet prior to Board
meetings to review performance in the fiscal year to
date and emerging budgetary strengths and
weaknesses.
(6) The President shall appoint, or delegate the powe
r to appoint, other committees as may be necessary for
the
carrying out of the duties of the President or other duties
for which no provision is made under Article IX.
(7) If in the judgment of the Board of Visitors and
Governors, the College is facing a financial exigency
at
either or both of its campuses which could call for a
reduction in the numb er of Faculty positions, both
Presidents shall immediately advise the Faculty of the
nature and extent of the financial difficulty and
consu lt with them concerning the best way to addres
s the situation. The Faculty may then make a formal
recommendation to the Presidents on ways to meet
the problem, or, if the Faculty fails so to act, the Deans
and the Instruction Committee shall propose a plan
to the Presidents. The Presidents shall jointly then
determine a plan which specifies a preferred course
of action to be taken. All necessary steps must be taken
in timely fashion as prescribed by the Board . Nothing
herein provided shall limit the power of the Board to
act otherwise in the event of need to reduce or elimin
ate Faculty positions.
(c) Each year the Chair of the Instruction Committee
shall, after consultation with the Instruction
Committee on the Chair 's campus, and after discussion
with the Instruction Committee of the College,
submit a Statement of Educational Policy and Program
to the Faculty as a whole for discussion. The
President shall present the Statement, together with an
account of the Faculty discussion of it and the
President's response to it, as a report to the Board of
Visitors and Governors for its consideration.
(d) The Chair of the Instruction Committee shall, as
such chair or the Chair of the Board of Visitors and
Governors may deem appropriate, report to the Board
such questions as the Board, through its Chair, may on instructional matters, and shall respond to
ask.
(2) The Deans.
(a) There is delegated to the Deans on their respective
campuses responsibility and authority for the
supervision of the progr am of instruction and for the
general welfare of the students and for whatever
government of the students be necessary for the greate
st possible attainment of aims of the program.
Each Dean shall be the Chair of the Instruction Comm
ittee on such Dean 's campus. In carrying out his
duties, each Dean shall consult regularly with the Presid
ent and with the Instruction Committee and the
other appropriate Faculty committees on that campu
s.
(b) The Deans shall be appointed for terms of five years
from among the Tutors by the Visitors and
Governors on the recommendation of the President after
consultation with a special committee of
seven, four from the campus for which the Dean is being
chosen and three from the other campus,
selected from among themselves by the Tutors havin
g tenure.
(c) A Dean shall be appointed from among the tutors
who have themselves been appointed in accord with
Article VI(3). If non-tenured, the appointee shall acquir
e tenure upon becoming Dean, in which case
the provisions of Article VI(3)(a) regarding reappointm
ent schedules shall not apply.
(d) To assist them in carrying out their duties, the Deans
shall recommend one or more Tutors to be
appointed by the President with the title of Assistant
Dean.
(e) During the absence of the President from either
camp
exercise the President's prerogative of final decision. us, the Dean on that campus shall if necessary
(f) During the absence of either Dean from the campu
s a Tutor with tenure named by the Dean shall act
for the Dean.
(g) The Dean on each campus shall appoint such comm
ittees
duties of the Dean and duties for which no other provis as may be necessary for the carrying out of
ion is made.
Article VI
Article V
THE FACULTY: THE CHAIR OF THE INST RUCT
ION COMMITTEE AND THE DEAN S
(I) The Chair of the Instruction Committee.
(a) There is delegated to the Chair of the Instruction
Committee·responsibility and authority for the
organization of the program of instruction in the libera
l arts that is followed by the Tutors and the
THE FACULTY: THE TUTO RS
(1) The primary responsibilities of the Tutors are to teach
and to make themselves as competent as
possible in all parts of the St. John's Program.
(2) The Tutors shall have authority to recommend to
the Visitors and Governors candidates for degrees of
respective campuses.
their
12
13
--
�(3) Appointment and Reappointment of Tutors. Tutors shall be appoint
ed by the Visitors and Governors upon
recommendation of the President in accordance with the recommendatio
n of the Dean and the Instruction
Committee on that campus where the Tutors so appointed shall teach.
(a) The schedule ofregul ar appointment of Tutors on each campus shall
be either (i)(A) or (i)(B) below, to
be decided by the President in accordance with the recommendation of
the Deari and the Instruction
Committee on that campus where the Tutors so appointed shall teach:
(i)(A)
New Tutors shall be appointed for one year unless they are appointed
at mid-year, in which
case the initial appointment shall be for a year and a half. First reappoi
ntments shall be for
one year. Second and third reappointments shall be for two and three years
respectively.
(i)(B)
New Tutors shall be appointed for two years unless they are appointed
at mid-year, in which
case the initial appointment shall be for a year and a half. First and second
reappointments
shall be for two and three years respectively.
(ii) A Tutor who has completed a three-year appointment must either
be given a tenure appointment or
not be reappointed as Tutor. A Tutor may, however, be given a tenure
appointment as early as the
conclusion of the first year of a three-year appointment. Procedures leading
to a recommendation
for an•early tenure appointment shall be initiated by the Dean and Instruct
ion Committee, but not
without the consent of the appointee, and shall not prejudice subsequent
consideration for a tenure
appointment. Tenure appointments shall not continue beyond retirement.
Tutors Emeriti shall
retain their privileges and responsibilities in voting at Faculty meeting
s.
(iii) Before making recommendations to the President on tenure appoint
ments the Dean on each
campus shall consult with the Instruction Committee on that campus,
after seeking the advice of
the Tutors on that campus.
(iv) A Tutor, to be recommended for a tenure appointment, must have
served full-time at the campus
where the recommendation is to be made for the two years immediately
preceding the year in
which that recommendation is made, the provisions of (ii) above notwith
standing. In ordinary
cases, these two years of service will be the second year of a two-year
appointment and the first
year of a three-year appointment. These requirements may be waived
by the President on the
recommendation of the Dean and Instruction Committee on that campus
.
(b) A non-tenure appointment as Tutor establishes the possibility, but
not the presumption, of its renewal
and the granting of a tenure appointment. Procedures for considering non-ten
ure appointments differ
from those for considering tenure appointments. Satisfaction of appoint
ment criteria admits of degree.
With each successive reappointment, the criteria are applied more rigorou
sly. For a tenure appointment
the application is especially strict.
( c) For the purpose of temporary transfer between campuses, special
appointments of one or two years
may be granted to a Tutor in addition to the regular appointments. The
Tutor may ask that such an
appointment be counted as a regular appointment for the purpose of (a)
above. In the case of a
permanent transfer a Tutor may ask that years of service at the other campus
be counted toward
tenure according to the provisions of(a) above. Nevertheless, the provisio
ns of(3) (a)(iv) prevail.
( d) Special one-year appointments and reappointments may be given
to Tutors who intend to teach on a
part-time basis only. Such a Tutor may subsequently apply for and receive
a regular appointment.
Special part-time appointments may then be counted on a fractional basis
toward eligibility for tenure,
subject to the provisions of (3)( a)(iv). In establishing eligibility for sabbati
cal leave, special part-time
appointments shall be computed proportionately .
(e) Visiting Tutors may be appointed for a tenn or a year.
14
(4) Notification.
(a) A Tutor under consideration for a-non-tenure appointment to begin
in a certain calendar year shall be
notified by the President no later than December 15th of the preceding
calendar year whether
reappointment will be recommended to the Board of Visitors and Govern
ors. If reappointed the
President shall provide notice by March 1st of the calendar year in which
the new appointment is to
begin.
(b) A Tutor under consideration for a tenure appointment to begin in a
certain calendar year shall be
notified by the President no later than May 31st of the preceding calenda
r year whether the
appointment will be recommended to the Board of Visitors and Govern
ors. If appointed the President
shall provide notice by July 31st of that same preceding year.
(5) A Tutor may apply to the Instruction Committee of the College not
later than January 15th for a transfer of
campus for the next academic year. Transfers shall require approval of
both Deans after consultation with
their Instruction Committees.
(6) (a)
A Tutor's appointment may be tenninated by the Board of Visitors and
Governors for one of the
following reasons only:
(i) failure or inability to perfom1 teaching duties in a satisfactory manner
, or
(ii) moral turpitude.
The President shall make such a recommendation to the Board of Visitors
and Governors only with the
concurrence of the Dean and the Instruction Committee of the campus
concerned. Before the
President makes such a recommendation the Tutor affected must be advised
, and the Tutor shall
have the right to be heard by the Instruction Committee or, at the Tutor's
option, by another
committee to be designated by the President for this purpose.
(b) Either Dean, with the approval of the Instruction Committee on the
campus concerned, may
recommend to the President that in the interest of instruction a Tutor be
temporarily relieved of duties
in whole or in part at any time. When such action is taken, the Tutor's
salary shall be continued for the
remainder of the current academic year.
(7) The sabbatical leave program is designed to provide Tutors with an
opportunity for study, rest, and renewal
of spirit, in anticipation of future teaching. It is the objective of the program
to grant all applications for
sabbatical leave meeting the conditions for eligibility set out in (a) of this
section. It is understood that
Tutors on such leave will not undertake full-time remunerative employ
ment elsewhere and will return to
the College .
(a) Eligibility for sabbatical leave shall be upon the following conditio
ns:
(i) A Tutor who has received a tenure appointment may apply for a full
year of sabbatical leave at full
salary, upon completion of the equivalent of seven full years of service
to the College since the
original appointment, or the equivalent of six full years of service since
any previous sabbatical
leave, and the sabbatical leave would not occur in the last two years of
a Tutor's tenure
appointment.
(ii) Such a Tutor may apply for an earlier sabbatical leave of a full year
at partial salary, or a partial
year at full salary. The fractional salary or fractional year shall be determi
ned by the number of
years of teaching completed in relation to the prescribed total for either
an initial or a subsequent
sabbatical leave, as the case may be. In no case shall a Tutor be paid more
than the Tutor's regular
salary. Sabbatical leave for a fraction of a year may·not occur during the
last two years of a Tutor's
tenure appointment.
15
�(b) If, in the judgment of the President, financial or
academic needs at a campus should require that fewer
sabbatical leaves be granted there in a given year than
there are qualified applicants, and if the number
that can be granted there should be smaller than one-s
ixth of the number of Tutors at that campus
having tenure and not on full-time leave under the provis
ions of section (8) below, the President shall
so notify the Board of Visitors and Governors and seek
its
approval for delaying a sabbatical leave for
one or more of the applicants.
( c) If in a year there are more qualified applicants for
sabbatical leave at any one campus than there are
leaves to be granted at that campus, then those memb
ers shall have precedence who meet the following
conditions in the order set forth:
•
•
(b) A request for a leave of absen
ce shall be submitted to the President as early as possib
le in the academic
year before the year in which the leave is to be taken,
but not later than January 15th of that_ year._
Requests for leaves of absence may be withdrawn at
any time prior to Apnl 1st of the year _mwhich the
request is submitted. Requests for leaves of absence
for
the second semester must be subnutted no later
than October 15th.
(c) Tutors on sabbatical leave or leave of absence remai
n members of the Faculty with the right of full
participation in Faculty meetings and all other Colleg
e exercises.
(i) Those who have served for the greater number of
years
since their last sabbatical leave, whichever is more recensince their first appointment as Tutor or
t;
(ii) Those whose service has been continuous throug
hout those years;
(iii) Those whose last sabbatical leave was postponed
because of the financial or academic needs of the
College;
(iv) Those who have seniority of appointment.
When there is a conflict of precedence, the Dean and
the Instruction Committee on the campus
concerned shall be consulted.
( d) A Tutor eligible for sabbatical leave shall make
application to the President before November I st for
leave to begin the following July 1st, and shall be inform
ed of the action upon the application not later
than January 1st.
(8) The President, with the concurrence of the Dean
after consultation with the Instruction Committee on
the
campus concerned, may grant leaves of absence to Tutor
s for a period of one year or less. At that time it
shall be determined whether the leave shall be count
ed as service to the College with respect to eligibility
for sabbatical leave and, if so, how. The decision with
respect to a request for leave of absence shall be
made in the light of the requirements both of the applic
ant Tutor and of the whole College.
(a) Leave of absence may be renewed upon request
but not more than twice in succession except in
extraordinary circumstances.
Article VII
THE FACULTY: THE VICE-PRESIDENTS FOR
COLL EGE ADVA NCEM ENT AND THE
TREASURERS
(1) The Vice-Presidents for College Advancement shall
be responsible to the President for the supervision and
development of all programs in fund-raising, public
relatio
ns, and alumni relations on their respective
campuses.
(2) The Vice-President of College Advancement on
each campus shall be appointed by the Board of Visito
rs
and Governors on the recommendation of the Presid
ent made after consultation with the Dean on that
campus and a committee constituted by resolution of
the Faculty on that campus.
(3) The Treasurers shall have charge, on their respec
tive campuses, under the supervision of the President,
of
all funds and property, and shall have authority to carry
out fiscal and Property transactions, and to receive
and disburse funds, subject to the provisions of this Polity
and other directions and arrangements pursuant
thereto.
(4) The Treasurer on each campus shall be appointed
by the Board of Visitors and Governors on the
.
recommendation of the President made after consultation
with the Dean on that campus and a committee
constituted by resolution of the Faculty on that campu
s.
(5) The Vice-Presidents for College Advancement and
Treasurers may be appointed Tutors under the
provisions of Article VI(3)(d) .
Article VIII
THE FACULTY: THE ASSO CIAT ES
(1) Associate members of the Faculty on each camp
us shall be appointed by the Board of Visitors and
Governors on the recommendation of the President in
consultation with the Dean of that campus. The
President shall have ultimate executive authority over
the Associates.
(2) Associates may be appointed Tutors under the provis
ions of Article VI (3)(d).
(3) The Associates on either campus may establish
for themselves an Associates' Council for the purpose
of
considering College matters of concern to them and
communicating with other members of the College,
(4) The Associates' Council may establish such comm
ittees as it deems appropriate.
(5) There shall be the following Associates, as deem
ed necessary by the President on each campus, with
the
powers and responsibilities provided.
16
17
�(a) The Registrars. The Registrars shall be responsible to
the Deans on their respective campuses. They
shall prepare and supervise the registration of students and
shall be responsible for the academic
records and schedules of students.
(b) The Librarians. The Librarians shall be responsible to
the Deans on their respective campuses for the
operation of the library . Appointments of professional memb
ers of the Library Staff shall be made
upon the recommendation of the Librarian to the Dean on
each campus.
(c) The Directors of Student Activities and the Directors
of Athletics. The Directors of Student Activities
and the Directors of Athletics shall be responsible to the Deans
on their respective campuses for
devising and directing programs of recreational activities.
(d) The Directors of Admissions. The Directors of Admis
sions shall be responsible to the Deans on their
respective campuses for the annual enrollment of qualified
freshmen.
(e) The Directors of Alumni Activities. The Directors of
Alumni Activities shall be responsible to the
Vice-Presidents for College Advancement. Their primary
duty is to enable the College and the Alumni
Association to be of service to alumni.
(f) The Directors of Financial Aid. The Directors of Financ
ial Aid shall be responsible to the Deans on
their respective campuses for the administration of financ
ial aid programs.
(g) The Directors of Career Services. The Directors of Caree
r Services shall be responsible to the Deans
on their respective campuses for helping and counseling
students with respect to graduate and
professional schools and careers.
(h) Persons designated Associates under the provisions
of Article I(3)(f) or of Article VII(3)(k) of this
Polity as amended through April 20, 1985, whose offices
are not specifically named in this Article,
shall continue to be Associates until the expiration of their
appointments to those offices.
• Article IX
THE FACULTY: FACU LTY COMM ITTEE S
(I) The Instruction Committee
(a) The Instruction Committee shares with its Chairs respon
sibility for the program of instruction of the
College. It shall consist of twelve Tutors in addition to the
Deans. The Presidents shall sit with the
Committee ex officio. Six of the Tutors shall be elected from
each campus of the College. The
Instruction Committee shall meet annually. On each campu
s the members of the Instruction Committee
and the Dean as Chair constitute the Instruction Committee
of the College on that campus. The
President sits ex officio with the Instruction Committee on
each campus.
(b) Each of the members of the Instruction Committee shall
serve for a term of three years, and the terms
shall be arranged in such a way that each year the terms of
two members at each campus shall expire.
Terms begin and end the day following cornrnencement exerci
ses. Annually, and separately at each
campus, the President with the Dean on his campus, after
consulting with the Instruction Committee
and seeking the advice of the other Tutors on that campu
s, shall at the last regular Faculty meeting
on that campus nominate four Tutors of whom two shall
be elected by the Tutors to membership on the
Instruction Committee. The Faculty shall be informed of
the names of the nominees prior to the
meeting at which the election occurs. At the expiration of
the three-year term a member of the
Instruction Committee shall for one year be ineligible for
reelection.
(c) If for any reason a member of the Instruction Comm
ittee is unable to serve for a part of the term,
another Tutor shall be chosen to serve for that part of the
term. For this purpose the President and the
Dean in consultation with the Instruction Committee on
the campus where the vacancy occurs, shall
nominate two Tutors of whom the Tutors shall elect one in
a regular Faculty meeting.
(d) If the Instruction Comm
ittee resigns with the Deans on a matter of confidence and
the resignations are
accepted, the President, in consultation with the new means
and after seeing the advice of the other
Tutors, shall nominate nine Tutors for the six vacancies on
each campus m such a manner that two out
of each three nominees shall be elected by the Tutors for
each
of the three classes to fill the unexpected
terms.
(2) The Tutors' Compensation Committee
(a) There shall be a Tutors' Compensation Committee of
six Tutors, three to be elected by the Tutors on
each campus, and the chair shall annually alternate betwe
en campuses. The Committee shall advise the
President concerning Tutors' compensation and related matter
s; it shall make annual reviews of the
College's statement of Tutors' salaries and other compensatio
n of Tutors and report to the Tutors and
the President recommendations consequent upon the review
.
(b) Members of the Comm
ittee shall be elected annually on each campus for terms of
three years irI such a
manner that the term of one member on each campus termin
ates each year. The Tutors' Compensation
Committee on each campus shall provide the Tutors on that
campus with two nominations for each
vacancy on the Committee on that campus . Additional nomin
ations may be made at the Faculty
meeting when election shall be made.
(3) The Library Committees. The President, in consultation
with the Librarian and the Dean, shall appoint
three Tutors on each campus to serve as a Library Comm
ittee. The President, the Dean, and the L1branan
shall themselves be ex officio members of the Committee,
and the Libranan shall serve as Chair. It
shall be the duty of the Library Committees to assist the Librar
ians in making the Libraries serve the_ends
of the College and its program; it shall be their duty to advise
the Librarians in rega_rd to Library policy and
acquisitions. The Managers of the Bookstores may be invited
to sit with the Comrruttees .
(4) The Campus Planning Committees. The Faculty on each
campus shall elect five of its members as a
Campus Planning Committee. Two members shall be electe
d to the Cornrruttee annually at the first regular
meeting of the academic session except in every third year,
when one member shall be chosen. The .
.
President the Dean one of the Assistant Deans , and the Treasu
rer on each campus shall sit ex offic10 with
the Committee on that campus. It shall be the duty of the
respective committees to advise the President on
the construction of new buildings, the renovation of old buildi
ngs, landscaping of grounds, and all matters
relating to the maintenance and development of the campu
s.
(5) The Prize Committees. Every three years the President
shall appoint Tutors on each campus to supervise
the awarding of prizes on the respective campuses. The Comm
ittees shall have full authon ty to decide what
prizes shall be a warded and to name the recipients of the
prizes.
(6) The Fellowship Committees. On each campus there shall
be a Fellowship Com mitte
appoin
e ted by the
President. It shall be the duty of this Committee to inform
students of fellowships for which they may be
eligible, to assist them in applying for fellowships, and to
act on behalf of the College m any matter
relating to application for fellowships .
(7) Other Committees. The Faculty on each campus shall
have authority to elect, or to request the President to
appoint, additional committees that may from time to time
become necessary.
Articl e X
THE FACULTY: FACU LTY PROC EDUR E
(1) Procedure for Instructional Propo sals.
18
19
�(a)( i)
Any proposal concerning matters of instruction that
may affect the College as a whole shall
originate with the Dean and the Instruction Committee
on either campus. A decision as to whether
a proposal is college-wide or campus-specific shall be
made by the Deans and Instruction
Committee of the College. They shall make this decisi
on after notifying the faculty on both
campuses and inviting their comment.
Written statements of college-wide instructional propo
sals shall be distributed to the Faculty at
least two weeks before the Faculty meeting at which
they are to be presented; the proposal shall be
presented to the whole Faculty by the Chair of the Instru
ction Committee, either in person or
through the other Dean . If, after full discussion of any
proposal so presented, there be no objection
on the part of any Tutor, the measure stands approved
and becomes effective as of the date
specified therefore. If, after full discussion, a Tutor objec
ts to the proposal and holds to the
objection, the proposal shall be submitted to vote of
the Tutors at special Faculty meetings called
by the Presidents within a month. Any objections that
have been made and held to and submitted
in writing shall be transmitted immediately in writin
g to the whole faculty. Any objections that
have been made and held to but not submitted in writin
g shall be reported immediately in writing
to the whole Faculty. If, after discussion, any objection
has been made and held to, the Presidents,
in calling special Faculty meetings, shall report the statem
ent of the Chair of the Instruction and
the Dean on the other campus as to whether it be a matte
r of confidence; and in submitting the
proposal to vote, the Chair of the Instruction Comm
ittee and the Dean on the other campus shall,
at the special Faculty meetings, repeat their statement
as to whether it be a matter of confidence.
The vote may then be taken and tallied by the Presid
ents in such a fashion that the Tutors shall
have recorded their decision acting as a whole . If the
proposal be one that the Chair of the
Instruction Committee and the other Dean have decla
red a matter of confidence and if it be
defeated by majority vote, the Deans and the Instruction
Committee shall immediately resign. Ifit
be passed by majority vote, it shall become effective
as of the date specified therefore. For the
confidence procedure a quorum shall consist of threefourths of all resident Tutors on each
campus.
(ii) Any instructional proposal that has been deemed
campus-specific shall be subject to the
procedure set forth above, except that, if an objection
is made and held to on either campus,
voting shall proceed only on the campus were the propo
sal is intended to be put into effect.
Any objections that have been made and held to and
submitted in writing on the other campus
shall be transmitted immediately to the voting Facul
ty. Any objections that have been made
and held to but not submitted in writing shall be repor
ted immediately in writing to the voting
Faculty. If the confidence procedure is invoked, it shall
be only by the Dean on the voting
campus, and it shall affect the Dean and the Instruction
Committee only on that campus.
(iii) The President may refuse to accept the resignation
of the Deans or the Instruction Committee,
any or all of them, whenever in the judgment of the
President such resignation would be
detrimental to the proper functioning of the College;
provided, however, that if any six or
more Tutors shall petition the Visitors and Governors,
the latter shall review the President's
decision within four weeks, during which time the Dean
s and the Instruction Committee shall
continue in office.
(iv) In the event that the proposal be defeated and the
resignations be accepted, the President shall
proceed to the choice of new Deans in accordance with
the provisions of Article V (2)(b).
(b) Upon either a petition of not less than one-tenth
of the Tutors on either campus or a request from the
President, the Dean and Instruction Committee on that
campus shall consider any recommendation
concerning instruction and shall report to the Faculty
within one year their proposal concerning it.
They shall decide whether their proposal is a college-wid
e or campus-specific proposal, and the
procedure of Article X(l) shall apply .
•
•
(2) Faculty Meetings.
(a) Regular monthly meetings of the Faculty shall be
called upon due notice by the President; except that
in the period comprising the months of December and
January only one regular meeting n~ed be
called . The President or, in his absence, the Dean, shall
preside. In the absence of the President and the
Dean, the Faculty shall elect one of its members to presid
e.
(b) Special meetings of the Faculty may be called upon
due notice by the President alone or at the request
of five Faculty members.
(c) Due notice shall be construed to mean no less than
three days notice, except in cases of emergency.
(d) A quorum shall consist of a majority of the Facul
ty in residence except as otherwise provided.
(e) Only Tutors may vote on instructional matters.
All Faculty members may vote on all other matters not
specifically restricted in the Polity.
(3) The Secretary of the Faculty. At the last regular
meeting of an academic year the Facul ty on each campu
s
shall elect one of its members, then in at least his third
year at the College, as Secretary. The Secretary shall
assist in the preparation and circulation of the agend
a for Faculty meetings, shall keep the mmutes of such
meetings, and shall collect and circulate reports of Facul
ty committees.
Artic le XI
THE SCHOLARS-IN-RESIDENCE AND THE ARTI
STS-I N-RE SIDE NCE
The Scholars-in-Residence and the Artists-in-Residen
ce shall be appointed from time to time by the Board
of
Visitors and Governors on the recommendation of the
President after consultation with the Dean and the
Instruction Committee on the campus where the Schol
ars and Artists shall reside .
Article XII
THE STUDENTS
(1) The primary responsibilities of the Students are
to study and to make themselves as competent as possib
le
in all parts of the St. John's Program. Their advice and
service shall be sought by the Faculty m such
matters and in such ways as may best serve the gener
al welfare of the College.
(2) The Students of St. John's College shall constitute
the Student Polity of St. John's College in Annapolis
in Santa Fe.
and
(3) The Student Polity in Annapolis or Santa Fe may
establish for itself a government which is representativ
e
of all·polity members. The Dean on each campus may
delegate to the Student government a share of the
responsibility for the general welfare of the Students
and whatever government of the Students may be
necessary for the greatest possible attainment of the
aims of the program. The duties of the Student
Government may include:
(a) the management of funds available to the Stude
nt Polity;
(b) the sanctioning of all student clubs , organizations,
and activities, and their regulation, if necessary;
(c) the representation of the Students of St. John's Colleg
e to the community outside the College;
20
21
�(d) the establishment and maintenance of formal channels of communication between the Students and
the Faculty; and
Article XIV
(e) any other duties agreed upon by the Students and the Dean.
THE ALUMNI
Article XIII
THE GRADUATE INSTITUTE
(1) The Directors.
(a) There shall be a Director of the Graduate Institute on each campus to whom shall be delegated
responsibility and authority, under the Chair of the Instruction Committee, for the organization and
supervision on such Director's campus of the graduate program of instruction in the liberal arts and for
matters concerning the general welfare of the students. Concerning matters that affect the Graduate
Institute as a whole the Director shall, in consultation with the other Director, be responsible to the
Chaim1an of the Instruction Committee. Concerning matters limited to the Director's campus he shall
be responsible to the Dean on that campus.
( 1) Alumni shall be life-long members of the College, since St. John's College is a community not limited by
geographical location or fixed periods of time.
(2) The Alumni Association is the formal means by which Alumni participate in the life of the College.
Through the election of alumni members of the Board of Visitors and Governors, Alumni share in the
direction of that life. In these and other ways, Alumni shall be given the opportunity to serve the College.
(3) The College shall cooperate with the Alumni Association to enable Alumni to assist in providing services
such as recruiting and interviewing prospective students, placing graduates in appropriate employment, and
advising students concerning careers and admission to graduate and professional schools.
( 4) The College, in cooperation with the Alumni Association, shall provide seminars and other appropriate
educational activities in Annapolis, in Santa Fe, and in other places.
(b) The Directors shall be appointed for terms of three years from among the Tutors by the Board of
Visitors and Governors on the recommendation of the President, after consultation with the Deans and
a special committee consisting of four members, two from each campus, selected from among
themselves by the Tutors having tenure. The Directors shall be Tutors of the Graduate Institute.
(c) Every three years, after consultation with the other Director and the Committee for the Graduate
Institute on such Director's campus, one of the Directors shall submit a Statement of Educational
Policy and Program for the Graduate Institute to the Instruction Committee for discussion at its joint
meeting. The Director may, thereafter, revise the Statement and then shall submit it to the Faculty as a
whole for discussion.
(2) The Faculty of the Graduate Institute.
(a) Each Director, after consultation with the Committee for the Graduate Institute on that campus, and in
accordance with the recommendation of the Instruction Committee on the same campus, shall
recommend to the President Tutors of the Graduate Institute for summer appointment to teach in the
Graduate Institute for one session.
Article XV
THE STAFF
( 1) Members of the Staff assist with the administration and maintenance of the College, performing duties
necessary to its well-being. They are subject to appropriate Staff rules and regulations.
(2) Members of the Staff on either campus may establish for themselves a Staff Council for the purpose of
better communication and understanding of College policies as a benefit to the College as a whole. The
Staff Council shall seek to establish and maintain formal channels of communication among the whole
Staff and between the Staff and the appropriate College Officers. The Treasurer on each campus shall
review Staff employment regulations with the Staff Council and discuss with them any changes proposed.
(3) The Staff Council may establish such committees as it deems appropriate.
(b) During the summer term the Tutors of the Graduate Institute on each campus shall have the authority
to recommend to the Board of Visitors and Governors candidates for degrees.
Article XVI
AMENDMENTS AND REVIEW
(3) Committees for the Graduate Institute.
(a) On each campus the Committee for the Graduate Institute shares with the Director on the same campus
responsibility for carrying out the program of instruction of the Graduate Institute and for the general
welfare of the students.
(b) Each Committee shall consist of three Tutors who have experience in the Institute, in addition to the
Director, who shall serve as Chair.
(c) Members of each Committee shall be appointed by the Director with the concurrence of the Dean on
the same campus after consultation with the Committee for the Graduate Institute on that campus.
(4) Proposals concerning matters of instruction or policy shall originate with one of the Directors, after
consultation with the other Director and with the Committee for the Graduate Institute and shall be
submitted to the Dean on the originating campus for handling in accordance with Article X(l)(a)(i) .
22
(1) Amendments to this Polity may be proposed by a majority of the Polity Review Committee, or by a petition
submitted by not fewer than ten percent of the members of the Board, or by the Faculty as provided for in
section (2) or (3) below. Written notice of a proposed amendment must be provided to the Board and to the
Faculty not less than 30 days prior to the date of the Board meeting at which the amendment is to be
considered. The Faculty shall have the right to infom1 the Board in writing of its recommendation with
respect to the proposed amendment by the time of that meeting. This Polity may be amended by a twothirds vote of those members voting at any regular or special meeting of the Board, provided that the votes
of no fewer than one-third of the members of the entire Board eligible to vote are in favor of such
amendment.
(2) Amendments may be proposed at any regular meeting of either the Faculty in Annapolis or the Faculty in
Santa Fe upon petition of not less than ten percent of the members on either campus. No such proposal
shall be acted upon earlier than the next regular meeting of the Faculty, whether in Annapolis or in Santa
Fe. A two-thirds vote of the entire Faculty in residence, including at least a simple majority vote of the
23
�Faculty in residence on each of the campuses, shall be required for approval and
the amendment shall not
become effective unless approved by the Board in the manner set forth in Section
(1) above.
(3) Every five years this Polity shall be reviewed by a committee of six, three
to be elected by the Faculty on
each campus. The report of the Committee shall be submitted to one regular Faculty
meeting and voted
upon at the next regular Faculty meeting. A two-thirds vote of the entire Faculty
in residence, including at
least a simple majority vote of the Faculty in residence on each of the campuse
s, shall be required for
approval.
Whatever action is thus recommended by the Faculty shall be submitted to the
Board for final decision in
the manner set forth in Section ( 1) above.
Article XVII
COMPL IANCE WITH LAW
No provision of this Polity shall be construed to contravene any applicable federal
or state law. If any provision
is determined to contravene any such law, that provision shall be deemed not
a part of this Polity, and this
Polity's remaining provisions shall remain in full force and effect.
Article XVIII
MANAG EMENT COMMI TTEE
Effective January 1, 2000, there shall be a Management Committee for the college
composed of the Presidents
and Deans of both campuses. The Chair of the Management Committee will be
appointed annually by the Board
of Visitors and Governors. With the advice of the Committee, and in a collegial
manner, the Chair shall exercise
executive authority over the College as a whole with respect to matters assigned
by the Board of Visitors and
Governors. All other provisions of the Polity, including the duties of the Presiden
ts and Deans, will remain in
full force and effect, except as modified hereby. This provis ion will terminate
in five years from the date of its
adoption unless renewed by an affirmative vote of the Board of Visitors and Governo
rs in the year prior to its
expiration.
24
��
Dublin Core
The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/.
Title
A name given to the resource
Charter and Polity of the College
Description
An account of the resource
Revised and amended editions of the St. John's College Charter and Polity.<br /><br />The College's first Charter and Polity was published as the <a href="https://digitalarchives.sjc.edu/items/show/3768">September 1950</a> issue of the <em><a href="https://digitalarchives.sjc.edu/collections/show/37">Bulletin of St. John's College in Annapolis</a></em>. Revised and amended versions were published as individual issues of the <em>Bulletin</em> in <a href="https://digitalarchives.sjc.edu/items/show/3746">1951</a>, <a href="https://digitalarchives.sjc.edu/items/show/7844">1960</a>, <a href="https://digitalarchives.sjc.edu/items/show/7845">1963</a>, and <a href="https://digitalarchives.sjc.edu/items/show/7846">1965</a>. <br /><br />The Charter and Polity was published as a separate document in <a href="https://digitalarchives.sjc.edu/items/show/7850">1955</a> and again from <a href="https://digitalarchives.sjc.edu/items/show/7851">1970</a> forward. The most recent version of the Charter and Polity is also available on the College's <a href="https://www.sjc.edu/about/leadership/board-visitors-governors/charter-polity">website</a>. <br /><br />Click on <strong><a title="Items in the Charter and Polity of the College Collection" href="https://digitalarchives.sjc.edu/items/browse?collection=62&sort_field=Dublin+Core%2CDate">Items in the Charter and Polity of the College Collection</a></strong> to view and sort all items in the collection.
Creator
An entity primarily responsible for making the resource
St. John's College
Publisher
An entity responsible for making the resource available
St. John's College
Contributor
An entity responsible for making contributions to the resource
St. John's College Greenfield Library
Text
A resource consisting primarily of words for reading. Examples include books, letters, dissertations, poems, newspapers, articles, archives of mailing lists. Note that facsimiles or images of texts are still of the genre Text.
Original Format
The type of object, such as painting, sculpture, paper, photo, and additional data
PDF
Page numeration
Number of pages in the original item.
24 pages
Dublin Core
The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/.
Title
A name given to the resource
Charter and Polity of the College, 2003
Description
An account of the resource
Charter and Polity of the College, amended and restated April 2003.
Creator
An entity primarily responsible for making the resource
St. John's College
Publisher
An entity responsible for making the resource available
St. John's College
Coverage
The spatial or temporal topic of the resource, the spatial applicability of the resource, or the jurisdiction under which the resource is relevant
Annapolis, MD
Santa Fe, NM
Date
A point or period of time associated with an event in the lifecycle of the resource
2003-04
Type
The nature or genre of the resource
text
Format
The file format, physical medium, or dimensions of the resource
PDF
Subject
The topic of the resource
St. John's College (Annapolis, Md.)
Legal instruments
Language
A language of the resource
English
Identifier
An unambiguous reference to the resource within a given context
Charter_and_Polity_2003
Charter and Polity
-
https://s3.us-east-1.amazonaws.com/sjcdigitalarchives/original/ec220860d9d1d993faee0cfa7865407c.pdf
49c4a062d3565b210edd89c342735627
PDF Text
Text
ST. JOHN'S COLLEGE
CHARTER AND POLITY
OF
THE COLLEGE
ANNAPOLIS, MARYLAND
SANTA FE, NEW MEXICO
Amended and Restated
as of January, 1997
Founded as King William's School, 1696
Chartered as St. John's College, 1784
�Since this Polity can be amended between printings, the current official Polity is kept in the offices
of the Presidents of St. John's College.
HISTORY
St. John's College was founded in 1696 as King William's School in accordance with a Petitionary
Act for free-schools of the General Assembly of the Colony of Maryland. Following the Revolutionary
War, the General Assembly of the new State of Maryland granted a Charter to St. John's College pursuant
to and as a part of Chapter 37 of the Laws of Maryland of 1784. This Charler was subsequently amended
by the General Assembly through Resolution No. 41 of 1832.
The Visitors and Governors of St. John's College in 1950 revised the Charter to eliminate extraneous
and obsolete matter and to make certain other amendments consistent with present requirements and
conditions. It was the opinion of the Attorney General of Maryland that the original Charter of the College
was subject to the general Corporation Laws of Maryland and might accordingly be amended by the
Visitors and Governors, pursuant to these laws, without legislative action by the General Assembly.
Subsequent amendments were made in 1961, in 1963, in 1965, in 1970, and in 1975.
When the decision was reached to establish a second St. John's College in Santa Fe, New Mexico,
amendments were made to the Charter to authorize branches or extensions of the College. The Charter was
then filed with the Corporations Commission of the State of New Mexico as a foreign corporation. The College
was thus empowered to grant degrees in New Mexico under the provisions of its Maryland Charter.
A Polity for the College was first suggested at a faculty meeting in 1943 by the Dean. A faculty
committee was elected and drafted a Polity which was then promulgated by the President. In April 1949
the Faculty elected a committee to revise the Polity. The resulting document was approved by the Faculty
on April 9, 1950, and was adopted by the Board of Visitors and Governors on July 8, 1950. Subsequent
quinquennial reviews were made by elected faculty committees, and desired amendments were
recommended by the Faculty to the Board of Visitors and Governors. The Polity was thus amended at
regular meetings of the Board held on May 14, 1955; May 21, 1960; May 15, 1965; June 6, 1970; April
19, 1975; January 16, 1982; April 19, 1986; and October 19, 1991. Other amendments were adopted
by the Board at regular meetings on February 22 and December 9, 1961; February 23 and September
28, 1963; October 3, 1970; February 18, 1972; October 25, 1975; January 24, 1976; November 6,
1982; July 21, 1984; April 20, 1985; October 25, 1986; April 11, 1987; October 19, 1991; July 18,
1992, April 17, 1993, April 22, 1995, April 19, 1996, and January 18, 1997.
�CHARTER OF ST. JOHN'S COLLEGE
land with the appurtenances to the said Visitors and Governors and their successors for the only use,
benefit and behoof of the said college and seminary of universal learning forever.
WHEREAS, institutions for the liberal education of youth in the principles of virtue, knowledge and
useful literature are of the highest benefit to society, in order to train up and perpetuate a succession of
able and honest men for discharging the various offices and duties of life, both civil and religious, with
usefulness and reputation, and such institutions of learning have accordingly been promoted and
encouraged by the wisest and best regulated States; And whereas, it appears to this General Assembly that
many public spirited individuals, from an earnest desire to promote the founding a college or seminary of
learning on the Western Shore of this State have subscribed and procured subscriptions to a considerable
amount, and there is reason to believe that very large additions will be obtained to the same throughout
the different counties of the said Shore, if they were made capable in law to receive and apply the same
towards founding and carrying on a college or general seminary oflearning with such salutary plan and
with such legislative assistance and direction as the General Assembly might think fit, and this General
Assembly, highly approving those generous exertions of individuals, are desirous to embrace the present
favorable occasion of peace and prosperity for making lasting provision for the encouragement and
advancement of all useful knowledge and literature through every part of this State;
VIII. That the said Visitors and Governors and their successors by the same name shall be able and
capable in law to purchase, have and enjoy to them and their successors in fee, or for any other less
estate or estates, any lands, tenements, rents, annuities, pensions or other hereditaments by the gift,
grant, bargain, sale, alienation, enfeoffment, release, confirmation, or devise of any person or persons,
bodies politic or corporate capable to make the same, and such lands, tenements, rents, annuities,
pensions or other hereditaments or any less estates, rights or interests of or in the same at their pleasure
to grant, alien, sell and transfer in such manner and form as they shall think meet and convenient for
the furtherance of the said college; And also that they may take and receive any sum or sums of money,
and any kind, manner or portion of goods and chattels that shall be given, sold or bequeathed to them
by any person or persons, bodies politic or corporate capable to make a gift, sale or bequest thereof and
employ the same towards erecting, setting up and maintaining the said college in such manner as they
shall judge most necessary and convenient for the instruction, improvement and education of youth in
the vernacular and learned languages, and generally in any kind ofliterature, arts and sciences, which
they shall think proper to be taught for training up good, useful and accomplished men for the service
of their country, in church and state.
BE IT ENACTED:
IX. That the said Visitors and Governors and their successors by the name aforesaid shall be able in
law to sue and be sued, plead and be impleadable in any court or courts, before any judge, judges, or
justices within this State and elsewhere in all and all manner of suits, complaints, pleas, causes, matters
and demands of whatsoever kind, nature or form they be and all and every other matter and thing therein
to do in as full and effectual a manner as any other person or persons, bodies politic or corporate within
this State or any of the United States of America in like cases may or can do.
II. That a college or general seminary oflearning by the name of "St. John' s College" be established on
the said Western Shore upon the following fundamental and inviolable principles; namely, first, the
said college shall be founded and maintained forever upon a most liberal plan for the benefit of youth
of every religious denomination, who shall be freely admitted to equal privileges and advantages_of
education and to all the literary honors of the college, according to their merit without requiring or
enforcing any religious or civil test, or urging their attendance upon any particular religious worship or
service other than what they have been educated in or have the consent and approbation of their parents
or guardians to attend; nor shall any preference be given in the choice of a Principal, Vice-Principal or
other Professor, Master or Tutor in said college on account of his particular religious profession, having
regard solely to his moral character and literary abilities and other necessary qualifications to fill the
place for which he shall be chosen.
X. That the said Visitors and Governors and their successors shall have full power and authority to have,
make and use one common and public seal and likewise one privy seal with such devices and inscriptions
as they shall think proper, and to ascertain, fix and regulate the uses of both seals, by their own laws
and the same seals or either of them to change, break, alter and renew at their pleasure.
IV. That the governing body or board of said College shall consist of not more than forty-nine nor less
than thirteen Visitors and Governors, to be chosen and to hold office in such manner as the said Visitors
and Governors may determine and prescribe by their fundamental ordinances; provided, however, that
the Governors of the States of Maryland and New Mexico shall act ex officio as two of the total number
of Visitors and Governors of said college during their respective terms in said offices; and that the said
Visitors and Governors and their successors duly chosen shall be and are hereby declared to be one
community, corporation and body politic to have continuance forever by the name of
ST. JOHN'S COLLEGE
and by the same name they shall have perpetual succession.
XI. That the said Visitors and Governors and their successors from time to time and at all times hereafter
'
forever, shall have full power and authority to constitute and appoint in such manner as they shall think
best and most convenient, a principal, a vice-principal of the said college and professors with proper
tutors and assistants for instructing the students and scholars of the said seminary in all the liberal arts
and sciences, and in the ancient and modern tongues and languages; and the said principal,
vice-principal and professors so constituted and appointed from time to time shall be known and
distinguished forever as one learned body or faculty by the name of "The Principal, Vice-Principal and
Professors of St. John's College"; and by that name shall be capable of exercising such powers and
authorities as the Visitors and Governors of the said college and their successors shall by their
ordinances think necessary to delegate to them for the instruction, discipline and government of the
said seminary and of all the students, scholars, ministers and servants belonging to the same.
VII. That if the City of Annapolis should be fixed upon as a proper place for establishing the said
intended college, this General Assembly give and grant, and upon that condition do hereby give and
grant to the Visitors and Governors of the said College by the name of "The Visitors and Governors of
Saint John's College in the State of Maryland," and their successors all that four acres within the City
of Annapolis purchased for the use by the public and conveyed on the 2nd day of October, 1744, by
Stephen Bordley, Esq., to Thos. Bladen, Esq., then Governor, to have and to hold the said four acres of
XIV. That a majority of the said Visitors and Governors for the time being and duly assembled at any
meeting upon due notice given to the whole body of Visitors and Governors shall have full power and
authority to make fundamental ordinances for the government of the said college and the instruction of
youth as aforesaid, and by these ordinances to appoint such a number of their own body not less than seven,
as they may think proper for transacting all general and necessary business of the said seminary and making
temporary rules for the government of the same; and also by the said fundamental ordinances to delegate to
2
3
c
,
�the principal, vice-principal and professors such powers and authorities as they may think
best for the
standing government of the said seminary and of the execution of the ordinances and rules
of the same;
provided always that they be not repugnant to the form of government of any law of this
State.
XV. And for animating and encouraging the students of said college to a laudable diligenc
e, industry
and progress in useful literature and science, be it enacted that the said Visitors and
Governors and
their successo rs shall by a written mandate under their privy seal and the hand of someone
of the Visitors
and Governors to be chosen annually as their President, accordin g to the ordinance to be
made for that
purpose , have full power and authority to direct the principa l, vice-pri ncipal and professo
rs to hold
public commencements either on stated annual days, or occasionally as the future ordinanc
es of the
said seminar y may direct and at such commencements to admit any of the students in
the said college
or any other persons meriting the same (whose names shall be severally inserted in the same
mandate) to
any degree or degrees in any of the faculties, arts and sciences and liberal professions to
which persons
are usually admitted in other colleges or universities in America or Europe; And it is hereby
enacted that
the principal, or in the case of his death or absence, the vice-principal, and in case of the death
or absence
of both, the senior professor who may be present, shall make out and sign with his name
diplomas or
certificates of the admission to such degree or degrees, which shall be sealed with the public
or greater
'seal of the said corporation or college and delivered to the graduates as honorable
and perpetual
testimonials of such admission; which diplomas, if thought necessary for doing greater
honor to such
graduates, shall also be signed with the names of the different professors or as many
of them as can
conveniently sign the same; provided always that no student or students within the said college
shall ever
be admitted to any such degree or degrees, or have their name inserted in any mandate for
a degree, until
such student or students have been first duly examined, and thought worthy of the same.
XVI. That the ordinanc es which shall be from time to time made by the Visitors and Governo
rs of the
said college and their successors with an account of their other proceed ings and of the
managem ent of
the estate and moneys committed to their trust, shall when required be laid before the General
Assembly
for their inspection and examination, but in case at any time hereafte r through oversigh
t, or otherwise
through misapprehension and mistaken constructions of the powers, liberties and franchis
es in this
Charter or Act of Incorporation granted, or intended to be granted, any ordinanc e should
be made by
the said corporation of Visitors and Governors or any matters done and transacted by
the corporation
contrary to the tenor hereof, it is enacted that although such ordinanc es, acts and
doings shall in
themselves be null and void, yet they shall not, however, in any courts oflaw, or by the General
Assembly,
be deemed, taken, interpreted or adjudge d into an avoidance or forfeiture of this Charter
and Act of
Incorporation, but the same shall be and remain unhurt, inviolate and entire unto the said
corporation
of Visitors and Governors in perpetua l succession; and all their acts conformable to the
powers, true
intent and meaning hereof shall be and remain in full force and validity, the nullity and
avoidan ce of
such illegal acts to the contrary in any wise notwithstanding.
XVII. That this Charter and Act of Incorporation and every part thereof shall be good and
available in all
things in the law according to the true intent and meaning thereof, and shall be construe
d, reputed and
adjudged in all cases most favorably on the behalf and for the best benefit and behoof of
the said Visitors
and Governors and their successors, so as most effectually to answer the valuable end
of this Act of
Incorporation towards the general advancement and promotion of useful knowledge, science
and virtue.
XVIII. That the College may establish and operate one or more branche s in one
or more states of the
United States.
4
• as herem
• after set fort h t he nouns "al umnus " an d " a1ummi" an d " man " d "
I n the P o11ty
an men, "
• her a1one or m
in compoun d s sue h as " ch airman
e1t
ir
" an d " c h airmen,
r
" an d the pronouns "h e, " "hi1m," an d
"his," are to be taken as referring to persons whether male or female.
Polit y of St. John's College
Preamb le
Education is the making of men out of children by bringing them into the world of inherited
customs,
intellect ual traditions, and spiritual ties. Institutions oflearni ng are set up for this purpose.
Beyond this
they should also seek to develop the moral and intellect ual powers of men to enable them
to fulfill best
their freely chosen tasks and thus to take their own responsible part in shaping the future.
St. John's
College is a community of learning committed to holding these ends constantly in sight
and to seeking
the best means of attaining them.
St. John's College strives to illuminate the common heritage of mankind in a persisting
study of the
great documents in which that heritage can be found. It is concerned with the unity of
knowledge, an
understa nding of the great issues faced by men, and the moral foundations on which
the conduct of
men's lives can be based. To provide proper conditions for the pursuit of these ends, we,
the Board of
Visitors and Governors, after consultation with the Faculty, do ordain and establish this
Polity for St.
John's College.
Articl e I
THE COLLEGE
(1) St. John's College is by its Charter a legal entity, carrying on its functions from
its campuse s in
Annapolis, Maryland, and in Santa Fe, New Mexico. Under the Charter of the College,
all power,
authority, and responsibility pertaining to the College are vested in the Visitors and Governo
rs.
(2) The College consists of the following: The Board of Visitors and Governors, the Faculty,
the Graduate
and Undergraduate Students, the Alumni and the Staff, and other members who may
be named from
time to time by the Board of Visitors and Governors.
(3) Under the Charter, "the said Visitors and Governors, and their successors, from time
to time, and
at all times hereafter, forever, shall have full power and authority to constitute and appoint,
in such
manner as they shall think best and most convenient, a principa l and vice-principal of the
said College,
and professors, with proper tutors and assistant s, for instructi ng the students and scholars
of the said
seminary in all the liberal arts and sciences, and in the ancient and modem tongues
and languages;
and the said principal, vice-pri ncipal, and professors, so constituted and appointed from
time to time
shall be known and distingu ished forever as one learned body or faculty, by the name of
'The Principa l,
Vice-Principal, and Professors of St. John's College;' and by that name shall be capable
of exercising
such powers and authorities as the Visitors and Governors of the said college and their successo
rs shall
by their ordinances think necessar y to delegate to them for the instruction, disciplin e, and
government
of the said seminary and of all the students , scholars, ministers and servants belonging
to the same."
5
�(a) The "principal" shall be the President, or if there are two Presidents, the Presidents. When
'president' is used in this Polity it shall mean:
the basis of race, religion, age, sex, national origin, color, or physical handicap, discrimination in each
case being understood in accordance with the proscriptions of federal law.
(i) with respect to membership on the Board of Visitors and Governors, in the
Faculty, on committees of the Board, and sitting ex officio with the Instruction
Committee, and for presentation of, and response to, the Statement of Educational Policy
and Program (Article V (l)(c)), the President of the Annapolis campus and the President
of the Santa Fe campus;
Article II
VISITORS AND GOVERNORS
(1) Qualifications for Membership. Persons shall be eligible for membership on the Board of Visitors
and Governors who are concerned for the maintenance, progress, and vitality of St. John's College's
educat10nal program and who are willing and able to discharge the responsibilities of trusteeship with
devotion and energy.
(ii) with respect to membership on committees or sitting ex officio with committees,
and actions or procedures relating to one campus, the President of that campus;
(2) Members. The Board of Visitors and Governors shall consist of not more than sixty members,
c_ompnsmg the Presidents, the Deans, the Governors of Maryland and New Mexico, ex officio, and
fifty-four members, of whom forty-five shall be elected by the entire Board and nine shall be elected by
the Alumni of the College, m the manner and for the terms hereinafter provided. In recognition of
meritorious service to the College, Visitors Emeriti may be elected to the Board who may attend all
meetmgs of the Board, with voice in deliberation, but without vote.
(iii) with respect to actions under Article II (12) (b) or actions or procedures involving
the entire College under Article X (l)(a)(i) and Article X (l)(a)(iii), either President.
(b) The "vice-principal" shall be the Dean who is serving as the Chairman of the Instruction
Committee.
(c) There shall be a Dean of St. John's College in Annapolis and a Dean of St. John's College in
Santa Fe.
for
(d) The "professors, tutors and assistants" shall bear the title Tutor or Tutor Emeritus. Tutors who
have completed their tenure appointments shall be Tutors Emeriti.
(e) There shall be Vice-Presidents for College Advancement and Treasurers.
(f) There shall be Associate members of the Faculty, hereinafter called Associates, who shall be .on
either campus, as the offices may be deemed necessary, the Registrar, the Librarian, the Director of
Athletics, the Director of Student Activities, the Director of Admissions, the Director of Alumni
Activities, the Director of Financial Aid, and the Director of Placement.
(g) The "one learned body or faculty," composed of the President, the Deans, the other Tutors, the
Tutors Emeriti, the Vice-Presidents for College Advancement, the Treasurers, and the Associates, shall
bear the title The Faculty of St. John's College.
(h) All who have formally matriculated, are at the present enrolled, and are in good standing shall
be called Students of St. John's College.
(i) The Directors and the Tutors of the Graduate Institute shall be called The Faculty of the Graduate
Institute.
G) All who have been awarded a degree by the College shall be called Alumni. In addition, all who
have completed at least one semester of undergraduate study or at least one segment of Graduate Institute
study, but who are not currently enrolled, shall be called Alumni either a) in the case of undergraduate
students, when their class has graduated, orb) in the case of Graduate Institute students, at the end of
three full sessions of the Graduate Institute, summer and winter, after the one in which they last enrolled.
All who have ever been Alumni shall continue to be.
(k) The Staff shall consist of all persons appointed by the President who are not members of the
Faculty of St. John's College or the Faculty of the Graduate Institute.
(1) There shall be no discrimination at St. John's College in appointments, conditions of
employment, admissions, educational policy, financial aid programs, athletics, or other activities, on
6
(3) Elections by the Board. At each annual meeting, the Board shall elect a class of no more than fifteen
members
a term of three years, to succeed those members whose term expires at the conclusion of
said meetmg. Those members elected shall begin their term at the meeting next following their election.
The procedure for nomination and election shall be as follows:
There shall be a Nominating Committee of seven members of the Board appointed by the Chairman.
The Chairman and the Presidents shall sit with the committee, ex officio, when nominations to Board
membership are being considered. The Nominating Committee shall recommend to each member of the
Board in writing, not later than thirty days prior to the annual meeting at which the election is to be
held, at least one candidate for each of the places to be filled by such election, including each position
as an officer of the Board. Additional nominations may be made in writing, addressed to the Chairman,
signed by at least five members of the Board, prior to the date above provided for the report of the
Nommatmg Committee, and any such additional nominations shall be reported to the Board by the
Committee at the time of its report.
Voting on nominations at annual meetings may be by ballot, each member present to vote for fifteen
of the said nominees. In case the balloting results in a tie for one or more positions, the Board shall
determine the procedure to resolve the tie. No nominee for member or officer of the Board shall be
deemed elected who has not received the affirmative votes of at least a majority of the members present
at the meeting.
If there should be fewer than fifteen members in any class prior to the end of the term for such class,
the vacancy may be filled pursuant to the procedure provided above for regular elections, except that
the elechon may take place at any regular meeting. A member elected to fill any such vacancy shall
hold office for the remainder of the term of the class in which such vacancy occurred.
•
(4) Elections by the Alumni. Each year in the spring, three alumni shall be elected to membership for
a term of three years, in such manner that there shall be nine members of the Board elected by the
alumni, consisting of three classes of three members each. Outgoing alumni members shall continue to
serve until their successors are elected.
The Directors of Alumni Activities shall request the Board of the Alumni Association to nominate
at least one candidate for each vacancy. Additional.candidates may be nominated by petition of any
7
�thirty alumni. All alumni shall be eligible to vote for the alumni members of the Board. Balloting will
be conducted by mail by the Directors of Alumni Activities.
In the event that for any reason there should be fewer than three alumni members in any class prior
to the end of the term of that class, the vacancy shall be filled by interim election, conducted in the
same manner. Newly-elected alumni shall begin their term at the meeting next following the annual
meeting of the Board.
(5) Faculty Representation at Board Meetings. Three members of the Faculty shall be elected by the
Faculty on each campus to attend all regular sessions of the Board on the campus to which they belong,
with voice in deliberation, but without vote.
(6) Student Representation at Board Meetings. Two students shall be elected by the students on each
campus to attend all regular sessions of the Board on the campus to which they belong, with voice in
deliberation, but without vote.
•
•
•
(9) Alumni Association Representation at Board Meetings. The President of the Alumni association shall
be invited to attend all regular sessions of the Board, with voice in deliberation, but without vote.
(10) Staff Representation at Board Meetings. The Staff on each campus shall be invited to send t:wo
representatives to all regular sessions of the Board at that campus, with voice in deliberation, but
without vote.
(11) Reelection. A member of the Board elected by the Board or by the Alumni may be elected for not
more than two consecutive terms, but may, after a second consecutive term, be reelected to membership
at the annual meeting in the year following the expiration of the member's second term.
(12) Meetings of the Board.
(a) Regular meetings of the Board shall be held quarterly in either Annapolis or Santa Fe. The
Spring meeting shall be called the annual meeting. The time and place of regular meetings shall be
determined by the Chairman, in consultation with the President, and notice of regular meetings shall
be given not less than fifteen days prior to such meetings.
(b) Special meetings of the Board may be called by the President, the Chairman, the Executive
Committee, or any ten members of the Board, not less than seven days after the dispatch of written,
faxed, or e-mail notice of the time, place, and purposes of the meeting. Such notice may be dispensed
with if waived in writing by all members of the Board either before or after the meeting.
(c) Any business may be conducted at a regular meeting without specific notice of such business
(except that which is required by law or as provided herein as to elections and amendments), but no
business shall be conducted at any special meeting unless notice of such business has been given, or
has been waived as above provided.
(13) Officers of the Board. At each annual meeting the Board shall elect a Chairman, two Vice-Chairmen,
and a Secretary, to hold office until the next annual meeting or until their successors are elected .
Vacancies in any such offices may be filled at any regular meeting, or any special meeting called for
that purpose. Such officers shall perform the customary duties of such offices, and such other duties as
the Board may from time to time direct.
(14) Committees of the Board.
(7) Graduate Institute Director Representation at Board Meetings. Each Director of the Graduate
Institute may attend all regular sessions of the Board on the campus to which he belongs, with voice in
deliberation, but without vote.
(8) Graduate Institute Student Representation at Board Meetings. A student of the Graduate Institute
shall be elected by the students of the Graduate Institute on each campus to attend all regular sessions
of the Board on the campus to which he belongs, with voice in deliberation, but without vote.
(e) The Board in regular session is open to elected and ex officio members, to Visitors Emeriti, to
Associates invited by the President, and to official representatives of the Faculty, Students, Graduate
Institute, Alumni Association and Staff. Attendance at Executive sessions shall be limited to voting
members and Visitors Emeriti. Public sessions shall be open without restriction. The Chairman of the
Board, in consultation with the President, shall determine whether any meeting or portion of a meeting
shall be in regular, executive, or public session.
•
•
•
••/
(a) Executive Committee. The Chairman, the Vice-Chairmen, the Secretary, the Presidents, the
Deans, and four other members chosen annually by the Board at the annual meeting shall comprise the
Executive Committee of the Board. In intervals between meetings of the Board, the Executive Committee
may act for the Board, except in those matters expressly delegated to some other committee, person, or
persons. Seven members of the Executive Committee present at a meeting shall constitute a quorum for
the transaction of business.
(b) Presidential Search Committee. There shall be a Presidential Search Committee to recommend
the appointment of a President as provided in Article IV(2).
(c) Nominating Committee. There shall be a nominating Committee for membership of the Board
and for officers of the Board as provided in Article 11(3).
(d) Visiting Committee. There shall be a Visiting Committee appointed by the Chairman. The
Visiting Committee shall meet at least once annually with the Instruction Committee on each campus.
The Visiting Committee shall discuss the Statement of Educational Policy and Program of the Chairman
of the Instruction Committee and become acquainted with the aims of the College and how they are
being realized.
(e) Finance Committee. There shall be a Finance Committee consisting of the Chairman, the
Presidents, and the Treasurers of the College, ex officio, and six or more members appointed by the
Chairman. The Chairman of the Board shall appoint one of the members to be the Chairman of the
Committee. In carrying out its functions the Committee may be divided into two working subcommittees,
one on investments, one on budget, each with its Chairman. The Finance Committee shall have the
following powers and duties:
(i) The Finance Committee shall have full power to direct the investment and
reinvestment of all funds of the College, including endowment and restricted funds, and
the proper officers of the Board and the College are authorized to carry out all written
directions, signed by the Chairman of the Committee, with respect to such investments
and reinvestments. The Committee shall report at each regular meeting any action taken
hereunder since the previous meeting.
(cl) One third of the members of the Board shall constitute a quorum for the transaction of business.
8
9
�(ii) The Finance Committee shall review the proposed annual budgets of the College
prior to their presentation for approval by the Board and shall make recommendations
to the Board with respect to the budgets at the meeting at which they are presented.
(iii) The Finance Committee shall study, ancl periodically advise the Board with
respect to, the financial business policies and practices of the College, and shall make
such special studies and reports as the Board may from time to time request.
(f) Audit Committee. There shall be an Audit Committee of five persons, including a Chairman,
appointed by the Chairman of the Board. The Treasurers shall serve as non-voting Staff to the Committee.
(i) The Committee shall review in detail the annual report of the independent
auditors and discuss audit findings with the auditors, unattended by employees of the
College.
(ii) The Committee shall meet with representatives of the independent auditors to
the next audit to discuss scope and procedures and any other matters requiring special
attention.
(iii) The Committee shall discuss with College personnel any corrective action
required as a result of the audit report.
(iv) The Committee shall recommend to the Board the appointment or reappointment
of independent auditors to conduct the audit for the next fiscal year.
(v) The Committee shall report to the Board annually on its review of the audit and
shall bring to the attention of the Board any matters related thereto requiring Board
action.
(g) Compensation Review Committee. There shall be a Compensation Review Committee of not
more than five members, including a Chairman, appointed by the Chairman of the Board.
(i) The Committee shall recommend to the Board policies for direct and indirect
compensation of Tutors, Associate members of the Faculty, other Faculty members, and
Staff at the College. It shall annually review the compensation policies and performance
with respect to them and report the findings of this review to the Board.
(ii) The Committee shall recommend to the Board the compensation of the
Presidents, Vice-Presidents for College Advancement, and Treasurers of the College.
(iii) In matters of policy and compensation, the Committee shall consult the
Presidents and the Chairman of the Finance Committee.
(h) Polity Review Committee. There shall be a Polity Review Committee of not more than five
members appointed by the Chairman every fifth year. The Committee shall receive the report of the
Faculty Committee and after appropriate study shall make recommendations to the Board for
consideration at the annual meeting when the final review of the Polity is consummated. The respective
Chairmen of the Board and Faculty Review Committees shall make such arrangements as they deem
appropriate for joint consultation prior to and after the adoption of the report by the Faculty.
j) Former members of the Board and Visitors Emeriti may be appointed by the Chairman to serve
on Committees at his discretion.
(k) Except for the Presidential Search Committee and the Polity Review Committee, committee
appointments shall be made annually. Members of the Committees serve until their successors have
been appointed.
(1) Any member of the Board may, without invitation, attend any Board committee meeting, except
those of the Presidential Search, Nominating and Executive Committees, but without vote.
(m) Whenever a Capital Campaign is in progress, its Chairman shall be an ex-officio voting member
of the Finance and Executive Committees.
(15) Execution of Contracts, Transfer of Securities, Etc. All contracts of $50,000 or more, notes, deeds,
leases, mortgages, releases, bonds for security or indemnity, negotiable instruments, stock certificates,
transfers, and powers, and like papers and documents on behalf of the College or the Endowment Funds
shall be executed by two persons, of whom one shall be the President, the Chaim1an, or the
Vice-Chairman, and of whom the other shall be the Secretary of the Board or the Treasurer of the campus
concerned.
(16) Signing of Checks, Drafts, Etc. All checks, drafts, acceptances, and similar orders for the payment
of money on behalf of the College may be signed by the same persons authorized to execute contracts,
etc., pursuant to Section (15) hereof, but may also be signed by such persons, and in such manner, as
the Board may from time to time direct by appropriate resolution.
Article III
THE FACULTY
The Visitors and Governors by these ordinances hereby delegate to the Faculty of St. John's
College-the President, the Deans, the other Tutors, the Tutors Emeriti, the Vice-Presidents for College
Advancement, the Treasurers, and the Associates-"powers and authorities" for the "instruction,
discipline, and government" of the College.
Article IV
THE FACULTY: THE PRESIDENT
(1) There shall be a President for the Annapolis campus and a President for the Santa Fe campus, each
appointed as provided in Article IV (2). There is delegated to each President by the Visitors and
Governors executive responsibility and authority for the instruction, discipline, and government of the
campus of which he is President, and the President, in turn, may delegate his authority. In the interest
of the orderly conduct of business and of maintaining and promoting the unity of the College, the
Presidents shall regularly consult and communicate with each other and, as appropriate, with other
College officials, on matters of common concern.
(i) Other Committees. The Chairman may appoint such other standing or special committees of the
Board as he may deem desirable or which the Board may request.
(2) The President shall be appointed by the Board of Visitors and Governors on the recommendation of
a Committee composed of five members of the Board of Visitors and Governors, at least one of whom is
an alumnus, the Deans, and one Tutor having tenure from each campus elected by the Faculty on that
campus. This Committee shall be known as the Presidential Search Committee. It shall consult with
10
11
�the continuing President in a regular and timely fashion. Prior to making its final recommendation, it
shall, on both campuses, consult with all other appropriate persons and shall arrange for the final
candidates to meet with the Faculty and the Instruction Committee.
(3) The President shall concurrently be a Tutor, but the provisions of Article VI need not apply .
(4) The President and persons to whom he delegates his authority shall consult with the Deans, other
appropriate persons, and appropriate Faculty committees in matters of policy, initiation of programs,
and setting of priorities affecting the general welfare of the College.
(5) There shall be a Financial Committee on each campus consisting of the President as Chairman, the
Dean and Treasurer of the campus, and other members the President may appoint. It will review
proposed budgets prior to their being presented to the Finance Committee of the Board. It will also meet
prior to Board meetings to review performance in the fiscal year to date and emerging budgetary strengths
and weaknesses.
(6) The President shall appoint, or delegate the power to appoint, other committees as may be necessary
for the carrying out of his duties and for which no provision is made under Article IX.
(7) If in the judgment of the Board of Visitors and Governors, the College is facing a financial exigency
at either or both of its campuses which could call for a reduction in the number of Faculty positions,
both Presidents shall immediately advise the Faculty of the nature and extent of the financial difficulty
and consult with them concerning the best way to address the situation. The Faculty may then make a
formal recommendation to the Presidents on ways to meet the problem, or, if the Faculty fails so to act,
the Deans and the Instruction Committee shall propose a plan to the Presidents. The Presidents shall
jointly then determine a plan which specifies a preferred course of action to be taken. All necessary
steps must be taken in timely fashion as prescribed by the Board. Nothing herein provided shall limit
the power of the Board to act otherwise in the event of need to reduce or eliminate Faculty positions.
Article V
THE FACULTY: THE CHAIRMAN OF THE INSTRUCTION COMMITTEE AND
THE DEANS
•
•
•
(d) The Chairman of the Instruction Committee shall, as he or the Chairman of the Board of Visitors
and Governors may deem appropriate, report to the Board on instructional matters, and shall respond
to such questions as the Board, through its Chairman, may direct to him.
(2) The Deans.
(a) There is delegated to the Deans on their respective campuses responsibility and authority for
the supervision of the program of instruction and for the general welfare of the students and for whatever
government of the students be necessary for the greatest possible attainment of aims of the program.
Each Dean shall be the Chairman of the Instruction Committee on the campus where he serves. In
carrying out his duties, each Dean shall consult regularly with the President and with the Instruction .
Committee and the other appropriate Faculty committees on that campus.
(b) The Deans shall be appointed for terms of five years from among the Tutors by the Visitors and
Governors on the recommendation of the President after consultation with a special committee of seven,
four from the campus for which the Dean is being chosen and three from the other campus, selected
from among themselves by the Tutors having tenure.
(c) A Dean shall be appointed from among the tutors who have themselves been appointed in accord
with Article VI(3). If non-tenured, the appointee shall acquire tenure upon becoming Dean, in which
case the provisions of Article VI(3)(a) regarding reappointment schedules shall not apply.
(d) To assist them in carrying out their duties, the Deans shall recommend one or more Tutors to
be appointed by the President with the title of Assistant Dean.
(e) During the absence of the President from either campus, the Dean on that campus shall if
necessary exercise the President's prerogative of final decision.
(f) During the absence of either Dean from the campus a Tutor with tenure named by him shall act
for the Dean.
(g) The Dean on each campus shall appoint such committees as may be necessary for the carrying
out of his duties and for which no other provision is made.
Article VI
(1) The Chairman of the Instruction Committee.
THE FACULTY: THE TUTORS
(a) There is delegated to the Chairman of the Instruction Committee responsibility and authority for
the organization of the program of instruction in the liberal arts that is followed by the Tutors and the
Students.
(1) The primary responsibilities of the Tutors are to teach and to make themselves as competent as
possible in all parts of the St. John's Program.
(b) The Deans shall serve alternately, for a term of one year, as Chairman of the Instruction
Committee.
(c) Each year the Chairman of the Instruction Committee shall, after consultation with the Instruction
Committee on his campus, and after discussion with the Instruction Committee of the College, submit
a Statement of Educational Policy and Program to the Faculty as a whole for discussion. The President
shall present the Statement, together with an account of the Faculty discussion of it and hi s response
to it, as a report to the Board of Visitors and Governors for its consideration.
12
(2) The Tutors shall have authority to recommend to the Visitors and Governors candidates for degrees
on their respective campuses.
(3) Appointment and Reappointment of Tutors. Tutors shall be appointed by the Visitors and Governors
upon recommendation of the President in accordance with the recommendation of the Dean and the
Instruction Committee on that campus where the Tutors so appointed shall teach.
(a) The schedule of regular appointment of Tutors on each campus shall be either (i)(A) or (i)(B)
below, to be decided by the President in accordance with the recommendation of the Dean and the
Instruction Committee on that campus where the Tutors so appointed shall teach:
13
�(i)(A) New Tutors shall be appointed for one year unless they are appointed at
mid-year, in which case the initial appointment shall be for a year and a half. First
reappointments shall be for one year. Second and third reappointments shall be for two
and three years respectively.
(i)(B) New Tutors shall be appointed for two years unless they are appointed at
mid-year, in which case the initial appointment shall be for a year and a half. First and
second reappointments shall be for two and three years respectively.
(ii) A Tutor who has completed a three-year appointment must either be given a
tenure appointment or not be reappointed as Tutor. A Tutor may, however, be given a
tenure appointment as early as the conclusion of the first year of a three-year
appointment. Procedures leading to a recommendation for an early tenure appointment
shall be initiated by the Dean and Instruction Committee, but not without the consent
of the appointee, and shall not prejudice subsequent consideration for a tenure
appointment. Tenure appointments shall not continue beyond retirement. Tutors Emeriti
shall retain their privileges and responsibilities in voting at Faculty meetings.
(iii) Before making recommendations to the President on tenure appointments the
Dean on each campus shall consult with the Instruction Committee on that campus,
after seeking the advice of the Tutors on that campus.
(iv) A Tutor, to be recommended for a tenure appointment, must have served
full-time at the campus where the recommendation is to be made for the two years
immediately preceding the year in which that recommendation is made, the provisions
of (ii) above notwithstanding. In ordinary cases, these two years of service will be the
second year of a two-year appointment and the first year of a three-year appointment.
These requirements may be waived by the President on the recommendation of the Dean
and Instruction Committee on that campus.
(b) A non-tenure appointment as Tutor establishes the possibility, but not the presumption, of its
renewal and the granting of a tenure appointment. Procedures for considering non-tenure appointments
differ from those for considering tenure appointments. Satisfaction of appointment criteria admits of
degree. With each successive reappointment, the criteria are applied more rigorously. For a tenure
appointment the application is especially strict.
(4) Notification.
(a) A Tutor under consideration for a non-tenure appointment to begin in a certain calendar year shall
be notified by the President no later than December 15th of the preceding calendar year whether his
reappointment will be recommended to the Board of Visitors and Governors. If heis reappointed the President
shall so notify him by March 1st of the calendar year in which the new appointment is to begin.
(b) A Tutor under consideration for a tenure appointment to begin in a certain calendar year shall
be notified by the President no later than May 31st of the preceding calendar year whether his
appointment will be recommended to the Board of Visitors and Governors. If he is appointed the
President shall so notify him by July 31st of that same preceding year.
(5) A Tutor may apply to the Instruction Committee of the College not later than January 15th for a
transfer of campus for the next academic year. Transfers shall require approval of both Deans after
consultation with their Instruction Committees.
(6) (a) A Tutor may have his appointment terminated by the Board of Visitors and Governors for one of
the following reasons only: (i) failure or inability to perform his teaching duties in a satisfactory manner,
or (ii) moral turpitude. The President shall make such a recommendation to the Board of Visitors and
Governors only with the concurrence of the Dean and the Instruction Committee of the campus
concerned. Before the President makes such a recommendation he shall advise the Tutor affected of
his intention to do so, and the Tutor shall have the right to be heard by the Instruction Committee or, if
he prefers, by another committee to be designated by the President for this purpose.
(b) Either Dean, with the approval of the Instruction Committee on the campus concerned, may
recommend to the President that in the interest of instruction a Tutor be temporarily relieved of his
duties in whole or in part at any time. When such action is taken, the Tutor's salary shall be continued
for the remainder of the current academic year.
(7) The sabbatical leave program is designed to provide Tutors with an opportunity for study, rest, and
renewal of spirit, in anticipation of future teaching. It is the objective of the program to grant all
applications for sabbatical leave meeting the conditions for eligibility set out in (a) of this section. It is
understood that Tutors on such leave will not undertake full-time remunerative employment elsewhere
and will return to the College.
(a) Eligibility for sabbatical leave shall be upon the following conditions:
(c) For the purpose of temporary transfer between campuses, special appointments of one or two
years may be granted to a Tutor in addition to his regular appointments. The Tutor may ask that such
an appointment be counted as a regular appointment for the purpose of (a) above. In the case of a
permanent transfer a Tutor may ask that his years of service at the other campus be counted toward
tenure according to the provisions of (a) above. Nevertheless, the provisions of (3) (a)(iv) prevail.
(i) A Tutor who has received a tenure appointment may apply for a full year of
sabbatical leave at full salary, provided he shall have completed the equivalent of seven
full years of service to the College since his original appointment, or the equivalent of
six full years of service since any previous sabbatical leave, and the sabbatical leave
would not occur in the last two years of his tenure appointment.
(cl) Special one-year appointments and reappointments may be given to Tutors who intend to teach
(ii) Such a Tutor may apply for an earlier sabbatical leave of a full year at partial
salary, or a partial year at full salary. The fractional salary or fractional year shall be
determined by the number of years of teaching completed in relation to the prescribed
total for eitrer an initial or a subsequent sabbatical leave, as the case may be. In no
case shall a Tutor be paid more than his regular salary. Sabbatical leave for a fraction
of a year may not occur during the last two years of a Tutor's tenure appointment.
on a part-time basis only. Such a Tutor may subsequently apply for and receive a regular appointment.
Special part-time appointments may then be counted on a fractional basis toward eligibility for tenure,
but see (3)(a)(iv). In establishing eligibility for sabbatical leave, special part-time appointments shall
be computed proportionately.
(e) Visiting Tutors may be appointed for a term or a year.
14
15
�(b) If, in the judgment of the President, financial or academic needs at a campus should require
that fewer sabbatical leaves be granted there in a given year than there are qualified applicants, and if
the number that can be granted there should be smaller than one-sixth of the number of Tutors at that
campus having tenure and not on full-time leave under the provisions of section (8) below, the President
shall so notify the Board of Visitors and Governors and seek its approval for delaying a sabbatical leave
for one or more of the applicants.
Article VII
THE FACULTY: THE VICE-PRESIDENTS FOR COLLEGE ADVANCEMENT AND
THE TREASURERS
(1) The Vice-Presidents for College Advancement shall be responsible to the President for the
supervision and development of all programs in fund-raising, public relations, and alumni relations on
their respective campuses.
(c) If in a year there are more qualified applicants for sabbatical leave at any one campus than there
are leaves to be granted at that campus, then those members shall have precedence who meet the
following conditions in the order set forth:
(2) The Vice-President for College Advancement on each campus shall be appointed by the Board of
Visitors and Governors on the recommendation of the President made after consultation with the Dean
on that campus and a committee constituted by resolution of the Faculty on that campus.
(i) Those who have served for the greater number of years since their first
appointment as Tutor or since their last sabbatical leave, whichever is more recent;
(3) The Treasurers shall have charge, on their respective campuses, under the supervision of the
President, of all funds and property, and shall have authority to carry out fiscal and property transactions,
and to receive and disburse funds, subject to the provisions of this Polity and other directions and
arrangements pursuant thereto.
(ii) Those whose service has been continuous throughout thos_e years;
(iii) Those whose last sabbatical leave was postponed because of the financial or
academic needs of the College;
(4) The Treasurer on each campus shall be appointed by the Board of Visitors and Governors on the
recommendation of the President made after consultation with the Dean on that campus and a committee
constituted by resolution of the Faculty on that campus.
(iv) Those who have seniority of appointment.
When there is a conflict of precedence, the Dean and the Instruction Committee on the campus
concerned shall be consulted.
(5) The Vice-Presidents for College Advancement and Treasurers may be appointed Tutors under the
provisions of Article Vl(3)(d).
(d) A Tutor eligible for sabbatical leave shall make application to the President before November
1st for leave to begin the following July 1st, and shall be informed of the action upon his application not
later than January 1st.
Article VIII
THE FACULTY: THE ASSOCIATES
(8) The President, with the concurrence of the Dean after consultation with the Instruction Committee
on the campus concerned, may grant leaves of absence to Tutors for a period of one year or less. At that
time it shall be determined whether the leave shall be counted as service to the College with respect to
eligibility for sabbatical leave and, if so, how. The decision with respect to a request for leave of absence
shall be made in the light of the requirements both of the applicant Tutor and of the whole College.
(1) Associate members of the Faculty on each campus shall be appointed by the Board of Visitors and
Governors on the recommendation of the President in consultation with the Dean of that campus. The
President shall have ultimate executive authority over the Associates.
(2) Associates may be appointed Tutors under the provisions of Article VI (3)(d).
(a) Leave of absence may be renewed upon request but not more than twice in succession except
in extraordinary circumstances.
(3) The Associates on either campus may establish for themselves an Associates' Council for the
purpose of considering College matters of concern to them and communicating with other members
of the College.
(b) A request for a leave of absence shall be submitted to the President as early as possible in the
academic year before the year in which the leave is to be taken, but not later than January 15th of that
year. Requests for leaves of absence may be withdrawn at any time prior to April 1st of the year in which
the request is submitted. Requests for leaves of absence for the second semester must be submitted no
later than October 15th.
(4) The Associates' Council may establish such committees as it deems appropriate.
(5) There shall be the following Associates, as deemed necessary by the President on each campus,
with the powers and responsibilities provided.
(c) Tutors on sabbatical leave or leave of absence remain members of the Faculty with the right of
full participation in Faculty meetings and all other College exercises.
(a) The Registrars. The Registrars shall be responsible to the Deans on their respective campuses.
They shall prepare and supervise the registration of students and shall be responsible for the academic
records and schedules of students.
(b) The Librarians. The Librarians shall be responsible to the Deans on their respective campuses
for the operation of the library. Appointments of professional members of the Library Staff shall be made
upon the recommendation of the Librarian to the Dean on each campus •
16
•
17
�(c) The Directors of Student Activities and the Directors of Athletics. The Directors of Student
Activities and the Directors of Athletics shall be responsible to the Deans on their respective campuses
for devising and directing programs of recreational activities.
(d) The Directors of Admissions. The Directors of Admissions shall be responsible to the Deans on
their respective campuses for the annual enrollment of qualified Freshmen.
(e) The Directors of Alumni Activities. The Directors of Alumni Activities shall be responsible to
the Vice-Presidents for College Advancement. Their primary duty is to enable the College and the
Alumni Association to be of service to alumni.
(f) The Directors of Financial Aid. The Directors of Financial Aid shall be responsible to the Deans
on their respective campuses for the administration of financial aid programs.
(g) The Directors of Placement. The Directors of Placement shall be responsible to the Deans on
their respective campuses for helping and counseling students with respect to graduate and professional
schools and careers.
(h) Persons designated Associates under the provisions of Article I(3)(f) or of Article VII(3)(k) of
this Polity as amended through April 20, 1985, whose offices are not specifically named in this Article,
shall continue to be Associates until the expiration of their appointments to those offices.
Article IX
THE FACULTY: FACULTY COMMITTEES
(1) The Instruction Committee
(a) The Instruction Committee shares with its Chairmen responsibility for the program of instruction
of the College. It shall consist of twelve Tutors in addition to the Deans. The President shall sit with the
Committee ex officio. Six of the Tutors shall be elected from each campus of the College. The Instruction
Committee shall meet annually. On each campus the members of the Instruction Committee and the
Dean as Chairman constitute the Instruction Committee of the College on that campus. The President
sits ex officio with the Instruction Committee on each campus.
(b) Each of the members of the Instruction Committee shall serve for a term of three years, and the
terms shall be arranged in such a way that each year the terms of two members at each campus shall
expire. Terms begin and end the day following commencement exercises. Annually, and separately at
each campus, the President with the Dean on his campus, after consulting with the Instruction
Committee and seeking the advice of the other Tutors on that campus, shall at the last regular Faculty
meeting on that campus nominate four Tutors of whom two shall be elected by the Tutors to membership
on the Instruction Committee. The Faculty shall be informed of the names of the nominees prior to the
meeting at which the election occurs. At the expiration of the three-year term a member of the Instruction
Committee shall for one year be ineligible for reelection.
(d) If the Instruction Committee resigns with the Deans on a matter of confidence and the
resignations are accepted, the President, in consultation with the new Deans and after seeking the advice
of the other Tutors, shall nominate nine Tutors for the six vacancies on each campus in such a manner
that two out of each three nominees shall be elected by t_he Tutors for each of the three classes to fill
the unexpired terms.
(2) The Tutors' Compensation Committee
(a) There shall be a Tutors' Compensation Committee of six Tutors, three to be elected by the Tutors
on each campus, whose chairmanship shall annually alternate between campuses. The Committee shall
advise the President concerning Tutors' compensation and related matters; it shall make annual reviews
of the College's statement of Tutors' salaries and other compensation of Tutors and report to the Tutors
and the President recommendations consequent upon the review.
(b) Members of the Committee shall be elected annually on each campus for terms of three years
in such a manner that the term of one member on each campus terminates each year. The Tutors'
Compensation Committee on each campus shall provide the Tutors on that campus with two nominations
for each vacancy on the Committee on that campus. Additional nominations may be made at the Faculty
meeting when election shall be made.
(3) The Library Committees. The President, in consultation with the Librarian and the Dean, shall
appoint three Tutors on each campus to serve as a Library Committee. The President, the Dean, and
the Librarian shall themselves be ex officio members of the Committee, and the Librarian shall serve
as Chairman. It shall be the duty of the Library Committees to assist the Librarians in making the
Libraries serve the ends of the College and its program; it shall be their duty to advise the Librarians
in regard to Library policy and acquisitions. The Managers of the Bookstores may be invited to sit with
the Committees.
(4) The Campus Planning Committees. The Faculty on each campus shall elect five of its members as
a Campus Planning Committee. Two members shall be elected to the Committee annually at the first
regular meeting of the academic session except in every third year, when one member shall be chosen.
The President, the Dean, one of the Assistant Deans, and the Treasurer on each campus shall sit ex
officio with the Committee on that campus. It shall be the duty of the respective committees to advise
the President on the construction of new buildings, the renovation of old buildings, landscaping of
grounds, and all matters relating to the maintenance and development of the campus.
(5) The Prize Committees. Every three years the President shall appoint Tutors on each campus to
supervise the awarding of prizes on the respective campuses. The Committees shall have full authority
to decide what prizes shall be awarded and to name the recipients of the prizes.
(6) The Fellowship Committees. On each campus there shall be a Fellowship Committee appointed by
the President. It shall be the duty of this Committee to inform students of fellowships for which they
may be eligible, to assist them in applying for fellowships, and to act on behalf of the College in any
matter relating to application for fellowships.
(c) If for any reason a member of the Instruction Committee is unable to serve for a part of his term,
another Tutor shall be chosen to take his place for that part of the term. For this purpose the President
and the Dean, in consultation with the Instruction Committee on the campus where the vacancy occurs,
shall nominate two Tutors of whom the Tutors shall elect one in a regular Faculty meeting.
(7) Other Committees. The Faculty on each campus shall have authority to elect, or to request the
President to appoint, additional committees that may from time to time become necessary.
18
19
�Article X
THE FACULTY: FACULTY PROCEDURE
(b) Upon eithe r a petition of not less than one-tenth
of the Tutors on eithe r campus or a reque st from
the Presi dent, the Dean and Instruction Committee
on that camp us shall consider any recommendation
conc ernin g instruction and shall report to the Faculty
within one year their proposal conc ernin g it. They
shall decid e whether their proposal is a major propo
sal, and the procedure of Article X(l) shall apply.
(1) Proc edure for Instructional Proposals.
(a)(i) Any proposal conc ernin g matters of instruction
that may affect the College as
a whole shall originate with the Dean and the Instru
ction Committee on eithe r campus.
A dec1s10n as to whether a proposal is college-wide
or camp us-sp ecific shall be made
by the Deans and Instr uctio n Committee of the Colle
ge. This decision shall be made
after notifying the faculty on both camp uses and inviti
ng their comment.
Written statements of college-wide instructional prop
osals shall be distri buted to
the Faculty at least two weeks before the Faculty
meeting at which they are to be
prese nted; the proposal shall be presented to the whol
e Facu lty by the Chairman of the
Instruction Committee, eithe r in his own person
or through the other Dean as his
representative. If, after full discussion of any propo
sal so presented there be no
objection on the part of any Tutor, the measure stand
s appro ved and becomes effective
as of the date specific therefor. If, after full discussion
, a Tuto r objects to the proposal
and holds to o jection
the proposal shall be submitted to vote of the Tutors
at speci al
Facu lty meetings calle d by the Presi dent within a
fortnight. Any objections that have
been made and held to shall be presented immediate
ly in writing to the whole faculty.
In submitting the proposal to vote the Chairman of
the Instr uctio n Committee and the
Dean on the other campus shall state whether it be a
matter of confidence. The vote may
then be taken and tallied by the President in such
a fashion that the Tutors shall have
recor ded their decision actin g as a whole. If the propo
sal be one that the Chairman of
the Instruction Committee and the other Dean have
decla red a matter of confidence and
if it be defeated by majority vote, the Deans and
the Instr uctio n Committee shall
immediately resign. If it be passe d by majority vote,
it shall become effective as of the
date specified therefor. For the confidence proce
dure a quor um shall consist of
three-fourths of all resid ent Tutors on each campus.
_(ii) Any instructional proposal that has been deem
ed camp us-sp ecific shall be
subject to the procedure set forth above, except that,
if an objection is made and held
to on eithe r campu_s, voting shall proceed only on
the camp us were the proposal is
inten ded to be put mto effect. Any objections that
have been made and held to on the
other campus shall be prese nted immedately in writin
g to the voting faculty.
(iii) The Presi dent may refuse to accept the resig
nation of the Deans or the
Instruction Committee, any or all of them, whenever
in his judg ment such resio-nation
woul d be detrimental to the prop er functioning of the
College; provided, however, that
if any six or more Tutors shall petition the Visitors and
Governors, the latter shall review
the Presi dent' s decision within four weeks, durin
g which time the Deans and the
Instr uctio n Committee shall conti nue in office.
(iv) In the event that the proposal be defeated and the
resio-nations be accep ted the
Presi dent shall proceed to the choice of new Dean
s
in
acco
rdanc e with the provisions
of Article V (2)(b).
(2) Faculty Meetings.
•
•
•
•
(a) Regular monthly meetings of the Faculty shall be
calle d upon due notice by the President; except
that in the period comp rising the months of December
and Janu ary only one regular meeting need be
calle d. The Presi dent or, in his absence, the Dean
, shall presi de. In the absen ce of the Presi dent and
the Dean, the Faculty shall elect one of its members
to presi de.
(b) Special meetings of the Faculty may be called
upon due notice by the Presi dent, eithe r at his
own discretion or at the requ est of five Faculty mem
bers.
(c) Due notice shall be construed to mean no less
than three days notice, exce pt in cases of
emergency.
(d) A quorum shall cons ist of a majority of the Facu
lty in residence except as otherwise provided.
(e) Only Tutors may vote on instructional matters. All
Faculty members may vote on all other matters
not specifically restri cted in the Polity.
(3) The Secretary of the Faculty. At the last regular
meeting of an academic year the Faculty on each
camp us shall elect one of its members, then in at least
his third year at the College, as Secretary. The
Secretary shall assis t in the preparation and circulation
of the agen da for Faculty meetings, shall keep
the minutes of such meetings, and shall collect and
circu late reports of Faculty committees.
Article XI
THE SCHOLARS-IN-RESIDENCE AND THE ARTISTS
-IN-RESIDENCE
The Scho lars-i n-Re siden ce and the Artists-in-Resid
ence shall be appointed from time to time by
the Board of Visitors and Governors on the recommend
ation of the President after consultation with the
Dean and the Instruction Committee on the campus
where the Scholars and Artists shall resid e.
THE STUDENTS
Article XII
(1) The primary respo nsibi lities of the students
are to study and to make themselves as comp etent
as
possible in all parts of the St. John 's Program. Thei
r advic e and service shall be sought by the Faculty
in such matters and in such ways as may best serve
the gene ral welfare of the College.
(2) The students of St. John 's College shall const
itute the Student Polity of St. John 's College in
Annapolis and in Santa Fe.
(3) The Student Polity in Annapolis or Santa Fe
may estab lish for itself a government which is
representative of all polity members. The Dean on each
camp us may delegate to the Stud ent government
a share of the respo nsibi lity for the general welfa
re of the stude nts and whatever government of the
stude nts may be nece ssary for the greatest possible
attain ment of the aims of the program. The duties
of the Student Government may include:
20
21
�(a) the management of funds available to the Student Polity;
activities, and their regulation, if
(b) the sanctioning of all stude nt clubs, organizations, and
necessary;
the community outside the College;
(c) the representation of the studen ts of St. John's College to
communication between the studen ts
(d) the establ ishme nt and maint enanc e of formal chann els of
and the Faculty; and
(e) any other duties agreed upon by the students and the Dean.
Article XIII
THE GRADUATE INSTITUTE
(1) The Directors.
campu s to whom shall be delega ted
(a) There shall be a Director of the Graduate Institute on each
ction Committee, for the organization and
responsibility and authority, under the Chairman of the Instru
ction in the libera l arts and for matters
supervision on his campu s of the gradu ate program of instru
rs that affect the Graduate Institu te as
conce rning the general welfare of the students. Concerning matte
tor, be responsible to the Chairman of
a whole the Director shall, in consultation with his fellow Direc
own campu s he shall be responsible to
the Instruction Committee. Concerning matters limited to his
the Dean on his own campu s.
from among the Tutors by the Board
(b) The Directors shall be appoi nted for terms of three years
ent, after consultation with the Deans
of Visitors and Governors on the recommendation of the Presid
each campus, selected from among
and a specia l committee consis ting of four members, two from
be Tutors of the Graduate Institute.
themselves by the Tutors having tenure. The Directors shall
and the Committee for the Gradu ate
(c) Every three years, after consu ltation with his fellow direct or
t a Statem ent of Educational Policy and
Institu te on his own campu s, one of the Directors shall submi
for discussion at its joint meeting. After
Program for the Graduate Institu te to the Instruction Committee
it to the Faculty as a whole for discus sion.
makin g any revisions he deems appro priate , he shall submi t
(2) The Faculty of the Gradu ate Institu te.
Graduate Institute on that campu s,
(a) Each Director, after consultation with the Committee for the
Committee on the same campu s, shall
and in accord ance with the recommendation of the Instru ction
for summ er appointment to teach in the
recommend to the Presid ent Tutor s of the Graduate Institu te
Gradu ate Institute for one sessio n.
te on each campus shall have the
(b) During the summ er term the Tutors of the Graduate Institu
candi dates for degrees.
authority to recommend to the Board of Visitors and Governors
(4) Committees for the Gradu ate Institu te.
shares with the Director on the same
(a) On each campu s the Committee for the Gradu ate Institu te
of the Graduate Institute and for the
camp us responsibility for carryi ng out the program of instru ction
gener al welfare of the studen ts.
ience in the Institute, in additi on
(b) Each Committee shall consis t of three Tutors who have exper
to the Director, who shall serve as Chairman.
appointed by the Director with the concur rence of the Dean
h(c) Members of each Committee shall be
the Graduate Institute on that campus.
on t e same campu s after consultation with the Committee for
t ors, af ter
one of th e D'Direct
ction or policy shall origina
g te with
(5) Propo·sals conce
tt s of instru
· o crning matter
shall b
and
te
for the Graduate Institu
consu_ talion with t e other Director and with the Committee
be
• campu s for handl ing in accordance with Article' X(l)(a )(i).
• • atmg
submitted to th e Dean on th e ongm
Article XIV
THE ALUMNI
John's College is a community not limited
(l) Alumni shall be life-long memb ersof the College, since St.
b y geographical locat10n or fixed periods of time.
i participate in the life of the C 11
(2) The Alumni Association is the formal means by which alumn
rs and Governors, alumni share onlege.
Throu ghthe election of alumni members of the Board of Visito
given the opportunity to serve the College.
direction of that life. In these and other ways, alumni shall be
to enable alumni to assist in providing
(3) The College shall Cooperate with the Alum niAssociation
ts, placing graduates in appropriate
servic es such as recruiting and mterv1ewmg prospective studen
admission to graduate and professional
employment, and adv1smg students concerning career s and
schools.
, shall provide semin ars and other
(4) The College, in cooperation with the Alumni Association
and in othe; places.
appro pnate educa tional activities in Annapolis, in Santa Fe,
Article XV
THE STAFF
maintenance of the College, performing
(1) _Members of the_ Staff assist with the administration and
Staff rules and regulations.
duties necessary to its well-bemg. They are subjec t to appro priate
for the purpose
f either campus may establ ish for themselves a Staff Council
~~) Members of the Stafon
e as a whole.
Colleg
the
as a benefit to
better communication and understandmg of College policies
l channels of communication s a wh the
The Staff Council shall seek to establish and maintain forma
Officers. The Treas urer on each camp us
whole Staff and between the Staff and the appropriate College
il and discuss with them any chang es
shall review Staff employment regulations with the Staff Counc
proposed.
appropriate.
(3) The Staff Council may establ ish such committees as it deems
Article XVI
AMENDMENTS AND REVIEW
of the Polity Review Committee, or by a
(l) Amendments to this Polity may be proposed by a majority
ers of the Board, or by the Faculty as
petition sumbi tted y not fewer than ten percent of the memb
sed amendment must be provided to the
provided for m sect10n (2) below. Written notice of a propo
date of the Board meeting at which the
Board and to the Faculty not less than 30 days prior to the
right to inform the Board_ i~ writing of its
amend ment is to be consid ered. The Faculty shall have the
23
22
�recommendation with respect to the proposed amendment by the time of that meeting. This Polity may
be amended by a two-thirds vote of those members voting at any regular or special meeting of the Board,
provided that the votes of no fewer than one-third of the members of the entire Board eligible to vote
are in favor of such amendment.
(2) Amendments may be proposed at any regular meeting of either the Faculty in Annapolis or the
Faculty in Santa Fe upon petition of not less than ten percent of the members on either campus. No
such proposal shall be acted upon earlier than the next regular meeting of the Faculty, whether in
Annapolis or in Santa Fe. A two-thirds vote of the entire Faculty in residence, including at least a simple
majority vote of the Faculty in residence on each of the campuses, shall be required for approval and
the amendment shall not become effective unless approved by the Board in the manner set forth in
Section (1) above.
(3) Every five years this Polity shall be reviewed by a committee of six, three to be elected by the Faculty
on each campus. The report of the Committee shall be submitted to one regular Faculty meeting and
voted upon at the next regular Faculty meeting. A two-thirds vote of the entire Faculty in residence,
including at least a simple majority vote of the Faculty in residence on each of the campuses, shall be
required for approval.
Whatever action is thus recommended by the Faculty shall be submitted to the Board for final
decision in the manner set forth in Section (1) above.
Article XVII
COMPLIANCE WITH LAW
No provision of this Polity shall be construed to contravene any applicable fed eral or state law. If
any provision is determined to contravene any such law, that provision shall be deemed not a part of
this Polity, and this Polity's remaining provisions shall remain in full force and effect.
24
��
Dublin Core
The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/.
Title
A name given to the resource
Charter and Polity of the College
Description
An account of the resource
Revised and amended editions of the St. John's College Charter and Polity.<br /><br />The College's first Charter and Polity was published as the <a href="https://digitalarchives.sjc.edu/items/show/3768">September 1950</a> issue of the <em><a href="https://digitalarchives.sjc.edu/collections/show/37">Bulletin of St. John's College in Annapolis</a></em>. Revised and amended versions were published as individual issues of the <em>Bulletin</em> in <a href="https://digitalarchives.sjc.edu/items/show/3746">1951</a>, <a href="https://digitalarchives.sjc.edu/items/show/7844">1960</a>, <a href="https://digitalarchives.sjc.edu/items/show/7845">1963</a>, and <a href="https://digitalarchives.sjc.edu/items/show/7846">1965</a>. <br /><br />The Charter and Polity was published as a separate document in <a href="https://digitalarchives.sjc.edu/items/show/7850">1955</a> and again from <a href="https://digitalarchives.sjc.edu/items/show/7851">1970</a> forward. The most recent version of the Charter and Polity is also available on the College's <a href="https://www.sjc.edu/about/leadership/board-visitors-governors/charter-polity">website</a>. <br /><br />Click on <strong><a title="Items in the Charter and Polity of the College Collection" href="https://digitalarchives.sjc.edu/items/browse?collection=62&sort_field=Dublin+Core%2CDate">Items in the Charter and Polity of the College Collection</a></strong> to view and sort all items in the collection.
Creator
An entity primarily responsible for making the resource
St. John's College
Publisher
An entity responsible for making the resource available
St. John's College
Contributor
An entity responsible for making contributions to the resource
St. John's College Greenfield Library
Text
A resource consisting primarily of words for reading. Examples include books, letters, dissertations, poems, newspapers, articles, archives of mailing lists. Note that facsimiles or images of texts are still of the genre Text.
Original Format
The type of object, such as painting, sculpture, paper, photo, and additional data
PDF
Page numeration
Number of pages in the original item.
24 pages
Dublin Core
The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/.
Title
A name given to the resource
Charter and Polity of the College, 1997
Description
An account of the resource
Charter and Polity of the College, amended and restated as of January 1997.
Creator
An entity primarily responsible for making the resource
St. John's College
Publisher
An entity responsible for making the resource available
St. John's College
Coverage
The spatial or temporal topic of the resource, the spatial applicability of the resource, or the jurisdiction under which the resource is relevant
Annapolis, MD
Santa Fe, NM
Date
A point or period of time associated with an event in the lifecycle of the resource
1997-01
Type
The nature or genre of the resource
text
Format
The file format, physical medium, or dimensions of the resource
PDF
Subject
The topic of the resource
St. John's College (Annapolis, Md.)
Legal instruments
Language
A language of the resource
English
Identifier
An unambiguous reference to the resource within a given context
Charter_and_Polity_1997
Charter and Polity
-
https://s3.us-east-1.amazonaws.com/sjcdigitalarchives/original/38c2cfa8c27bdf0d3849045c0d8c8ebf.pdf
71c7f52ac28e0422ac4c1f19c244a5eb
PDF Text
Text
ST.
JOHN~S
COLLEGE
ANNAPOLIS. MARYLAND
�Views of
ST. JOHN'S COLLEGE
ANNAPOLIS,
MARYLAND
•
�OLD McDOWELL HALL
�THE SPLENDID NEW GYMNASIUM
AN UNSURPASSED HALL OF PHYSICAL CULTURE
THE PHILOKOLIAN LITERARY SOCIETY
�THE PHILOMATHEAN LITERARY SOCIETY
THE GLEE CLUB
�>-i
::i::
tx,
E
()
t:
z
0
t:J
z>
~
trj
THE CADET MAJOR
THIS CADE't COMMANDS 1'HI! CORPS OF CADETS, UNDER THE COMMANDANT.
�STAFF AND NON-COMMISSIONED STAFF OFFICERS OF THE CORPS
LINE OFFICERS OF THE CORPS
�FOOT BALL TEAM
DURING TwtNTY-FIVJ:: YtARS THEst TEAMS HAvt USUALLY
BttN SuPRtMt IN MARYLAND
BASE BALL TEAM
THIS TtAM: HAD TH£ DISTINCTION OF DEFEATING THE NAVY
�FOOT BALL SQUAD
FOOT BALL HISTORY
TH£S£ CAD£TS WILL MAK£ FUTURE
TRACK TEAM
r'OR
OLD
ST. JOHN'S
A
Fm£ BRANCH OF SPORT, AND V£RY SuccitsSFUL H£R£
�••
FULL DRESS PARADE, BATTALION IN LINE
ST. JOHN'S IS CLASSED BY THE WAR DEPARTMENT AS AMONG THE VERY BEST MILITARY SCHOOLS IN THE UNITED STATES
BAYONET EXERCISE-IN GREY SHIRTS
•A••
•
�THE CORPS IN FULL DRESS, COLUMN OF COMPANIES
ABOUT To PASS IN
Ri;;vn:w WITH
BAND LtADIN<;
THE CORPS, AS SKIRMISHERS
A LoNG, THIN GREY LINE OF RIFLES
�THE GREAT FIREPLACE IN THE CADETS' DINING ROOM
�..
Tms
INTERIOR NEW GYMNASIUM
No EQUAL IN MARYLAND AND FEw
BUILDING HAS
ANYWHERE
.... . .
���
Dublin Core
The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/.
Title
A name given to the resource
Promotional Publications
Description
An account of the resource
Brochures and other documents published to promote the college and the Annapolis campus to the public. The collection includes campus walking tour brochures, and fundraising pamphlets.
Creator
An entity primarily responsible for making the resource
St. John's College (Annapolis, Md.)
Publisher
An entity responsible for making the resource available
St. John's College (Annapolis, Md.)
Coverage
The spatial or temporal topic of the resource, the spatial applicability of the resource, or the jurisdiction under which the resource is relevant
Annapolis, Md.
Identifier
An unambiguous reference to the resource within a given context
PromotionalPubs
Contributor
An entity responsible for making contributions to the resource
St. John's College Greenfield Library
Text
A resource consisting primarily of words for reading. Examples include books, letters, dissertations, poems, newspapers, articles, archives of mailing lists. Note that facsimiles or images of texts are still of the genre Text.
Original Format
The type of object, such as painting, sculpture, paper, photo, and additional data
paper
Page numeration
Number of pages in the original item.
24 pages
Dublin Core
The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/.
Title
A name given to the resource
Views of St. John's College, Annapolis, Maryland
Description
An account of the resource
Views of St. John's College, a brochure published circa 1909. The brochure includes a view of a swimming pool in Iglehart gymnasium. A slightly later (circa 1910) version of the brochure shows Iglehart in a more finished state.
Creator
An entity primarily responsible for making the resource
St. John's College (Annapolis, Md.)
Publisher
An entity responsible for making the resource available
St. John's College
Coverage
The spatial or temporal topic of the resource, the spatial applicability of the resource, or the jurisdiction under which the resource is relevant
Annapolis, MD
Date
A point or period of time associated with an event in the lifecycle of the resource
circa 1910
Rights
Information about rights held in and over the resource
St. John's College owns the rights to this publication.
Type
The nature or genre of the resource
text
Format
The file format, physical medium, or dimensions of the resource
pdf
Subject
The topic of the resource
St. John's College (Annapolis, Md.)--Students
St. John's College (Annapolis, Md.)--Buildings
Language
A language of the resource
English
Identifier
An unambiguous reference to the resource within a given context
Views of St Johns College_circa1909
Relation
A related resource
<a href="https://digitalarchives.sjc.edu/items/show/6517">Views of St. John's College, circa 1910</a>
-
https://s3.us-east-1.amazonaws.com/sjcdigitalarchives/original/6b0d931e5b9189b0bbf3d31c18c9025c.pdf
27aeba2a1f4c0462511e07d40d2d544e
PDF Text
Text
St. John's College
ST. JOHN'S COLLEGE
CHARTER AND POLITY
OF
THE COLLEGE
ANNAPOLIS, MARYLAND
SANTA FE, NEW MEXJCO
Amended and Restated as of April 1993
Founded. as King William's School, 1696
Chartered as St. John's College, 1784
Library
�Since this Polity can be amended between printings, the current official Polity is
kept in the offices of the Presidents of St John's College.
�1
HISTORY
accordance
St. John's College was founded in 1696 as King William's School in
of
Colony
the
of
ly
Assemb
l
Genera
with a Petitionary Act for free-schools of the
State
new
the
of
ly
Assemb
l
Genera
the
Maryland. Following the Revolutionary War,
of
part
a
as
and
to
t
pursuan
College
of Maryland granted a Charter to St. John's
ently amended
Chapte r 37 of the Laws of Maryland of 1784. This Charter was subsequ
1832.
of
41
No.
tion
by the General Assembly through Resolu
Charter to
The Visitors and Governors of St. John's College in 1950 revised the
ents
amendm
other
certain
make
to
and
matter
elimina te extraneous and obsole te
the
of
opinion
the
was
It
ons.
conditi
and
consist ent with present requirements
the College was subject to
Attorney General of Maryland that the original Charter of
amended by the
the general Corporation Laws of Maryland and might accordingly be
by the
action
Visitor s and Governors, pursuant to these laws, without legislative
1965, in
in
1963,
General Assembly. Subsequent amendments were made in 1961, in
1970, and in 1975.
•
•
•
in Santa
When the decision was reached to establish a second St. John's College or
s
branche
ze
Fe, New Mexico , amendments were made to the Charter to authori
ations
extensions of the College. The Charter was then filed with the Corpor
was thus
College
The
Commission of the State of New Mexico as a foreign corporation.
nd
Maryla
its
of
ons
empowered to grant degrees in New Mexico under the provisi
Charte r.
by the
A Polity for the College was first suggested at a faculty meeting in 1943
then
was
which
Dean. A faculty committee was elected and drafted a Polity
ttee to revise
promulgated by the President. In April 1949 the Faculty elected a commi 9, 1950, and
April
on
Faculty
the
the Polity. The resultin g document was approved by
Subsequent
was adopted by the Board of Visitors and Governors on July 8, 1950.
desired
and
ttees,
commi
quinqu ennial reviews were made by elected faculty
and
s
Visitor
of
Board
amendments were recommended by the Faculty to the
held on
Board
the
of
s
meeting
Governors. The Polity was thus amended at regular
16, 1982;
January
1975;
19,
April
1970;
May 14, 1955; May 21, 1960; May 15, 1965; June 6,
at
Board
the
by
adopted
were
ents
April 19, 1986; and October 19, 1991. Other amendm
ber
Septem
and
23
ry
Februa
1961;
9,
ber
regular meetings on February 22 and Decem
24, 1976;
28, 1963; October 3, 1970; February 18, 1972; October 25, 1975; January
11, 1987; October
April
1986;
25,
r
Octobe
1985;
20,
November 6, 1982; July 21, 1984; April
19, 1991; July 18, 1992, and April 17, 1993.
�3
2
establishing the said intended college, this General Assembly give and grant, and
upon that condition do hereby give and grant to the Visitors and Governors of the
said College by the name of "The Visitors and Governors of Saint John's College in the
State of Maryland," and their successors all that four acres within the City of
Annapolis purchased for the use by the public and conveyed on the 2nd day of
October, 1744, by Stephen Bordley, Esq., to Thos. Bladen, Esq., then Governor, to have
and to hold the said four acres of land with the appurtenances to the said Visitors and
Governors and their successors for the only use, benefit and behoof of the said
college and seminary of universal learning forever.
CHARTER OF ST. JOHN'S COLLEGE
WHEREAS, institutions for the liberal education of youth in the principles of
virtue, knowledge and useful literature are of the highest benefit to society, in order
to train up and perpetuate a succession of able and honest men for discharging the
various offices and duties of life, both civil and religious, with usefulness and
reputation, and such institutions of learning have accordingly been promoted and
encouraged by the wisest and best regulated States; And whereas, it appears to this
General Assembly that many public spirited individuals, from an earnest desire to
promote the founding a college or seminary of learning on the Western Shore of this
State have subscribed and procured subscriptions to a considerable amount, and
there is reason to believe that very large additions will be obtained to the same
throughout the different counties of the said Shore, if they were made capable in law
to receive and apply the same towards founding and carrying on a college or general
seminary of learning with such salutary plan and with such legislative assistance
and direction as the General Assembly might think fit, and this General Assembly,
highly approving those generous exertions of individuals, are desirous to embrace
the present favorable occasion of peace and prosperity for making lasting provision
for the encouragement and advancement of all useful knowledge and literature
through every part of this State;
VIII. That the said Visitors and Governors and their successors by the same
name shall be able and capable in law to purchase, have and enjoy to them and their
successors in fee, or for any other less estate or estates, any lands, tenements, rents,
annuities, pensions or other hereditaments by the gift, grant, bargain, sale,
alienation, enfeoffment, release, confirmation, or devise of any person or persons,
bodies politic or corporate capable to make the same, and such lands, tenements,
rents, annuities, pensions or other hereditaments or any less estates, rights or interests of or in the same at their pleasure to grant, alien, sell and transfer in such
manner and form as they shall think meet and convenient for the furtherance of the
said college; And also that they may take and receive any sum or sums of money, and
any kind, manner or portion of goods and chattels that shall be given, sold or
bequeathed to them by any person or persons, bodies politic or corporate capable to
make a gift, sale or bequest thereof and employ the same towards erecting, setting up
and maintaining the said college in such manner as they shall judge most necessary
and convenient for the instruction, improvement and education of youth in the
vernacular and learned languages, and generally in any kind of literature, arts and
sciences, which they shall think proper to be taught for training up good, useful and
accomplished men for the service of their country, in church and state.
BE IT ENACTED:
II. That a college or general seminary of learning by the name of "St. John's
College" be established on the said Western Shore upon the following fundamental
and inviolable principles; namely, first, the said college shall be founded and maintained forever upon a most liberal plan for the benefit of youth of every religious
denomination, who shall be freely admitted to equal privileges and advantages of
education and to all the literary honors of the college, according to their merit without requiring or enforcing any religious or civil test, or urging their attendance
upon any particular religious worship or service other than what they have been
educated in or have the consent and approbation of their parents or guardians to
attend; nor shall any preference be given in the choice of a Principal, VicePrincipal or other Professor, Master or Tutor in said college on account of his
particular religious profession, having regard solely to his moral character and
literary abilities and other necessary qualifications to fill the place for which he
shall be chosen.
IV. That the governing body or board of said College shall consist of not more
than forty-nine nor less than thirteen Visitors and Governors, to be chosen and to
hold office in such manner as the said Visitors and Governors may determine and
prescribe by their fundamental ordinances; provided, however, that the Governors
of the States of Maryland and New Mexico shall act ex officio as two of the total
number of Visitors and Governors of said college during their respective terms in
said offices; and that the said Visitors and Governors and their successors duly chosen
shall be and are hereby declared to be one community, corporation and body politic
to have continuance forever by the name of
ST. JOHN'S COLLEGE
and by the same name they shall have perpetual succession.
VII.
That if the City of Annapolis should be fixed upon as a proper place for
IX. That the said Visitors and Governors and their successors by the name
aforesaid shall be able in law to sue and be sued, plead and be impleadable in any
court or courts, before any judge, judges, or justices within this State and elsewhere
in all and all manner of suits, complaints, pleas, causes, matters and demands of
whatsoever kind, nature or form they be •and all and every other matter and thing
therein to do in as full and effectual a manner as any other person or persons, bodies
politic or corporate within this State or any of the United States of America in like
cases may or can do.
-
X. That the said Visitors and Governors and their successors shall have full
power and authority to have, make and use one common and public seal and likewise
one privy seal with such devices and inscriptions as they shall think proper, and to
ascertain, fix and regulate the uses of both seals, by their own laws and the same
seals or either of them to change, break, alter and renew at their pleasure.
XI. That the said Visitors and Governors and their successors from time to time
and at all times hereafter, forever, shall have full power and authority to constitute
and appoint in such manner as they shall think best and most convenient, a
principal, a vice-principal of the said college and professors with proper tutors and
assistants for instructing the students and scholars of the said seminary in all the
liberal arts and sciences, and in the ancient and modem tongues and languages; and
the said principal, vice-principal and professors so constituted and appointed from
time to time shall be known and distinguished forever as one learned body or faculty
by the name of "The Principal, Vice-Principal and Professors of St. John's College";
�4
and by that name shall be capable of exercising such powers and authorities as the
Visitors and Governors of the said college and their successors shall by their
ordinances think necessary to delegate to them for the instruction, discipline and
government of the said seminary and of all the students, scholars, ministers and
servants belonging to the same.
XIV. That a majority of the said Visitors and Governors for the time being and
duly assembled at any meeting upon due notice given to the whole body of Visitors
and Governors shall have full power and authority to make fundamental ordinances
for the government of the said college and the instruction of youth as aforesaid, and
by these ordinances to appoint such a number of their own body not less than seven,
as they may think proper for transacting all general and necessary business of the
said seminary and making temporary rules for the government of the same; and also
by the said fundamental ordinances to delegate to the principal, vice-principal and
professors such powers and authorities as they may think best for the standing
government of the said seminary and of the execution of the ordinances and rules of
the same; provided always that they be not repugnant to the form of government of
any law of this State.
XV. And for animating and encouraging the students of said college to a
laudable diligence, industry and progress in useful literature and science, be it
enacted that the said Visitors and Governors and their successors shall by a written
mandate under their privy seal and the hand of someone of the Visitors and Governors to be chosen annually as their President, according to the ordinance to be made
for that purpose, have full power and authority to direct the principal, viceprincipal and professors to hold public commencements either on stated annual days,
or occasionally as the future ordinances of the said seminary may direct and at such
commencements to admit any of the students in the said college or any other persons
meriting the same (whose names shall be severally inserted in the same mandate) to
any degree or degrees in any of the faculties, arts and sciences and liberal
professions to which persons are usually admitted in other colleges or universities in
America or Europe; And it is hereby enacted that the principal, or in the case of his
death or absence, the vice-principal, and in case of the death or absence of both, the
senior professor who may be present, shall make out and sign with his name
diplomas or certificates of the admission to such degree or degrees, which shall be
sealed with the public or greater seal of the said corporation or college and delivered
to the graduates as honorable and perpetual testimonials of such admission; which
diplomas, if thought necessary for doing greater honor to such graduates, shall also
be signed with the names of the different professors or as many of them as can
conveniently sign the same; provided always that no student or students within the
said college shall ever be admitted to any such degree or degrees, or have their name
inserted in any mandate for a degree, until such student or students have been first
duly examined, and thought worthy of the same.
XVI. That the ordinances which shall be from time to time made by the Visitors
and Governors of the said college and their successors with an account of their other
proceedings and of the management of the estate and moneys committed to their
trust, shall when required be laid before the General Assembly for their inspection
and examination, but in case at any time hereafter through oversight, or otherwise
through misapprehension and mistaken constructions of the powers, liberties and
franchises in this Charter or Act of Incorporation granted, or intended to be granted,
any ordmance should be made by the said corporation of Visitors and Governors or
any matters done and transacted by the corporation contrary to the tenor hereof, it is
•
-
5
enacted that although such ordinances, acts and doings shall in themselves be null
and void, yet they shall not, however, in any courts of law, or by the General
Assembly , be deemed, taken, interpreted or adjudged into an avoidance or forfeiture
of this Charter and Act of Incorporation, but the same shall be and remain unhurt,
inviolate and entire unto the said corporation of Visitors and Governors in perpetual
succession; and all their acts conformable to the powers, true intent and meaning
hereof shall be and remain in full force and validity, the nullity and avoidance of
such illegal acts to the contrary in any wise notwithstanding.
XVII. That this Charter and Act of Incorporation and every part thereof shall
be good and available in all things in the law according to the true intent and
meaning thereof, and shall be construed, reputed and adjudged in all cases most
favorably on the behalf and for the best benefit and behoof of the said Visitors and
Governors and their successors, so as most effectually to answer the valuable end of
this Act of Incorporation towards the general advancement and promotion of useful
knowledge, science and virtue.
XVIII. That the College may establish and operate one or more branches in one
or more states of the United States.
�6
In the Polity as hereinafter set forth the nouns "alumnus" and "alumni" and
"man" and "men," either alone or in compounds such as "chairman" and "chairmen,"
and the pronouns "he," "him," and "his," are to be taken as referring to persons
whether male or female.
-
7
Polity of St. John's College
Preamble
Education is the making of men out of children by bringing them into the
world of inherited customs, intellectual traditions, and spiritual ties.
Institutions of
learning are set up for this purpose. Beyond this they should also seek to develop the
moral and intellectual powers of men to enable them to fulfill best their freely
chosen tasks and thus to take their own responsible part in shaping the future. St.
John's College is a community of learning committed to holding these ends constantly
in sight and to seeking the best means of attaining them.
St. John's College strives to illuminate the common heritage of mankind in a
persisting study of the great documents in which that heritage can be found. It is
concerned with the unity of knowledge, an understanding of the great issues faced
by men, and the moral foundations on which the conduct of men's lives can be based.
To provide proper conditions for the pursuit of these ends, we, the Board of Visitors
and Governors, after consultation with the Faculty, do ordain and establish this Polity
for St. John's College.
�8
Article I
-
9
Emeritus.
Emeriti.
THE COLLEGE
(1) St. John's College is by its Charter a legal entity, carrying on its functions
from its campuses in Annapolis, Maryland, and in Santa Fe, New Mexico. Under the
Charter of the College, all power, authority, and responsibility pertaining to the
College are vested in the Visitors and Governors.
Tutors who have completed their tenure appointments shall be Tutors
(e) There shall be Vice-Presidents for College Advancement and Treasurers.
(f) There shall be Associate members of the Faculty, hereinafter called
Associates, who shall be on either campus, as the offices may be deemed necessar y .
the Registrar, the Librarian, the Director of Athletics, _the Director of Student Activity
ties, the Director of Admissions, the Director of Alumni Acuv1ues, the Director of
Financial Aid, and the Director of Placement.
(2) The College consists of the following : The Board of Visitors and Governors,
the Faculty, the Graduate and Undergraduate Students, the Alumni and the Staff, and
other members who may be named from time to time by the Board of Visitors and
Governors.
(g) The "one learned body or faculty," composed of the President, the Deans,
the other Tutors, the Tutors Emeriti, the Vice-Presidents for College Advancement,
the Treasurers, and the Associates, shall bear the title The Faculty of St. John's
College.
(3) Under the Charter, "the said Visitors and Governors, and their successors,
from time to time, and at all times hereafter, forever, shall have full power and
authority to constitute and appoint, in such manner as they shall think best and most
convenient, a principal and vice-principal of the said College, and professors, with
proper tutors and assistants, for instructing the students and scholars of the said
seminary in all the liberal arts and sciences, and in the ancient and modem tongues
and languages; and the said principal, vice-principal, and professors, so constituted
and appointed from time to time shall be known and distinguished forever as one
learned body or faculty, by the name of 'The Principal, Vice-Principal, and
Professors of St. John's College;' and by that name shall be capable of exercising such
powers and authorities as the Visitors and Governors of the said college and their
successors shall by their ordinances think necessary to delegate to them for the
instruction, discipline, and government of the said seminary and of all the students,
scholars, ministers and servants belonging to the same."
(b) All who have formally matriculated, are at the present enrolled, and
are in good standing shall be called Students of St. John's College.
(i) The Directors and the Tutors of the Graduate Institute shall be called The
Faculty of the Graduate Institute.
(j) All who have been awarded a degree by the College shall be called
Alumni. In addition, all who have completed at least one semester of undergraduate
study or at least one segment of Graduate Institute study, but who are not currently
enrolled, shall be called Alumni either a) in the case of undergraduate students,
when their class has graduated, or b) in the case of Graduate Insutute students, at the
end of three full sessions of the Graduate Institute, summer and winter, after the one
in which they last enrolled. All who have ever been Alumni shall continue to be.
(a) The "principal" shall be the President, or if there are two Presidents,
the Presidents. When 'president' is used in this Polity it shall mean:
(k) The Staff shall consist of all persons appointed by the President who are
not members of the Faculty of St. John's College or the Faculty of the Graduate
Institute.
(i) with respect to membership on the Board of Visitors and Governors, in the Faculty, on committees of the Board, and sitting ex officio with the
Instruction Committee, and for presentation of, and response to, the Statement of
Educational Policy and Program (Article V (l)(c)), the President of the Annapolis
campus and the President of the Santa Fe campus;
(1) There shall be no discrimination. at St. John's College in_ appointments,
conditions of employment, admissions, educational policy, financial aid. progress.
.
athletics, or other activities, on the basis of race, rehg1on, age sex, nauonal ongm,
color, or physical handicap, discrimination in each case being understood in
accordance with the proscriptions of federal law.
(ii) with respect to membership on committees or sitting ex officio
with committees, and actions or procedures relating to one campus, the President of
that campus;
(m) No one shall be employed by the College beyond June 30th of the
academic year in which he reaches the age of 70, without the annual approval of the
Board of Visitors and Governors.
(iii) with respect to actions under Article II (12)(b) or actions or
procedures involving the entire College under Article X (l)(a)(i) and Article X
(l)(a)(iii) , either President.
Article II
(b) The "vice-principal" shall be the Dean who is serving as the Chairman
of the Instruction Committee.
(c) There shall be a Dean of St. John's College in Annapolis and a Dean of St.
John's College in Santa Fe.
(d) The "professors, tutors and assistants" shall bear the title Tutor or Tutor
VISITORS AND GOVERNORS
-
(1) Qualifications for Membership.
Persons shall be eligible for_ membership
on the Board of Visitors and Governors who are concerned for the mamtenance,
progress, and vitality of St. John's College's educational program and who are willing
and able to discharge the responsibilities of trusteeship with devotion and energy.
�10
(2) Members. The Board of Visitors and Governors shall consist of not more
than sixty members, comprising the Presidents, the Deans, the Governors of Maryland and New Mexico, ex officio, and fifty-four members, of whom forty-five shall
be elected by the entire Board and six shall be elected by the Alumni of the College, in
the manner and for the terms hereinafter provided.
In recognition of meritorious
service to the College, Visitors Emeriti may be elected to the Board who may attend all
meetings of the Board, with voice in deliberation, but without vote.
-
(3) Elections by the Board. At each annual meeting, the Board shall elect a
class of fifteen members for a term of three years, to succeed those members whose
term expires at the conclusion of said meeting. Those members elected shall begin
their term at the meeting next following their election. The procedure for
nomination and election shall be as follows:
There shall be a Nominating Committee of seven members of the Board
appointed by the Chairman. The Chairman and the Presidents shall sit with the
committee, ex officio, when nominations to Board membership are being considered.
The Nominating Committee shall recommend to each member of the Board in writing,
not later than thirty days prior to the annual meeting at which the election is to be
held, at least one candidate for each of the places to be filled by such election,
including each position as an officer of the Board. Additional nominations may be
made in writing, addressed to the Chairman, signed by at least five members of the
Board, prior to the date above provided for the report of the Nominating Committee,
and any such additional nominations shall be reported to the Board by the Committee
at the time of its report.
Voting on nominations at annual meetings may be by ballot, each member
present to vote for fifteen of the said nominees. In case the balloting results in a tie
for one or more positions, the Board shall determine the procedure to resolve the tie.
No nominee for member or officer of the Board shall be deemed elected who has not
receiyed the affirmative votes of at least a majority of the members present at the
meetmg.
If there should be fewer than fifteen members in any class prior to the end of
the term for such class, the vacancy may be filled pursuant to the procedure provided above for regular elections, except that the election may take place at any regular
meeting. A member elected to fill any such vacancy shall hold office for the
remainder of the term of the class in which such vacancy occurred.
In the event that for any reason there should be fewer than three alumni
members in any class prior to the end of the term of that class, the vacancy shall be
filled by interim election, conducted in the same manner. Newly-elected alumni
shall begin their term at the meeting next following the annual meeting of the
Board.
(5) Faculty Representation at Board Meetings. Three members of the Faculty
shall be elected by the Faculty on each campus to attend all regular sessions of the
Board on the campus to which they belong, with voice in deliberation, but without
vote.
(6) Student Representation at Board Meetings. Two students shall be elected by
the students on each campus to attend all regular sessions of the Board on the campus
to which they _belong, with voice in deliberation, but without vote.
-..
-
.
(7) Graduate Institute _Director Representation at Board Meetings. Each
Director of the Graduate Institute may attend all regular sessions of the Board on the
campus to which he belongs, with voice in deliberation, but without vote.
(8) Graduate Institute Student Representation at Board Meetings. A student of
the Graduate Institute shall be elected by the students of the Graduate Institute on
each campus to attend all regular sessions of the Board on the campus to which he
belongs, with voice in deliberation, but without vote.
(9) Alumni Association Representation at Board Meetings. The President of the
Alumni association shall be invited to attend all regular sessions of the Board, with
voice in deliberation, but without vote.
(10) Staff Representation at Board Meetings. The Staff on each campus shall be
invited to send two representatives to all regular sessions of the Board at that campus,
with voice in deliberation, but without vote.
(11) Reelection. A member of the Board elected by the Board or by the Alumni
may be elected for not more than two consecutive terms, but may, after a second
consecutive term, be reelected to membership at the annual meeting in the year
following the expiration of the member's second term.
(12)
1
(4) Elections by the Alumni. Each ·year in the spring, three alumni shall be
elected to membership for a term of three years, in such manner that there shall be
nine members of the Board elected by the alumni, consisting of three classes of three
members each.
Outgoing alumni members shall continue to serve until their
successors are elected.
The Directors of Alumni Activities shall request the Board of the Alumni
Association to nominate at least one candidate for each vacancy. Additional candidates may be nominated by petition of any thirty alumni. All alumni shall be eligible
to vote for the alumru members of the Board. Balloting will be conducted by mail by
the Directors of Alumni Activities.
11
-
Meetings of the Board.
.
(a) Regular meet_ings of _the Board shall be held quarterly in either Annapolis or Santa Fe. The Spnng meeting shall be called the annual meeting. The time
andplace of regular meetings shall be determined by the Chairman, in consultation
with the President, and notice of regular meetings shall be given not less than
fifteen days prior to such meetings.
(b) Special meetings of the Board may be called by the President, the Chairman, the Executive Committee, or any ten members of the Board, not less than seven
days after the dispatch of written, faxed, or telegraphic notice of the time, place, and
purposes of the meeting. Such notice may be dispensed with if waived in writing by
all members of the Board either before or after the meeting.
.
(c) Any business may be conducted at a regular meeting without specific
notice of such business (except that which is required by law or as provided herein
as to elections and amendments), but no business shall be conducted at any special
meeting unless notice of such business has been given, or has been waived as above
provided.
�13
12
constitute a quorum for the
(d) One third of the members of the Board shall
transaction of business.
ed and ex officio members,
(e) The Board in regular session is open to elect
President, and to official representato Visitors Emeriti, to Associates invited by the
Alumni Association and Staff.
tives of the Faculty, Students, Graduate Institute, to voting members and Visitors
ed
Attendance at Executive sessions shall be limit restriction. The Chairman of the
ut
witho
open
be
Emeriti. Public sessions shall
determine whether any meeting or
Board, in consultation with the President, shall
utive, or public session.
poni on of a meeting shall be in regular, exec
ing the Board shall elect a
( 13) Officers of the Board. At each annual meet
office until the next annual
hold
to
Chairman, two Vice-Chairmen, and a Secretary,
Vacancies in any such offices may be
meeting or until their successors are elected. meeting called for that purpose. Such
filled at any regular meeting, or any special
such offices, and such other duties as
officers shall perform the customary duties of
the Board may from time to time direct.
(14)
Committees of the Board.
Vice-Chairmen, the Secretary,
(a) Executive Committee. The Chairman, the
bers chosen annually by the Board at
the Presidents, the Deans, and four other mem
Committee of the Board. In
the annual meeting shall comprise the Executive utive Committee may act for the
Exec
intervals between meetings of the Board, the ated to some othe r committee, person,
deleg
ssly
expre
Board, except in those matters
Committee present at a meeting shall
or persons. Seven members of the Executive
ess.
constitute a quorum for the transaction of busin
be a Presidential Search
(b) Presidential Search Committee. There shall
President as provided in Anicle IV(2).
Committee to recommend the appointment of a
nominating Committee for
(c) Nominating Committee. There shall be a
provided in Article ll(3).
as
Board
membership of the Board and for officers of the
ing Committee appointed by
(d) Visiting Committee. There shall be a Visit
meet at least once annually with the
the Chairman. The Visiting Committee shall
Visiting Committee shall discuss the
Instruction Committee on each campus. The
of the Chairman of the Instruction
Statement of Educational Policy and Program
of the College and how they are
Committee and become acquainted with the aims
bein g reali zed.
ce Committee ·consisting of
(e) Finance Committee. There shall be a Finan
s of the College, ex officio, and six or
the Chairman, the Presidents, and the Treasurer
Chairman of the Board shall appoint
more members appointed by the Chairman. The
•
Committee. In carrying out its
one of the members to be the Chairman of the
inon
two working subcommittees, one
functions the Committee may be divided into
have
. The Finance Committee shall
vestments, one on budget, each with its Chairman
the following powers and duties:
r to direct the invest(i) The Finance Committee shall have full powe
ge, including endowment and
ment and reinvestment of all funds of the ColleBoard and the College are authorized
restricted funds, and the proper officers of the
Chairman of the Committee, with
to carry out all written directions, signed by the
h
t at
investments and reinvestments. . Th e committee shall repor
.
respect to such
eac
ing.
meet
ous
regu 1ar meetmg any action taken hereunder smce the previ
•
h 11
(ii) The Finance Committe shal
p ropo sedd annual budgets
ew t h e
revi
l
for
n
ntatio
of the Colle_ge prior to their prese
ands a make
Boa
the b d ~
e meetmg at which
recommendations to the Board with respect to
at
dget
u
they are presented.
dically advise the
The Finance Com mitte e shall. study, and perio
Board with res (iii)
ge, and
and practices of the Colle
financial busmess policies
to time
time
shall make resp ect to the
from
may
d
Boar
the
as
ts
repor
an
dies
su
request.
t Committee of five persons,
(f) Audit Committee. There shall be an Audi
.
.
the Board. The Treasurers shall
mcludmg a Chairman, appointed by the Chairman of
serve as non-voting Staff to the Committee.
annual report of the
(i) The Committee shall review in_ detail the
.
with the auditors, unattended
mdependent auditors and discuss audit findings
by
employees of the College.
representatives f h
(ii) The Committee shall meet with
.
dures and o t e indepenproce
and
e
dent auditors to the next audit to discuss scop
any other matters
requ iring special atten tion.
personnel any
(iii) The Committee shall discuss with College
correct
n.
tive action requi red as a result of the audit repo
d the a ointment
(iv) The Committee shall recommend to the Boar
next fiscal year. or
the
uct the audit for
reappointment of independent auditors to cond
of
•
t to the Board annually on •1 revie
(v) The Committee shall reporthe
w
·t
its
any
d
Boar
bring to the attention of
matters related thereto
the audl and dshall
requiring Boar action.
all be a Compensation Re(g) Compensation Review Committee. Th_ere sh_
.
b
, appointed by
more
e of
mitteof
Com
viewChai
d. than fiive mem ers, mcludmg a Chairman
Boar
the not
rman
the
d policies for direct
(i) The Committee shall recommend to thef Boar
and . d.
h
b
m direct compensation of Tutors Associate mem bers of t e Faculty, other Faculty
members, and Staff at the College ' It shall
ies
the compensation topolic
uall y review
the
1s review
and performance with respect to them and ann
oard.
B
mend to the B d
(ii) The Committee shall recomAdva
.
ensation
comp
thesurer
oar Trea
ncement , and
ge
Colle
for
s
s of the
Presidents, Vice-President
of othe
ege.
•tt
shall
the Co
(iii) In matters of policy and compensation mitte
ee
mm1
e.
Com
nce
Fina
consult the Presidents and the Chairman of the
y Review Committee of
(h) Polity Review Committee. There shall be a Polit
�15
14
(1) There is delegated to the President by the Visitors and Governors executive
responsibility and authority for the instruction, discipline, and government of the
College, and the President, in tum, may delegate his authority.
not more than five members appointed by the Chairman every fifth year. The
Committee shall receive the report of the Faculty Committee and after appropriate
study shall make recommendations to the Board for consideration at the annual
meeting when the final review of the Polity is consummated. The respective Chairmen of the Board and Faculty Review Committees shall make such arrangements as
they deem appropriate for joint consultation prior to and after the adoption of the
report by the Faculty.
There shall be a President for the Annapolis campus and a President for the
Santa Fe campus, each appointed as provided in Article IV (2). There is delegated to
each President by the Visitors and Governors executive responsibility and authority
for the instruction, discipline, and government of the campus of which he is
President, and the President, in tum, may delegate his authority. In the interest of
the orderly conduct of business and of maintaining and promoting the unity of the
College, the Presidents shall regularly consult and communicate with each other and,
as appropriate, with other College officials, on matters of common concern.
(i) Other Committees. The Chairman may appoint such other standing or
special committees of the Board as he may deem desirable or which the Board may
request.
(j) Former members of the Board and Visitors Emeriti may be appointed by
the Chairman to serve on Committees at his discretion.
(k) Except for the Presidential Search Committee and the Polity Review
Committee, committee appointments shall be made annually. Members of the
Committees serve until their successors have been appointed.
(1) Any member of the Board may, without invitation, attend any Board
committee meeting, except those of the Presidential Search, Nominating and
Executive Committees, but without vote.
(m) Whenever a Capital Campaign is in progress, its Chairman shall be an
ex-officio voting member of the Finance and Executive Committees.
(15) Execution of Contracts, Transfer of Securities, Etc. All contracts of $50,000
or more, notes, deeds, leases, mortgages, releases, bonds for security or indemnity,
negotiable instruments, stock certificates, transfers, and powers, and like papers and
documents on behalf of the College or the Endowment Funds shall be executed by two
persons, of whom one shall be the President, the Chairman, or the Vice-Chairman,
and of whom the other shall be the Secretary of the Board or the Treasurer of the
campus concerned.
(16) Signing of Checks, Drafts, Etc. All checks, drafts, acceptances, and similar
orders for the payment of money on behalf of the College may be signed by the same
persons authorized to execute contracts, etc., pursuant to Section (15) hereof, but may
also be signed by such persons, and in such manner, as the Board may from time to
time direct by appropriate resolution.
Article ill
THEFACULTY
The Visitors and Governors by these ordinances hereby delegate to the Faculty
of St. John's College-the President, the Deans, the other Tutors, the Tutors Emeriti, the
Vice-Presidents for College Advancement, the Treasurers, and the Associates-"powers
and authorities" for the "instruction, discipline, and government" of the College.
Article IV
THEFACULTY:THEPRESIDENT
.
.
(2) The President shall be appointed by the Board of Visitors and Governors on
the recommendation of a Committee composed of five members of the Board of
Visitors and Governors, at least one of whom is an alumnus, the Deans, and one Tutor
having tenure from each campus elected by the Faculty on that campus. This Committee shall be known as the Presidential Search Committee. It shall consult with the
continuing President in a regular and timely fashion. Prior to making its final recommendation, it shall, on both campuses, consult with all other appropriate persons
and shall arrange for the final candidates to meet with the Faculty and the
Instruction Committee.
(3) The President shall concurrently be a Tutor, but the provisions of Article
VI need not apply.
(4) The President and persons to whom he delegates his authority shall consult
with the Deans, other appropriate persons, and appropriate Faculty committees in
matters of policy, initiation of programs, and setting of priorities affecting the general welfare of the College.
(5) There shall be a Financial Committee on each campus cons1stmg of the
President as Chairman, the Dean and Treasurer of the campus, and other members
the President may appoint. It will review proposed budgets prior to their being
presented to the Finance Committee of the Board. It will also meet prior to Board
meetings to review performance in the fiscal year to date and emerging budgetary
strengths and weaknesses.
(6) The President shall appoint, or delegate the power to appoint, other committees as may be necessary for the carrying out of his duties and for which no
provision is made under Article IX.
(7) If in the judgment of the Board of Visitors and Governors, the College is
facing a financial exigency at either or both of its campuses which could call for a
reduction in the number of Faculty positions, both Presidents shall immediately
advise the Faculty of the nature and extent of the financial difficulty and consult
with them concerning the best way to address the situation. The Faculty may then
make a formal recommendation to the Presidents on ways to meet the problem, or, if
the Faculty fails so to act, the Deans and the Instruction Committee shall propose a
plan to the Presidents. The Presidents shall jointly then determine a plan which
specifies a preferred course of action to be taken. All necessary steps must be taken
in timely fashion as prescribed by the Board. Nothing herein provided shall limit
the power of the Board to act otherwise in the event of need to reduce or eliminate
Faculty positions.
�16
17
Article V
THE FACULTY: THE CHAIRMAN OF THE INST
RUCTION COMMITTEE AND THE DEANS
(1) The Chairman of the Instruction
Committee.
(a) There is delegated to the Chai
sponsibility and authority for the organiza rman of the Instruction Committee reliberal ans that is followed by the Tutors tion of the program of instruction in the
and the Students.
(b) The Deans shall serve alternately, for
a term of one year, as Chairman
of the Instruction Com
mittee.
(c) Each year the Chairman of
sultation with the Instruction Committee onthe Instruction Committee shall, after conInstruction Committee of the College, subm his campus, and after discussion with the
it a Statement of Educational Policy and
Program to the Faculty as a whole for discu
Statement, together with an account of the ssion. The President shall present the
1t, as a report to the Board of Visitors and Faculty discussion of it and his response to
Governors for its consideration.
(d) The Chairman of the Instr uctio
of the _Board of Visitors and Governors may n Committee shall, as he or the Chairman
deem appropriate, report to the Board on
mstruct1onal matt ers, and shall respond to
such
questions as the Board, through its
Chairman, may direct to him.
(2) The Deans.
(a) Ther e is delegated to the Deans on their
respective campuses responsibility and authority for the supervision of
the
prog
ram
of instruction and for the
general welfare of the students and for wha
tever government of the students be
necessary for the greatest possible attainme
nt of aims of the program. Each Dean
shall be. the Cha irma nof the Instruction Com
In carrymg out his duties, each Dean shall mittee on the campus where he serves.
consult regularly with the President and
with the
campus. Instr uctio n Committee and the othe r appropriate Faculty committees on that
(b) The _Deans shall be appointed for term
s of five years from among the
Tutors by the V1s1tors and Governors on
the
reco
mme
ndation of the President after
consultation with a special committee of seve
n, four from the campus for which the
Dean is being chosen and three from the
othe r campus, selected from among
themselves by the Tutors havi
ng tenure.
(c) A Dean shall be appointed from amon
g the tutors who have themselves
been_ appointed in accord with Article VI(3
).
If non-tenured, the appointee shall
acquu~ tenure upon becommg Dean, in whic
h case the provisions of Article Vl(3)(a)
regardmg reap pom tmen t schedule
s shall not apply.
(d) To assist them in carrying out their dutie
s, the Deans shall recommend
one or more Tutors to be appointed by the
President with the title of Assistant Dean.
(e) During the absence of the President from
either campus, the Dean on
that campus shall if necessary exercise the
President's prerogative of final decision.
(f) During the absence of either Dean
from the campus a Tutor with tenure
named by him shall act for the Dean.
(g) The Dean on each campus shall
essary for the carrying out of his duues and appoint such committee~ _as may be necfor which no other prov1s1on 1s made.
Article VI
THE FACULTY: THETUTORS
(1) The primary responsibilities of the
Tutors are to teach and to make
themselves as competent as possible in all
pans of the St. John's Program.
(2) The Tutors shall have aut honty
• to recommend to the Visitors and Governors candidates for degrees on the resp
ective campuses.
(3) Appointment and Reappointment of Tuto
rs. Tutors shall be appointed by
the Visitors and Governors upon recomme
ndation of The Pres1de_nt m accordance
with the recommendation of the Dean and
the Instruction Committee on that campus
where the Tutors so appointed shall teach
.
(a) The schedule of regular appointment of
Tutors on each campus shall be
eithe r (i)(A) or (i)(B) below, to be decided
be the Pres1_dent in accordance with the
recommendation of the Dean and the Instr
uction Committee on that campus where
the Tutors so appointed shall teach:
(i)(A) New Tutors shall be appointed for
one year unless they are
appointed at mid-year, in which case the
initial appointment shall be for a year and
a
half. First reap pointments shall be for _one
Second and third reappomtments
shall be for two and three years respective year.
ly.
(i)(B) New Tutors shall be appointed for two
years unless they are
ap ointed at mid-year, in which case the
initial appointment shall be for a year . and
a
half. First and second reappointments shall
be for two and three _years respectively.
(ii) A Tuto r who has completed a three
-year appomtment must eithe r
be given a tenure appointment or not be reap
pointed as Tutor. ~ Tuto r may,
however, be given a tenure appointment as
early as the conclusion _of the first year
of a three-year appointment.
Procedures leading to a recommendation for
an early
tenu re appointment shall be initiated by the
Dean and Inst ruct ion Committee, but not
without the consent of the appointee, and
shall not preJud1ce subsequent
.
cons idera tion for a tenure appointment.
Tenure appo intm ents shall not cont mue beyond June 30th of the academic year in whic
h a attracts in
the age of 70. Tutors
Eme riti shall retain their privileges and
respons1b1hties in votmg at Faculty
mee ting s.
(iii) Befo re making recommendations to_
the President . on tenu re
appointments the Dean on each campus shall
cons ult with the Instruction Committee
on that campus, after seeking the advice of
the Tutors on that appointment.
(iv) A Tuto r, to be recommended for a tenur
e _appomtment, mus t
have served full-time at the campus where
the recommendauon 1s to be made for the
two years immediately preceding the year
in which . that recommendation 1s made,
the provisions of (ii) above notwithstanding.
In ordmary cases, these two year s of
service will be the second year of a twoyear appointment and the first year of a
three-year appo mtm
•
ent.
Th ese requirem
• entt s may be waived by the Pres iden t
on the
reco mme ndat ion of the Dean and Instructio
n Committee on that campus.
�19
18
(b) A non-tenure appointment as Tutor establishes the possibility, but not
the presumption, of its renewal and the granting of a tenure appointment. Procedures for considering non-tenure appointments differ from those for considering
tenure appointments. Satisfaction of appointment criteria admits of degree. With
each successive reappointment, the criteria are applied more rigorously. For a
tenure appointment the application is especially strict.
(c) For the purpose of temporary transfer between campuses, special appointments of one or two years may be granted to a Tutor in addition to his regular
appointments. The Tutor may ask that such an appointment be counted as a regular
appointment for the purpose of (a) above. In the case of a permanent transfer a
Tutor may ask that his years of service at the other campus be counted toward
tenure according to the provisions of (a) above. Nevertheless, the provisions of (3)
(a)(iv) prevail.
(d) Special one-year appointments and reappointments may be given to
Tutors who intend to teach on a part-time basis only. Such a Tutor may subsequently
apply for and receive a regular appointment.
Special part-time appointments may
then be counted on a fractional basis toward eligibility for tenure, but see (3)(a)(iv).
In establishing eligibility for sabbatical leave, special part-time appointments shall
be computed proportionately.
(e) Visiting Tutors may be appointed for a term or a year.
(4)
Notification.
(a) A Tutor under consideration for a non-tenure appointment to begin in a
certain calendar year shall be notified by the President no later than December 15th
of the preceding calendar year whether his reappointment will be recommended to
the Board of Visitors and Governors. If he is reappointed the President shall so notify
him by March 1st of the calendar year in which the new appointment is to begin.
(b) A Tutor under consideration for a tenure appointment to begin in a
certain calendar year shall be notified by the President no later than May 31st of the
preceding calendar year whether his appointment will be recommended to the Board
of Visitors and Governors. If he is appointed the President shall so notify him by
July 31st of that same preceding year.
(5) A Tutor may apply to the Instruction Committee of the College not later
than January 15th for a transfer of campus for the next academic year. Transfers
shall require approval of both Deans after consultation with their Instruction
Committees.
(6) (a) A Tutor may have his appointment terminated by the Board of Visitors
and Governors for one of the following reasons only: (i) failure or inability to
perform his teaching duties in a satisfactory manner, or (ii) moral turpitude. The
President shall make such a recommendation to the Board of Visitors and Governors
only with the concurrence of the Dean and the Instruction Committee of the campus
concerned. Before the President makes such a recommendation he shall advise the
Tutor affected of his intention to do so, and the Tutor shall have the right to be heard
by the Instruction Committee or, if he prefers, by another committee to be designated
by the President for this purpose.
(b) Either Dean, with the approval of the Instruction Committee on the
campus concerned, may recommend to the President that in the interest of instruction a Tutor be temporarily relieved of his duties in whole or in part at any time.
When such action is taken, the Tutor's salary shall be continued for the remainder of
the current academic year.
(7) The sabbatical leave program is designed to provide Tutors with an opportunity for study, rest, and renewal of spirit, in anticipation of future teaching. It is
the objective of the program to grant all applications for sabbatical leave meeting
the conditions for eligibility set out in (a) of this section. It is understood that Tutors
on such leave will not undertake full-time remunerative employment elsewhere and
will return to the College.
(a) Eligibility for sabbatical leave shall be upon the following conditions:
(i) A Tutor who has received a tenure appointment may apply for a
full year of sabbatical leave at full salary, provided he shall have completed the
equivalent of seven full years of service to the College since his original appointment, or the equivalent of six full years of service since any previous sabbatical
leave, and the sabbatical leave would not occur in the last two years of his tenure
appointment.
(ii) Such a Tutor may apply for an earlier sabbatical leave of a full
year at partial salary, or a partial year at full salary. The fractional salary or fractional year shall be determined by the number of years of teaching completed in
relation to the prescribed total for either an initial or a subsequent sabbatical leave,
as the case may be. In no case shall a Tutor be paid more than his regular salary.
Sabbatical leave for a fraction of a year may not occur during the last two years of a
Tutor's tenure appointment.
(b) If, in the judgment of the President, financial or academic needs at a
campus should require that fewer sabbatical leaves be granted there in a given year
than there are qualified applicants, and if the number that can be granted there
should be smaller than one-sixth of the number of Tutors at that campus having
tenure and not on full-time leave under the provisions of section (8) below, the
President shall so notify the Board of Visitors and Governors and seek its approval for
delaying a sabbatical leave for one or more of the applicants.
(c) If in a year there are more qualified applicants for sabbatical leave at
any one campus than there are leaves to be granted at that campus, then those
members shall have precedence who meet the following conditions in the order set
forth:
(i) Those who have served for the greater number of years since
their first appointment as Tutor or since their last sabbatical leave, whichever is
more recent;
years;
(ii) Those whose service has been continuous throughout those
(iii) Those whose last sabbatical leave was postponed because of the
financial or academic needs of the College;
�21
20
(iv)
Those who have seniority of appointment.
When there is a conflict of precedence, the Dean and the Instruction Committee on the campus concerned shall be consulted.
the Dean on that campus and a committee constituted by resolution of the Faculty on
that campus.
(5) The Vice-Presidents for College Advancement and Treasurers may be
appointed Tutors under the provisions of Article VI(3)(d).
(d) A Tutor eligible for sabbatical leave shall make application to the President before November 1st for leave to begin the following July 1st, and shall be
informed of the action upon his application not later than January 1st.
Article VIII
THE FACULTY: THE ASSOCIATES
(8) The President, with the concurrence of the Dean after consultation with
the Instruction Committee on the campus concerned, may grant leaves of absence to
Tutors for a period of one year or less. At that time it shall be determined whether
the leave shall be counted as service to the College with respect to eligibility for
sabbatical leave and, if so, how. The decision with respect to a request for leave of
absence shall be made in the light of the requirements both of the applicant Tutor
and of the whole College.
(1) Associate members of the Faculty on each campus shall be appointed by the
Board of Visitors and Governors on the recommendation of the President in consultation with the Dean of that campus. The President shall have ultimate executive
authority over the Associates.
(a) Leave of absence may be renewed upon request but not more than twice
in succession except in extraordinary circumstances.
(3) The Associates on either campus may establish for themselves an Associates' Council for the purpose of considering College matters of concern to them and
communicating with other members of the College.
(b) A request for a leave of absence shall be submitted to the President as
early as possible in the academic year before the year in which the leave is to be
taken, but not later than January 15th of that year. Requests for leaves of absence
may be withdrawn at any time prior to April 1st of the year in which the request is
submitted. Requests for leaves of absence for the second semester must be submitted
no later than October 15th.
(3)(d).
priate.
(2) Associates may be appointed Tutors under the provisions of Article VI
(4) The Associates' Council may establish such committees as it deems appro-
(5) There shall be the following Associates, as deemed necessary by the President on each campus, with the powers and responsibilities provided.
(c) Tutors on sabbatical leave or leave of absence remain members of the
Faculty with the right of full participation in Faculty meetings and all other College
exercises.
(a) The Registrars. The Registrars shall be responsible to the Deans on
their respective campuses. They shall prepare and supervise the registration of
students and shall be responsible for the academic records and schedules of students.
Article VII
(b) The Librarians. The Librarians shall be responsible to the Deans on
their respective campuses for the operation of the library. Appointments_ of profesional members of the Library Staff shall be made upon the recommendation of the
... ibrarian to the Dean on each campus.
THE FACULTY: THE VICE-PRESIDENTS FOR COLLEGE ADVANCEMENT AND THE
TREASURERS
(1) The Vice-Presidents for College Advancement shall be responsible to the
President for the supervision and development of all programs in fund-raising, public relations, and alumni relations on their respective campuses.
(2) The Vice-President for College Advancement on each campus shall be appointed by the Board of Visitors and Governors on the recommendation of the President made after consultation with the Dean on that campus and a committee
constituted by resolution of the Faculty on that campus.
(3) The Treasurers shall have charge, on their respective campuses, under the
supervision of the President, of all funds and property, and shall have authority to
carry out fiscal and property . transactions, and to receive and disburse funds, subject
to the prov1s1ons of this Polity and other directions and arrangements pursuant
thereto.
(4) The Treasurer on each campus shall be appointed by the Board of Visitors
and Governors on the recommendation of the President made after consultation with
(c) The Directors of Student Activities and the Directors of Athletics. The
Directors of Student Activities and the Directors of Athletics shall be responsible to
the Deans on their respective campuses for devising and directing programs of recreational activities.
(d) The Directors of Admissions. The Directors of Admissions shall be
responsible to the Deans on their respective campuses for the annual enrollment of
qualified Freshmen.
(e) The Directors of Alumni Activities. The Directors of Alumni Activities
shall be responsible to the Vice-Presidents for College Advancement. Their primary
duty is to enable the College and the Alumni Association to be of service to alumni.
(f) The Directors of Financial Aid. The Directors of Financial Aid shall be
responsible to the Deans on their respective campuses for the administration of financial aid programs.
�23
22
nate between campuses. The Committee shall advise the President concerning Tutors'
compensation and related matters; it shall make annual reviews of the College's
statement of T utors' salaries and other compensation of Tutors and report to the
Tutors and the President recommendations consequent upon the review.
(g) The Directors of Placement. The Directors of Placement shall be responsible to the Deans on their respective campuses for helping and counseling
students with respect to graduate and professional schools and careers.
(b) Members of the Committee shall be elected annually on each campus for
terms of three years in such a manner that the term of one member on each campus
terminates each year. The Tutors' Compensation Committee on each campus shall
provide the Tutors on that campus with two nominations for each vacancy on the
Committee on that campus. Additional nominations may be made at the Faculty
meeting when election shall be made.
(h) Persons designated Associates under the provisions of Article I(3)(f) or
of Article VII(3)(k) of this Polity as amended through April 20, 1985, whose offices
are not specifically named in this Article, shall continue to be Associates until the
expiration of their appointments to those offices.
Article IX
THE FACULTY: FACULTY COMMITTEES
(1) The Instruction Committee
(a) The Instruction Committee shares with its Chairmen responsibility for
the program of instruction of the College. It shall consist of twelve Tutors in addition
to the Deans. The President shall sit with the Committee ex officio. Six of the Tutors
shall be elected from each campus of the College. The Instruction Committee shall
meet annually. On each campus the members of the Instruction Committee and the
Dean as Chairman constitute the Instruction Committee of the College on that campus.
The President sits ex officio with the Instruction Committee on each campus.
(b) Each of the members of the Instruction Committee shall serve for a
term of three years, and the terms shall be arranged in such a way that each year the
terms of two members at each campus shall expire. Terms begin and end the day
following commencement exercises. Annually, and separately at each campus, the
President with the Dean on his campus, after consulting with the Instruction
Committee and seeking the advice of the other Tutors on that campus, shall at the last
regular Faculty meeting on that campus nominate four Tutors of whom two shall be
elected by the Tutors to membership on the Instruction Committee. The Faculty shall
be informed of the names of the nominees prior to the meeting at which the election
occurs. At the expiration of the three-year term a member of the Instruction
Committee shall for one year be ineligible for reelection.
(c) If for any reason a member of the Instruction Committee is unable to
serve for a part of his term, another Tutor shall be chosen to take his place for that
part of the term. For this purpose the President and the Dean, in consultation with
the Instruction Committee on the campus where the vacancy occurs, shall nominate
two Tutors of whom the Tutors shall elect one in a regular Faculty meeting.
(d) If the Instruction Committee resigns with the Deans on a matter of confidence and the resignations are accepted, the President, in consultation with the
new Deans and after seeking the advice of the other Tutors, shall nominate nine
Tutors for the six vacancies on each campus in such a manner that two out of each
three nominees shall be elected by the Tutors for each of the three classes to fill the
unexpired terms.
(2)
The Tutors' Compensation Committee
(a) There shall be a Tutors' Compensation Committee of six Tutors, three to
be elected by the Tutors on each campus, whose chairmanship shall annually alter-
-
(3) The Library Committees. The President, in consultation with the Librarian
and the Dean, shall appoint three Tutors on each campus to serve as a Library
Committee. The President, the Dean, and the Librarian shall themselves be ex officio
members of the Committee, and the Librarian shall serve as Chairman. It shall be the
duty of the Library Committees to assist the Librarians. in making the Libraries serve
the ends of the College and its program; it shall be their duty to advise the Libranans
in regard to Library policy and acquisitions. The Managers of the Bookstores may be
invited to sit with the Committees.
(4) The Campus Planning Committees. The Faculty on each campus shall elect
five of its members as a Campus Planning Committee. Two members shall be elected
to the Committee annually at the first regular meeting of the academic session except
in every third year, when one member shall be chosen. The President shall sit ex
officio with both Committees. The Dean, one of the Assistant Deans, and the
Treasurer on each campus shall sit ex officio with the Committee on that campus. It
shall be the duty of the respective committees to advise the President on the
construction of new buildings, the renovation of old buildings. landscaping of
grounds, and all matters relating to the maintenance and development of the campus.
(5) The Prize Committees. Every three years the President shall appoint Tutors
on each campus to supervise the awarding of prizes on the respective campuses. The
Committees shall have full authority to decide what prizes shall be awarded and to
name the recipients of the prizes.
(6) The Fellowship Committees. On each campus there shall be a Fellowship
Committee appointed by the President. It shall be the duty of this Committee. to inform students of fellowships for which they may be eligible, to assist them m applying for fellowships, and to act on behalf of the College in any matter relating to
application for fellowships.
(7) Other Committees. The Faculty on each campus shall have authority to
elect, or to request the President to appoint, additional committees that may from time
to time become necessary.
Article X
THEFACULTY:FACULTYPROCEDURE
(1 ) Procedure for Instructional Proposals.
(a)(i) Any major proposal concerning matters of instruction affecting the
College as a whole shall originate with the Dean and the Instruction Committee on
.
�24
25
/
either campus, and the decision as to what proposals are not major
shall require the
concur rence of the Dean and the Instruction Committee on the other
campus. In
normal circum stances major proposals concerning instruc tion shall
be formulated at
the annual meeting of the Instruction Committee of the College. Written
statements
of such a proposal shall be distributed to the Faculty at least two weeks
before
the
Faculty meeting at which they are to be presented; the proposal shall
be presented to
the whole Faculty by the Chairman of the Instruction Committee, either
in his own
person or through the other Dean as his representative. If, after full
discussion of
any proposal so presented, there be no objection on the part of any
Tutor, the
measure stands approved and becomes effective as of the date specifi
ed therefor. If,
after full discussion, a Tutor objects to the proposal and holds to his
objectio
proposal shall be submitted to vote of the Tutors at special Faculty meeting n, the
s called by
the President within a fortnight. In submitting the proposal to vote
the Chairman of
the Instruction Committee and the Dean on the other campus shall state
whether it be
a matter of confidence. The vote may then be taken and tallied by
the President in
such a fashion that the Tutors shall have recorded their decision acting
as a whole.
If the proposal be one that the Chairman of the Instruction Comm
ittee and the other
Dean have declared a matter of confidence and if it be defeated by
majority vote, the
Deans and the Instruction Committee shall immediately resign. If it
be passed by
majority vote, it shall become effective as of the date specified therefo
r. For the
confidence proced ure a quorum shall consist of three-fourths of all
resident Tutors
on each campus.
and January only one regular meeting need be called. The President
or, in his absence, the Dean, shall preside. In the absence of the President and
the Dean, the
Faculty shall elect one of its members to preside.
(b) Special meetings of the Faculty may be called upon due notice by
the
President, either at his own discretion or at the request of five Faculty
members.
(c) Due notice shall be construed to mean no less than three days notice,
except in cases of emergency.
(d) A quorum shall consist of a majority of the Faculty in residence
except
as otherwise provided.
(e) Only Tutors may vote on instructional _ matters. All FacuLty membe
rs
may vote on all other matters not specifically restnct ed m the Polity.
(3) The Secretary of the Faculty. At the last regular meeting of. an
academic
year the Faculty on each campus shall elect one of its members,. then
m at least this
third year at the College, as Secretary. The Secretary shall assist in
the preparation
and circulation of the agenda for Faculty meetings, shall keep the mmute
s of such
meetings, and shall collect and circulate reports of Faculty committees.
Article XI
(ii) Any proposal concer ning instruc tion that
is not consid ered
major shall originate with the Dean and the Instruction Committee
on the campus
where it is intended to be put into effect. It shall be presented by the
Dean to the
Faculty on that campus after obtaining the concurrence of the Dean
and the Instruction Committee on the other campus that the proposal is minor and not
major. The
procedure set forth above for the approval or rejection of proposals
shall be
followed, except that it shall apply only on the campus concerned.
(iii) The President may refuse to accept the resignation of the
Deans
or the Instruction Committee, any or all of them, whenever in his
judgment such
resignation would be detrimental to the proper functioning of the
College; provided,
however, that if any six or more Tutors shall petition the Visitors and
Governors, the
latter shall review the President's decision within four weeks, during
which
time the
Deans and the Instruction Committee shall continue in office.
(iv) In the event that the proposal be defeated and the resignations
be accepted, the President shall proceed to the choice of new Deans
in accordance
with the provisions of Article V (2)(b).
(b) Upon either a petition of not less than one-tenth of the Tutors
on either
campus or a request from the President, the Dean and Instruction Commi
ttee on that
campus shall consid er any recommendation concerning instruc tion
and shall report
to the Faculty within one year their proposal concerning it. They
shall decide
whether their proposal is a major proposal, and the procedure of Article
X(l) shall
apply.
(2)
Faculty Meetings.
(a) Regular monthly meetings of the Faculty shall be called upon due
notice by the President; except that in the period comprising the months
of December
THE SCHOLARS-IN-RESIDENCE AND THE ARTISTS-IN-RESIDENCE
The Schola rs-in-R esidenc e and the Artists -in-Res idence shall be appoi_n
ted
from time to time by the Board of Visitors and Governors on the recomm
endation of
the President after consultation with the Dean and the Instruction Commi
ttee on the
campu s where the Scholars and Artists shall reside.
Article XII
THE STUDENTS
(1) The primary responsibilities of the students are to study and
to make themselves as competent as possible in all parts _of the St. Johns Program
. Their advice
and service shall be sought by the Faculty m such matters and in such
ways as may
best serve the general welfare of the College.
(2) The students of St. John's College shall constitute the Student Polity
of St.
John's College in Annapolis and in Santa Fe.
(3) The Student Polity in Annapolis. or Santa Fe may establish for itself
a government which is representative of all polity members. The Dean. on
each campus
may delegate to the Student government a share of the respons1b1l1ty
for the general
welfare of the students and whatever government of the students may
be necessary
for the greatest possible attainment of the aims of the program. The
duties of the
Student Government may include:
(a) the management of funds available to the Student Polity;
(b) the sanctioning of all student clubs, organizations, and activities,
and
�27
26
concurrence of the Dean on the same campus after consultation with the Committee
for the Graduate Institute on that campus.
their regulation, if necessary;
(c) the representation of the students of St. John's College to the community
outside the College;
(d) the establishment and maintenance of formal channels of communication between the students and the Faculty; and
(e) any other duties agreed upon by the students and the Dean.
Article xm
THE GRADUATE INSTITUTE
(1)
The Directors.
(a) There shall be a Director of the Graduate Institute on each campus to
whom shall be delegated responsibility and authority, under the Chairman of the
Instruction Committee, for the organization and supervision on his campus of the
graduate program of instruction in the liberal arts and for matters concerning the
general welfare of the students. Concerning matters that affect the Graduate Institute as a whole the Director shall, in consultation with his fellow Director, be responsible to the Chairman of the Instruction Committee. Concerning matters limited to
his own campus he shall be responsible to the Dean on his own campus.
(b) Every three years, after consultation with his fellow director and the
Committee for the Graduate Institute on his own campus, one of the Directors shall
submit a Statement of Educational Policy and Program for the Graduate Institute to
the Instruction Committee for discussion at its joint meeting. After making any
revisions he deems appropriate, he shall submit it to the Faculty as a whole for
discussion .
(2)
The Faculty of the Graduate Institute.
(a) Each Director, after consultation with the Committee for the Graduate
Institute on that campus, and in accordance with the recommendation of the
Instruction Committee on the same campus, shall recommend to the President Tutors
of the Graduate Institute for summer appointment to teach in the Graduate Institute
for one session.
(b) During the summer term the Tutors of the Graduate Institute on each
campus shall have the authority to recommend to the Board of Visitors and Governors
candidates for degrees.
(4)
Committees for the Graduate Institute.
(a) On each campus the Committee for the Graduate Institute shares with
the Director on the same campus responsibility for carrying out the program of instruction of the Graduate Institute and for the general welfare of the students.
(b) Each Committee shall consist of three Tutors who have experience in
the Institute, in addition to the Director, who shall serve as Chairman.
(c) Members of each Committee shall be appointed by the Director with the
(5)
Procedure for Instructional Proposals.
(a) Major proposals concerning matters of instruction or policy shall
originate with one of the Directors, after consultation with the other Director and
with the Committee for the Graduate Institute and the Dean on his own campus. Such
proposals shall be submitted to the Instruction Committee of the College; if approved,
they shall come before the Faculty in accordance with Article X(l)(a)(i).
(b) Proposals concerning instruction or policy that are not considered
major shall originate with the Director on the campus where they are intended to be
put into effect, after consultation with the Committee for the Graduate Institute and
the Dean on that campus. Such proposals shall be submitted to the Instruction
Committee on that campus; if approved, they shall come before the Faculty in
accordance with Article X(l)(a)(ii).
Article XIV
THE ALUMNI
( 1) Alumni shall be life-long members of the College, since St. John's College is
a community not limited by geographical location or fixed periods of time.
(2) The Alumni Association is the formal means by which alumni participate
in the life of the College. Through the election of alumni members of the Board of
Visitors and Governors, alumni share in the direction of that life. In these and other
ways, alumni shall be given the opportunity to serve the College.
(3) The College shall cooperate with the Alumni Association to enable alumni
to assist in providing services such as recruiting and interviewing prospective students, placing graduates in appropriate employment, and advising students concerning careers and admission to graduate and professional schools.
(4) The College, in cooperation with the Alumni Association, shall provide
seminars and other appropriate educational activities in Annapolis, in Santa Fe, and
in other places.
Article XV
THE STAFF
(1) Members of the Staff assist with the administration and maintenance of the
College, performing duties necessary to its well-being. They are subject to appropriate Staff rules and regulations.
(2) Members of the Staff on either campus may establish for themselves a Staff
Council for the purpose of better communication and understanding of College
policies as a benefit to the College as a whole. The Staff Council shall seek to establish
and maintain formal channels of communication among the whole Staff and between
the Staff and the appropriate College Officers. The Treasurer on each campus shall
review Staff employment regulations with the Staff Council and discuss with them
any changes proposed.
�28
(3) The Staff Council may establish such committees as it deems appropriate.
Article XVI
AMENDMENTS AND REVIEW
(1) This Polity may be amended by a two-thirds vote of those members voting
at any regular or special meeting of the Board, provided, however, that the
amendment has been proposed by not fewer than ten percent of the members of the
Board or a majority of the Polity Review Committee, and that the votes of no less than
one-third of the members of the entire Board eligible to vote are in favor of such
amendment, and further provided written notice of the proposed amendment has
been given to members of the Board and to the Faculty not less than thirty days prior
to such meeting. The Faculty shall have the right to inform the Board in writing of
its recommendation with respect to the proposed amendment by the date of the Board
meeting at which the amendment is to be considered.
(2) Amendments may be proposed at any regular meeting of either the Faculty
in Annapolis or the Faculty in Santa Fe upon petition of not less than ten percent of
the members on either campus. No such proposal shall be acted upon earlier than
the next regular meeting of the Faculty, whether in Annapolis or in Santa Fe. Twothirds vote of the entire Faculty in residence shall be required for approval and the
amendment shall not become effective unless approved by the Board in the manner
set forth in Section (1) above.
(3) Every five years this Polity shall be reviewed by a committee of six, three
to be elected by the Faculty on each campus. The report of the Committee shall be
submitted to one regular Faculty meeting and voted upon at the next regular Faculty
meeting. A two-thirds vote of the Faculty in residence shall be required for
approval.
Whatever action is thus recommended by the Faculty shall be submitted to
the Board for final decision in the manner set forth in Section (1) above.
Article XVII
COMPLIANCE WITH LAW
No prov1s1on of this Polity shall be construed to contravene any applicable
federal or state law. If any provision is determined to contravene any such law, that
provision shall be deemed not a part of this Polity, and this Polity's remaining
provisions shall remain in full force and effect.
�26
28
(3) The Staff Council may establish such committees as it deems appropriate.
Article XVI
AMENDMENTS AND REVIEW
(b) the sanctioning of all student clubs, organizations, and activities, and
their regulation, if necessary;
(c) the representation of the students of St. John's College to the community
outside the College;
(d) the establishment and maintenance of formal channels of communication between the students and the Faculty; and
(e) any other duties agreed upon by the students and the Dean.
(1) This Polity may be amended by a two-thirds vote of those members voting
at any regular or special meeting of the Board, provided, however, that the
amendment has been proposed by not fewer than ten percent of the members of the
Board or a majority of the Polity Review Committee, and that the votes of no less than
one-third of the members of the entire Board eligible to vote are in favor of such
amendment, and further provided written notice of the proposed amendment has
been given to members of the Board and to the Faculty not less than thirty days prior
to such meeting. The Faculty shall have the right to inform the Board in writing of
its recommendation with respect to the proposed amendment by the date of the Board
meeting at which the amendment is to be considered.
(2) Amendments may be proposed at any regular meeting of either the Faculty
in Annapolis or the Faculty in Santa Fe upon petition of not less than ten percent of
the members on either campus. No such proposal shall be acted upon earlier than
the next regular meeting of the Faculty, whether in Annapolis or in Santa Fe. Twothirds vote of the entire Faculty in residence shall be required for approval and the
amendment shall not become effective unless approved by the Board in the manner
set forth in Section (1) above.
(3) Every five years this Polity shall be reviewed by a committee of six, three
to be elected by the Faculty on each campus. The report of the Committee shall be
submitted to one regular Faculty meeting and voted upon at the next regular Faculty
meeting. A two-thirds vote of the Faculty in residence shall be required for
approval.
Whatever action is thus recommended by the Faculty shall be submitted to
the Board for final decision in the manner set forth in Section (1) above.
Article XVII
COMPLIANCE WITH LAW
No prov1s1on of this Polity shall be construed to contravene any applicable
federal or state law. If any provision is determined to contravene any such law, that
provision shall be deemed not a part of this Polity, and this Polity's remaining
provisions shall remain in full force and effect.
f o v ~ 1993
Article XIII
THE GRADUATE INSTITUTE
(1)
The Directors.
(a) There shall be a Director of the Graduate Institute on each campus to
whom shall be delegated responsibility and authority, under the Chairman of the
Instruction Co mmittee, for the organization and supervision on his campus of the
graduate p ro gram of instruction in the liberal ans and for matters concerning the
general welfare of the students.
Concerning matters that affect the Graduate Institute as a whole _the Director shall, in consultati_on with his fellow Director, be responsible to the Chairman of the Instrucuon Commmee.
Concerning matters limited to
his own campus he shall be responsible to the Dean on his own campus.
(b) The Directors shall be appointed for terms of three years from among
the Tutors by the Board of Visitors and Governors on the recommendation of the
Pres ident, afte r consultation with the Deans and a special committee consisting of
fou7: members, two from each campus, selected from among themselves by the Tutors
havmg tenure . The Directors shall be Tutors of the Graduate Institute.
(c) Every three years, after consultation with his fellow director and the
Committee for the Graduate Institute on his own campus, one of the Directors shall
submit a S tatement of Educational Policy and Program for the Graduate Institute to
the. Instruction Committee for discussion at its joint meeting. After making any
revisions he dee ms appropriate, he shall submit it to the Faculty as a whole for
d iscussion.
(2)
The Faculty of the Graduate Institute.
(a) Each Director, after consultation with the Committee for the Graduate
In stitute on that campus, and in accordance with the recommendation of the
In structi on Committee on the same campus, shall recommend to the President Tutors
of th e Graduate Institute for summer appointment to teach in the Graduate Institute
for one session.
(b) During the summer term the Tutors of the Graduate Institute on each
campus sh all have the authority to recommend to the Board of Visitors and Governors
candidates for degrees.
(4)
Committees for the Graduate Institute:
~
~
y
-,
�27
(a) On each campus the Committee for the Graduate Institute shares with
the Director on the same campus responsibility for carrying out the program of instruction of the Graduate Institute and for the general welfare of the students.
(b) Each Committee shall consist of three Tutors who have experience in
the Institute, in addition to the Director, who shall serve as Chairman.
(c) Members of each Committee shall be appointed by the Director with the
concurrence of the Dean on the same campus after consultation with the Committee
for the Graduate Institute on that campus.
(5)
Procedure for Instructional Proposals.
(a) Major proposals concerning matters of instruction or policy shall
originate with one of the Directors, after consultation with the other Director and
with the Committee for the Graduate Institute and the Dean on his own campus. Such
proposals shall be submitted to the Instruction Committee of the College; if approved,
they shall come before the Faculty in accordance with Article X(l)(a)(i).
(b) Proposals concerning instruction or policy that are not considered
major shall originate with the Director on the campus where they are intended to be
put into effect, after consultation with the Committee for the Graduate Institute and
the Dean on that campus. Such proposals shall be submitted to the Instruction
Committee on that campus; if approved , they shall come before the Faculty in
accordance with Article X(l)(a)(ii).
Article XIV
THE ALUMNI
(1) Alumni shall be life-long members of the College, since St. John's College is
a community not limited by geographical location or fixed periods of time.
(2) The Alumni Association is the formal means by which alumni participate
in the life of the College. Through the election of alumni members of the Board of
Visitors and Governors, alumni share in the direction of that life. In these and other
ways, alumni shall be given the opportunity to serve the College.
(3) The College shall cooperate with the Alumni Association to enable alumni
to assist in providing services such as recruiting and interviewing prospective students, placing graduates in appropriate employment, and advising students concerning careers and admission to graduate and professional schools.
(4) The College, in cooperation with the Alumni Association, shall provide
seminars and other appropriate educational activities in Annapolis, in Santa Fe, and
in other places.
Article XV
THE STAFF
(1) Members of the Staff assist with the administratio n and maintenance of the
College , performing duties necessary to its well-being. They are subject to appropriate Staff rules and regulations.
�.
28
(2) Members of the Staff on either campus may establis h for themsel ves
a Staff
Council for the purpose of better commun ication and understa nding of
College
policies as a benefit to the College as a whole. The Staff Council shall seek
to establis h
and maintai n formal channel s of commu nication among the whole Staff
and between
the Staff and the appropr iate College Officers . The Treasur er on each campus
shall
review Staff employm ent regulati ons with the Staff Council and discuss
with
them
any changes propose d.
(3) The Staff Council may establis h such commit tees as it deems appropr
iate.
Article XVI
AMENDMENTS AND REVIEW
(1) This Po lity may be amende d by a two-thir ds vote of those member s
voting
at any regular or special meeting of the Board, provide d, howeve r, that
the
amendm ent has been propose d by not fewer than ten percent of the member
s of the
Board or a majority of the Polity R eview Commit tee, and that the votes of
no less than
one-thir d of the members of the entire Board eligible to vote are in favor
of such
amendm ent, and further provide d written notice of the propose d amendm
ent has
been given to members of the Bo ard and to the Faculty not less than thirty
days prior
to such meeting. The Faculty shall have the right to inform the Board in
writing of
its recomm endation with respect to the propose d amendm ent by the date
of the Board
meeting at which the amendm ent is to be conside red.
(2) Amendm ents may be propose d at any regular meeting of either the
Faculty
in Annapo lis or the Faculty in S anta Fe upon petition of not less than ten
percent of
the member s on either campus . No such proposa l shall be acted upon earlier
than
the next regular meeting of the Faculty , whether in Annapo lis or in Santa
Fe. Twothirds vote of the entire Faculty in residenc e sh all be required for approva
l and the
amendm ent shall not become effectiv e unless approve d by the Board in
the
manner
set forth in Section (1) above.
(3) Every fi ve years this Polity shall be reviewe d by a committee of six,
three
to be elected by the Faculty on each campus. The report of the Committee
shall be
submitt ed to one reg ular Faculty meeting and voted upon at the next regular
Faculty
meeting . A two-thirds vote of the Faculty in residenc e shall be required
for
approva l.
Whatev er action is thus recomm ended by the Faculty shall be submitt ed
to
the Board for final decision in the manner set forth in Section (1) above.
Article XVII
COMPLIANCE WITH LAW
No provisio n of this Polity shall be constru ed to contrave ne any applicab
le
federal or state l aw. If any provisio n is determi ned to contrave ne any such
law, that
provisio n shall be deemed not a pan of th.is Polity, and this Polity's remaini
ng
provisio ns shall remain in full force and effect.
���
Dublin Core
The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/.
Title
A name given to the resource
Charter and Polity of the College
Description
An account of the resource
Revised and amended editions of the St. John's College Charter and Polity.<br /><br />The College's first Charter and Polity was published as the <a href="https://digitalarchives.sjc.edu/items/show/3768">September 1950</a> issue of the <em><a href="https://digitalarchives.sjc.edu/collections/show/37">Bulletin of St. John's College in Annapolis</a></em>. Revised and amended versions were published as individual issues of the <em>Bulletin</em> in <a href="https://digitalarchives.sjc.edu/items/show/3746">1951</a>, <a href="https://digitalarchives.sjc.edu/items/show/7844">1960</a>, <a href="https://digitalarchives.sjc.edu/items/show/7845">1963</a>, and <a href="https://digitalarchives.sjc.edu/items/show/7846">1965</a>. <br /><br />The Charter and Polity was published as a separate document in <a href="https://digitalarchives.sjc.edu/items/show/7850">1955</a> and again from <a href="https://digitalarchives.sjc.edu/items/show/7851">1970</a> forward. The most recent version of the Charter and Polity is also available on the College's <a href="https://www.sjc.edu/about/leadership/board-visitors-governors/charter-polity">website</a>. <br /><br />Click on <strong><a title="Items in the Charter and Polity of the College Collection" href="https://digitalarchives.sjc.edu/items/browse?collection=62&sort_field=Dublin+Core%2CDate">Items in the Charter and Polity of the College Collection</a></strong> to view and sort all items in the collection.
Creator
An entity primarily responsible for making the resource
St. John's College
Publisher
An entity responsible for making the resource available
St. John's College
Contributor
An entity responsible for making contributions to the resource
St. John's College Greenfield Library
Text
A resource consisting primarily of words for reading. Examples include books, letters, dissertations, poems, newspapers, articles, archives of mailing lists. Note that facsimiles or images of texts are still of the genre Text.
Original Format
The type of object, such as painting, sculpture, paper, photo, and additional data
PDF
Page numeration
Number of pages in the original item.
28 pages
Dublin Core
The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/.
Title
A name given to the resource
Charter and Polity of the College, 1993
Description
An account of the resource
Charter and Polity of the College, amended and restated as of April 1993.
Creator
An entity primarily responsible for making the resource
St. John's College
Publisher
An entity responsible for making the resource available
St. John's College
Coverage
The spatial or temporal topic of the resource, the spatial applicability of the resource, or the jurisdiction under which the resource is relevant
Annapolis, MD
Santa Fe, NM
Date
A point or period of time associated with an event in the lifecycle of the resource
1993-04
Type
The nature or genre of the resource
text
Format
The file format, physical medium, or dimensions of the resource
PDF
Subject
The topic of the resource
St. John's College (Annapolis, Md.)
Legal instruments
Language
A language of the resource
English
Identifier
An unambiguous reference to the resource within a given context
Charter_and_Polity_1993
Charter and Polity
-
https://s3.us-east-1.amazonaws.com/sjcdigitalarchives/original/538d8518f881db24b1567b9f41339227.pdf
988479ee31e9aa9d79fd5a00c781d08c
PDF Text
Text
St. John 's Coll ege
Charte r and Polity
of the Colleg e
Annapolis, Maryland
Santa Fe, New Mexico
Amende d and Restated as of July 1992
Founded as King William's School, 1696
Chartered as St. John's College, 1784
�1
HISTORY
St. John's College was founded in 1696 as King William's School in accordance
with a Petitionary Act for free-schools of the General Assembly of the Colony of
Maryland. Following the Revolutionary War, the General Assembly of the new State
of Maryland granted a Charter to St. John's College pursuant to and as a part of
Chapter 37 of the Laws of Maryland of 1784. This Charter was subsequently amended
by the General Assembly through Resolution No. 41 of 1832.
Since this Polity can be amended between printings, the current official Polity is
kept in the offices of the Presidents of St John's College.
The Visitors and Governors of St. John's College in 1950 revised the Charter to
eliminate extraneous and obsolete matter and to make cenain other amendments
consistent with present requirements and conditions. It was the opinion of the
Attorney General of Maryland that the original Charter of the College was subject to
the general Corporation Laws of Maryland and might accordingly be amended by the
Visitors and Governors, pursuant to these laws, without legislative action by the
General Assembly. Subsequent amendments were made in 1961, in 1963, in 1965, in
1970, and in 1975.
When the decision was reached to establish a second St. John's College in Santa
Fe, New Mexico, amendments were made to the Chaner to authorize branches or
extensions of the College. The Chaner was then filed with the Corporations
Commission of the State of New Mexico as a foreign corporation. The College was thus
empowered to grant degrees in New Mexico under the provisions of its Maryland
Chaner.
A Polity for the College was first suggested at a faculty meeting in 1943 by the
Dean. A f acuity committee was elected and drafted a Polity which was then
promulgated by the President. In April 1949 the Faculty elected a committee to revise
the Polity. The resulting document was approved by the Faculty on April 9, 1950, and
was adopted by the Board of Visitors and Governors on July 8, 1950. Subsequent
quinquennial reviews were made by elected faculty committees, and desired
amendments were recommended by the Faculty to the Board of Visitors and
Governors. The Polity was thus amended at regular meetings of the Board held on
May 14, 1955; May 21, 1960; May 15, 1965; June 6, 1970; April 19, 1975; January 16, 1982;
April 19, 1986; and October 19, 1991. Other amendments were adopted by the Board at
regular meetings on February 22 and December 9, 1961; February 23 and September
28, 1963; October 3, 1970; February 18, 1972; October 25, 197S; January 24, 1976;
November 6, 1982; July 21, 1984; April 20, 1985; October 25, 1986; April 11, 1987; October
19, 1991; and July 18, 1992.
�2
3
CHARTER OF ST. JOHN'S COLLEGE
establishing the said intended college. this General Assembly give and grant. and
upon that condition do hereby give and grant to the Visitors and Governors of the
said College by the . name of "The Visitors and Governors of Saint John's College in the
State of Maryland." and their successors all that four acres within the City of
Annapolis purchased for the use by the public and conveyed on the 2nd day of
October. 1744. by Stephen Bordley. Esq.. to Thos. Bladen. Esq.. then Governor. to have
and to hold the said four acres of land with the appurtenances to the said Visitors and
Governors and their successors for the only use. benefit and behoof of the said
college and seminary of universal learning forever.
WHEREAS. institutions for the liberal education of youth in the principles of
virtue. knowledge and useful literature are of the highest benefit to society. in order
to train up and perpetuate a succession of able and honest men for discharging the
various offices and duties of life. both civil and religious. with usefulness and
reputation. and such institutions of learning have accordingly been promoted and
encouraged by the wisest and best regulated States; And whereas. it appears to this
General Assembly that many public spirited individuals. from an earnest desire to
promote the founding a college or seminary of learning on the Western Shore of this
State have subscribed and procured subscriptions to a considerable amount. and
there is reason to believe that very large additions will be obtained to the same
throughout the different counties of the said Shore. if they were made capable in law
to receive and apply the same towards founding and carrying on a college or general
seminary of learning with such salutary plan and with such legislative assistance
and direction as the General Assembly might think fit. and this General Assembly.
highly approving those generous exertions of individuals. are desirous to embrace
the present favorable occasion of peace and prosperity for making lasting provision
for the encouragement and advancement of all useful knowledge and literature
through every part of this State;
BE IT ENACTED:
II. That a college or general seminary of learning by the name of "St. John's
College" be established on the said Western Shore upon the following fundamental
and inviolable principles; namely, first, the said college shall be founded and maintained forever upon a most liberal plan for the benefit of youth of every religious
denomination. who shall be freely admitted to equal privileges and advantages of
education and to all the hterary honors of the college. according to their merit without requiring or enforcing any religious or civil test. or urging their attendance
upon any. particular religious worship or service other than what they have been
educated in or have the consent and approbation of their parents or guardians to
attend; nor shall any preference be given in the choice of a Principal. VicePnnc1pal or other Professor, Master or Tutor in said college on account of his
particular religious profession. having regard solely to his moral character and
literary abilities and other necessary qualifications to fill the place for which he
shall be chosen.
IV. That the governing body or board of said College shall consist of not more
than forty-nine nor less than thirteen Visitors and Governors. to be chosen and to
hold office in such manner as the said Visitors and Governors may determine and
prescribe by their fundamental ordinances; provided. however. that the Governors
of the States of Maryland and New Mexico shall act ex officio as two of the total
number of Visitors and Governors of said college during their respective terms in
said offices; and that the said Visitors and Governors and their successors duly chosen
shall be and are hereby declared to be one community. corporation and body politic
to have continuance forever by the name of
ST. JOHN'S COLLEGE
and by the same name they shall have perpetual succession.
VII.
That if the City of Annapolis should be fixed upon as a proper place for
VIII. That the said Visitors and Governors and their successors by the same
name shall be able and capable in law to purchase. have and enjoy to them and their
successors in fee. or for any other less estate or estates. any lands, tenements. rents.
annuities. pensions or other hereditaments by the gift. grant. bargain. sale,
alienation. enfeoffment. release, confirmation. or devise of any person or persons.
bodies politic or corporate capable to make the same. and such lands. tenements.
rents, annuities. pensions or other hereditaments or any less estates. rights or interests of or in the same at their pleasure to grant. alien. sell and transfer in such
manner and form as they shall think meet and convenient for the furtherance of the
said college; And also that they may take and receive any sum or sums of money. and
any kind, manner or portion of goods and chattels that shall be given. sold or
bequeathed to them by any person or persons. bodies politic or corporate capable to
make a gift. sale or bequest thereof and employ the same towards erecting. setting up
and maintaining the said college in such manner as they shall judge most necessary
and convenient for the instruction. improvement and education of youth in the
vernacular and learned languages. and generally in any kind of literature. arts and
sciences. which they shall think proper to be taught for training up good, useful and
accomplished men for the service of their country. in church and state.
IX. That the said Visitors and Governors and their successors by the name
aforesaid shall be able in law to sue and be sued, plead and be impleadable in any
court or courts, before any judge, judges, or justices within this State and elsewhere ·
in all and all manner of suits, complaints, pleas. causes, matters and demands of
whatsoever kind, nature or form they be and all and every other matter and thing
therein to do in as full and effectual a manner as any other person or persons. bodies
politic or corporate within this State or any of the United States of America in like
cases may or can do.
X. That the said Visitors and Governors and their successors shall have full
power and authority to have. make and use one common and public seal and likewise
one privy seal with such devices and inscriptions as they shall think proper. and to
ascertain. fix and regulate the uses of both seals. by their own laws and the same
seals or either of them to change. break. alter and renew at their pleasure.
XI. That the said Visitors and Governors and their successors from time to time
and at all times hereafter. forever. shall have full power and authority to constitute
and appoint in such manner as they shall think best and most convenient, a
principal. a vice-principal of the said college and professors with proper tutors and
assistants for instructing the students and scholars of the said seminary in all the
liberal arts and sciences. and in the ancient and modem tongues and languages; and
the said principal. vice-principal and professors so constituted and appointed from
time to time shall be known and distinguished forever as one learned body or faculty
by the name of "The Principal, Vice-Principal and Professors of St. John's College";
�4
-
and by that name shall be capable of exerc1S1ng such powers and authorities as the
Visitors and Governors of the said college and their successors shall by their
ordinances think necessary to delegate to them for the instruction. discipline and
government of the said seminary and of all the students. scholars. ministers and
servants belonging to the same.
XIV. That a majority of the said Visitors and Governors for the time being and
duly assembled at any meeting upon due notice given to the whole body of Visitors
and Governors shall have full power and authority to make fundamental ordinances
for the government of the said college and the instruction of youth as aforesaid. and
by these ordinances to appoint such a number of their own body not less than seven.
as they may think proper for transacting all general and necessary business of the
said seminary and making temporary rules for the government of the same; and also
by the said fundamental ordinances to delegate to the principal. vice-principal and
professors such powers and authorities as they may think best for the standing
government of the said seminary and of the execution of the ordinances and rules of
the same; provided always that they be not repugnant to the form of government of
any law of this State.
XV. And for animating and encouraging the students of said college to a
laudable diligence, industry and progress in useful literature and science. be it
enacted that the said Visitors and Governors and their successors shall by a written
mandate under their privy seal and the hand of someone of the Visitors and Governors to be chosen annually as their President, according to the ordinance to be made
for that purpose. have full power and authority to direct the principal. viceprincipal and professors to hold public commencements either on stated annual days,
or occasionally as the future ordinances of the said seminary may direct and at such
commencements to admit any of the students in the said college or any other persons
meriting the same (whose names shall be severally inserted in the same mandate) to
any degree or degrees in any of the faculties, arts and sciences and liberal
professions to which persons are usually admitted in other colleges or universities in
America or Europe; And it is hereby enacted that the principal, or in the case of his
death or absence, the vice-principal, and in case of the death or absence of both. the
senior professor who may be present. shall make out and sign with his name
diplomas or certificates of the admission to such degree or degrees, which shall be
scaled with the public or greater seal of the said corporation or college and delivered
to the graduates as honorable and perpetual testimonials of such admission; which
diplomas, if thought necessary for doing greater honor to such graduates, shall also
be signed with the names of the diffcrent professors or as many of them as can
conveniently sign the same; provided always that no student or students within the
said college shall ever be admitted to any such degree or degrees. or have their name
inserted in any mandate for a degree, until such student or students have been first
duly examined, and thought worthy of the same.
XVI. That the ordinances which shall be from time to time made by the Visitors
and Governors of the said college and their successors with an account of their other
proceedings and of the management of the estate and moneys committed to their
trust, shall when required be laid before the General Assembly for their inspection
and examination. but in case at any time hereafter through oversight, or otherwise
through misapprehension and mistaken constructions of the powers • . liberties and
franchises in this Charter or Act of Incorporation granted. or intended to be granted,
any ordinance should be made by the said corporation of Visitors and Governors or
any matters done and transacted by the corporation contrary to the tenor hereof, it is
5
enacted that although such ordinances, acts and doings shall in themselves be null
and void, yet they shall not. however, in any courts of law, or by the General
Assembly, be deemed, taken, interpreted or adjudged into an avoidance or forfeiture
of this Charter and Act of Incorporation, but the same shall be and remain unhurt,
inviolate and entire unto the said corporation of Visitors and Governors in perpetual
succession; and all their acts conformable to the powers, true intent and meaning
hereof shall be and remain in full force and validity. the nullity and avoidance of
such illegal acts to the contrary in any wise notwithstanding.
XVII. That this Charter and Act of Incorporation and every part thereof shall
be good and available in all things in the law according to the true intent and
meaning thereof, and shall be construed, reputed and adjudged in all cases most
favorably on the behalf and for the best benefit and bchoof of the said Visitors and
Governors and their successors, so as most effectually to answer the valuable end of
this Act of Incorporation towards the general advancement and promotion of useful
knowledge, science and virtue.
XVIII. That the College may establish and operate one or more branches in one
or more states of the United States.
-
�6
7
Polity of St John's College
Preamble
Education is the making of men out of children by bringing them into the
world of inherited customs, intellectual traditions, and spiritual ties. Institutions of
learning are set up for this purpose. Beyond this they should also seek to develop the
moral and intellectual powers of men to enable them to fulfill best their freely
chosen tasks and thus to take their own responsible part in shaping the future. St.
John's College is a community of learning committed to holding these ends constantly
in sight and to seeking the best means of attaining them.
In the Polity as hereinafter set forth the nouns "alumnus" and "alumni" and
"man" and "men," e1'ther alone or in
• compoun ds sueh as "ch airman
•
" an d "ch airmen,
•
"
and the pronouns "he," "him," and "his," are to be taken as referring to persons
whether male or female.
St. John's College strives to illuminate the common heritage of mankind in a
persisting study of the great documents in which that heritage can be found. It is
concerned with the unity of knowledge, an understanding of the great issues faced
by men, and the moral foundations on which the conduct of men's lives can be based.
To provide proper conditions for the pursuit of these ends, we, the Board of Visitors
and Governors, after consultation with the Faculty, do ordain and establish this Polity
for St. John's College.
1111111
1111111
1
1
..
�8
Article I
THE COLLEGE
(1) St. John's College is by its Charter a legal entity, carrying on its functions
from its campuses in Annapolis, Maryland, and in Santa Fe, New Mexico. Under the
Charter of the College, all power, authority, and responsibility pertaining to the
College are vested in the Visitors and Governors.
(2) The College consists of the following: The Board of Visitors and Governors,
the Faculty, the Graduate and Undergraduate Students, the Alumni and the Staff, and
other members who may be named from time to time by the Board of Visitors and
Governors.
(3) Under the Charter, "the said Visitors and Governors, and their successors,
from time to time, and at all times hereafter, forever, shall have full power and
authority to constitute and appoint, in such manner as they shall think best and most
convenient, a principal and vice-principal •of the said College, and professors, with
proper tutors and assistants, for instructing the students and scholars of the said
seminary in all the liberal arts and sciences, and in the ancient and modem tongues
and languages; and the said principal, vice-principal, and professors, so constituted
and appointed from time to time shall be known and distinguished forever as one
learned body or faculty, by the name of 'The Principal, Vice-Principal, and
Professors of St. John's College;' and by that name shall be capable of exercising such
powers and authorities as the Visitors and Governors of the said college and their
successors shall by their ordinances think necessary to delegate to them for the
instruction, discipline, and government of the said seminary and of all the students,
scholars, ministers and servants belonging to the same."
(a) The "principal" shall be the President, or if there are two Presidents,
the Presidents. When 'president' is used in this Polity it shall mean:
(i) with respect to membership on the Board of Visitors and Governors, in the Faculty, on committees of the Board, and sitting ex officio with the
Instruction Committee, and for presentation of, and response to, the Statement of
Educational Policy and Program (Article V (l)(c)), the President of the Annapolis
campus and the President of the Santa Fe campus;
(ii) with respect to membership on committees or sitting ex officio
with committees, and actions or procedures relating to one campus, the President of
that campus;
(iii) with respect to actions under Article TT (12)(b) or actions or
procedures involving the entire College under Article X (l)(a)(i) and Article X
(l)(a)(iii ), either President.
(b) The "vice-principal" shall be the Dean who is serving as the Chairman
of the Instruction Committee.
(c) There shall be a Dean of St. John's College in Annapolis and a Dean of St.
John's College in Santa Fe.
(d) The "professors, tutors and assistants" shall bear the title Tutor or Tutor
-
9
Emeritus.
Emeriti.
Tutors who have completed their tenure appointments shall be Tutors
(e) There shall be Vice-Presidents for College Advancement and Treasurers.
(f) There shall be Associate members of the Faculty, hereinafter called
Associates, who shall be on either campus, as the offices may be deemed necessary,
the Registrar, the Librarian, the Director of Athletics, the Director of Student Activities, the Director of Admissions, the Director of Alumni Activities, the Director of
Financial Aid, and the Director of Placement.
(g) The "one learned body or faculty," composed of the President, the Deans,
the other Tutors, the Tutors Emeriti, the Vice-Presidents for College Advancement,
the Treasurers, and the Associates, shall bear the title The Faculty of St. John's
College.
(h) All who have formally matriculated, are at the present enrolled, and
are in good standing shall be called Students of St. John's College.
(i) The Directors and the Tutors of the Graduate Institute shall be called The
Faculty of the Graduate Institute.
(j) All who have been awarded a degree by the College shall be called
Alumni. In addition, all who have completed at least one semester of undergraduate
study or at least one segment of Graduate Institute study, but who are not currently
enrolled, shall be called Alumni either a) in the case of undergraduate students,
when their class bas graduated, or b) in the case of Graduate Institute students, at the
end of three full sessions of the Graduate Institute, summer and winter, after the one
in which they last enrolled. All who have ever been Alumni shall continue to be.
(k) The Staff shall consist of all persons appointed by the President who are
not members of the Faculty of St. John's College or the Faculty of the Graduate
Institute.
(1) There shall be no discrimination at St. John's College in appointments,
conditions of employment, admissions, educational policy, financial aid programs,
athletics, or other activities, on the basis of race, religion, age, sex, national origin,
color, or physical handicap, discrimination in each case being understood in
accordance with the proscriptions of federal law.
(m) No one shall be employed by the College beyond June 30th of the
academic year in which be reaches the age of 70, without the annual approval of the
Board of Visitors and Governors.
Article II
VISITORS AND GOVERNORS
(1) Qualifications for Membership.
Persons shall be eligible for membership
on the Board of Visitors and Governors who are concerned for the maintenance,
progress, and vitality of St. John's College's educational program and who are willing
and able to discharge the responsibilities of trusteeship with devotion and energy.
�11
(2) Members. The Board of Visitors and Governors shall consist of not more
than sixty members, comprising the President, the Deans, the Governors of Marylan
d
and New Mexico, ex officio, and fifty-four members, of whom forty-eight shall
be
elected by the entire Board and six shall be elected by the Alumni of the College,
the manner and for the terms hereinafter provided. In recognition of meritori in
ous
service to the College, Visitors Emeriti may be elected to the Board who may attend
all
meetings of the Board, with voice in deliberation, but without vote.
(3) Elections by the Board. At each annual meeting, the Board shall elect a.
class of sixteen members for a term of three years, to succeed those members whose
term expires at the conclusion of said meeting. Those members elected shall begin
their term at the meeting next following their election. The procedure for
nomination and election shall be as follows:
There shall be a Nominating Committee of four members of the Board
appointed by the Chairman. The Chairman and the President shall sit with the
committee, ex officio, when nominations to Board membership are being consider
ed.
The Nominating Committee shall recommend to each member of the Board in writing,
not later than thiny days prior to the annual meeting at which the election is to
be
held, at least one candidate for each of the places to be filled by such election,
including each position as an officer of the Board. Additional nominations may
made in writing, addressed to the Chairman, signed by at least five members of be
the
Board, prior to the date above provided for the repon of the Nominating Commit
tee,
and any such additional nominations shall be reported to the Board by the Commit
tee
at the time of its repon.
Voting on nominations at annual meetings may be by ballot, each member
present to vote for sixteen of the said nominees. In case the balloting results in
for one or more positions, the Board shall determine the procedure to resolve thea tie
No nominee for member or officer of the Board shall be deemed elected who has tie.
not
received the affirmative votes of at least a majority of the members present at the
meeting.
If there should be fewer than sixteen members in any class prior to the end of
the term for such class, the vacancy may be filled pursuant to the procedure provided above for regular elections, except that the election may take place at any regular
meeting. A member elected to fill any such vacancy shall hold office for the
remainder of the term of the class in which such vacancy occurred.
(4) Elections by the Alumni. Each year in the spring, three alumni shall be
elected to membership for a term of three years, in such manner that there shall
nine members of the Board elected by the alumni, consisting of three classes of be
members each. Outgoing alumni members shall continue to serve until their two
successors are elected.
The Director of Alumni Activities shall request the Board of the Alumni
Association to nominate at least one candidate for each vacancy. Additional candidates may be nominated by petition of any thirty alumni. All alumni shall be eligible
to vote for the alumni members of the Board. Balloting will be conducted by mail
by
the Director of Alumni Activities.
In the event that for any reason there should be fewer than two alumni members in any class prior to the end of the term of that class, the vacancy shall be
filled
by interim election, conducted in the same manner. Newly-elected alumni shall
begin their term at the meeting next following the annual meeting of the Board.
(5) Faculty Representation at Board Meetings. Three members of the Faculty
shall be elected by the Faculty on each campus to attend all regular sessions of
the
Board on the campus to which they belong, with voice in deliberation, but without
vote.
(6) Student Representation at Board Meetings. Two students shall be elected by
the students on each campus to attend all regular sessions of the Board on the campus
to which they belong, with voice in deliberation, but without vote.
(7) Graduate Institute Director Representation at Board Meetings. Each
Director of the Graduate Institute may attend all regular sessions of the Board on
the
campus to which he belongs, with voice in deliberation, but without vote.
(8) Graduate Institute Student Representation at Board Meetings. A student of
the Graduate Institute shall be elected by the students of the Graduate Institute
on
each campus to attend all regular sessions of the Board on the campus to which
he
belongs, with voice in deliberation, but without vote.
(9) Alumni Association Representation at Board Meetings. The President of
Alumni association shall be invited to attend all regular sessions of the Board, with the
voice in deliberation, but without vote.
(10) Staff Representation at Board Meetings. The Staff on each campus shall be
invited to send two representatives to all regular sessions of the Board at that campus,
with voice in deliberation, but without vote.
(11) Reelection. A member of the Board elected by the Board or by the Alumni
may be elected for not more than two consecutive terms, but may, after a second
consecutive term, be reelected to membership at the annual meeting in the year
following the expiration of the member's second term.
(12)
Meetings of the Board.
(a) Regular meetings of the Board shall be held quanerly in either Annapolis or Santa Fe. The Spring meeting shall be called the annual meeting. The time
and place of regular meetings shall be determined by the Chairman, in consulta
tion
with the President, and notice of regular meetings shall be given not less than
fifteen days prior to such meetings.
(b) Special meetings of the Board may be called by the President, the Chairman, the Executive Committee, or any ten members of the Board, not less than seven
days after the dispatch of written, faxed, or telegraphic notice of the time, place,
and
purposes of the meeting. Such notice may be dispensed with if waived in writing
by
all members of the Board either before or after the meeting.
(c) Any business may be conducted at a regular meeting without specific
notice of such business (except that which is required by law or as provided herein
as to elections and amendments), but no business shall be conducted at any special
.
meeting unless notice of such business bas been given, or has been waived as
above
provided.
�12
13
(d) One third of the members of the Board shall constitute a quorum for the
transaction of business.
respect to such investments and reinvestments. The Committee shall report at each
regular meeting any action taken hereunder since. the previous meeting.
(e) The Board in regular session is open to elected and ex officio members,
to Visitors Emeriti, to Associates invited by the President, and to official representatives of the Faculty, Students, Graduate Institute, Alumni Association and Staff.
Attendance at Executive sessions shall be limited to voting members and Visitors
Emeriti. Public sessions shall be open without restriction. The Chairman of the
Board, in consultation with the President, shall determine whether any meeting or
portion of a meeting shall be in regular, executive, or public session.
(ii) The Finance Committee shall review the proposed annual budgets
of the College prior to their presentation for approval by the Board and shall make
recommendations to the Board with respect to the budgets at the meeting at which
they are presented.
(iii) The Finance Committee shall study, and periodically advise the
Board with respect to, the financial business policies and practices of the College, and
shall make such special studies and reports as the Board may from time to time
request.
(13) Officers of the Board. At each annual meeting the Board shall elect a
Chairman, two Vice-Chairmen, and a Secretary, to hold office until the next annual
meeting or until their successors are elected. Vacancies in any such offices may be
filled at any regular meeting, or any special meeting called for that purpose. Such
officers shall perform the customary duties of such offices, and such other duties as
the Board may from time to time direct.
(14)
Committees of the Board.
(a) Executive Committee. The Chairman, the Vice-Chairmen, the Secretary,
the Presidents, the Deans, and four other members chosen annually by the Board at
the annual meeting shall comprise the Executive Committee of the Board. In
intervals between meetings of the Board, the Executive Committee may act for the
Board, except in those matters expressly delegated to some other committee, person,
or persons. Seven members of the Executive Committee present at a meeting shall
constitute a quorum for the transaction of business.
(f) Audit Committee. There shall be an Audit Committee of five persons,
including a Chairman, appointed by the Chairman of the Board. The Treasurers shall
serve as non-voting Staff to the Committee.
-
(i) The Committee shall review in detail the annual report of the
independent auditors and discuss audit findings with the auditors, unattended by
employees of the College.
(ii) The Committee shall meet with representatives of the independent auditors to the next audit to discuss scope and procedures and any other matters
requiring special attention.
(iii) The Committee shall discuss with College personnel any corrective action required as a result of the audit report.
(b) Presidential Search Committee. There shall be a Presidential Search
Committee to recommend the appointment of a President as provided in Article IV(2).
(iv) The Committee shall recommend to the Board the appointment or
reappointment of independent auditors to conduct the audit for the next fiscal year.
(c) Nominating Committee. There shall be a nominating Committee for
membership of the Board and for officers of the Board as provided in Aniclc 11(3).
(v) The Committee shall report to the Board annually on its review of
the audit and shall bring to the attention of the Board any matters related thereto
requiring Board action.
(d) Visiting Committee. There shall be a Visiting Committee appointed by
the Chairman. The Visiting Committee shall meet at least once annually with the
Instruction Committee on each campus. The Visiting Committee shall discuss the
Statement of Educational Policy and Program of the Chairman of the Instruction
Committee and become acquainted with the aims of the College and bow they are
being realized.
(e) Finance Committee. There shall be a Finance Committee consisting of
the Chairman, the Presidents, and the Treasurers of the College, ex officio, and six or
more members appointed by the Chairman. The Chairman of the Board ahall appoint
one of the members to be the Chairman of the Committee. In carrying out its
functions the Committee may be divided into two working subcommittees, one on investments, one on budget, each with its Chairman. The Finance Committee shall have
the following powers and duties:
(i) The Finance Committee shall have full power to direct the investment and reinvestment of all funds of the College, including endowment and
restricted funds, and the proper officers of the Board and the College are authorized
to carry out all written directions, signed by the Chairman of the Committee, with
(g) Compensation Review Committee. There shall be a Compensation Review Committee of not more than five members, including a Chairman, appointed by
the Chairman of the Board.
(i) The Committee shall recommend to the Board policies for direct
and indirect compensation of Tutors, Associate members of the Faculty, other Faculty
members, and Staff at the College. It shall annually review the compensation policies
and performance with respect to them and report the fmdings of this review to the
Board.
-
(ii) The Committee shall recommend to the Board the compensation
of the Presidents, Vice-Presidents for College Advancement, and Treasurers of the
College.
(iii) In matters of policy and compensation, the Committee shall
consult the Presidents and the Chairman of the Finance Committee.
(h) Polity Review Committee.
There shall be a Polity Review Committee of
�15
14
(1) There is delegated to the President by the Visitors and Governors executive
responsibility and authority for the instruction, discipline, and government of the
College, and the President, in tum, may delegate his authority.
not more than five members appointed by the Chairman every fifth year. The
Committee shall receive the report of the Faculty Committee and after appropriate
study shall make recommendations to the Board for consideration at the annual
meeting when the final review of the Polity is consummated. The respective Chairmen of the Board and Faculty Review Committees shall make such arrangements as
they deem appropriate for joint consultation prior to and after the .adoption of the
report by the Faculty.
There shall be a President for the Annapolis campus and a President for the
Santa Fe campus, each appointed as provided in Article IV (2). There is delegated to
each President by the Visitors and Governors executive responsibility and authority
for the instruction, discipline, and government of the campus of which he is
President, and the President, in tum, may delegate his authority. In the interest of
the orderly conduct of business and of maintaining and promoting the unity of the
College, the Presidents shall regularly consult and communicate with each other and,
as appropriate, with other College officials, ·on matters of common concern.
(i) Other Committees. The Chairman may appoint such other standing or
special committees of the Board as he may deem desirable or which the Board may
request.
(j) Former members of the Board and Visitors Emeriti may be appointed by
the Chairman to serve on Committees at his discretion.
(2) The President shall be appointed by the Board of Visitors and Governors on
the recommendation of a Committee composed of five members of the Board of
Visitors and Governors, at least one of whom is an alumnus, the Deans, and one Tutor
having tenure from each campus elected by the Faculty on that campus. This Committee shall be known as the Presidential Search Committee. It shall consult with the
continuing President in a regular and timely fashion. Prior to making its final recommendation, it shall, on both campuses, consult with all other appropriate persons
and shall arrange for the final candidates to meet with the Faculty and the
Instruction Committee.
(k) Except for the Presidential Search Committee and the Polity Review
Committee, committee appointments shall be made annually. Members of the
Committees serve until their successors have been appointed.
(1) Any member of the Board may, without invitation, attend any Board
committee meeting, except those of the Presidential Search, Nominating and
Executive Committees, but without vote.
(3) The President shall concurrently be a Tutor, but the provisions of Article
VI need not apply.
(m) Whenever a Capital Campaign is in progress, its Chairman shall be an
ex-officio voting member of the Finance and Executive Committees.
(15) Execution of Contracts, Transfer of Securities, Etc.
or more, notes, deeds,
negotiable instruments,
documents on behalf of
persons, of whom one
and of whom the other
campus concerned.
(4) The President and persons to whom he delegates bis authority shall consult
with the Deans, other appropriate persons, and appropriate Faculty committees in
matters of policy, initiation of programs, and setting of priorities affecting the general welfare of the College.
All contracts of $50,000
leases, mortgages, releases, bonds for security or indemnity,
stock certificates, transfers, and powers, and like papers and
the College or the Endowment Funds shall be executed by two
shall be the President, the Chairman, or the Vice-Chairman,
shall be the Secretary of the Board or the Treasurer of the
(5) There shall be a Financial Committee on each campus consisting of the
President as Chairman, the Dean and Treasurer of the campus, and other members
the President may appoint. It will review proposed budgets prior to their being
presented to the Finance Committee of the Board. It will also meet prior to Board
meetings to review performance in the fiscal year to date and emerging budgetary
strengths and weaknesses.
(16) Signing of Checks, Drafts, Etc. All checks, drafts, acceptances, and similar
orders for the payment of money on behalf of the College may be signed by the same
persons authorized to execute contracts, etc., pursuant to Section (15) hereof, but may
also be signed by such persons, and in such manner, as the Board may from time to
time direct by appropriate resolution.
(6) The President shall appoint, or delegate the power to appoint, other committees as may be necessary for the carrying out of his duties and for which no
provision is made under Article IX.
Article Ill
THEFACULTY
The Visitors and Governors by these ordinances hereby delegate to the Faculty
of St. John's College-th e President, the Deans, the other Tutors, the Tutors Emeriti the
Vice-Presidents for College Advancement, the Treasurers, and the Associate s-"powers
and authorities" for the "instruction, discipline, and government" of the College.
Article IV
THEFACULTY: THE PRESID ENT
-
(7) If in the judgment of the Board of Visitors and Governors, the College is
facing a financial exigency at either or both of its campuses which could call for a
reduction in the number of Faculty positions, both Presidents shall immediately
advise the Faculty of the nature and extent of the fmancial . difficulty and consult
with them concerning the best way to address the situation. The Faculty may then
make a formal recommendation to the Presidents on ways to meet the problem, or, if
the Faculty fails so to act, the Deans and the Instruction Committee shall propose a
plan to the Presidents. The Presidents shall jointly then determine a plan which
specifies a preferred course of action to be taken. All necessary steps must be taken
in timely fashion as prescribed by the Board. Nothing herein provided shall limit
the power of the Board to act otherwise in the event of need to reduce or eliminate
Faculty positions.
,
�17
16
(f) During the absence of either Dean from the campus a Tutor with tenure
named by him shall act for the Dean.
Article V
(g) The Dean on each campus shall appoint such committees as may be necessary for the carrying out of his duties and for which no other provision is made.
THE FACULTY: THE CHAIRMAN OF THE INSTRUCTION COMMITI'EE AND THE DEANS
(1)
The Chairman of the Instruction Committee.
Article VI
(a) There is delegated to the Chairman of the Instruction Committee responsibility and authority for the organization of the program of instruction in the
liberal ans that is followed by the Tutors and the Students.
THE FACULTY: THETUTORS
(1) The primary responsibilities of the Tutors are to teach and to make
themselves as competent as possible in all parts of the St. John's Program.
(b) The Deans shall serve alternately, for a term of one year, as Chairman
of the Instruction Committee.
(2) The Tutors shall have authority to recommend to the Visitors and Governors candidates for degrees on their respective campuses.
(c) Each year the Chairman of the Instruction Committee shall, after consultation with the Instruction Committee on his campus, and after discussion with the
Instruction Committee of the College, submit a Statement of Educational Policy and
Program to the Faculty as a whole for discussion. The President shall present the
Statement, together with an account of the Faculty discussion of it and his response to
it, as a report to the Board of Visitors and Governors for its consideration.
(3) Appointment and Reappointment of Tutors. Tutors shall be appointed by
the Visitors and Governors upon recommendation of the President in accordance
with the recommendation of the Dean and the Instruction Committee on that campus
where the Tutors so appointed shall teach.
(a) The schedule of regular appointment of Tutors on each campus shall be
either (i)(A) or (i)(B) below, to be decided by the President in accordance with the
recommendation of the Dean and the Instruction Committee on that campus where
the Tutors so appointed shall teach:
(i)(A) New Tutors shall be appointed for one year unless they are
appointed at mid-year, in which case the initial appointment shall be for a year and a
half. First reappointments shall be for one year. Second and third reappointments
shall be for two and three years respectively.
(i)(B) New Tutors shall be appointed for two years unless they are
appointed at mid-year, in which case the initial appointment shall be for a year and a
half. First and second reappointments shall be for two and three years respectively.
(ii) A Tutor who has completed a three-year appointment must either
be given a tenure appointment or not be reappointed as Tutor. A Tutor may,
however, be given a tenure appointment as early as the conclusion of the first year
of a three-year appointment. Procedures leading to a recommendation for an early
tenure appointment shall be initiated by the Dean and Instruction Committee, but not
without the consent of the appointee, and shall not prejudice subsequent
consideration for a tenure appointment.
Tenure appointments shall not continue beyond June 30th of the academic year in which a Tutor attains the age of 70. Tutors
Emeriti shall retain their privileges and responsibilities in voting at Faculty
meetings.
(d) The Chairman of the Instruction Committee shall, as he or the Chairman
of the Board of Visitors and Governors may deem appropriate, report to the Board on
instructional matters, and shall respond to such questions as the Board, through its
Chairman, may direct to him.
(2) The Deans.
(a) There is delegated to the Deans on their respective campuses responsibility and authority for the supervision of the program of instruction and for the
general welfare of the students and for whatever government of the students be
necessary for the greatest possible attainment of aims of the program. Each Dean
shall be the Chairman of the Instruction Committee on the campus where he serves.
In carrying out his duties, each Dean shall consult regularly with the President and
with the Instruction Committee and the other appropriate Faculty committees on that
campus.
(b) The Deans shall be appointed for terms of five years from among the
Tutors by the Visitors and Governors on the• recommendation of the President after
consultation with a special committee of seven, four from the campus for which the
Dean is being chosen and three from the other campus, selected from among
themselves by the Tutors having tenure.
(iii) Before making recommendations to the President on tenure
appointments the Dean on each campus shall consult with the Instruction Committee
on that campus, after seeking the advice of the Tutors on that campus.
(iv) A Tutor, to be recommended for a tenure appointment, must
have served full-time at the campus where the recommendation is to be made for the
two years immediately preceding the year in which that recommendation is made,
the provisions of (ii) above notwithstanding. In ordinary cases, these two years of
service will be the second year of a two-year appointment and the first year of a
three-year appointment.
These requirements may be waived by the President on the
recommendation of the Dean and Instruction Committee on that campus.
(c) A Dean shall be appointed from among the tutors who have themselves
been appointed in accord with Article Vl(3). If non-tenured, the appointee shall
acquire tenure upon becoming Dean, in which case the provisions of Article Vl(3)(a)
regarding reappointment schedules shall not apply.
(d) To assist them in carrying out their duties, the Deans shall recommend
one or more Tutors to be appointed by the President with the title of Assistant Dean.
(e) During the absence of the President from either campus, the Dean on
that campus shall if necessary exercise the President's prerogative of final decision.
1
�19
18
(b) A non-tenure appointment as Tutor establishes the possibility, but not
the presumption, of its renewal and the granting of a tenure appointment. .Procedures for considering non-tenure appointments differ from those for cons1denng
tenure appointments. Satisfaction of appointment criteria admits of degree. With
each successive reappointment, the criteria are applied more rigorously. For a
tenure appointment the application is especially strict.
(c) For the purpose of temporary transfer between campuses, special appointments of one or two years may be granted to a Tutor in addition to his regular
appointments. The Tutor may ask that such an appointment be counted as a regular
appointment for the purpose of (a) above. In the case of a permanent transfer a
Tutor may ask that his years of service at the other campus be counted toward
tenure according to the provisions of (a) above. Nevertheless, the provisions of (3)
(a)(iv) prevail.
(d) Special one-year appointments and reappointments may be given to
Tutors who intend to teach on a part-time basis only. Such a Tutor may subsequently
apply for and receive a regular appointment. Special part-time appointments may
then be counted on a fractional basis toward eligibility for tenure, but see (3)(a)(iv).
In establishing eligibility for sabbatical leave, special part-time appointments shall
be computed proportionately.
(e) Visiting Tutors may be appointed for a term or a year.
(4)
Notification.
(a) A Tutor under consideration for a non-tenure appointment to begin in a
certain calendar year shall be notified by the President no later than December 15th
of the preceding calendar year whether his reappointment will be recommended to
the Board of Visitors and Governors. If be is reappointed the President shall so notify
him by March 1st of the calendar year in which the new appointment is to begin.
(b) A Tutor under consideration for a tenure appointment to begin in a
certain calendar year shall be notified by the President no later than May 31st of the
preceding calendar year whether his appointment will be recommended to the Board
of Visitors and Governors. If he is appointed the President shall so notify him by
July 31st of that same preceding year.
(5) A Tutor may apply to the Instruction Committee of the College not later
than January 15th for a transfer of campus for the next academic year. Transfers
shall require approval of both Deans after consultation with their Instruction
Committees.
(6) (a) A Tutor may have his appointment terminated by the Board of Visitors
and Governors for one of the following reasons only: (i) failure or inability to
perform bis teaching duties in a satisfactory manner, or (ii) moral turpitude. The
President shall make such a recommendation to the Board of Visitors and Governors
only with the concurrence of the Dean and the Instruction Committee of the campus
concerned. Before the President makes such a recommendation he shall advise the
Tutor affected of his intention to do so, and the Tutor shall have the right to be heard
by the Instruction Committee or, if he prefers, by another committee to be designated
by the President for this purpose.
(b) Either Dean, with the approval of the Instruction Committee on the
campus concerned, may recommend to the President that in the interest of instruction a Tutor be temporarily relieved of his duties in whole or in part at any time.
When such action is taken, the Tutor's salary shall be continued for the remainder of
the current academic year.
(7) The sabbatical leave program is designed to provide Tutors with an opportunity for study, rest, and renewal of spirit, in anticipation of future teaching. It is
the objective of the program to grant all applications for sabbatical leave meeting
the conditions for eligibility set out in (a) of this section. It is understood that Tutors
on such leave will not undertake full-time . remunerative employment elsewhere and
will return to the College.
(a) Eligibility for sabbatical leave shall be upon the following conditions:
(i) A Tutor who has received a tenure appointment may apply for a
full year of sabbatical leave at full salary, provided he shall have completed the
equivalent of seven full years of service to the College since his original appointment, or the equivalent of six full years of service since any previous sabbatical
leave, and the sabbatical leave would not occur in the last two years of his tenure
appointment.
(ii) Such a Tutor may apply for an earlier sabbatical leave of a full
year at partial salary, or a partial year at full salary. The fractional salary or frac
tional year shall be determined by the number of years of teaching completed in
relation to the prescribed total for either an initial or a subsequent sabbatical leave,
as the case may be. In no case shall a Tutor be paid more than his regular salary.
Sabbatical leave for a fraction of a year may not occur during the last two years of a
Tutor's tenure appointment.
(b) If, in the judgment of the President, financial or academic needs at a
campus should require that fewer sabbatical leaves be granted there in a given year
than there are qualified applicants, and if the number that can be granted there
should be smaller than one-sixth of the number of Tutors at that campus having
tenure and not on full-time leave under the provisions of section (8) below, the
President shall so notify the Board of Visitors and Governors and seek its approval for
delaying a sabbatical leave for one or more of the applicants.
(c) If in a year there arc more qualified applicants for sabbatical leave at
any one campus than there are leaves to be granted at that campus, then those
members shall have precedence who meet the following conditions in the order set
forth:
(i) Those who have served for the greater number of years since
their first appointment as Tutor or since their last sabbatical leave, whichever is
more recent;
years;
(ii) Those whose service has been continuous throughout those
(iii) Those whose last sabbatical leave was postponed because of the
financial or academic needs of the College;
�21
20
(iv)
Those who have seniority of appointment.
When there is a conflict of precedence, the Dean and the Instruction Committee on the campus concerned shall be consulted.
the Dean on that campus and a committee constituted by resolution of the Faculty on
that campus.
(5) The Vice-Presidents for College Advancement and Treasurers may be
appointed Tutors under the provisions of Article VI(3)(d).
(d) A Tutor eligible for sabbatical leave shall make application to the President before November 1st for leave to begin the following July 1st, and shall be
informed of the action upon his application not later than January 1st.
Article VIII
THE FACULTY: THE ASSOClATES
(8) The President, with the concurrence of the Dean after consultation with
the Instruction Committee on the campus concerned, may grant leaves of absence to
Tutors for a period of one year or less. At that time it shall be determined whether
the leave shall be counted as service to the College with respect to eligibility for
sabbatical leave and, if so, how. The decision with respect to a request for leave of
absence shall be made in the light of the requirements both of the applicant Tutor
and of the whole College.
(1) Associate members of the Faculty on each campus shall be appointed by the
Board of Visitors and Governors on the recommendation of the President in consultation with the Dean of that campus. The President shall have ultimate executive
authority over the Associates.
(a) Leave of absence may be renewed upon request but not more than twice
in succession except in extraordinary circumstances.
(3) The Associates on either campus may establish for themselves an Associates' Council for the purpose of considering College matters of concern to them and
communicating with other members of the College.
(3)(d).
(2) Associates may be appointed Tutors under the provisions of Article VI
(b) A request for a leave of absence shall be submitted to the President as
early as possible in the academic year before the year in which the leave is to be
taken, but not later than January 15th of that year. Requests for leaves of absence
may be withdrawn at any time prior to April 1st of the year in which the request is
submitted. Requests for leaves of absence for the second semester must be submitted
no later than October 15th.
(5) There shall be the following Associates, as deemed necessary by the President on each campus, with the powers and responsibilities provided.
(c) Tutors on sabbatical leave or leave of absence remain members of the
Faculty with the right of full panicipation in Faculty meetings and all other College
exercises.
(a) The Registrars. The Registrars shall be responsible to the Deans on
their respective campuses. They shall prepare and supervise the registration of
students and shall be responsible for the academic records and schedules of students.
Article VII
(b) The Librarians. The Librarians shall be responsible to the Deans on
their respective campuses for the operation of the library. Appointments of professional members of the Library Staff shall be made upon the recommendation of the
Librarian to the Dean on each campus.
THE FACULTY: THE VICE-PRESIDENTSFOR COLLEGE ADVANCEMENT AND THE
TREASURERS
priate.
(4) The Associates' Council may establish such committees as it deems appro-
(1) The Vice-Presidents for College Advancement shall be responsible to the
President for the supervision and development of all programs in fund-raising, public relations, and alumni relations on their respective campuses.
(c) The Directors of Student Activities and the Directors of Athletics. The
Directors of Student Activities and the Directors of Athletics shall be responsible to
the Deans on their respective campuses for devising and directing programs of recreational activities.
(2) The Vice-President for College Advancement on each campus shall be appointed by the Board of Visitors and Governors on the recommendation of the President made after consultation with the Dean on that campus and a committee
constituted by resolution of the Faculty on that campus.
(d) The Directors of Admissions. The Directors of Admissions shall be
responsible to the Deans on their respective campuses for the annual enrollment of
qualified Freshmen.
(3) The Treasurers shall have charge, on their respective campuses under the
supervision of the President, of all funds and property, and shall have authority to
carry out fiscal and property ttransactions, and to receive and disburse funds, subject
to the prov1s1ons of this Pohty and other directions and arrangements pursuant
thereto.
(4) The Treasurer on each campus shall be appointed by the Board of Visitors
and Governors on the recommendation of the President made after consultation with
(e) The Directors of Alumni Activities. The Directors of Alumni Activities
shall be responsible to the Vice-Presidents for College Advancement. Their primary
duty is to enable the College and the Alumni Association to be of service to alumni.
(f) The Directors of Financial Aid. The Directors of Financial Aid shall be
responsible to the Deans on their respective campuses for the administration of financial aid programs.
�22
(g) The Directors of Placement. The Directors of Placement shall be responsible to the Deans on their respective campuses for helping and counseling
students with respect to graduate and professional schools and careers.
(h) Persons designated Associates under the provisions of Article 1(3)(f) or
of Anicle Vll(3)(k) of this Polity as amended through April 20, 1985, whose offices
are not specifically named in this Article, shall continue to be Associates until the
expiration of their appointments to those offices.
Article IX
THE FACULTY: FACULTY C O M M I T T E E S
(1) The Instruction Committee
(a) The Instruction Committee shares with its Chairmen responsibility for
the program of instruction of the College. It shall consist of twelve Tutors in addition
to the Deans. The President shall sit with the Committee ex officio. Six of the Tutors
shall be elected from each campus of the College. The Instruction Committee shall
meet annually. On each campus the members of the Instruction Committee and the
Dean as Chairman constitute the Instruction Committee of the College on that campus.
The President sits ex officio with the Instruction Committee on each campus.
(b) Each of the members of the Instruction Committee shall serve for a
term of three years, and the terms shall be arranged in such a way that each year the
terms of two members at each campus shall expire. Terms begin and end the day
following commencement exercises. Annually, and separately at each campus, the
President with the Dean on his campus, after consulting with the Instruction
Committee and seeking the advice of the other Tutors on that campus, shall at the last
regular Faculty meeting on that campus nominate four Tutors of whom two shall be
elected by the Tutors to membership on the Instruction Committee. The Faculty shall
be informed of the names of the nominees prior to the meeting at which the election
occurs. At the expiration of the three-year term a member of the Instruction
Committee shall for one year be ineligible for reelection.
(c) If for any reason a member of the Instruction Committee is unable to
serve for a pan of his term, another Tutor shall be chosen to take his place for that
part of the term. For this purpose the President and the Dean, in consultation with
the Instruction Committee on the campus where the vacancy occurs, shall nominate
two Tutors of whom the Tutors shall elect one in a regular Faculty meeting.
(d) If the Instruction Committee resigns with the Deans on a matter of confidence and the resignations are accepted, the President, in consultation with the
new Deans and after seeking the advice of the other Tutors, shall nominate nine
Tutors for the six vacancies on each campus in such a manner that two out of each
three nominees shall be elected by the Tutors for each of the three classes to fill the
unexpired terms.
(2)
The Tutors' Compensation Committee
(a) There shall be a Tutors' Compensation Committee of six Tutors, three to
be elected by the Tutors on each campus, whose chairmanship shall annually alter-
23
nate between campuses. The Committee shall advise the President concerning Tutors'
compensation and related matters; it shall make annual reviews of the College's
statement of Tutors' salaries and other compensation of Tutors and report to the
Tutors and the President recommendations consequent upon the review.
(b) Members of the Committee shall be elected annually on each campus for
terms of three years in such a manner that the term of one member on each campus
terminates each year. The Tutors' Compensation Committee on each campus shall
provide the Tutors on that campus with two nominations for each vacancy on the
Committee on that campus. Additional nominations may be made at the Faculty
meeting when election shall be made.
(3) The Library Committees. The President, in consultation with the Librarian
and the Dean, shall appoint three Tutors on each campus to serve as a Library
Committee. The President, the Dean, and the Librarian shall themselves be ex officio
members of the Committee, and the Librarian shall serve as Chairman. It shall be the
duty of the Library Committees to assist the Librarians in making the Libraries serve
the ends of the College and its program; it shall be their duty to advise the Librarians
in regard to Library policy and acquisitions. The Managers of the Bookstores may be
invited to sit with the Committees.
(4) The Campus Planning Committees. The Faculty on each campus shall elect
five of its members as a Campus Planning Committee. Two members shall be elected
to the Committee annually at the first regular meeting of the academic session except
in every third year, when one member shall be chosen. The President shall sit ex
officio with both Committees. The Dean, one of the Assistant Deans, and the
Treasurer on each campus shall sit ex officio with the Committee on that campus. It
shall be the duty of the respective committees to advise the President on the
construction of new buildings, the renovation of old buildings, landscaping of
grounds, and all matters relating to the maintenance and development of the campus.
(5) The Prize Committees. Every three years the President shall appoint Tutors
on each campus to supervise the awarding of prizes on the respective campuses. The
Committees shall have full authority to decide what prizes shall be awarded and to
name the recipients of the prizes.
(6) The Fellowship Committees. On each campus · there shall be a Fellowship
Committee appointed by the President. It shall be the duty of this Committee to inform students of fellowships for which they may be eligible, to assist them in applying for fellowships, and to act on behalf of the College in any matter relating to
application for fellowships.
(7) Other Committees. The Faculty on each campus shall have authority to
elect, or to request the President to appoint, additional committees that may from time
to time become necessary.
Article X
THE FACULTY: FACULTY PROCEDURE
(1) Procedure for Instructional Proposals.
(a)(i) Any major proposal concerning matters of instruction affecting the
College as a whole shall originate with the Dean and the Instruction Committee on
�24
25
either campus, and the decision as to what proposals are not major shall require the
concurrenc e of the Dean and the Instruction Committee on the other campus. In
normal circumstances major proposals concerning instruction shall be formulated at
the annual meeting of the Instruction Committee of the College. Written statements
of such a proposal shall be distributed to the Faculty at least two weeks before the
Faculty meeting at which they are to be presented; the proposal shall be presented to
the whole Faculty by the Chairman of the Instruction Committee, either in his own
person or through the other Dean as his representative. If, after full discussion of
any proposal so presented, there be no objection on the part of any Tutor, the
measure stands approved and becomes effective as of the date specified therefor. If,
after full discussion, a Tutor objects to the proposal and holds to his objection, the
proposal shall be submitted to vote of the Tutors at special Faculty meetings called by
the President within a fortnight. In submitting the proposal to vote the Chairman of
the Instruction Committee •and the Dean on the other campus shall state whether it be
a matter of confidence. The vote may then be taken and tallied by the President in
such a fashion that the Tutors shall have recorded their decision acting as a whole.
If the proposal be one that the Chairman of the Instruction Committee and the other
Dean have declared a matter of confidence and if it be defeated by majority vote, the
Deans and the Instruction Committee shall immediately resign. If it be passed by
majority vote, it shall become effective as of the date specified therefor. For the
confidence procedure a quorum shall consist of three-fourths of all resident Tutors
on each campus.
(ii) Any proposal concerning instruction that is not considered
major shall originate with the Dean and the Instruction Committee on the campus
where it is intended to be put into effect. It shall be presented by the Dean to the
Faculty on that campus after obtaining the concurrence of the Dean and the Instruction Committee on the other campus that the proposal is minor and not major. The
procedure set forth above for the approval or rejection of proposals shall be
followed, except that it shall apply only on the campus concerned.
(iii) The President may refuse to accept the resignation of the Deans
or the Instruction Committee, any or all of them, whenever in his judgment such
resignation would be detrimental to the proper functioning of the College; provided,
however, that if any six or more Tutors shall petition the Visitors and Governors, the
latter shall review the President's decision within four weeks, during which time the
Deans and the Instruction Committee shall continue in office.
(iv) In the event that the proposal be defeated and the resignations
be accepted, the President shall proceed to the choice of new Deans in accordance
with the provisions of Article V (2)(b).
(b) Upon either a petition of not less than one-tenth of the Tutors on either
campus or a request from the President, the Dean and Instruction Committee on that
campus shall consider any recommendation concerning instruction and shall report
to the Faculty within one year their proposal concerning it. They shall decide
whether their proposal is a major proposal, and the procedure of Article X(l) shall
apply.
(2)
Faculty Meetings.
(a) Regular monthly meetings of the Faculty shall be called upon due notice by the President; except that in the period comprising the months of December
and January only one regular meeting need be called. The President or, in his absence, the Dean, shall preside. In the absence of the President and the Dean, the
Faculty shall elect one of its members to preside.
(b) Special meetings of the Faculty may be called upon due notice by the
President, either at his own discretion or at the request of five Faculty members.
(c) Due notice shall be construed to mean no less than three days notice,
except in cases of emergency.
(d) A quorum shall consist of a majority of the Faculty in residence except
as otherwise provided.
(e) Only Tutors may vote on instructional matters. All Faculty members
may vote on all other matters not specifically restricted in the Polity.
(3) The Secretary of the Faculty. At the last regular meeting of an academic
year the Faculty on each campus shall elect one of its members, then in at least his
third year at the College, as Secretary. The Secretary shall assist in the preparation
and circulation of the agenda for Faculty meetings, shall keep the minutes of such
meetings, and shall collect and circulate reports of Faculty committees.
Article XI
THE SCHOLARS-IN-RESIDENCE AND THE ARTISTS-IN-RESIDENCE
The Scholars-in-Residence and the Artists-in-Residence shall be appointed
from time to time by the Board of Visitors and Governors on the recommendation of
the President after consultation with the Dean and the Instruction Committee on the
campus where the Scholars and Artists shall reside.
Article XII
THE STUDENTS
(1) The primary responsibilities of the students are to study and to make themselves as competent as possible in all parts of the St. John's Program. Their advice
and service shall be sought by the Faculty in such matters and in such ways as may
best serve the general welfare of the College.
(2) The students of St. John's College shall constitute the Student Polity of St.
John's College in Annapolis and in Santa Fe.
(3) The Student Polity in Annapolis or Santa Fe may establish for itself a government which is representative of all polity members. The Dean on each campus
may delegate to the Student government a share of the responsibility for the general
welfare of the students and whatever government of the students may be necessary
for the greatest possible attainment of the aims of the program. The duties of the
Student Government may include:
(a) the management of funds available to the Student Polity;
(b) the sanctioning of all student clubs, organizations, and activities, and
�26
concurrence of the Dean on the same campus after consultation with the Committee
for the Graduate Institute on that campus.
their regulation, if necessary;
(c) the representation of the students of St. John's College to the community
outside the College;
(d) the establishment and maintenance of formal channels of communication between the students and the Faculty; and
(e) any other duties agreed upon by the students and the Dean.
Article XIII
THE GRADUA1E INSTITUTE
(1)
The Directors.
(a) There shall be a Director of the Graduate Institute on each campus to
whom shall be delegated responsibility and authority, under the Chairman of the
Instruction Committee, for the organization and supervision on his campus of the
graduate program of instruction in the liberal arts and for matters concerning the
general welfare of the students. Concerning matters that affect the Graduate Institute as a whole the Director shall, in consultation with his fellow Director, be responsible to the Chairman of the Instruction Committee. Concerning matters limited to
his own campus he shall be responsible to the Dean on his own campus.
(b) Every three years, after consultation with his fellow director and the
Committee for the Graduate Institute on his own campus, one of the Directors shall
submit a Statement of Educational Policy and Program for the Graduate Institute to
the Instruction Committee for discussion at its joint meeting. After making any
revisions he deems appropriate, he shall submit it to the Faculty as a whole for
discussion .
(2)
The Faculty of the Graduate Institute.
(a) Each Director, after consultation with the Committee for the Graduate
Institute on that campus, and in accordance with the recommendation of the
Instruction Committee on the same campus, shall recommend to the President Tutors
of the Graduate Institute for summer appointment to teach in the Graduate Institute
for one session.
(b) During the summer term the Tutors of the Graduate Institute on each
campus shall have the authority to recommend to the Board of Visitors and Governors
candidates for degrees.
(4)
27
Committees for the Graduate Institute.
(a) On each campus the Committee for the Graduate Institute shares with
the Director on the same campus responsibility for carrying out the program of instruction of the Graduate Institute and for the general welfare of the students.
(b) Each Committee shall consist of three Tutors who have experience in
the Institute, in addition to the Director, who shall serve as Chairman.
(c) Members of each Committee shall be appointed by the Director with the
(5)
Procedure for Instructional Proposals.
(a) Major proposals concerning matters of instruction or policy shall
originate with one of the Directors, after consultation with the other Director and
with the Committee for the Graduate Institute and the Dean on his own campus. Such
proposals shall be submitted to the Instruction Committee of the College; if approved,
they shall come before the Faculty in accordance with Article X(l)(a)(i).
(b) Proposals concerning instruction or policy that arc not considered
major shall originate with the Director on the campus where they arc intended to be
put into effect, after consultation with the Committee for the Graduate Institute and
the Dean on that campus. Such proposals shall be submitted to the Instruction
Committee on that campus; if approved, they shall come before the Faculty in
accordance with Article X(l)(a)(ii).
Article XIV
THE ALUMNI
(1) Alumni shall be life-long members of the College, since St. John's College is
a community not limited by geographical location or fixed periods of time.
(2) The Alumni Association is the formal means by which alumni participate
in the life of the College. Through the election of alumni members of the Board of
Visitors and Governors, alumni share in the direction of that life. In these and other
ways, alumni shall be given the opportunity to serve the College.
(3) The College shall cooperate with the Alumni Association to enable alumni
to assist in providing services such as recruiting and interviewing prospective students, placing graduates in appropriate employment, and advising students concerning careers and admission to graduate and professional schools.
(4) The College, in cooperation with the Alumni Association, shall provide
seminars and other appropriate educational activities in Annapolis, in Santa Fe, and
in other places.
Article XV
THE STAFF
(1) Members of the Staff assist with the administration and maintenance of the
College, performing duties necessary to its well-being. They are subject to appropriate Staff rules and regulations.
(2) Members of the Staff on either campus may establish for themselves a Staff
Council for the purpose of better communication and understanding of College
policies as a benefit to the College as a whole. The Staff Council shall seek to establish
and maintain formal channels of communication among the whole Staff and between
the Staff and the appropriate College Officers. The Treasurer on each campus shall
review Staff employment regulations with the Staff Council and discuss with them
any changes proposed.
�28
(3) The Staff Council may establish such committees as it deems appropriate.
Article XVI
AMENDMENTS AND REVIEW
(1) This Polity may be amended by a two-thirds vote of those members voting
at any regular or special meeting of the Board, provided, however, that the
amendment has been proposed by not fewer than ten percent of the members of the
Board or a majority of the Polity Review Committee, and that the votes of no less than
one-third of the members of the entire Board eligible to vote are in favor of such
amendment, and further provided written notice of the proposed amendment has
been given to members of the Board and to the Faculty not less than thirty days prior
to such meeting. The Faculty shall have the right to inform the Board in writing of
its recommendation with respect to the proposed amendment by the date of the Board
meeting at which the amendment is to be considered.
(2) Amendments may be proposed at any regular meeting of either the Faculty
in Annapolis or the Faculty in Santa Fe upon petition of not less than ten percent of
the members on either campus. No such proposal shall be acted upon earlier than
the next regular meeting of the Faculty, whether in Annapolis or in Santa Fe. Twothirds vote of the entire Faculty in residence shall be required for approval and the
amendment shall not become effective unless approved by the Board in the manner
set forth in Section (1) above.
(3) Every five years this Polity shall be reviewed by a committee of six, three
to be elected by the Faculty on each campus. The report of the Committee shall be
submitted to one regular Faculty meeting and voted upon at the next regular Faculty
meeting. A two-thirds vote of the Faculty in residence shall be required for
approval.
Whatever action is thus recommended by the Faculty shall be submitted to
the Board for final decision in the manner set forth in Section (1) above.
Article XVII
COMPLIANCE WITH LAW
No provision of this Polity shall be construed to contravene any applicable
federal or state law. If any provision is determined to contravene any such law, that
provision shall be deemed not a part of this Polity, and this Polity's remaining
provisions shall remain in full force and effect.
��
Dublin Core
The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/.
Title
A name given to the resource
Charter and Polity of the College
Description
An account of the resource
Revised and amended editions of the St. John's College Charter and Polity.<br /><br />The College's first Charter and Polity was published as the <a href="https://digitalarchives.sjc.edu/items/show/3768">September 1950</a> issue of the <em><a href="https://digitalarchives.sjc.edu/collections/show/37">Bulletin of St. John's College in Annapolis</a></em>. Revised and amended versions were published as individual issues of the <em>Bulletin</em> in <a href="https://digitalarchives.sjc.edu/items/show/3746">1951</a>, <a href="https://digitalarchives.sjc.edu/items/show/7844">1960</a>, <a href="https://digitalarchives.sjc.edu/items/show/7845">1963</a>, and <a href="https://digitalarchives.sjc.edu/items/show/7846">1965</a>. <br /><br />The Charter and Polity was published as a separate document in <a href="https://digitalarchives.sjc.edu/items/show/7850">1955</a> and again from <a href="https://digitalarchives.sjc.edu/items/show/7851">1970</a> forward. The most recent version of the Charter and Polity is also available on the College's <a href="https://www.sjc.edu/about/leadership/board-visitors-governors/charter-polity">website</a>. <br /><br />Click on <strong><a title="Items in the Charter and Polity of the College Collection" href="https://digitalarchives.sjc.edu/items/browse?collection=62&sort_field=Dublin+Core%2CDate">Items in the Charter and Polity of the College Collection</a></strong> to view and sort all items in the collection.
Creator
An entity primarily responsible for making the resource
St. John's College
Publisher
An entity responsible for making the resource available
St. John's College
Contributor
An entity responsible for making contributions to the resource
St. John's College Greenfield Library
Text
A resource consisting primarily of words for reading. Examples include books, letters, dissertations, poems, newspapers, articles, archives of mailing lists. Note that facsimiles or images of texts are still of the genre Text.
Original Format
The type of object, such as painting, sculpture, paper, photo, and additional data
PDF
Page numeration
Number of pages in the original item.
28 pages
Dublin Core
The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/.
Title
A name given to the resource
Charter and Polity of the College, 1992
Description
An account of the resource
Charter and Polity of the College, amended and restated as of July 1992.
Creator
An entity primarily responsible for making the resource
St. John's College
Publisher
An entity responsible for making the resource available
St. John's College
Coverage
The spatial or temporal topic of the resource, the spatial applicability of the resource, or the jurisdiction under which the resource is relevant
Annapolis, MD
Santa Fe, NM
Date
A point or period of time associated with an event in the lifecycle of the resource
1992-07
Type
The nature or genre of the resource
text
Format
The file format, physical medium, or dimensions of the resource
PDF
Subject
The topic of the resource
St. John's College (Annapolis, Md.)
Legal instruments
Language
A language of the resource
English
Identifier
An unambiguous reference to the resource within a given context
Charter_and_Polity_1992
Charter and Polity
-
https://s3.us-east-1.amazonaws.com/sjcdigitalarchives/original/60f95899ae05a24f7b6e357525a8b61f.pdf
eec77ca9515c61f8e8433b0532178edf
PDF Text
Text
�St. John's College Library
Annapolis,
Marvland
ST. JOHN'S COLLEGE
CHARTER AND POLITY
OF
THE COLLEGE
ANNAPOLIS, MARYLAND
SANTA FE, NEW MEXICO
APRIL
1987
Founded as King William's School, 1696, Chartered as St. John's College, 1784
�HISTORY
St. John's College was founded in 1696 as King William 's
School in accorda nce with a Petition ary Act for free-sch ools of
t he General Assembl y of the Colony of Marylan d.
Followin g the
Revolut ionary War, the General Assembl y of the new State of
Maryland granted a Charter to St. John's College pursuan t to and
a s a part of Chapter 37 of the Laws of Marylan d of 1784. This
Charter was subsequ ently amended by the General Assembl y through
Resolut ion No. 41 of 1832.
The Visitor s and Governo rs of St. John's College in 1950
r evised the Charter to elimina te extraneo us and obsolet e matter
a nd to make certain other amendme nts consist ent with present
r equirem ents and conditio ns.
It was the opinion of the Attorne y
General of Marylan d that the origina l Charter of the College was
s ubjec t to the general Corpora tion Laws of Marylan d and might
a ccordin gly be amended by the Visitor s and Governo rs, pursuan t to
t hese laws, without legisla tive action by the General Assembl y.
Subsequ ent amendme nts were made in 1961, in 1963, in 1965, in
1 970 , and in 1975.
When the decision was reached to establis h a second St.
J ohn ' s College in Santa Fe , New Mexico, amendme nts were made to
t he Charter to authori ze branche s or extensio ns of the College .
The Charter was then filed with the Corpora tions Commiss ion of
the State of New Mexico as a foreign corpora tion. The College
was thus empower ed to grant degrees in New Mexico under the
p rovision s of its Marylan d Charter .
A Polity for the College was first suggest ed at a faculty
meeting in 1943 by the Dean. A faculty committ ee was elected and
d rafted a Polity which was then promulg ated by the Preside nt. In
April 1949 the Faculty elected a committ ee to revise the Polity.
The resultin g documen t was approve d by the Faculty on April 9,
1 950, and was adopted by the Board of Visitor s and Governo rs on
J uly 8, 1950. Subsequ ent quinque nnial reviews were made by
elected faculty committ ees, and desired amendme nts were
recomme nded by the Faculty to the Board of Visitor s and
Governo rs. The Polity was thus amended at regular meeting s of
the Board held on May 14, 1955; May 21, 1960; May 15, 1965; June
6, 1970; April 19, 1975; January 16, 1982; and April 19, 1986.
Other amendme nts were adopted by the Board at regular meeting s on
February 22 and Decembe r 9, 1961; February 23 and Septemb er 28,
1963; October 3, 1970; Februar y 18, 1972; October 25, 1975;
January 24, 1976; Novembe r 6, 1982; July 21, 1984; April 20,
1985; October 25, 1986; and April 11, 1987.
1
�CHARTER OF ST. JOHN'S COLLEGE
WHEREAS, institutions for the liberal educat i on of youth i n
the principles of virtue, knowledge and useful li terature ar e o f
the highest benefit to society, in orde r to train up and
perpetuate a succession of able and honest men fo r di schargi ng
the various offices and duties of life, both civi l and re l ig ious ,
with usefulness and reputation, and such institut ions of lea rni ng
have accordingly been promoted and encouraged by the wi sest and
best regulated States; And whereas, it appears t o this Gene ral
Assembly that many public spirited individuals , from a n ear nest
desire to promote the founding a col lege or seminary of lea rn i n g
on the Western Shore of this State have subscri bed and procur e d
subscriptions to a considerable amount , and th ere is r easo n to
believe that very large additions will be obta ined to the same
throughout the different counties of the said Shore, i f t hey we re
made capable in law to receive and apply the same towa rds
founding and carrying on a college or general s eminary of
learning with such salutary plan and with such legisla tiv e
assistance and direction as the General Assembl y might t hink fi t,
and this General Assembly, highly approving tho se gene rou s
exertions of individuals, are desirous to embrace the pre s ent
favorable occasion of peace and prosper ity for making las t ing
provision for the encouragement and advancement of all us eful
knowledge and literature through every part of this State ;
BE IT ENACTED:
II. That a college or general seminary o f learn ing by the
name of "St. John's College " be establ ished on the s aid Western
Shore upon the following fundamenta l and invio l a ble princ iples;
namely, first, the said college shall be found ed and main tained
forever upon a most liberal plan for the benefi t of youth of
every religious denomination, who shall be freel y admitted to
equal privileges and advantages of education and to all th e
literary honors of the college, according to their merit without
requiring or enforcing any religious or civil test, or urg ing
their attendance upon any particular religious worship or serv ic e
other than what they have been educated in or ha v e the consent
and approbation of their parents or guardians to attend; nor
shall any preference be given in the choice of a Principal, Vice Principal or other Professor, Master or Tutor in said college on
account of his particular religious profess ion, having regard
solely to his moral character and literary abilities and other
necessary qualifications to fill the place for which he shall be
chosen.
IV. That the governing body or board of said College shall
consist of not more than fort y -nine nor less than thirteen
Visitors and Governors, to be chosen and to hold office in such
manner as the said Visitors and Governors may determine and
prescribe by their fundamental ordinances; provided, however,
that the Governors of the States of Maryland and New Mexico shall
act ex officio as two of the total number of Visitors and
Governors of said college during their respective terms in said
offices; and that the said Visitors and Governors and their
successors duly chosen shall be and are hereby declared to be one
community, corporation and body politic to have continuance
forever by the name of
ST. JOHN'S COLLEGE
and by the same name they shall have perpetual succession.
VII. That if the City of Annapolis should be fixed upon _as
a proper place for establishing the said intended college, this
General Assembly give and grant, and upon that condition do
hereby give and grant to the Visitors and Governors of the said
college by the name of "The Visitors and Governors of Saint
John's College in the State of Maryland, and their successors
all that four acres within the City of Annapolis purchased for
the use by the public and conveyed on the 2nd day of October,
1744, by Stephen Bordley, Esq. to Thos. Bladen, Esq., then
Governor, to have and to hold the said four acres of land with
the appurtenances to the said Visitors and Governors and their
successors for the only use, benefit and behoof of the said
college and seminary of universal learning forever.
VIII. That the said Visitors and Governors and their
successors by the same name shall be able and capable in law to
purchase, have and enjoy to them and their successors in fee, or
for any other less estate or estates, any _lands, tenements,
rents, annuities, pensions or other hereditaments by the gift,
grant, bargain, sale, alienation, enfeoffment, release,
confirmation, or devise of any person or persons, bodies politic
or corporate capable to make the same, and such lands, tenements,
rents, annuities, pensions or other hereditaments or any less
estates, rights or interests of or in the same at their pleasure
to grant, alien, sell and transfer in such manner and form as
they shall think meet and convenient for the furtherance of the
said college; And also that they may take and receive any sum or
sums of money, and any kind, manner or portion of goods and
chattels that shall be given, sold or bequeathed to them by any
person or persons, bodies politic or corporate capable to make a
gift, sale or bequest thereof and employ the same towards
erecting, setting up and maintaining the said college in such
manner as they shall judge most necessary and convenient for the
instruction, improvement and education of youth in the vernacular
and learned languages, and generally in any kind of literature,
arts and sciences, which they shall think proper to be taught for
training up good, useful and accomplished men for the service of
their country, in church and state.
IX. That the said Visitors and Governors and their
successors by the name aforesaid shall be able in law to sue and
be sued, plead and be impleadable in any court or courts, before
any judge, judges, or justices within this State and elsewhere in
2
3
�all and all manner of su it s, comp l a int s, pleas, causes, matters
and demands of whatsoeve r kind, natu re or form they be and ·all
and every other matter and thing t here in to do in as full and
effectual a manner as any other perso n or persons, bodies politic
or corporate within this State or any o f the United States of
America in like cases may or can do.
X.
That the - said Visitors and Gove rnors and their
successor s shall have fu l l power and aut hority to have, make and
use one common and public seal and l ikew i s e one privy seal with
such devices and inscriptio ns as th ey shall think proper, and to
ascertain , fix and regulate the uses of bo th seals, by their own
laws and the same sea l s or either of th e m to change, break, alter
and renew at their pleasure.
XI. That the said Visitors and Governors and their
successor s from time to time and at all times hereafter , forever,
shall have full power and author i t y to c onstitute and appoint in
such manner as they shall think best and mo st convenien t, a
principal , a vice-prin cipal of t h e sa i d college and professor s
with proper tutors and assistant s for instructi ng the students
and scholars of the said seminary in al l the liberal arts and
sciences, and in the ancient and modern tongues and languages ;
and the said principal , vice-prin cipa l and professor s so
constitut ed and appointed from time to time shall be known and
distingui shed forever as one learned body or faculty by the name
of "The Principal , Vice-Prin cipa l and Professor s of St. John's
College"; and by that name s hall be capable of exercisin g such
powers and authoriti es as the Visitors and Governors of the said
college and their successor s shall by th e ir ordinance s think
necessary to delegate to them for t h e i ns truction, disciplin e and
governmen t of the said seminary and of a l l the students,
scholars, ministers and servants be lo ng ing to the same.
XIV. That a majority of t h e sai d Vi s itors and Governors for
the time being and duly assembled a t any mee ting upon due notice
given to the whole body of Vi si t ors and Go v e rnors shall have full
power and authority to make fundamen tal ord inanc es for the
governmen t of the said college and the instructi o n of youth as
aforesaid , and by these ordinance s to appo int such a number of
their own body not less than seven, as t h e y may think proper for
transacti ng all general and necessary busin e ss of the said
seminary and making temporary ru l es for th e governmen t of the
same; and also by the said fundamen tal ordi n ances to delegate to
the principal , vice-prin cipal and profess or s such powers and
authoriti es as they may think best for the sta ndin g governmen t of
the said seminary and of the execution o f t he ordinanc es and
rules of the same; provided always that t h e y be not repugnant to
the form of governmen t of any law of th i s State.
XV. And for animating and encourag i ng the students of said
college to a laudab l e diligence , industry a nd progres s in useful
literatur e and science, be it enacted t hat t h e s ai d Visito r s and
Governors and their successor s shall b y a wr i t te n ma n date u n der
their privy seal and the hand of someone of the Vi s it o r s an d
Governors to be chosen annually as their President , according to
the ordinance to be made for that purpose, have full power and
authority to direct the principal , vice-prin cipal and professor s
to hold public commencem ents either on stated annual nary or
occasiona lly as the future ordinance s of the said seminary may
direct and at such commencem ents to admit any of the students in
the said college or any other persons meriting the same (whose .
names shall be severally inserted in the same mandate) to any
degree or degrees in any of the faculties , arts and sciences and
liberal professio ns to which persons are usually admitted in
other colleges or universit ies in America or Europe; And it is
hereby enacted that the principal , or in the case of his death or
absence, the vice-prin cipal, and in case of the death or absence
of both, the senior professor who may be present, shall ma~e ~ut
and sign with his name diplomas or certifica tes of the admission
to such degree or degrees, which shall be sealed with the public
or greater seal of the said corporati on or college and delivered
to the graduates as honorable and perpetual testimoni als of such
admission ; which diplomas, if thought necessary _for doing greater
honor to such graduates , shall also be signed with the names of
the different professor s or as many of them as can convenien tly
s i gn the same; prov i ded always that no student or students within
the said college shall ever be admitted to any such degree or
degrees, or have their name inserted in any mandate for
degree,
until such student or students have been first duly examined, and
thought worthy of the same.
XVI. That the ordinance s which shall be from time to time
made by the Visitors and Governors of the said college and their
successor s with an account of their other proceedin gs and of the
managemen t of the estate and moneys committed to their trust,
.
shall when required be laid before the General Assembly for their
i nspection and examinati on, but in case at any time tereafter
through oversight , or otherwise through misappreh ension and
mistaken construct ions of the powers, liberties and franchise s in
this Charter or Act of Incorpora tion granted, or intended to be
granted, any ordinance should be made by the said corporati on of
Visitors and Governors or any matters done and transacte d by the
corporati on contrary to the tenor hereof, it is enacted that
although such ordinance s, acts and doings shall in themselve s be
null and vo i d, yet they shall not, however, in any courts of law,
or by the General Assembly, be deemed, taken, interpret ed or
adjudged into an avoidance or forfeitur e of this Charter and Act
of Incorpora tion, but the same shall be and remain unhurt,
inviolate and entire unto the said corporati on of Visitors and
Governors in perpetual successio n; and all their acts conformab le
to the powers, true intent and meaning hereof shall be and remain
i n full force and validity, the nullity and avoidance of such
illegal acts to the contrary in any wise notwithst anding.
XVII. That this Charter and Act of Incorpora tion and every
part thereof shall be good and available
i n all things in the law
according to the true intent and meaning thereof, and shall be
construed , reputed and adjudged in all cases most favorably on
the behalf and for the best benefit and behoof of the said
4
5
�Visitors and Governors and their successo rs, so as most
effectually to answer the valuable end of this Act of
Incorporatio n towards the general advancement and promotion of
useful knowledge, science and virtue.
XVIII. That the College may establish and operate one or
more branches in one or more states of the United States.
In the Polity as hereinafter set forth the
nouris "alumnus" and "alumni" and "man" and "men",
either alone or in compounds such as "chairman"
and "chairmen", and the pronouns "he", "him",
and "his", are to be taken as referring to
persons whether male or female.
6
7
�Article I
THE COLLEGE
Polity of st. John's College
Preamble
Education is the making of men o ut of children by
bringing them into the world of inherited customs,.
intellectual traditions, and spiritual ties. Institutions
of learning are set up for this purpose. Beyond this they
should also seek to develop the mora l and intellectual
powers of men to enable them to fulfill be st their freely_
chosen tasks and thus to take their own re sponsible_part in
shaping the future.
St. John's College is a community of
learning committed to holding these ends c onstantly in sight
and to seeking the best means of attaining them.
st. John's College strives to illuminate the common
heritage of mankind in a persisting study of the great
documents in which that heritage can be fo und.
It is
concerned with the unity of knowledge, an understanding of
the great issues faced by men, and the mo r a l foundations_ o n
which the conduct of men's lives can be based. To provide
proper conditions for the pursuit of these ends, we, the
Board of Visitors and Governors, after con sultation with t he
Faculty, do ordain and establish this Poli ty for St. John 's
College.
(1) St. John's College is by its Charter a legal entity,
carrying on its functions in Annapolis, Maryland, and in Santa
Fe, New Mexico.
Under the Charter of the College, all power,
authority, and responsibility pertaining to the College are
vested in the Visitors and Governors.
(2) The College consists of the following:
The Board of
Visitors and Governors, the Faculty, the Students, the Graduate
Institute, the Alumni and the Staff, and other members who may be
named from time to time by the Board of Visitors and Governors.
(3) Under the Charter, "the said Visitors and Governors,
and their successors, from time to time, and at all times
hereafter, forever, shall have full power and authority to
constitute and appoint, in such manner as they shall think best
and most convenient, a principal and vice-principal of the said
College, and professors, with proper tutors and assistants, for
instructing the students and scholars of the said seminary in all
the liberal arts and sciences, and in the ancient and modern
tongues and languages; and the said principal, vice-principal,
and professors, so constituted and appointed from time to time
shall be known and distinguished forever as one learned body or
faculty, by the name of 'The Principal, Vice-Principal, and
Professors of St. John's College'; and by that name shall be
capable of exercising such powers and authorities as the Visitors
and Governors of the said college and their successors shall by
their ordinances think necessary to delegate to them for the
instruction, discipline, and government of the said seminary and
of all the students, scholars, ministers and servants belonging
to the same."
(a) The "principal" shall be the President, or if
there are two Presidents, the Presidents. When 'president' is
used in this Polity it shall mean:
(i) with respect to membership on the Board of
Visitors and Governors, in the Faculty, on committees of the
Board, and sitting ex officio with the Instruction Committee, and
for presentation of, and response to, the Statement of
Educational Policy and Program (Article IV (l)(c)), the President
of the Annapolis campus and the President of the Santa Fe campus;
(ii) with respect to membership on committees or
sitting ex officio with committees, and actions or procedures
relating to one campus, the President of that campus;
(iii) with respect to actions under Article II
(12)(b) or actions or procedures involving the entire College
under Article IX (l)(a)(i) and Article IX (l)(a) (iii), either
President.
8
9
�(bl
The "vice-principal" shall be the Dean who is
serving as the Chairman of the Instruction Committee.
(cl There shall be a Dean of St. John's College in
Annapolis and a Dean of St. John's College in Santa Fe.
(d)
The "professors, tutors and assistants" shall bear
the title Tutor or Tutor Emeritus. Tutors who have completed
their tenure appointments and are no longer teaching shall be
Tutors Emeriti.
being understood in accordance with the proscriptions of federal
law.
(ml No one shall be employed by the College beyond June
30th of the academic year in which he reaches the age of 70,
without the annual approval of the Board of Visitors and
Governors.
(e) There shall be Vice-Presidents for Co llege
Advancement and Treasurers.
(fl
There shall be Associate members of the Faculty,
hereinafter called Associates, who shall be on eithe r campus, as
the offices may be deemed necessary, the Registrar, the
Librarian, the Director of Athletics, the Director of Student
Activities, the Director of Admissions, the Directo r of Alumni
Activities, the Director of Financial Aid, and the Director of
Career Counseling.
(g) The "one learned body or faculty," composed of th e
President, the Deans, the other Tutors, the Tutors Emeriti, the
Vice-Presidents for College Advancement, the Treasurers, and the
Associates, shall bear the title The Faculty of St. John's
College.
(hi All who have formally matriculated, are at the
present enrolled, and are in good standing shall be called
Students of St. John's College.
(i) The Directors and the Tutors of the Graduate
Institute shall be called The Faculty of the Graduate Institute.
(j)
All who have been awarded a degree by the College
shall be called Alumni.
In addition, all who have completed at
least one semester of undergraduate study or at least one segment
of Graduate Institute study, but who are not currently enrolled,
shall be called Alumni either a) in the case of undergraduate
students, when their class has graduated, or b) in the case
of Graduate Institute students, at the end of three full sessions
of the Graduate Institute, summer and winter, after the one in
which they last enrolled. All who have ever been Alumni shall
continue to be,
(k) The Staff shall consist of all persons appointed
by the President who are not members of the Faculty of St. John's
College or the Faculty of the Graduate Institute.
(1)
There shall be no discrimination at St. John's
College in appointments, conditions of employment, admissions,
educational policy, financial aid programs, athletics, or other
activities, on the basis of race, religion, age, sex, national
origin, color, or physical handicap, discrimination in each case
Article II
VISITORS AND GOVERNORS
(1) Qualifications for Membership. Persons shall be
eligible for membership on the Board of Visitors and Governors
who are concerned for the maintenance, progress, and vitality of
St. John's College's educational program and who are willing and
able to discharge the responsibilities of trusteeship with
devotion and energy.
(2) Members. The Board of Visitors and Governors shall
consist of not more than sixty members, comprising the President,
the Deans, the Governors of Maryland and New Mexico, ex officio
and fifty-four members, of whom forty-eight shall be elected by
the entire Board and six shall be elected by the Alumni of the
College, in the manner and for the terms hereinafter provided.
In recognition of meritorious service to the College, Visitors
Emeriti may be elected to the Board who may attend all meetings
of the Board, with voice in deliberation, but without vote.
(3) Elections by the Board. At each annual meeting, the
Board shall elect a class of sixteen members for a term of three
years, to succeed those members whose term expires at the
conclusion of said meeting.
Those members elected shall begin
their term at the meeting next following their election. The
procedure for nomination and election shall be as follows:
There shall be a Nominating Committee of four members of the
Board appointed by the Chairman. The Chairman and the President
shall sit with the committee, ex officio, when nominations to
Board membership are being considered. The Nominating Committee
shall recommend to each member of the Board in writing, not later
than thirty days prior to the annual meeting at which the
election is to be held, at least one candidate for each of the
places_to be filled by such election, including each position as
an officer of the Board. Additional nominations may be made in
writing, addressed to the Chairman, signed by at least five
members of the Board, prior to the date above provided for the
report of the Nominating Committee, and any such additional
nominations shall be reported to the Board by the Committee at
the time of its report.
10
11
�Voting on nominatio ns at annual meetings may be by ballot,
In
each member present to vote for sixteen of th e said nominees.
,
positions
more
case the balloting results in a tie for one or
No
the Board shall determine the procedure to resolve the tie.
nominee for member or officer of the Board shal l be deemed
elected who has not received the affirma tive vot es of at least a
majority of the members present at the meeting.
If there should be fewer than si xte en members in any class
prior to the end of the term for such class, the vacancy may be
filled pursuant to the procedure provided above for regular
elections , except that the election may take place at any regular
meeting. A member elected to fill any such vac ancy shall hold
office for the remainder of the term of th e class in which such
vacancy occurred.
(4) Elections by the Alumni. Each year in the spring, two
alumni shall be elected to membersh ip fo r a term of three years,
in such manner that there shall be six members of the Board
elected by the alumni, consistin g of three classes of two members
each. Outgoing alumni members shall continue to serve until
their successor s are elected.
The Director of Alumni Activitie s sha ll request the Board of
the Alumni Associati on to nominate at least one candidate for
each vacancy. Additiona l candidate s may be nominated by petition
of any thirty alumni. All alumni shall be elig ible to vote for
the alumni members of the Board. Balloting will be conducted by
mail by the Director of Alumni Activitie s.
In the event that for any reason there should be fewer than
two alumni members in any class prior to the end of the term of
that class, the vacancy shall be filled by interim election,
conducted in the same manner. Newly-ele cted alumni shall begin
their term at the meeting next following the annual meeting of
the Board.
Faculty Represen tation at Board Meetings. Three
(5)
members of the Faculty shall be elected by the Faculty on each
campus to attend all regular sessions of the Board on the campus
to which they belong, with voice in deliberat ion, but without
vote.
Student Represen tation at Board Meetings. Two students
(6)
shall be elected by the students on each campus to attend al l
regular sessions of the Board on the campus to which they belong,
with voice in deliberat ion, but without vote.
(7) • Graduate Institute Director Represen tation at Board
Each Director of the Graduate Institute may attend all
Meetings.
regular sessions of the Board on the campus to which he belongs,
with voice in deliberat ion, but without vote.
(8) Graduate Institute Student Represen tation at Board
Meetings. A student of the Graduate Institute shall be elected by
the students of the Graduate Institute on each campus to attend
all regular sessions of the Board on the campus to which he
belongs, with voice in deliberat ion, but without vote.
(9) Alumni Associati on Represen tation at Board Meetings.
The President of the Alumni associati on shall be invited to
attend all regular sessions of the Board, with voice in
deliberat ion, but without vote.
(10) Staff Represen tation at Board Meetings. The Staff on
each campus shall be invited to send two represent atives to all
regular sessions of the Board at that campus, with voice in
deliberat ion, but without vote.
(11) Reelectio n. A member of the Board elected by the
Board or by the Alumni may be elected for not more than two
consecuti ve terms, but may, after a second consecuti ve term, be
reelected to membersh ip at the annual meeting in the year
following the expiratio n of the member's second term.
(12)
Meetings of the Board.
(a) Regular meetings of the Board shall be held
quarterly in either Annapolis or Santa Fe. The Spring meeting
shall be called the annual meeting. The time and place of
regular meetings shall be determine d by the Chairman, in
consultat ion with the President , and notice of regular meetings
shall be given not less than fifteen days prior to such meetings.
(b) Special meetings of the Board may be called by the
President , the Chairman, the Executive Committee , or any ten
members of the Board, not less than seven days after the dispatch
of written or telegraph ic notice of the time, place, and purposes
of the meeting. Such notice may be dispensed with if waived in
writing by all members of the Board either before or after the
meeting.
(c) Any business may be conducted at a regular meeting
without specific notice of such business (except that which is
required by law or as provided herein as to elections and
amendmen ts), but no business shall be conducted at any special
meeting unless notice of such business has been given, or has
been waived as above provided.
(d) Twelve members of the Board present at a meeting
shall constitut e a quorum for the transacti on of business.
(e) The Board in regular session is open to elected
members, to Visitors Emeriti, to Associate s
officio
ex
and
invited by the President , and to official represent atives of the
Faculty, Students, Graduate Institute , Alumni Associati on and
Staff. Attendanc e at Executive sessions shall be limited to
voting members and Visitors Emeriti. Public sessions shall be
open without restrictio n. The Chairman of the Board, in
consultat ion with the President , shall determine whether any
12
13
�meeting or portion of a meeting shal l be in regular, executive,
or public session.
(13) Officers of the Board. At e ach annual meeting the
Board shall elect a Chairman, two Vice- Chairme n, and a Secretary ,
to hold office until the next annual meet ing or unti l the ir
successors are elected. Vacancies i n any such offices may be
filled at any regular meeting, or a ny special meeti ng c alled f or
that purpose. Such officers shall p e rform th e customa ry dutie s
of such offices, and such other dut ies as th e Board may from t i me
to time direct.
(14)
•
(ii) The Finance Committee shall review the
proposed annual budgets of the College prior to their
presentation for approval by the Board and shall make
recommendations to the Board with respect to the budgets at the
meeting at which they are presented.
Committees of the Board .
Executive Committee. The Cha irma n, the Vice(a)
Chairmen, the Secretary, the Presi dent, the Deans, and four oth er
members chosen annually by the Board at th e an nual meeting shall
comprise the Executive Committee of the Board. In intervals
between meetings of the Board, t h e Executive Comm ittee may act
for the Board, except in those ma tt e rs expres s ly de l e gated to
some other committee, person, or persons. Seve n members of the
Executive Committee present at a meeting sha ll cons titute a
quorum for the transaction of bus i nes s.
(b) Presidential Searc h Committee . There shall be a
Presidential Search Committee to recommend the appoin tment of a
President as provided i n Artic l e I I I(2).
(c) Nominating Commi ttee. There sha ll be a nomina ti n g
Committee for membership of the Board a nd for office r s of the
Board as provided in Article II ( 3).
(iii) The Finance Committee shall study, and
periodically advise the Board with respect to, the financial
business policies and practices of the College, and shall make
such special studies and reports as the Board may from time to
time request.
•
(d) Visiting Committee. Ther e s hall be a Visiting
Committee of not more than ten persons a ppo inted by th e Chairman.
There shall be an eastern and a western Co-C ha irman of the
Visiting Committee, and the Committee ' s me mb er s hip shal l i nc l ude
an equal number of members from the t wo sect ions of the co u ntry.
Each half of the Visiting Committee sha ll ma k e at least one visit
to the campus in its area each y ear to repo r t to the Board on how
well the aims of the College are being rea li zed . Each half of
the Visiting Committee shall meet at least once annually with the
Instruction Committee on the campus i n it s a r ea to discuss the
Statement of Educat i onal Pol i c y a nd Program of th e Chairman of
the Instruction Committee and to acquain t th emse lves with other
educational matters.
Finance Commit t ee. There sha ll be a Finance
(e)
Committee consisting of the Ch a i r man, t h e Pr e s i den t, and the
off i c i o , and s i x members appointed
Treasurers of the College,
by the Chairman. The Chairman of the Board s h a ll appoint one of
In carrying out
the members to be the Chairman o f th e Committee.
its functions the Committee may be d i vided int o t wo working
subcommittees, one on investments , one on budget , e ac h with it s
Chairman. The Fi nance Committee shall have the foll ow ing po wers
and duties:
14
(i) The Finance Committee shall have full power
to direct the investment and reinvestment of all funds of the
College, including endowment and restricted funds, and the proper
officers of the Board and the College are authorized to carry out
all written directions, signed by the Chairman of the Committee,
with respect to such investments and reinvestments. The
Committee shall report at each regular meeting any action taken
hereunder since the previous meeting.
(f) Audit Committee. There shall be an Audit
Committee of three persons, including a Chairman, appointed by
the Chairman of the Board. The Treasurers shall serve as nonvoting Staff to the Committee .
(i) The Committee shall review in detail the
the independent auditors and discuss audit
of
annual report
findings with the auditors, unattended by employees of the
College.
(ii) The Committee shall meet with
representatives of the independent auditors to the next audit to
discuss scope and procedures and any other matters requiring
special attention.
(iii) The Committee shall discuss with College
personnel any corrective action required as a result of the audit
report.
(iv) The Committee shall recommend to the Board
the appointment or reappointment of independent auditors to
conduct the audit for the next fiscal year.
The Committee shall report to the Board
(v)
annually on its review of the audit and shall bring to the
attention of the Board any matters related thereto requiring
Board action.
•
(g) Compensation Review Committee. There shall be a
Compensation Review Committee of not more than five members, including a Cha i rman, appointed by the Chairman of the Board.
(i ) The Committee shall recommend to the Board
policies for direct and indirect compensation of Tutors,
15
�Associate members of the Faculty, other Faculty membe rs, a nd
Staff at the College. It shall annually review t h e compensati o n
policies and performance with respect to them and r e p o rt the
findings of this review to the Board.
(ii) The Committee shall recommend to the Board
the compensation of the Presidents, Vice-Presiden ts for College
Advancement, and Treasurers of the College.
(iii) In matters of policy and compensation, the
Committee shall consult the Presidents and the Chairman of the
Finance Committee.
(h) Polity Review Committee. There shall be a Polity
Review Committee of not more than five members appointed by the
Chairman every fifth year. The Committee shall receive the
report of the Faculty Committee and after appropriate study shall
make recommendations to the Board for co n sidera tion at the annual
meeting when the final review of the Po li ty i s co nsummated. The
respective Chairmen of the Board and Facu l ty Rev iew Committees
shall make such arrangements as they deem appropr iate for joint
consultation prior to and after the adopt io n of the report by the
Faculty.
(i) Other Committees. The Cha irman ma y appoint such
other standing or special committees of t h e Board as he may deem
desirable or which the Board may request.
(j)
Former members of the Board and Visitors Emeriti
may .be appointed by the Chairman to serve on Committees at his
discretion.
(k)
Except for the Presidential Searc h Committee and
the Polity Review Committee, committee appointme nts shall be ma d e
annually. Members of the Committees serve unti l t he ir success or s
have been appointed.
(1)
Any member of the Board may, without invitatio n,
attend any Board committee meeting, except those of t he
Presidential Search and Executive Committees, but witho ut v ote.
(15)
Execution of Contracts, Transfer of Secur ities, Etc.
All contracts of $50,000 or more, notes, deeds, l eases,
mortgages, releases, bonds for security or indemnity , negotiable
instruments, stock certificates, transfers, and powers, and like
papers and documents on behalf of the College or the Endowment
Funds shall be executed by two persons, of whom one shall be the
President, the Chairman, or the Vice-Chairman, and of whom the
other shall be the Secretary of the Board or the Treasurer of the
campus concerned.
(16)
Signing of Checks, Drafts, Etc. All
acceptances, and similar orders for the payment
behalf of the College may be signed by the same
authorized to execute contracts, etc., pursuant
checks, drafts,
of money on
persons
to Section (15)
hereof, but may also be signed by such persons, and in such
manner, as the Board may from time to time direct by appropriate
resolution.
THE FACULTY
The Visitors and Governors by these ordinances
hereby delegate to the Faculty of St. John's College - the President, the Deans, the other Tutors, the Tutors Emeriti, the VicePresidents for College Advancement, the Treasurers, and the
Associates - "powers and authorities" for the "instruction,
discipline, and government" of the College.
Article III
THE FACULTY:
THE PRESIDENT
(1) There is delegated to the President by the Visitors and
Governors executive responsibility and authority for the
instruction, discipline, and government of the College, and the
President, in turn, may delegate his authority.
There shall be a President for the Annapolis campus and
a President for the Santa Fe campus, each appointed as provided
in Article III (2). There is delegated to each President by the
Visitors and Governors executive responsibility and authority for
the instruction, discipline, and government of the campus of
which he is President, and the President, in turn, may delegate
his authority. In the interest of the orderly conduct of
business and of maintaining and promoting the unity of the
College, the Presidents shall regularly consult and communicate
with each other and, as appropriate, with other College
officials, on matters of common concern.
(2) The President shall be appointed by the Board of
Visitors and Governors on the recommendation of a Committee
composed of five members of the Board of Visitors and Governors,
at least one of whom is an alumnus, the Deans, and one Tutor from
each campus selected from among themselves by the Tutors on that
campus having tenure. This Committee shall be known as the
Presidential Search Committee. It shall consult with all
appropriate persons on both campuses prior to making its final
recommendation and shall arrange for the candidates to meet with .
the Instruction Committee on each campus.
(3) The President shall concurrently be a Tutor, but the
provisions of Article V need not apply.
16
17
�(4) The President and persons to whom he delegates his
authority shall consult with the Deans, other appropr i ate
persons, and appropriate Faculty committees in matters o f po licy,
initiation of programs, and setting of priorities af f ec ting the
general welfare of the College.
(5) There shall be a Financial Committee on each campu s
consisting of the President as Chairman and the Dean and
Treasurer of the campus.
It will review proposed budgets prio r
to their being presented to the Finance Committee o f the Board.
It will also meet prior to Board meetings to review performance
in the fiscal year to date and emerging budgetary s trengths and
weaknesses. The President shall appoint, or delegate the power
to appoint, other committees as may be necessary for the carrying
out of his duties and for which no provision is made under
Article VIII.
(6)
If in the judgment of the Board of Vis itors and
Governors, the College is facing a financial exig ency at eithe r
or both of its campuses which could call for a reduction in the
number of Faculty positions, both President s shal l immediately
advise the Faculty of the nature and extent of the financial
difficulty and consult with them concerning the be st way to
address the situation. The Faculty may then make a formal
recommendation to the Presidents on ways to meet th e problem, or,
if the Faculty fails so to act, the Deans and the Instruction
Committee shall propose a plan to the Pres i dents. The Preside nt s
shall jointly then determine a plan which specifies a preferr ed
course of action to be taken.
All necessary steps must be ta ken
in timely fashion as prescribed by the Board. Nothing herein
provided shall limit the power of the Board to act o therwise in
the event of need to reduce or eliminate Faculty pos itions.
•
(c)
Each year the Chairman of the Instruction
Committee shall, after consultation with the Instruction
Committee on his campus, and after discussion with the
Instruction Committee of the College, submit a Statement of
Educational Policy and Program to the Faculty as a whole for
discussion.
The President shall present the Statement, together
with an account of the Faculty discussion of it and his response
to it, as a report to the Board of Visitors and Governors for its
consideration.
as he may
Governors
questions
Chairman,
(2)
•
(d) The Chairman of the Instruction Committee shall,
deem appropriate, report to the Board of Visitors and
on instructional issues, and shall respond to such
about instructional matters as the Board, through its
may from time to time direct to him.
The Deans.
(a) There is delegated to the Deans on their
respective campuses responsibility and authority for the
supervision of the program of instruction and for the general
welfare of the students and for whatever government of the
students be necessary for the greatest possible attainment of
aims of the program. Each Dean shall be the Chairman of the
Instruction Committee on the campus where he serves. In carrying
out their duties, the Deans shall consult regularly with the
Instruction Committee and other appropriate Faculty committees.
(b) The Deans shall be appointed for terms of five
years from among the Tutors by the Visitors and Governors on the
recommendation of the President after consultation with the
special committee of six, three from each campus, selected from
among themselves by the Tutors having tenure.
(c) The Deans shall be Tutors with tenure, the
provisions of Article V(3) notwithstanding.
Article IV
(d) To assist them in carrying out their duties, the
Deans shall recommend one or more Tutors to be appointed by the
President with the title of Assistant Dean.
THE FACULTY:
THE CHAIRMAN OF THE
INSTRUCTION COMMITTEE AND THE DEANS
The Chairman of the Instruction Committee.
(e) During the absence of the President from either
campus, the Dean on that campus shall if necessary exercise the
President's prerogative of final decision.
(a) There is delegated to the Chairman of the
Instruction Committe responsibility and authority for the
organization of the program of instruction in the liberal arts
that is followed by the Tutors and the Students.
(f) During the absence of either Dean from the campus
a Tutor with tenure named by him shall act for the Dean.
(1)
(b) The Deans shall serve alternately, for a term of
one year, as Chairman of the Instruction Committee.
•
(g) The Dean on each campus shall appoint such
committees as may be necessary for the carrying out of his duties
and for which no other provision is made.
18
19
�Article V
THE TUTORS
THE FACULTY:
(1) The primary responsibilities of the Tutors are to teach
and to make themselves as competent as possible in all parts of
the St. John's Program.
(2) The Tutors in Annapolis and the Tutors in Santa Fe
shall have authority to recommend to the Visitors and Governors
candidates for degrees.
(3) Appointment and Reappointment of Tutors. Tutors shall
be appointed by the Visitors and Governors upon recommendation of
the President in accordance with the recommenda tion of the Dean
and the Instruction Committee on that campus where the Tutors so
appointed shall teach.
(a) Regular appointment of Tutors shall be upon the
following terms:
(i) New Tutors shall be appointed for one year
unless they are appointed at mid-year, in which case the initial
First reappointments
appointment shall be for a year and a half.
shall be for one year. Second and third reappointments shall be
for two and three years respectively. Tenure appointments shall
not continue beyond June 30th of the academic year in which a
Tutor attains the age of 70, subject to the provisions of Section
(6) below.
(ii) Before making recommendations to the
President on tenure appointments the Dean on each campus shall
consult with the Instruction Committee on that campus, after
seeking the advice of the Tutors on that campus having tenure.
(iii) A Tutor who has completed two one-year
appointments followed by a two-year appointment and a three-year
appointment must either be given a tenure appointment or not be
reappointed as Tutor. A Tutor may, however, be given a tenure
appointment as early as the conclusion of the first year of a
Procedures leading to a recommendation
three-year appointment.
for an early tenure appointment shall be initiated by the Dean
and Instruction Committee, but not without the consent of the
appointee, and shall not prejudice subsequent consideration for a
tenure appointment.
(iv) A Tutor, to be recommended for a tenure
appointment, must have served full-time at the campus where the
recommendation is to · be made for the two years immediately
preceding the year in which that recommendation is made, the
In ordinary cases,
provisions of (iii) above notwithstanding.
these two years of service will be the second year of a two-year
appointment and the first year of a three-year appointment. The
requirement that the service be full-time may be waived by the
Dean and Instruction Committee on that campus.
20
(b) A non-tenure appointment as Tutor establishes the
possibility, but not the presumption, of its renewal and the
granting of a tenure appointment. Procedures for considering
non-tenure appointments differ from those for considering tenure
appointments. Satisfaction of appointment criteria admits of
degree. With each successive reappointment, the criteria are
For a tenure appointment the
applied more rigorously.
application is especially strict.
(c) For the purpose of temporary transfer between
campuses, special appointments of one or two years may be granted
to a Tutor in addition to his regular appointments. The Tutor
may ask that such an appointment be counted as a regular
In the case of a
appointment for the purpose of (a) above.
permanent transfer a Tutor may ask that his years of service at
the other campus be counted toward tenure according to the
provisions of (a) above. Nevertheless, the provisions of (3)
(a) (iv) prevail.
(d) Special one-year appointments and reappointments may
be given to Tutors who intend to teach on a part-time basis only.
Such a Tutor may subsequently apply for and receive a regular
appointment. Special part-time appointments may then be counted
on a fractional basis toward eligibility for tenure, but see
(3)(a)(iv). In establishing eligibility for sabbatical leave,
special part-time appointments shall be computed proportionately.
(4)
Notification.
(a) A Tutor under consideration for a non-tenure
appointment to begin in a certain calendar year shall be notified
by the President no later than December 15th of the preceding
calendar year whether his reappointment will be recommended to
If he is reappointed the
the Board of Visitors and Governors.
President shall so notify him by March 1st of the calendar year
in which the new appointment is to begin.
(b) A Tutor under consideration for a tenure
appointment to begin in a certain calendar year shall be notified
by the President no later than May 31st of the preceding calendar
year whether his appointment will be recommended to the Board of
If he is appointed the President shall
Visitors and Governors.
so notify him by July 31st of that same preceding year.
(5) A Tutor may apply to the Instruction Committee of the
College not later than January 15th for a transfer of campus for
the next academic year. Transfers shall require approval of both
Deans after consultation with their Instruction Committees.
(a) A Tutor may have his appointment terminated by the
(6)
Board of Visitors and Governors for one of the following reasons
(i) failure or inability to perform his teaching duties in
only:
a satisfactory manner, or (ii) moral turpitude. The President
shall make such a recommendation to the Board of Visitors and
Governors only with the concurrence of the Dean and the
21
�Before the
Instruction Committee of the campus co n cerned.
President makes such a recommenda ti on h e s hall advise the Tutor
affected of his intention to do so , a nd the Tutor shall have the
right to be heard by the Instruct i on Committee or, if he pref 7rs,
by another committee to be designated by the President for this
purpose.
(b) Either Dean, with the a pp roval of the Instruction
Committee on the campus concerned , may r ec omme nd to the President
that in the interest of instruction a Tuto r be temporarily
relieved of his duties in whole or in p art at any time. When
such action is taken, the Tutor's sal ary s h a ll be continued for
the remainder of the current acad emi c year .
(7) The sabbatical leave p rogram i s designed to provide
Tutors with an opportunity for s tudy , re st , and renewal of
It is the objective
spirit, in anticipation of future te achi ng.
of the program to grant all applicat ions f o r sabbatical leave
meeting the conditions for eligib ility set out in (a) of this
section. It is understood that Tut o rs on such leave will not
undertake full-time remunerative e mp loyment elsewhere and will
return to the College.
Eligibility for sabbat ica l leave shall be upon the
(a)
following conditions:
(i) A Tutor who has rece ive d a tenure appointment
may apply for a full year of sabbatical leave at full salary,
provided he shall have completed the equivalent of seven full
years of service to the College since his o riginal appointment,
or the equivalent of six full years of service since any previous
sabbatical leave, and the sabbat i ca l leave would not occur in the
last two years of his tenure appo i n t men t.
Such a Tutor ma y a pp ly fo r an earlier
(ii)
sabbatical leave of a full year at pa r t ial sala ry, or a partial
year at full salary. The fractional salary or fractional year
shall be determined by the number of y ears of te aching completed
in relation to the prescribed tota l for e i t h er a n initial or a
In no case
subsequent sabbatical leave, as the case may be.
Sabbatical
salary.
ar
l
egu
r
shall a Tutor be paid more than his
leave for a fraction of a year may not occur dur ing the last t wo
years of a Tutor's tenure appointment.
If, in the judgment of the President, f ina n c ial o r
(b)
academic needs at a campus should require tha t fe we r s abbatic a l
leaves be granted there in a given year than there a re qualifi ed
applicants, and if the number that can be gra n ted there shoul d be
smaller than one-sixth of the number of Tutors a t that campu s
having tenure and not on full-time l eave under th e pr ovisio ns of
section (8) below, the President shall so notif y t he Boa r d of
Visitors and Governors and seek its approval for de l a yin g a
sabbatical leave for one or more of the applicants.
22
(c) If in a year there are more qualified applicants for
sabbatical leave at any one campus than there are leaves to be
granted at that campus, then those members shall have precedence
who meet the following conditions in the order set forth:
(i) Those who have served for the greater number
of years since their first appointment as Tutor or since their
last sabbatical leave, whichever is more recent;
(ii) Those whose service has been continuous
throughout those years;
(iii) Those whose last sabbatical leave was
postponed because of the financial or academic needs of the
College;
(iv)
Those who have seniority of appointment.
When there is a conflict of precedence, the Dean and the
Instruction Committee on the campus concerned shall be consulted.
(d) A Tutor eligible for sabbatical leave shall make
application to the President before November 1st for leave to
begin the following July 1st, and shall be informed of the action
upon his application not later than January 1st.
(8) The President, with the concurrence of the Dean after
cqnsultation with the Instruction Committee on the campus
concerned, may grant leaves of absence to Tutors for a period of
one year or less. At that time it shall be determined whether
the leave shall be counted as service to the College with respect
to eligibility for sabbatical leave and, if so, how. The
decision with respect to a request for leave of absence shall be
made in the light of the requirements both of the applicant Tutor
and of the whole College.
(a) Leave of absence may be renewed upon request but
not more than twice in succession except in extraordinary
circumstances.
(b) A request for a leave of absence shall be
submitted to the President as early as possible in the academic
in which the leave is to be taken, but not
year before the year
later than January 15th of that year. Requests for leaves of
absence may be withdrawn at any time prior to April 1st of the
year in which the request is submitted. Requests for leaves of
absence for the second semester must be submitted no later than
October 15th.
(c) Tutors on sabbatical leave or leave of absence
remain members of the Faculty with the right of full
participation in Faculty meetings and all other College
e·xercises.
23
�Article VI
THE FACULTY:
THE VICE-PRESIDE NTS
FOR COLLEGE ADVANCEMENT AND THE TREASURERS
(1) The Vice-Preside nts for College Advancement shall be
responsible to the President for the supervision and development
of all programs in fund-raising , public relations , a n d alumni
relations on their respective campuses.
(2) The Vice-Preside nt
campus shall be appointed by
on the recommendati on of the
with the Dean on that campus
resolution of the Faculty on
for College Advancement on each
the Board of Visi t or s and Governors
President made afte r co nsultati on
and a committee con stituted by
that campus.
(3) The Treasurers shall have charge, on thei r respecti ve
campuses, under the supervision of the President , of all fund s
and property, and shall have authority to carry o ut fiscal and
property transactions , and to receive and disbursemen
funds,
ts
subJ ect
to the provisions of this Polity and other directions and
arrangements pursuant thereto.
(4) The Associates' Council may establish such committees
as it deems appropriate.
(5) There shall be the following Associates, as deemed
necessary on each campus, with the powers and responsibil ities
provided.
(a) The Registrars. The Registrars shall be
responsible to the Deans on their respective campuses. They
shall prepare and supervise the registration of students and
shall be responsible for the academic records and schedules of
students.
(b) The Librarians. The Librarians shall be
responsible to the Deans on their respective campuses for the
operation of the library. Appointments of professional members
of the Library Staff shall be made upon the recommendati on of the
Librarian to the Dean on each campus.
(c) The Director of Student Activities and the
Director of Athletics. The Director of Student Activities and
the Director of Athletics shall be responsible to the Deans on
their respective campuses for devising and directing programs of
recreational activities.
(4) The Treasurer on each campus shall be appo inted by the
Board of Visitors and Governors on the recommendat io n of the
President made after consultation with the Dean on t hat campus
and a committee constituted by resolution of the Faculty on that
campus.
(d) The Directors of Admissions. The Directors of
Admissions shall be responsible to the Deans on their respective
campuses for the annual enrollment of qualified Freshmen.
(5) The Vice-Preside nts for College Advancemen t and
Treasurers may be appointed Tutors under the provis ions of
Article V(3)(d).
(e) The Directors of Alumni Activities. The Directors
of Alumni Activities shall be responsible to the Vice-Preside nts
for College Advancement. Their primary duty is to enable the
College and the Alumni Association to be of service to alumni.
Article VII
THE FACULTY:
THE ASSOCIATES
(1) Associates on each campus shall be appointed by the
Board of Visitors and Governors on the recommendat ion of the
President in consultation with the Dean of that campus.
(2) Associates may be appointed Tutors under the provisions
of Article V (3) (d).
(3) The Associates on either campus may establish for
themselves an Associates' Council for the purpose of considering
college matters of concern to them and communicatin g with other
members of the College.
(£)
The Directors of Financial Aid. The Directors of
Financial Aid shall be responsible to the Deans on their
respective campuses for the administrati on of financial aid
programs.
(g) The Directors of Career Counseling. The Directors
of Career Counseling shall be responsible to the Deans on their
respective campuses for counseling students with respect to
graduate and professional schools and careers.
(h)
Persons designated Associates under the provisions
of Article I(3)(f) or of Article VII(3)(k) of this Polity as
amended through April 20, 1985, whose offices are not
specifically named in this Article, shall continue to be
Associates until the expiration of their appointments to those
offices.
24
25
�I
I
•
Article VIII
THE FACULTY:
(1)
FACULTY COMMITTEES
The Instruc tion Committ ee
The Instruc tion Committ ee shares with its Chairme n
(a)
respons ibility for the program of instruc tion of the College . It
shall consist of twelve Tutors in additio n to the Deans. The
Preside nt shall sit with the Committ ee ex officio . Six of the
Tutors shall be elected from each campus of the College . The
Instruc tion Committ ee shall meet annuall y. On each campus the
members of the Instruc tion Committ ee and the Dean as Chairma n
constit ute the Instruc tion Committ ee of the College on that
campus. The Preside nt sits ex officio with the Instruc tion
Committ ee on each campus.
(b) Each of the members of the Instruc tion Committ ee
shall serve for a term of three years, and the terms shall be
arrange d in such a way that each year the terms of two members at
each campus shall expire. Terms begin and end the day followin g
commenc ement exercis es. Annuall y, and separat ely at each campus,
the Preside nt with the Dean on his campus, after consult ing with
the Instruc tion Committ ee and seeking the advice of the other
Tutors on that campus, shall at the last regular Faculty meeting
on that campus nominat e four Tutors of whom two shall be elected
by the Tutors to members hip on the Instruc tion Committ ee. The
Faculty shall be informe d of the names of the nominee s prior to
the meeting at which the electio n occurs. At the expirat ion of
the three-y ear term a member of the Instruc tion Committ ee shall
for one year be ineligib le for reelect ion.
I
'
The Library Committ ees. The Preside nt, in consult ation
with the Libraria n and the Dean, shall appoint three Tutors on
each campus to serve as a Library Committ ee. The Preside nt, the
Dean, and the Libraria n shall themsel ves be ex officio members of
the Committ ee, and the Libraria n shall serve as Chairma n. It
shall be the duty of the Library Committ ees to assist the
Libraria ns in making the Librarie s serve the ends of the College
and its program ; it shall be their duty to advise the Librari ans
in regard to Library policy and acquisi tions. The Manager s of
the Booksto res may be invited to sit with the Commit tees.
I
(a) There shall be a Tutors' Compen sation Committ ee of
six Tutors, three to be elected by the Tutors on each campus,
whose chairma nship shall annuall y alterna te between campuse s.
The Committ ee shall advise the Preside nt concern ing Tutors'
compen sation and related matters ; it shall make annual reviews of
26
I
I
(3)
I
I
The Campus Planning Commit tees. The Faculty on each
campus shall elect five of its members as a Campus Plannin g
Committ ee. Two members shall be elected to the Committ ee
annuall y at the first regular meeting of the academi c session
except in every third year, when one member shall be chosen. The
Preside nt shall sit ex officio with both Commit tees. The Dean,
one of the Assista ntDean s, and the Treasur er on each campus
It shall
shall sit ex officio with the Committ ee on that campus.
be the duty of the respect ive committ ees to advise the Preside nt
on the constru ction of new buildin gs, the renovat ion of old
buildin gs, landsca ping of grounds , and all matters relating to
the mainten ance and developm ent of the campus.
(4)
•
The Prize Committ ees. Every three years the Preside nt
shall appoint five Tutors on each campus to supervi se the
awardin g of prizes on the respect ive campuse s. The Committ ees
shall have full authori ty to decide what prizes shall be awarded
and to name the recipie nts of the prizes.
(5)
If the Instruc tion Committ ee resigns with the
(d)
Deans on a matter of confide nce and the resigna tions are
accepte d, the Preside nt, in consult ation with the new Deans and
after seeking the advice of the other Tutors, shall nominat e nine
Tutors for the six vacanci es on each campus in such a manner that
two out of each three nominee s shall be elected by the Tutors for
each of the three classes to fill the unexpir ed terms.
The Tutors' Compen sation Committ ee
Members of the Committ ee shall be elected annuall y
on each campus for terms of three years in such a manner that the
term of one member on each campus termina tes each year. The
Tutors' Compen sation Committ ee on each campus shall provide the
Tutors on that campus with two nominat ions for each vacancy on
the Committ ee on that campus. Additio nal nominat ions may be made
at the Faculty meeting when election shall be made.
(b)
If for any reason a member of the Instruc tion
(c)
Committ ee is unable to serve for a part of his term, another
Tutor shall be chosen to take his place for that part of the
For this purpose the Preside nt and the Dean, in
term.
consult ation with the Instruc tion Committ ee on the campus where
the vacancy occurs, shall nominat e two Tutors of whom the Tutors
shall elect one in a regular Faculty meeting .
(2)
the College 's stateme nt of Tutors' salarie s and other
compens ation of Tutors and report to the Tutors and the Preside nt
recomme ndations consequ ent upon the review.
The Fellows hip Committ ees. On each campus there shall
It shall be the
be a Fellows hip Committ ee appoint ed by the Dean.
hips for
fellows
of
s
student
inform
to
duty of this Committ ee
for
applying
in
them
assist
to
which they may be eligibl e,
matter
any
in
College
fellows hips, and to act on behalf of the
relating to applica tion for fellows hips.
(6)
•
Other Commit tees. The Faculty on each campus shall
have authori ty to elect, or to request the Preside nt to appoint ,
addition al committ ees that may from time to time become
necessa ry.
(7)
27
�Article IX
THE FACULTY:
(1 )
I
I
Ii
FACULTY PROCEDURE
Procedure for Instructiona l Proposals.
(a)(i) Any major proposal concerning matters of
instruction affecting the College as a whole shall originate with
the Dean and the Instruction Committee on either campus, and the
decision as to what proposals are major shall be within the
discretion of the said Dean and Instruction Committee who shall
then consult with the Dean and the Instruction Committee on the
In normal circumstance s major proposals concerning
other campus.
instruction shall be formulated at the annual meeting of the
Instruction Committee of the College. Written statements of such
a proposal shall be distributed to the Faculty at least two weeks
before the Faculty meeting at which they are to be presented; the
proposal shall be presented to the whole Faculty by the Chairman
of the Instruction Committee, either in his own person or through
If, after full discussion
the other Dean as his representati ve.
of any proposal so presented, there be no objection on the part
of any Tutor, the measure stands approved and becomes effective
If, after full discussion, a
as of the date specified therefor.
Tutor objects to the proposal and holds to his objection, the
proposal shall be submitted to vote of the Tutors at special
In
Faculty meetings called by the President within a fortnight.
Instruction
the
of
Chairman
the
vote
to
submitting the proposal
Committee and the Dean on the other campus shall state whether it
be a matter of confidence. The vote may then be taken and
tallied by the President in such a fashion that the Tutors shall
If the proposal
have recorded their decision acting as a whole.
and the
Committee
Instruction
the
of
Chairman
the
be one that
it be
if
and
confidence
of
other Dean have declared a matter
defeated by majority vote, the Deans and the Instruction
If it be passed by majority
Committee shall immediately resign.
vote, it shall become effective as of the date specified
For the confidence procedure a quorum shall consist of
therefor.
three-fourth s of all resident Tutors on each campus.
(ii) Proposals concerning instruction that are
not considered major shall originate with the Dean and the
Instruction Committee on the campus where they are intended to be
put into effect, and shall be presented by the Dean to the
Faculty on that campus. The procedure set forth above for the
approval or rejection of proposals shall be followed, except that
it shall apply only on the campus concerned.
In the event that the proposal be defeated
(iv)
and the resignations be accepted, the President shall proceed to
the choice of new Deans in accordance with the provisions of
Article IV (2)(b).
Upon petition of not less than one-tenth of the
(b)
campus, the Dean and Instruction Committee on
either
Tutors on
that campus shall consider any recommendati on concerning
instruction that may be made by the petitioning members, and the
Dean and the Instruction Committee shall report to the Faculty
within one year their proposal concerning it. They shall decide
whether their proposal is a major proposal, and the procedure of
Article IX(l) shall apply.
(2)
Faculty Meetings.
(a) Regular monthly meetings of the Faculty shall be
called upon due notice by the President; except that in the
period comprising the months of December and January only one
regular meeting need be called. The President or, in his
absence, the Dean, shall preside. In the absence of the
President and the Dean, the Faculty shall elect one of its
members to preside.
(b) Special meetings of the Faculty may be called upon
due notice by the President, either at his own discretion or at
the request of five Faculty members.
(c) Due notice shall be construed to mean no less than
three days' notice, except in cases of emergency.
(d) A quorum shall consist of a majority of the
Faculty in residence except as otherwise provided.
(3) The Secretary of the Faculty. At the last regular
meeting of an academic year the Faculty on each campus shall
elect one of its members, then in at least his third year at the
College, as Secretary. The Secretary shall assist in the
preparation and circulation of the agenda for Faculty meetings,
shall keep the minutes of such meetings, and shall collect and
circulate reports of Faculty committees.
Article X
I
I
I
(iii) The President may refuse to accept the
resignation of the Deans or the Instruction Committee, any or all
of them, whenever in his judgment such resignation would be
detrimental to the proper functioning of the College; provided,
however, that if any six or more Tutors shall petition the
Visitors and Governors, the latter shall review the President's
decision within four weeks, during which time the Deans and the
Instruction Committee shall continue in office.
28
THE SCHOLARS-IN-RESIDENCE AND THE ARTISTS-IN-R ESIDENCE
The Scholars-in- Residence and the Artists-in-R esidence shall
be appointed by the Board of Visitors and Governors on the
recommendati on of the President after consultation with the Dean
and the Instruction Committee on the campus where the Scholars
and Artists shall reside.
29
I
�Article XI
Article XII
THE STUDENTS
THE GRADUATE INSTITUTE
The primary responsibilities of the students are to
(1)
study and to make themselves as competent as possible in all
Their advice and service shall
parts of the St. John's Program.
be sought by the Faculty in such matters and in such ways as may
best serve the general welfare of the College.
The students of St. John's College in Annapolis shall
(2)
constitute the Student Polity of St. John's College in Annapolis;
the students of St. John's College in Santa Fe shall constitute
the Student Polity in Santa Fe.
The Student Polity in Annapolis or Santa Fe may
(3)
establish for itself a government which is representative of all
polity members. The Dean on each campus may delegate to the
Student government a share of the responsibility for the general
welfare of the students and whatever government of the students
may be necessary for the greatest possible attainment of the aims
of the program. The duties of the Student Government may
include:
Polity;
(a)
the management of funds available to the Student
the sanctioning of all student clubs,
(b)
organizations, and activities, and their regulation, if
necessary;
the representation of the students of St. John's
(c)
College to the community outside the College;
the establishment and maintenance of formal
(d)
channels of communication between the students and the spokesmen
of the Faculty; and
the Dean.
(e)
any other duties agreed upon by the students and
(1)
The Directors.
(a) There shall be a Director of the Graduate
Institute on each campus to whom shall be delegated
responsibility and authority, under the Chairman of the
Instruction Committee, for the organization and supervision on
his campus of the graduate program of instruction in the liberal
arts and for matters concerning the general welfare of the
students. He shall consult with the Dean on his own campus
concerning matters that affect the Graduate Institute there and
with his fellow Director concerning matters that affect the
Graduate Institute as a whole; when necessary, the final decision
shall be reached by the Coordinator of the Graduate Institute in
consultation with the Chairman of the Instruction Committee of
the College.
(b) The Directors shall be appointed for terms of
three years from among the Tutors by the Board of Visitors and
Governors on the recommendation of the President, after
consultation with the Deans and a special committee consisting of
four members, two from each campus, selected from among
themselves by the Tutors having tenure. The Directors shall be
Tutors of the Graduate Institute.
(2)
The Coordinator of the Graduate Institute.
(a) That Director who resides on the same campus as
the Chairman of the Instruction Committee of the College shall be
designated Coordinator of the Graduate Institute for that year.
He shall be responsible for coordinating the work of the Graduate
Institute on the two campuses.
(b) Every three years, after consultation with his
fellow director and the Committee for the Graduate Institute on
his own campus, the Coordinator shall submit a Statement of
Educational Policy and Program for the Graduate Institute to the
Instruction Committee for discussion at its joint meeting. After
making any revisions he deems appropriate he shall submit it to
the Faculty as a whole for discussion.
(3)
The Faculty of the Graduate Institute.
(a) Each Director, after consultation with the
Committee for the Graduate Institute on that campus, and in
accordance with the recommendation of the Instruction Committee
on the same campus, shall recommend to the President Tutors of
the Graduate Institute for summer appointment to teach in the
Graduate Institute for one session.
30
31
�(b) On each campus the Tutors of the Graduate
Institute shall have the authority to recommend to the Board of
Visitors and Governors candidates for degrees.
(4)
Committees for the Graduate Institute.
(a) On each campus the Committee for the Graduate
Institute shares with the Director on the same campus
responsibility for carrying out the program of instruction of the
Graduate Institute and for the general welfare of the students.
(b)
Each Committee shall consist of three Tutors who
have experience in the Institute, in addition to the Director,
who shall serve as Chairman.
(c) Members of each Committee shall be appointed by
the Director with the concurrence of the Dean on the same campus,
after consultation with the Committee for the Graduate Institute
on that campus.
I
(5 )
I
I
I
I
Procedure for Instructional Proposals.
(a) Major proposals concerning matters of instruction
or policy shall originate with one of the Directors, after
consultation with the other Director and with the Committee for
the Graduate Institute and the Dean on his own campus.
Such
proposals shall be submitted to the Instruction Committee of the
College; if approved, they shall come before the Faculty in
accordance with Article IX(l)(a)(i).
(b)
Proposals concerning instruction or policy that
are not considered major shall originate with the Director on the
campus where they are intended to be put into effect, after
consultation with the Committee for the Graduate Institute and
the Dean on that campus. Such proposals shall be submitted to
the Instruction Committee on that campus; if approved, they shall
come before the Faculty in accordance with Article IX(l)(a)(ii).
•
(3) The College shall cooperate with the Alumni Association
to enable alumni to assist in providing services such as
recruiting and interviewing prospective students, placing
graduates in appropriate employment, and advising students
concerning careers and admission to graduate and professional
schools.
(4) The College, in cooperation with the Alumni
Association, shall provide seminars and other appropriate
educational activities in Annapolis, in Santa Fe, and in other
places.
Article XIV
THE STAFF
(1) Members of the Staff assist with the administration and
maintenance of the College, performing duties necessary to its
well-being. They are subject to appropriate Staff rules and
regulations.
(2) Members of the Staff on either campus may establish for
themselves a Staff Council for the purpose of better
communication and understanding of College policies as a benefit
to the College as a whole. The Staff Council shall seek to
establish and maintain formal channels of communication among the
whole Staff and between the Staff and the appropriate College
Officers. The Treasurer on each campus shall review Staff
employment regulations with the Staff Council and discuss with
them any changes proposed.
(3) The Staff Council may establish such committees as it
deems appropriate.
Ii
Ii
Article XIII
THE ALUMNI
(1)
Alumni shall be life-long members of the College, since
St. John's College is a community not limited by geographical
location or fixed periods of time.
I
(2)
The Alumni Association is the formal means by which
alumni participate in the life of the College. Through the
election of alumni members of the Board of Visitors and
Governors, alumni share in the direction of that life.
In these
and other ways, alumni shall be given the opportunity to serve
the College.
32
Article XV
AMENDMENTS AND REVIEW
(1) This Polity may be amended by a two-thirds vote of the
members present at any regular or special meeting of the Board
provided written notice of the proposed amendment shall have been
given to members of the Board and to the Faculty not less than
thirty days prior to such meeting. The Faculty shall have the
right to inform the Board in writing of its recommendation with
33
�respect to the propose d amendme nt by the date of the Board
meeting at which the amendme nt is to be conside red.
(2) Amendm ents may be propose d at any regular meet ing of
either the Faculty in Annapo lis or the Faculty in Santa Fe upon
petitio n of not less than ten percent of the members on either
campus. No such proposa l shall be acted upon earlier than the
next regular meeting of the Faculty , whether in Annapo li s or in
Santa Fe. Two-thi rds vote of the entire Faculty in resi dence
shall be require d for approva l and the amendme nt shall not become
effectiv e unless approve d by the Board in the manner set forth in
Section (1) above.
Every five years this Polity shall be reviewe d by a
(3)
committ ee of the Faculty elected by a majorit y vote of the
Faculty . The report of the Committ ee shall be submitt ed to one
regular Faculty meeting and voted upon at the next regula r
Faculty meeting . A two-thi rds vote of the Faculty in res idence
shall be require d for approva l.
Whateve r action is thus recomme nded by the Facu lty
shall be submitt ed to the Board for final decisio n in the manne r
set forth in Section (1) above.
Article XVI
No provisio n of this Polity shall be constru ed to contrav en
If any provisi on is
any applica ble federal or state law.
determi ned to contrav ene any such law, that provisi on shal l be
deemed not a part of this Polity, and this Polity' s remaini ng
provisio ns shall remain in full force and effect:
34
��
Dublin Core
The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/.
Title
A name given to the resource
Charter and Polity of the College
Description
An account of the resource
Revised and amended editions of the St. John's College Charter and Polity.<br /><br />The College's first Charter and Polity was published as the <a href="https://digitalarchives.sjc.edu/items/show/3768">September 1950</a> issue of the <em><a href="https://digitalarchives.sjc.edu/collections/show/37">Bulletin of St. John's College in Annapolis</a></em>. Revised and amended versions were published as individual issues of the <em>Bulletin</em> in <a href="https://digitalarchives.sjc.edu/items/show/3746">1951</a>, <a href="https://digitalarchives.sjc.edu/items/show/7844">1960</a>, <a href="https://digitalarchives.sjc.edu/items/show/7845">1963</a>, and <a href="https://digitalarchives.sjc.edu/items/show/7846">1965</a>. <br /><br />The Charter and Polity was published as a separate document in <a href="https://digitalarchives.sjc.edu/items/show/7850">1955</a> and again from <a href="https://digitalarchives.sjc.edu/items/show/7851">1970</a> forward. The most recent version of the Charter and Polity is also available on the College's <a href="https://www.sjc.edu/about/leadership/board-visitors-governors/charter-polity">website</a>. <br /><br />Click on <strong><a title="Items in the Charter and Polity of the College Collection" href="https://digitalarchives.sjc.edu/items/browse?collection=62&sort_field=Dublin+Core%2CDate">Items in the Charter and Polity of the College Collection</a></strong> to view and sort all items in the collection.
Creator
An entity primarily responsible for making the resource
St. John's College
Publisher
An entity responsible for making the resource available
St. John's College
Contributor
An entity responsible for making contributions to the resource
St. John's College Greenfield Library
Text
A resource consisting primarily of words for reading. Examples include books, letters, dissertations, poems, newspapers, articles, archives of mailing lists. Note that facsimiles or images of texts are still of the genre Text.
Original Format
The type of object, such as painting, sculpture, paper, photo, and additional data
PDF
Page numeration
Number of pages in the original item.
34 pages
Dublin Core
The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/.
Title
A name given to the resource
Charter and Polity of the College, 1987
Description
An account of the resource
Charter and Polity of the College, April 1987.
Creator
An entity primarily responsible for making the resource
St. John's College
Publisher
An entity responsible for making the resource available
St. John's College
Coverage
The spatial or temporal topic of the resource, the spatial applicability of the resource, or the jurisdiction under which the resource is relevant
Annapolis, MD
Santa Fe, NM
Date
A point or period of time associated with an event in the lifecycle of the resource
1987-04
Type
The nature or genre of the resource
text
Format
The file format, physical medium, or dimensions of the resource
PDF
Subject
The topic of the resource
St. John's College (Annapolis, Md.)
Legal instruments
Language
A language of the resource
English
Identifier
An unambiguous reference to the resource within a given context
Charter_and_Polity_1987
Charter and Polity
-
https://s3.us-east-1.amazonaws.com/sjcdigitalarchives/original/449d723e466cc25a7b79ca2c068c950c.pdf
702044109db8c6989cce2a8521bd2918
PDF Text
Text
ST. JOHN'S COLLEGE
CHARTER AND POLITY
OF
THE COLLEGE
ANNAPOLIS, MARYLAND
SANTA FE, NEW MEXICO
May, 1976
Founded as King William's School, 1696, Chartered as St. John's College, 1784
�History
I
7
I
I
I
'
J
St. john's College was founded in 1696 as King William's School in
accordance with a Petitionary Act for free-schools of the General Assembly of
the Colony of Maryland. Following the Revolutionary War, the General
Assembly of the new State of Maryland granted a Charter to St. John's
College pursuant to and as a part of Chapter 37 of the Laws of Maryland of
1784. This Charter was subsequently amended by the General Assembly
through Resolution No. 41 of 1832.
The Visitors and Governors of St. John's College in 1950 revised the
Charter to eliminate extraneous and obsolete matter and to make certain
other amendments consistent with present requirements and conditions. It
was the opinion of the Attorney General of Maryland that the original
Charter of the College was subject to the general Corporation Laws of
Maryland and might accordingly be amended by the Visitors and Governors,
pursuant to these laws, without legislative action by the General Assembly.
Subsequent amendments were made in 1961, in 1963, in 1965, in 1970, and
in 1975.
When the decision was reached to establish a second St. john's College in
Santa Fe, New Mexico, amendments were made to the Charter to authorize
branches or extensions of the College. The Charter was then filed with the
Corporations Commission of the State of New Mexico as a foreign
corporation. The College was thus empowered to grant degrees in New
Mexico under the provisions of its Maryland Charter.
A Polity for the College was first suggested at a faculty meeting in 1943 by
the Dean. A faculty committee was elected and drafted a Polity which was
then promulgated by the President. In April 1949 the Faculty elected a
committee to revise the Polity. The resulting document was approved by the
Faculty on April 9, 1950, and was adopted by the Board of Visitors and
Governors on July 8, 1950. Subsequent quinquennial reviews were made by
elected faculty committees, and desired amendments were recommended by
the Faculty to the Board of Visitors and Governors. The Polity was thus
amended at regular annual meetings of the Board held in Annapolis on May
14, 1955, May 21, 1960, May 15, 1965, June 6, 1970, and April 19, 1975.
Other amendments were adopted by the Board at regular meetings in
Annapolis on February 22 and December 9, 1961, February 23, 1963,
October 3, 1970, and October 25, 1975; also at regular meetings in Santa Fe
on September 28, 1963, February 18, 1972, and January 24, 1976.
1
-
�IV. That the governing body or board of said College shall consist of not
more than forty-nine nor less than thirteen Visitors and Governors, to be
chosen and to hold office in such manner as the said Visitors and Governors
may determine and prescribe by their fundamental ordinances; provided,
however, that the Governors of the States of Maryland and New Mexico shall
act ex officio as two of the total number of Visitors and Governors of said
college during their respective terms in said offices; and that the said Visitors
and Governors and their successors duly chosen shall be and are hereby
declared to be one community, corporation and body politic to have
contmuance forever by the name of
Charter of St. John's College
WHEREAS, institutions for the liberal education of youth in the principles of virtue , knowledge and useful literature are of the highest benefit to
society, in order to train up and perpetuate a succession of able and honest
men for discharging the various offices and duties of life, both civil and
religious, with usefulness and reputation , and such institutions of learning
have accordingly been promoted and encouraged by the wisest and best
regulated States; And whereas, it appears to this General Assembly that many
public spirited individuals, from an earnest desire to promote the founding a
college or seminary of learning on the Western Shore of this State have
subscribed and procured subscriptions to a considerable amount, and there is
reason to believe that very large additions will be obtained to the same
throughout the different counties of the said Shore , if they were made capable
in law to receive and apply the same towards founding and carrying on a
college or general seminary of learning with such salutary plan and with such
legislative assistance and direction as the General Assembly might think fit,
and this General Assembly, highly approving those generous exertions of
individuals, are desirous to embrace the present favorable occasion of peace
and prosperity for making lasting provision for the encouragement and
advancement of all useful knowledge and literature through every part of this
State;
ST. JOHN'S COLLEGE
and by the same name they shall have perpetual succession.
VII. That if the City of Annapolis should be fixed upon as a proper place
for establishing the said mtended college, this General Assembly give and
grant, and upon that condition do hereby give and grant to the Visitors and
Governors of the said College by the name of ''The Visitors and Governors of
Saint John's College in the State of Maryland," and their successors all that
four acres within the City of Annapolis purchased for· the use by the public
and conveyed on the 2nd day of October, 1744, by Stephen Bordley, Esq . to
Thos. Bladen, Esq., then Governor, to have and to hold the said four acres
of land with the appurtenances to the said Visitors and governors and their
successors for the only use, benefit and behoof of the said college and
seminary of universal learning forever.
BE IT ENACTED :
II. That a college or general seminary of learning by the name of "St.
John's College" be established on the said Western Shore upon the following
fundamental and inviolable principles ; namely, first, the said college shall be
founded and maintained forever upon a most liberal plan for the benefit of
youth of every religious denomination , who shall be freely admitted to equal
privileges and advantages of education and to all the literary honors of the
college, according to their merit without requiring or enforcing any religious
or civil test, or urging their attendance upon any particular religious worship
or service other than what they have been educated in or have the consent and
approbation of their parents or guardians to attend; nor shall any preference
be given in the choice of a Principal, Vice-Principal or other Professor, Master
or Tutor in said college on account of his particular religious profession,
having regard solely to his moral character and literary abilities and other
necessary qualifications to fill the place for which he shall be chosen.
2
-
, I
VIII. That the said Visitors and Governors and their successors by the same
name shall be able and capable in law to purchase, have and enjoy to them
and their successors in fee, or for any other less estate or estates, any lands,
tenements , rents, annuities, pensions or other hereditaments by the gift,
grant, bargam, sale, alienation, enfoeffment, release, confirmation, or devise
of any person or persons, bodies politic or corporate capable to make the
same, and such lands, tenements , rents, annuities, pensions or other
hereditaments or any less estates, rights or interests of or in the same at their
pleasure to grant, alien, sell_ and transfer in such manner and form as they
shall think meet and convement for the furtherance of the said college; And
also that they ma_y take and receive any sum or sums of money, and any kind,
manner or pomon of goods and chattels that shall be given, sold or
bequeathed to them by any person or persons, bodies politic or corporate
capable to make a gift, sale or bequest thereof and employ the same toward
erecting, setting up and maintaining the said col.lege in such manner as they
shall Judge most necessary and convenient for the instruction, improvement
- 3 -
�I
I
I
and education of youth in the vernacular and learned languages, and
generally in any kind of literature, ans and sciences, which they shall think
proper to be taught for training up good , useful and accomplished men for
the service of their country , in church and state .
professors such powers and authorities as they may think best for the standing
government of the said seminary and of the execuuon of the ordmances and
rules of the same; provided always that they be not repugnant to the form of
government of any law of this State.
IX. That the said Visitors and Governors and their successors by the name
aforesaid shall be able in law to sue and be sued, plead and be impleadable in
any court or courts, before any judge, judges, or justices within this State and
elsewhere in all and all manner of suits, complaints, pleas, causes, matters
and demands of whatsoever kind, nature or form they be and all and every
other matter and thing therein to do in as full and effectual a manner as any
other person or persons, bodies politic or corporate within this State or any of
the United States of America in like cases may or can do.
XV. And for animating and encouraging the students of said college to a
laudable diligence, industry and progress in useful literature and science, be it
enacted that the said Visitors and Governors and their successors shall by
a written mandate under their privy seal and the hand of someone of the
Visitors and Governors to be chosen annually as their President, according to
the ordinance to be made for that purpose, have full power and authoriry to
direct the principal, vice-principal and professors to hold public commencements either on stated annual days, or occas10nally as the future ordmances of
the said seminary may direct and at such commencements to admit any of the
students in the said college or any other persons meriting the same (whose
names shall be severally inserted in the same mandate) to any degree or
degrees in any of the faculties, arts and sciences and liberal professions .to
which persons are usually admitted in other colleges or universities in Amenc_a
or Europe; And it is hereby enacted that the pnncipal, or in the case of his
death or absence, the vice-principal, and in case of the death or absence of
both, the senior professor who may be present, shall make out and sign with
his name diplomas or certificates of the admission to such degree or degrees,
which shall be sealed with the public or greater seal of the said corporatton or
college and delivered to the graduates as honorable and perpetual
testimonials of such admission; which diplomas, if thought necessary for
doing greater honor to such graduates, shall also be signed with the names of
the different professors or as many of them as can conveniently sign the same;
provided always that no student or students within the said college shall ever
be admitted to any such degree or degrees, or have their name mserted in any
mandate for a degree, until such student or students have been first duly
examined, and thought worthy of the same.
X. That the said Visitors and Governors and their successors shall have full
power and authoriry to have, make and use one common and public seal and
likewise one privy seal with such devices and inscriptions as they shall_ think
proper, and to ascertain, fix and regulate the uses of both seals, by their own
laws and the same seals or either of them to change, break, alter and renew at
their pleasure.
Ir
II
I
I
XI . That the said Visitors and Governors and their successors from time to
time and at all times hereafter, forever, shall have full power and authority to
constitute and appoint in such manner as they shall think best and most
convenient, a principal, a vice-principal of th_esaid college and professors with
proper tutors and assistants for instructing the students and scholars of the
said seminary in all the liberal arts and sciences, and in the ancient and
modern tongues and languages; and the said principal, vice-principal and
professors so constituted and appointed from time to time shall be known and
distinguished forever as one learned body or faculry by the name of ''The
Principal, Vice-Principal and Professors of St. John's College"; and by that
name shall be capable of exercising such powers and authorities as the Visitors
and Governors of the said college and their successors shall by their ordinances
think necessary to delegate to them for the instruction, discipline and
government of the said seminary and of all the students, scholars, ministers
and servants belonging to the same.
XIV. That a majority of the said Visitors and Governors for the time being
and duly assembled at any meeting upon due notice given to the whole body
of Visitors and Governors shall have full power and authority to make
fundamental ordinances for the government of the said college and the
instruction of youth as aforesaid, and by these ordinances to appoint such a
number of their own body not less than seven, as they may think proper for
transacting all general and necessary business of the said seminary and making
temporary rules for the government of the same; and also by the said
fundamental ordinances to delegate to the principal, vice-principal and
- 4 -
'
XVI. That the ordinances which shall be from time to time made by the
Visitors and Governors of the said college and their successors with an account
of their other proceedings and of the manag_ement of theestate and moneys
committed to their trust, shall when required be laid before the General
Assembly for their inspection and examination,but in case at 3:°Y time
hereafter through oversight, or otherwise through misapprehension
and
mistaken constructions of the powers, liberties and franchises m this Charter
or Act of Incorporation granted, or intended to be granted, any ordinance
should be made by the said corporation of Visitors and Governors or any
matters done and transacted by the corporation contrary to the tenor hereof,
it is enacted that although such ordinances, acts and doings shall in
themselves be null and void, yet they shall not, however, in any courts of law,
or by the General Assembly, be deemed, taken, interpreted or adjudged into
- 5 -
�an avoidance or forfeiture of this Charter and Act of Incorporation, but the
same shall be and remain unhun , inviolate and entire unto the said
corporation of Visitors and Governors in perpetual succession; and all their
acts conformable to the powers , true intent and meaning hereof shall be and
remain in full force and validity, the nullity and avoidance of such illegal acts
to the contrary in any wise notwithstanding.
XVII. That this Charter and Act of Incorporation and every pan thereof
shall be good and available in all things in the law according to the true
intent and meaning thereof, and shall be construed, reputed and adjudged in
all cases most favorably on the behalf and for the best benefit and behoof of
the said Visitors and Governors and their successors , so as most effectually to
answer the valuable end of this Act of Incorporation towards the general
advancement and promotion of useful knowledge, science and virtue.
Polity of St. John's College
PREAMBLE
XVIII. That the College may establish and operate one or more branches
in one or more states of the United States.
Education is the making of men out of children by
bringing them into the world of inherited customs,
intellectual traditions, and spiritual ties. Institutions of
learning are set up for this purpose. Beyond this they
should also seek to develop the moral and intellectual
powers of men to enable them to fulfill best their
freely chosen tasks and thus to take their own
responsible part in shaping the future. St. John's
College is a community of learning committed to
holding these ends constantly in sight and to seeking
the best means of attaining them.
C
St.John's College strives to illuminate the common
heritage of mankind in a persisting study of the great
documents in which that heritage can be found. It is
concerned with the unity of knowledge, an understanding of the great issues faced by men, and the
moral foundations on which the conduct of men's lives
can be based. To provide proper conditions for the
pursuit of these ends, we, the Board of Visitors and
Governors, after consultation with the Faculty, do
ordain and establish the polity for St. John's College.
- 7 -
- 6 -
�'r
Anicle I
THE COLLEGE
II
(1) St.John's College is by its Chaner a legal entity, carrying on its functions in Annapolis, Maryland, and in Santa Fe, New Mexico. Under the Charter of the College, all power, authority, and responsibility penaining to the
College are vested in the Visitors and Governors.
(2) The College shall be understood to consist of the following: (a) the
Board of Visitors and Governors; (b) the Faculty; (c) the Scholars-in-Residence;
(d) the Anists-in-Residence; (e) the Students; (f) the Faculty of the Graduate
Institute; (g) the Alumni; and (h) the Staff.
(3) Under the Chaner, "the said Visitors and Governors, and their
successors, from time to time, and at all times hereinafter, forever, shall have
full power and authority to constitute and appoint, in such manner as they
shall think best and most convenient, a principal and vice-principal of the
said College, and professors, with proper tutors and assistants, for instructing
the students and scholars of the said seminary in all the liberal arts and
sciences, and in the ancient and modern tongues and languages; and the said
principal, vice-principal, and professors, so constituted and appointed from
time to time shall be known and distinguished forever as one learned body or
faculty, by the name of 'The Principal, Vice-Principal, and Professors of St.
John's College'; and by that name shall be capable of exercising such powers
and authorities as the Visitors and Governors of the said college and their
successors shall by their ordinances think necessary to delegate to them for the
instruction, discipline, and government of the said seminary and of all the
students, scholars, ministers and servants belonging to the same."
(a) The "principal" shall bear the title President.
(b) The "vice-principal" shall be the Dean who 1s servmg as the
Chairman of the Instruction Committee.
(c) There shall be a Dean of St. John's College in Annapolis and a
Dean of St. John 's College in Santa Fe.
(d) The ''professors, tutors and assistants'' shall bear the title Tutor or
Tutor Emeritus. Tutors who have completed their tenure appointments and
are no longer teaching shall be Tutors Emeriti.
(e) There shall be a Vice-President of St. John's College in Annapolis
and a Vice-President of St. John's College in Santa Fe.
(f) There shall be Associates of St. John's College, who shall be on
either campus, as the offices may be deemed necessary, the Treasurer, the
Registrar, the Librarian, the Assistant Librarian, the Director of Athletics, the
Director of Student Activities, the Director of Admissions, the Director of
-
8
-
Alumni Activities, the College Archivist and Alumni Secretary, the Director
of Financial Aid, and the Director of Placement.
(g) The '' one learned body or faculty,'' composed of the President, the
Deans, the other Tutors, the Tutors Emeriti, the Vice-Presidents, and the
Associates, shall bear the title The Faculty of St. John's College.
(h) There may be on either campus Scholars-in-Residenc~ and Anistsin-Residence.
(i) All who have formally matriculated, are at the present enrolled, and
are in good standing shall be called Students of St. John's College.
(j) Tutors of the Graduate Institute, the Director, the Assistant
Director, and the Registrar of the Graduate Institute shall be called the
Faculty of the Graduate Institute .
(k) All who have formally matriculated on either campus, who are not
at present enrolled, and whose class has graduated, whether graduates or
non-graduates, whether in undergraduate or post-graduate programs, shall be
called Alumni of St. John's College.
(1) The Staff shall consist of all persons who are appointed by the
Vice-Presidents to the performance of duties necessary to the proper
functioning of the College. The Staff may, as appropriate to either campus,
consist of two parts, the Administrative Staff and the Buildings and Grounds
Staff.
(m) In all appointments and in student admissions there shall be no
discrimination with respect to sex, race, color, creed, and national or ethnic
ongm.
(n) Normal retirement of any person employed by the College shall
take place on June 30th following the date on which such person shall have
attained the age of 65 years. For persons other than Tutors, any extension of
employment beyond normal retirement age shall be authorized annually at the
discretion of the President and reponed by him to the Board of Visitors and
Governors; except that in the case of the President and of those Associates
who are appointed by the Visitors and Governors on the recommendation of
the President, any extension shall be at the discretion, expressed by resolution
annually, of the Board of Visitors and Governors.
Anicle II
VISITORS AND GOVERNORS
(1) Qualifications for Membership. Persons shall be eligible for membership on the Board of Visitors and Governors who are concerned for the
- 9 -
�maintenance, progress, and vitality of St. John's College's educational
program and who are willing and able to discharge the responsibilities of
trusteeship with devotion and energy.
(2) Members. The Board of Visitors and Governors shall consist of not
more than fony-nine members, comprising the President, the Deans, the
Vice-Presidents, the Governors of Maryland and New Mexico, ex officio, and
fony-two members, of whom thiny-six shall be elected by the entire Board
and six shall be elected by the Alumni of the College, in the manner and for
the terms hereinafter provided. In recognition of meritorious service to the
College, honorary members may be elected at the discretion of the Board.
(3) Elections by the Board. At each annual meeting, the Board shall elect
a class of nine members for a term of three years, to succeed those members
whose term expires at the conclusion of said meeting. The procedure for
nomination and election shall be as follows:
There shall be a standing Nominating Committee of three members of
the Board appointed by the Chairman. The Chairman and the President shall
sit with the committee, ex officio, when nominations to Board membership
are being considered. The Nominating Committee shall recommend to each
member of the Board in writing, not later than thirty days prior to the annual
meeting at which the election is to be held, at least one candidate for each of
the places to be filled by such election. Additional nominations may be made
in writing, addressed to the Chairman, signed by at least five members of the
Board, prior to the date above provided for the report of the Nominating
Committee, and any such additional nominations shall be reported to the
Board by the Committee at the time of its report.
Voting on such nominations at such annual meetings shall be by ballot,
each member present to vote for nine of the said nominees. In case there are
more than nine nominees, and the balloting results in a tie for one or more
places, the Board shall determine the procedure to resolve the tie. No
nominee shall be deemed elected who has not received the affirmative votes
of at least a majoriry of the members present at the meeting.
In the event that for any reason there should be less than nine members in
any class prior to the end of the term for such class, the vacancy may be filled
pursuant to the procedure provided above for regular elections, except that
the election may take place at any regular meeting. A member elected to fill
any such vacancy shall hold office for the remainder of the term of the class in
which such vacancy occurred.
(4) Elections by the Alumni. Each year in the spring, two alumni shall be
elected to membership for a term of three years, in such manner that there
shall be six members of the Board elected by the Alumni, consisting of three
classes of two members each. Out-going alumni members shall continue to
serve until their successors are elected.
-
10
-
. The Director of Alumni Activities shall request the Board of the Alumni
Association to nominate_ at least one candidate for each vacancy. Additional
candidates may be nominated by petition of any thirty alumni. All Alumni
(which shall include all Alumni and honorary members of the Alumni
Association) shall be eligible to vote for the Alumni members of the Board.
Balloting will be conducted by mail by the Director of Alumni Activities.
In the event that for any reason there should be less than two Alumni
members in any class prior to the end of the term of such class, the vacancy
shall be filled by interim election, conducted in the same manner.
(5) Faculty Representation at Board Meetings. Three Tutors shall be elected
by the Faculty on each campus for a term of three years, one to be elected at
the last meeting in each academic year, to attend all regular meetings on the
campus to which they belong, with voice in deliberation, but without vote.
(6) Student Representation at Board Meetings. Two students shall attend
all regular meetings on the Board on the campus to which they belong, with
voice in deliberation, but without vote.
(7) Alumni Association Representation at Board Meetings. The President
of the Alumni Association shall attend Board meetings, with voice in
deliberation, but without vote.
(8) _Reelection. A member of the Board elected by the Board or by the
Alumm may be elected for not more than two consecutive terms, but may,
after a second consecutive term, be reelected to membership beginning with
the annual meeting in the year following the expiration of his second term.
(9) Meetings of the Board.
(a) Regular meetings of the Board shall be held quanerly in either
Annapolis or Santa Fe in the month of September, December, February, and
May of each year, or in such other months as the Board may determine· the
meeting in May shall be called the annual meeting. The time and place of
regular meetings shall be determined by the Chairman, in consultation with
the President, and notice of regular meetings shall be given not less than
fifteen days prior to such meetings.
(b) Special meetings of the Board may be called by the President, the
chairman, the Executive Committee, or any five members of the Board, not
less than seven days after the dispatch of written or telegraphic notice of the
time, place, and purposes of the meeting. Such notice may be dispensed with
if waived in writing by all members of the Board either before or after the
meeting.
(c) Any business may be conducted at a regular meeting without
specific notice of such business (except that which is required by law or as
provided herein as to elections and amendments), but no business shall be
11
�conducted at any special meeting unless notice of such business has been
given, or has been waived as above provided.
(d) Twelve members of the Board present at a meeting shall constitute
a quorum for the transaction of business.
(10) Officers of the Board. At each annual meeting the Board shall elect a
Chairman, two Vice-Chairmen, and a Secretary, to hold office until the next
annual meeting or until their successors are elected . Vacancies in any such
offices may be filled at any regular meeting, or any special meeting called for
that purpose. Such officers shall perform the customary duties of such offices,
and such other duties as the Board may from time to time direct.
(11) Committees of the Board.
(a) Executive Committee. The Chairman, the Vice-Chairman, the
Secretary, the President, the Deans, and four other members chosen annually
by the Board at the annual meeting shall comprise the Executive Committee
of the Board. In intervals between meetings of the Board, the Executive
Committee may act for the Board, except in those matters expressly delegated
to some other committee, person, or persons. Five members of the Executive
Committee present at a meeting shall constitute a quorum for the transaction
of business.
(b) Visiting Committee. There shall be a Visiting Committee of not
more than ten persons appointed by the Chairman. There shall be an eastern
and a western Co-Chairman of the Visiting Committee, and the Committee's
membership shall include an equal number of members from the two sections
of the country. Each half of the Visiting Committee shall make at least one
visit to the campus in its area each year to repon to the Board on how well the
aims of the College are being realized. Each half of the visiting Committee
shall meet at least once annually with the Instruction Committee on the
campus in its area to discuss the statement of educational policy and program
of the Chairman of the Instruction Committee and to acquaint themselves
with other educational matters.
(c) Finance Committee. There shall be a Finance Committee consisting
of the Chairman, the President, the Vice-Presidents, and the Treasurers of the
College ex officio, and four members appointed by the Chairman to serve at
the pleasure of the Board or until their successors have been duly appointed.
The members of the Committee shall select one of their members to be the
Chairman of the Committee. In carrying out its functions the Committee may
be divided into three working subcommittees, one on investments, one on
budget and finance for the Annapolis campus, and one on budget and
finance for the Santa Fe campus. The Finance Committee shall have the
following powers and duties:
-
12
-
,,
(i) The Finance Committee shall have full power to direct the
investment and reinvestment of all funds of the College, including
endowment and restricted funds, and the proper officers of the Board and the
College are authorized to carry out all written directions, signed by the
Chairman of the Committee, with respect to such investments and
reinvestments . The Committee shall repon at each regular meeting any action
taken hereunder since the previous meeting.
(ii) The Finance Committee shall review the proposed annual budgets
of the College prior to their presentation for approval by the Board and shall
make recommendations to the Board with respect to the budgets at the
meeting at which they are presented.
(iii) The Finance Committee shall study, and periodically advise the
Board with respect to, the financial business policies and practices of the
College, and shall make such special studies and reports as the Board may
from time to time request.
(d) Polity Review Committee. There shall be a Poliry Review Committee of not more than five members appointed by the Chairman every fifth
year to serve for one year. The Committee shall receive the repon of . the
Faculry Committee and after appropriate study shall make recommendations
to the Board for consideration at the annual meeting when the final review of
the Polity is consummated. The respective chairmen of the Board and Faculty
Review Committees shall make such arrangements as they deem appropnatc
for joint consultation prior to and after the adoption of the repon by the
Faculty.
(e) Other Committees. The Chairman may appoint such other standing
or special committees of the Board as he may deem desirable or which the
Board may request.
(f) Former members of the Board may be appointed by the Chairman
to serve on Committees at his discretion.
(12) Execution of Contracts, Transfer of Securities, etc. All major
contracts of $5,000 or more, notes, deeds, leases, mongages, releases, bonds
for security or indemnity, negotiable instruments, stock cenificates, transfers,
and powers, and like papers and documents on behalf of the College or the
Endowment Funds shall be executed by two persons, of whom one shall be
the President, the Chairman, or the Vice-Chairman, and of whom the other
shall be the Secretary of the Board, the Vice-President, or the Treasurer of the
campus concerned.
(13) Signing of Checks, Drafts, Etc. All checks, drafts, acceptances, and
similar orders for the payment of money on behalf of the College may be
signed by the same persons authorized to execute contracts, etc., pursuant to
13
�Section {12) hereof, but may also be signed by such persons, and in such
manner, as the Board may from time to time direct by appropriate resolution.
(7) The President shall appoint, or delegate the power to appoint, such
committees as may be necessary for the carrying out of his duties and for
which no provision is made under Article VIII.
THE FACULTY
Article IV
THE FACULTY: THE CHAIRMAN OF THE
INSTRUCTION COMMITTEE AND THE DEANS
The Visitors and Governors by these ordinances hereby delegate
to the Faculty of St. John 's College - the President, the Deans, the
other Tutors, the Tutors Emeriti, the Vice-Presidents, and the
Associates - "powers and authorities" for the "instruction, discipline, and government" of the College.
{1) The Chairman of the Instruction Committee.
{a) There is vested in the Chairman of the Instruction Committee
responsibility and authority for the organization of the program of instruction
in the liberal arts that is followed by the Tutors and the Students.
(b) The Deans shall serve alternately, for a term of one year, as
Chairman of the Instruction Committee.
(c) The Chairman of the Instruction Committee shall, after consultation with the Instruction Committee on his campus, and after discussion with
the Instruction Committee of the College, submit a Statement of Educational
Policy and Program to the Faculty as a whole for discussion. The Statement
shall be presented by the President as a report to the Board of Visitors and
Governors.
Article III
THE FACULTY: THE PRESIDENT
(1) There is vested in the President by the Visitors and Governors
executive responsibility and authority for the instruction, discipline, and
government of the College, and the President, in turn, may delegate his
authority.
(2) The President shall be appointed by the Board of Visitors and
Governors on the recommendation of a Committee composed of five
members of the Board of Visitors and Governors, the Deans, and one Tutor
from each campus selected from among themselves by the Tutors on that
campus having tenure . This Committee shall consult with all appropriate
persons on both campuses prior to making its final recommendation and shall
arrange for the candidates to meet with the Instruction Committee on each
campus .
(2) The Deans.
(3) The President shall concurrently be a Tutor, but the provisions of
Article V need not apply.
(4) The President and persons to whom he delegates his authority shall
consult with the Deans, other appropriate persons, and appropriate faculty
committees in matters of policy, initiation of programs, and setting of
priorities affecting the general welfare of the College.
(5) The President may appoint members of the Faculty to serve as
administrative assistants, and he shall have power to relieve them of their
administrative duties at any time.
(6) The President shall appoint a member of the Faculty on each campus
to serve as Marshal at convocation and commencement ceremonies.
14
-
I
'
(a) There is vested in the Deans on their respective campuses
responsibility and authority for the supervision of the program of instruction
and for the general welfare of the students and for whatever government of
the students be necessary for the greatest possible attainment of aims of the
program. Each Dean shall be the Chairman of the Instruction Committee on
the campus where he serves. In carrying out their duties, the Deans shall
consult regularly with the Instruction Committee and other appropriate
Faculty committees.
(b) The Deans shall be appointed for terms of five years from among
the Tutors by the Visitors and Governors on the recommendation of the
President after consultation with a special committee of six, three from each
campus, selected from among themselves by the Tutors having tenure.
(c) The Deans shall be Tutors with tenure, the provisions of Article
V(3) notwithstanding.
(d) To assist them in carrying out their duties, the Deans shall
recommend one or more Tutors to be appointed by the President with the
title of Assistant Dean.
(e) Either Dean, with the approval of the Instruction Committee on
15
-
�II
the campus concerned, may recommend to the President that in the interest of
instruction a Tutor be relieved of his duties in whole or in part at any time.
When such action is taken, the Tutor's salary shall be continued for the
remainder of the current academic year.
(f) During the absence of the President from either campus, the Dean
on that campus shall if necessary exercise the President's prerogative of final
decision .
(g) During the absence of either Dean from the campus a Tutor with
tenure named by him shall act for the Dean.
(h) The Dean on each campus shall appoint such committees as may be
necessary for the carrying out of his duties and for which no other provision is
made.
I
I
AnicleV
THE FACULTY: THE TUTORS
(1) The primary responsibilities of the Tutors are to teach and to make
themselves as competent as possible in all parts of the St. John's Program.
(2) The Tutors in Annapolis and the Tutors in Santa Fe shall have
authority to recommend to the Visitors and Governors candidates for degrees
which the College is empowered to grant.
11
111
',
'I
(3) Appointment and Reappointment of Tutors. Tutors shall be
appointed by the Visitors and Governors upon recommendation of the
President in accordance with the recommendation of the Dean and the
Instruction Committee on that campus where the Tutors so appointed shall
teach.
(a) Regular appointment of Tutors shall be upon the following terms:
(i) New Tutors shall be appointed for one year. First and second
reappointments shall also be for one year. Third and fourth reappointments,
that are not tenure appointments, shall be for two years. Tenure
appointments shall continue until June 30th after the Tutor's sixty-fifth
birthday, subject to the provisions of Section 5 below.
(ii) Before making recommendations to the President on tenure
appointments the Dean on each campus shall consult with the Instruction
Committee on that campus, after seeking the advice of the Tutors on that
campus having tenure.
(iii) A Tutor under the age of thiny at first appointment may upon
the completion of three one-year and one two-year appointments be given a
tenure appointment. If he is not given a tenure appointment, he may be
reappointed for another two years, after which he must either be given a
tenure appointment or not be reappointed as Tutor. \
-
16 -
J
I
(iv) A Tutor of 30 to 45 years of age at first appointment shall upon
the completion of three one-year and one two-year appointments either be
given a tenure appointment or not be reappointed as Tutor.
(v) A Tutor over 45 years of age at first appointment may upon the
completion of three one-year appointments be given a tenure appointment. If
he is not given a tenure appointment, he may be reappointed for two years,
after which he must either be given a tenure appointment or not be
reappointed as a Tutor.
(b) For the purpose of temporary transfer between campuses, special
full-time appointments of one or two years may be granted to a Tutor m
additional to his regular appointments. The Tutor may ask that such an
appointment be counted as a regular appointment for the purpose of (a)
above.
(c) In exceptional circumstances, notwithstanding the provisions of
Section (3) (a) of this Anicle, a Tutor who has not been given a tenure
appointment may be reappointed as Tutor annually provided that he serve
concurrently as Assistant Dean.
(d) Special one-year initial appointments and re-appointments may be
given to Tutors who intend to teach on a pan-time basis only. Such a Tutor
may apply for and receive a regular appointment. Special pan-time
appointments may be counted on · a fractional basis toward eligibility for
tenure. Notwithstanding, a Tutor shall not be considered for a tenure
appointment without having served three regular one-year appointments. In
establishing eligibility for sabbatical leave, special pan-time appointments
shall be computed proponionately.
(e) When Tutors are reappointed to non-tenure appointments, the
President shall notify them of their appointment no later than March 1st of
each year. In the event that a Tutor is not recommended for reappointment,
he shall be so notified by December 15th. When Tutors are appointed to
tenure appointments, the President shall notify them of their appointment
before the beginning of the last year of their non-tenure appointment. In the
event that a Tutor is not recommended for a tenure appointment, he shall be
so notified prior to June 30 of the year preceding the beginning of the last
year of his non-tenure appointment.
(4) A tutor may apply to the Instruction Committee of the College not
later than January 15 for a transfer of campus for the next academic year.
Transfers shall require approval of both Deans after consultation with their
Instruction Committee.
(5) A Tutor may have his appointment terminated at any time by the
Board of Visitors and Governors upon recommendation of the President for
17
�(i) Those who have served for the greater number of years since their
first appointment as Tutor or since their last sabbatical leave whichever is
more recent;
(ii) Those whose service has been continuous throughout those years.
(iii) Those who have seniority of appointment.
When there is a conflict of precedence, the Dean and the Instruction
Committee on the campus concerned shall be consulted .
(c) A Tutor eligible for sabbatical leave shall make application to the
President before November 1st for leave to begin the following July 1st, and
shall be informed of the action upon his application not later than January
1st.
(8) The President, with the concurrence of the Dean after consultation
with the Instruction Committee on the campus concerned, may grant leaves
of absence to Tutors for a period of one year or less. At that time it shall be
determined whether the leave shall be counted as service to the College with
respect to eligibility for sabbatical leave and, if so, how. The decision with
respect to a request for leave of absence shall be made in the light of the
requirements both of the applicant Tutor and of the whole College.
(a) Leaves of absence may be renewed upon request but not more than
twice in succession except in extraordinary circumstances.
(b) A request for a leave of absence shall be submitted to the President
as early as possible in the year before the year in which the leave is to be
taken, but not later than January 15th of that year. Requests for leaves of
absence may be withdrawn at any time prior to April 1st of the year in which
the request is submitted. Requests for leaves of absence for the second
semester must be submitted no later than October 15th.
(c) A Tutor applying for leave of absence to further his studies may also
apply for a grant from the College.
(d) Tutors on sabbatical leave or leave of absence remain members of
the Faculty with the right of full panicipation in Faculty meetings and all
other College exercises.
Article VI
one of the following reasons only: (1) failure or inability to perform his
teaching duties in a satisfactory manner, or (ii) moral turpitude. The
President shall make such recommendation only with the concurrence of the
Dean and the Instruction Committee of the campus concerned. Prior to the
termination of such appointment, the Tutor concerned shall have the right to
be heard by the Instruction Committee and by the Visitors and Governors.
~6)(a) The College makes provision for members of the Faculty who have
atta10ed age 65 through the program of the Teachers Insurance and Annuity
of America and the Federal Old Age Benefits program.
Association
Participation in the former is required after the first three one-year
appo10tments.
(b) Tutors who have completed their tenure appointments may be
recommended by the Dean, after consultation with the Instruction
Committee, for as many as five successive one-year appointments with a
full-time or reduced teaching responsibility as individually determined.
(7) The sabbatical leave program is designed to provide Tutors with an
I
opporturuty for study, rest, and renewal of spirit. Sabbatical leaves shall
normally be granted to four _or five Tutors at each campus each academic year,
dependmg upon the financial capability of the College. It is understood that
Tutors on such leave will not undenake full-time remunerative employment
elsewhere and will return to the College.
. (a) Eligibility for sabbatical leave shall be upon the following
cond1t1ons:
(i) A Tutor who holds a tenure appointment may apply for a full
year_ of sabbatical leave at full sal3:tr, provided he has completed the
equivalent of nine full _years of service to the College since his original
appointment, or the equivalent of six full years of service since any previous
sabbatical leave, and the sabbatical leave does not coincide with the last year
of his tenure appointment.
(ii) Such a Tutor may apply for an earlier sabbatical leave of a full
year at panial salary, or a partial year at full salary. The fractional salary or
fractional year shall be determmed by the number of years of teaching
completed 10 relation to the prescnbed total for either an initial or a
subsequent sabbatical leave, as the case may be. In no case shall a Tutor be
paid more than_ his regular salary. Sabbatical leave for a fraction of a year may
be granted dunng any but the last year of a Tutor's tenure appointment.
(b) If in a year there are more applicants for sabbatical leave at any one
campus than there are leaves to be granted at that campus, then those
members shall have precedence who meet the following conditions in the
order set forth:
-
18
-
THE VICE-PRESIDENTS
I
(1) There is delegated to the Vice-Presidents on their respective campuses
responsibility and authority for the supervision of administrative affairs as
hereinafter provided; for the supervision of financial affairs; for the
appointment of members of the Staff; and for relations with the local
community outside the College.
• 19 •
�(2) The Vice-Presidents shall be appointed by the Board of Visitors and
Governors on the recommendation of the President after consultation with
the Dean and a committee constituted on each campus by resolution of the
Faculty on that campus.
(3) The Vice-Presidents may be appointed Tutors under the provisions of
Article V (3) (d).
(4) The Vice-Presidents, and persons to whom they delegate their
authority, shall consult with the Dean, other appropriate persons, and appropriate faculty committees in the exercise of their responsibilities.
(5) The Vice-Presidents shall make themselves as familiar as possible with
the aims and methods of the program of instruction and to that end may sit
with the Instruction Committee on their respective campuses.
Article VII
THE FACUL1Y: THE ASSOCIATES
(1) Associates on each campus shall be appointed by the Board of Visitors
and Governors on the recommendation of the President in consultation with
the Dean and Vice-President of that campus .
(2) Associates may be appointed Tutors under the provisions of Article
V
(3) (d).
(3) There shall be the following Associates, as deemed necessary on each
campus, with the powers and responsibilities provided.
(a) The Treasurers. The Treasurers shall have charge on their respective
campuses, under the supervision of the Vice Presidents, of all funds and
property , and shall have authority to carry out fiscal and property
transactions, and to receive and disburse funds, subject to the provisions of
this Polity and other directions and arrangements made pursuant thereto.
(b) The Registrars. The Registrars shall be responsible to the Deans on
their respective campuses and shall prepare and supervise the registration of
students, maintain current student records, assist in the preparation of
instruction schedules, compile statistics about the students, record grades,
issue and interpret transcripts, and perform archival functions.
(c) The Librarians. The Librarians shall be responsible to the Deans on
their respective campuses for the operation of the Library. Appointments of
professional members of the Library Staff shall be made upon the
recommendation of the Librarian to the Dean on each campus.
(d) The Director of Student Activities and the Director of Athletics.
The Director of Student Activities and the Director of Athletics shall be
-
20
responsible to the Deans on their respective campuses for devising and
directing programs of recreational activities.
(e) The Directors of Admissions. The Directors of Admissions shall be
responsible to the Deans on their respective campuses for the annual
enrollment of qualified Freshmen.
(f) The Directors of Alumni Activities. The Directors of Alumni
Activities shall be responsible to the Vice-Presidents on their respective
campuses. Their primary duty is to enable the College and the Alumni
Association to be of service to alumni.
(g) The College Archivist and Alumni Secretary. The College Archivist
and Alumni Secretary shall be responsible to the Vice-Presidents on their
respective campuses for maintaining the archives of the College at that
campus.
(h) The Directors of Financial Aid. The Directors of Financial Aid shall
be responsible to the Deans on their respective campuses for the
administration of financial aid programs.
(i) The Directors of Placement. The Directors of Placement shall be
responsible to the Deans on their respective campuses for counselling students
with respect to graduate and professional schools and careers.
Article VIII
THE FACUL1Y: FACUL1Y COMMITTEES
(1) The Instruction Committee
(a) The Instruction Committee shares with its Chairmen responsibility
for the program of instruction of the College. It shall consist of twelve Tutors
in addition to the Deans. The President shall sit with the Commmee ex
officio. Six of the Tutors shall be elected from each campus of the College.
The Instruction Committee shall meet annually . On each campus the
members of the Instruction Committee and the Dean as Chairman constitute
the Instruction Committee of the College on that campus. The President sits
ex officio with the Instruction Committee on each campus.
(b) Each of the members of the Instruction Committee shall serve for a
term of three years and the terms shall be arranged in suth a way that each
year the terms of twomembers at each camp:i,is shall expire. Terms begin and
end the day following commencement exercises. Annually, and separately_ at
each campus, the President with the Dean on his _campus, after consultmg
with the Instruction Committee and seeking the advice of the other Tutors on
that campus, shall at the last regular Faculty meeting on that campus
-
21
-
�-
nominate four Tutors of whom two shall be elected by the Tutors to
membership on the Instruction Committee. The Faculty shall be informed of
the names of the nominees prior to the meeting at which the election occurs.
No member of the Instruction Committee shall serve more than two terms in
succession.
(c) If for any reason a member of the Instruction Committee is unable
to serve for a pan of his term, another Tutor shall be chosen to take his place
for that pan of the term. For this purpose the President and the Dean, in
consultation with the Instruction Committee on the campus where the vacancy
occurs, shall nominate two Tutors of whom the Tutors shall elect one in a
regular Faculty meeting.
(d) If the Instruction Committee resigns with the Deans on a matter of
confidence and the resignations are accepted, the President, in consultation
with the new Deans and after seeking the advice of the other Tutors, shall
nominate nine Tutors for the six vacancies on each campus in such manner
that two out of each three nominees shall be elected by the Tutors for each of
the three classes to fill the unexpired terms.
I
I
(2) The Salary Committee.
(a) There shall be a Faculty Salary Committee of six members, three to
be elected by the Faculty on each campus, whose chairmanship shall annually
alternate between campuses. The Committee shall advise with the President
concerning Faculty salaries and related matters; it shall make annual reviews
of the College's statement of salaries and other compensation of Tutors and
repon to the Faculty and the President recommendations consequent upon
the review.
(b) Members of the Committee shall be elected annually on each
campus for terms of three years in such manner that the term of one member
on each campus terminates each year. The Salary Committee on each campus
shall provide the Faculty on that campus with two nominations for each
vacancy on the Committee on that campus. Additional nominations may be
made at the Faculty meeting when election shall be made.
(3) The Library Committees. The President, in consultation with the
Librarian and the Dean, shall appoint three Tutors on each campus to serve as
a Library Committee. The President, the Dean, and the Librarian shall
themselves be ex officio members of the Committee, and the Librarian shall
serve as Chairman. It shall be the duty of the Library Committees to assist the
Librarians in making the Libraries serve the ends of the College and its
program; it shall be their duty to advise the Librarians in regard to Library
policy and acquisitions. The Managers of the Bookstores may be invited to sit
with the Committees.
-
22
-
(4) The Campus Development Committees. The Faculty on each campus
shall elect five of its members as a Campus Development Committee. Two
members shall be elected to the Committee annually at the first regular
meeting of the academic session except in every third year, when one member
shall be chosen. The President shall sit ex officio with both Committees. The
Dean, the Vice President, one of the Assistant Deans, and the Treasurer on
each campus shall sit ex officio with the Committee on that campus. It shall
be the duty of the respective committees to advise the President on the
construction of new buildings, the renovation of old buildings, landscaping of
grounds, and all matters relating to the maintenance and development of the
campus.
(5) The Prize Committees. Every three years the President shall appoint
five Tutors on each campus to supervise the awarding of prizes on the
respective campuses. The Committees shall have full authority to decide what
prizes shall be awarded and to name the recipients of the prizes.
(6) The Committee for the Graduate Institute. There shall be a
Committee for the Graduate Institute as specified in Article XII.
(7) Other Committees. The Faculty on each campus shall have authority
to elect, or to request the President to appoint, additional committees that
may from time to time become necessary.
Article IX
THE FACULTY: FACULTY PROCEDURE
(1) Procedure for Instructional Proposals.
(a) (i) Any major proposal concerning matters of instruction affecting
the College as a whole shall originate with the Dean and the Instruction
Committee on either campus, and the decision as to what proposals are major
shall be within the discretion of the said Dean and Instruction Committee
who shall then consult with the Dean and the Instruction Committee on the
other campus. In normal circumstances major proposals concerning instruction shall be formulated at the annual meeting of the Instruction Committee
of the College. Such a proposal shall then be presented to the whole Faculty
by the Chairman of the Instruction Committee, either in his own person or
through the other Dean as his representative. If, after full discussion of any
proposal so presented, there be no objection on the part of any Tutor, the
measure stands approved and becomes effective as of the date specified
therefor. If, after full discussion, a Tutor objects to the proposal and holds to
his objection, the proposal shall be submitted to vote of the Tutors at special
-
23
-
�Faculty meetings called by the President within a fonnight. In submitting the
proposal to vote the Chairman of the Instruction Committee and the Dean on
the other campus shall state whether it be a matter of confidence. The vote
may then be taken and tallied by the President in such fashion that the Tutors
shall have recorded their decision acting as a whole. If the proposal be one
that the Chairman of the Instruction Committee and the other Dean have
declared a matter of confidence and if it be defeated by majority vote, the
Deans and the Instruction Committee shall immediately resign. If it be
passed by majority vote, it shall become effective as of the date specified
therefor. For the confidence procedure a quorum shall consist of three-founhs
of all resident Tutors on each campus.
(ii) Proposals concerning instruction that are not considered major
shall originate with the Dean and the Instruction Committee on the campus
where they are intended to be put into effect, and shall be presented by the
Dean to the Faculty on that campus. The procedure set fonh above for the
approval or rejection of proposals shall be followed, except that it shall apply
only on the campus concerned.
(iii) The President may refuse to accept the resignation of the Deans
or the Instruction Committee, any or all of them, whenever in his judgment
such resignation would be detrimental to the proper functioning of the
College; provided, however, that if any six or more Tutors shall petition the
Visitors and Governors, the latter shall review the President's decision within
four weeks, during which time the Deans and the Instruction Committee
shall continue in office.
(iv) In the event that the proposal be defeated and the resignations
be accepted, the President shall proceed to the choice of new Deans in
accordance with the provisions of Article IV (2) (b).
(b) Upon petition of not less than one-tenth of the Tutors on either
campus, the Dean and Instruction Committee on that campus shall consider
any recommendation concerning instruction that may be made by the
petitioning members, and the Dean and the Instruction Committee shall
report to the Faculty within one year their proposal concerning it. They shall
decide whether their proposal is a major proposal, and the procedure of
Article IX (1) shall apply.
(2) Faculty Meetings.
(a) Regular monthly meetings of the Faculty shall be called upon due
notice by the President who shall preside. In the absence of the President, the
Dean shall preside. In the absence of the President and the Dean, the Faculty
shall elect one of its members to preside.
(b) Special meetings of the Faculty may be called upon due notice by
the President, either at his own discretion or at the request of five Faculty
members.
- 24
-
(c) Due notice shall be construed to mean no less than three days'
notice, except in cases of emergency.
(d) A quorum shall consist of a majority of the Faculty in residence
except as otherwise provided.
(3) !he Secretary of the Faculty. At the last regular meeting of an
academic year the Faculty on each campus shall elect one of its members then
in at least his third year at the College, as Secretary. The Secretary shall, assist
in the preparation and circulation of the agenda for Faculty meetings, shall
keep the minutes of such meetings, and shall collect and circulate reports of
Faculty committees.
AnicleX
THE SCHOLARS-IN-RESIDENCE AND THE ARTISTS-IN-RESIDENCE
The Scholars-in-Residence and the Anists-in-Residence shall be appointed
by the Board of Visitors and Governors on the recommendation of the
President after consultation with the Dean and the Instruction Committee on
the campus where the Scholars and Artists shall reside.
Article XI
THE STUDENTS
(1) The primary responsibilities of the students are to study and to make
themselves as competent as possible in all parts of the St. John's Program.
Their advice and service shall be sought by the Faculty in such matters and in
such ways as may best serve the general welfare of the College.
(2) The students of St. John's College in Annapolis shall constitute the
Student _Polity of St. John's College in Annapolis; the students of St. John's
College in Santa Fe shall constitute the Student Polity in Santa Fe.
(3) The Student Polity in Annapolis or in Santa Fe may establish for itself
a government which is representative of all Polity members. The Dean on
each campus may delegate to the Student Government a share of the
responsibility for the general welfare of the students and whatever
government of the students may be necessary for the greatest possible
attamment of the aims of the program. The duties of . the Student
Government may include:
(a) the management of funds available to the Student Polity;
(b) the sanctioning of all student clubs, organizations, and activities,
and their regulation, if necessary;
- 25
-
�(c) the representation of the students of St. John's College to the
community outside the College;
(d) the establishment and maintenance of formal channels of communication between the students and the spokesmen of the Faculty; and
(e) any other duties agreed upon by the students and the Dean.
Article XII
1HE GRADUATE INSTITUTE
(1) The Director
'
(a) The President, after consultation with the Deans and a committee of
four, two from each campus, selected from among themselves by the Tutors
having tenure, shall recommend to the Board of Visitors and Governors for
appointment from the Tutors one of their number as Director of the
Graduate Institute to serve for three years with powers and duties as
hereinafter provided.
(b) There is vested in the Director, acting under the authority of the
Chairman of the Instruction Committee, responsibility and authority for the
organization and supervision of the graduate program of instruction in the
liberal arts, and for matters concerning the general welfare of the students
and for whatever government may be necessary for the greatest possible
attainment of the aims of the program.
(c) To assist in carrying out his duties the Director may recommend a
Tutor to be appointed by the President with the title of Assistant Director.
(4) Procedure for Instructional Proposals. Any proposals concerning major
matters of instruction and policy shall originate with the Director and the
Committee for the Graduate Institute and shall be submitted to the
Instruction Committee of the College. If approved by the Instruction
Committee, such proposals shall then be presented to the Faculty in
accordance with the provision for major proposals.
Article XIII
THE ALUMNI
(1) Alumni shall be life-long members of the College, since St..John's
College is a community not limited by geographical location or fixed periods
of time.
(2) The Faculty of the Graduate Institute.
11
I
I
(a) The Director, after consultation with the Committee for the
Graduate Institute, and in accordance with the recommendation of the
Instruction Committee of the College, shall recommend to the President
Tutors of the Graduate Institute for appointment to teach in the Graduate
Institute for one session.
(b) The Faculty of the Graduate Institute, acting for the Tutors of the
College, shall have the authority to recommend to the Visitors and Governors
candidates for the appropriate degree.
(2) The Alumni Association shall be the formal means by which alumni
participate in the life of the College. Through the election of Alumni
members of the Board of Visitors and Governors, alumni share in the
direction of that life. In these and other ways, alumni shall be given the
opponunity to serve the College.
(3) The College shall cooperate with the Alumni Association to enable
alumni to assist in providing services such as recruiting and interviewing
prospective students, placing graduates in appropriate employment, and
advising students concerning admission to graduate and professional schools.
(3) Committee for the Graduate Institute.
(a) The Committee for the Graduate Institute shares with the Director
responsibility for the program of instruction of the Graduate Institute and for
the general welfare of the students.
- 26
(b) The Committee shall consist of three Tutors residing on the same
campus as the Director who have taught in at least one full session of the
Institute, in addition to the Director, who shall serve as Chairman. Members
of the Committee shall serve for three-year terms, in such manner that the
term of one member terminates each year.
(c) Members of the Committee shall be appointed by the Director with
the concurrence of the Dean on the same campus, after consultation with the
Committee for the Graduate Institute.
(d) In the absence of regularly appointed members, the Director, in
consultation with the Committee, may appoint Tutors who are members of
the Faculty of the Graduate Institute to serve as members of the Committee
for one session of the Institute.
(4) The College, in cooperation with the Alumni Association, shall
provide seminars and other appropriate educational activities in Annapolis, in
Santa Fe, and in other places.
-
-
I
27
-
�Article XIV
THE STAFF
Members of the Administration Staff and members of the Buildings and
Grounds Staff assist with the administrative and maintenance duties of the
College. They are subject to appropriate Staff Rules and Regulations.
Article XV
AMENDMENTS AND REVIEW
(1) This Polity may be amended by a two-thirds vote of the members
present at any regular or special meeting of the Board provided written notice
of the proposed amendment shall have been given to members of the Board
and to the Faculty not less than fifteen days prior to such meeting. The
Faculty shall have the right to inform the Board in writing of its
recommendation with respect to the proposed amendment by the date of the
Board meeting at which the amendment is to be considered.
(2) Amendments may be proposed at any regular meeting of either the
Faculty in Annapolis or the Faculty in Santa Fe upon petition of not less than
ten percent of the members on either campus. No such proposal shall be
acted upon earlier than the next regular meeting of the Faculty, whether in
Annapolis or in Santa Fe. Two-thirds vote of the entire Faculty in residence
shall be required for approval and the amendment shall not become effective
unless approved by the Board in the manner set forth in Section (1) above.
(3) Every five years this Polity shall be reviewed by a committee of the
Faculty elected by a majority vote of the Faculty. The report of the
Committee shall be submitted to one regular Faculty meeting and voted upon
at the next regular Faculty meeting. A two-thirds vote of the Faculty in
residence shall be required for approval.
Whatever action is thus recommended by the Faculty shall be submitted
to the Board for final decision in the manner set forth in Section (1) above.
-
28
-
��
Dublin Core
The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/.
Title
A name given to the resource
Charter and Polity of the College
Description
An account of the resource
Revised and amended editions of the St. John's College Charter and Polity.<br /><br />The College's first Charter and Polity was published as the <a href="https://digitalarchives.sjc.edu/items/show/3768">September 1950</a> issue of the <em><a href="https://digitalarchives.sjc.edu/collections/show/37">Bulletin of St. John's College in Annapolis</a></em>. Revised and amended versions were published as individual issues of the <em>Bulletin</em> in <a href="https://digitalarchives.sjc.edu/items/show/3746">1951</a>, <a href="https://digitalarchives.sjc.edu/items/show/7844">1960</a>, <a href="https://digitalarchives.sjc.edu/items/show/7845">1963</a>, and <a href="https://digitalarchives.sjc.edu/items/show/7846">1965</a>. <br /><br />The Charter and Polity was published as a separate document in <a href="https://digitalarchives.sjc.edu/items/show/7850">1955</a> and again from <a href="https://digitalarchives.sjc.edu/items/show/7851">1970</a> forward. The most recent version of the Charter and Polity is also available on the College's <a href="https://www.sjc.edu/about/leadership/board-visitors-governors/charter-polity">website</a>. <br /><br />Click on <strong><a title="Items in the Charter and Polity of the College Collection" href="https://digitalarchives.sjc.edu/items/browse?collection=62&sort_field=Dublin+Core%2CDate">Items in the Charter and Polity of the College Collection</a></strong> to view and sort all items in the collection.
Creator
An entity primarily responsible for making the resource
St. John's College
Publisher
An entity responsible for making the resource available
St. John's College
Contributor
An entity responsible for making contributions to the resource
St. John's College Greenfield Library
Text
A resource consisting primarily of words for reading. Examples include books, letters, dissertations, poems, newspapers, articles, archives of mailing lists. Note that facsimiles or images of texts are still of the genre Text.
Original Format
The type of object, such as painting, sculpture, paper, photo, and additional data
PDF
Page numeration
Number of pages in the original item.
28 pages
Dublin Core
The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/.
Title
A name given to the resource
Charter and Polity of the College, 1976
Description
An account of the resource
Charter and Polity of the College, May 1976.
Creator
An entity primarily responsible for making the resource
St. John's College
Publisher
An entity responsible for making the resource available
St. John's College
Coverage
The spatial or temporal topic of the resource, the spatial applicability of the resource, or the jurisdiction under which the resource is relevant
Annapolis, MD
Santa Fe, NM
Date
A point or period of time associated with an event in the lifecycle of the resource
1976-05
Type
The nature or genre of the resource
text
Format
The file format, physical medium, or dimensions of the resource
PDF
Subject
The topic of the resource
St. John's College (Annapolis, Md.)
Legal instruments
Language
A language of the resource
English
Identifier
An unambiguous reference to the resource within a given context
Charter_and_Polity_1976
Charter and Polity
-
https://s3.us-east-1.amazonaws.com/sjcdigitalarchives/original/b7151d2faef25702618219262a03973f.mp3
ee63e1a2cad5b9fd192ca595b1a6782b
Dublin Core
The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/.
Title
A name given to the resource
St. John's College Lecture Recordings—Santa Fe
Contributor
An entity responsible for making contributions to the resource
St. John's College Meem Library
Coverage
The spatial or temporal topic of the resource, the spatial applicability of the resource, or the jurisdiction under which the resource is relevant
Santa Fe, NM
Sound
A resource primarily intended to be heard. Examples include a music playback file format, an audio compact disc, and recorded speech or sounds.
Original Format
The type of object, such as painting, sculpture, paper, photo, and additional data
m4a
Duration
Length of time involved (seconds, minutes, hours, days, class periods, etc.)
01:03:30
Dublin Core
The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/.
Title
A name given to the resource
What is the Measure of Electricity?
Description
An account of the resource
Audio recording of a lecture given by tutor Howard Fisher on February 23, 2024 as part of the Dean's Lecture & Concert Series. The Dean's Office has provided this description of the event: “Faraday made use of numerous electrical measuring instruments; but what, exactly, did they measure? What properties of electricity are “measurable” at all? Faraday’s efforts to identify these properties raised a question which Meno would have recognized: how can we know the properties of electricity unless we first know what electricity actually is?”
Creator
An entity primarily responsible for making the resource
Fisher, Howard J., 1942-
Publisher
An entity responsible for making the resource available
St. John's College
Coverage
The spatial or temporal topic of the resource, the spatial applicability of the resource, or the jurisdiction under which the resource is relevant
Santa Fe, NM
Date
A point or period of time associated with an event in the lifecycle of the resource
2024-02-23
Rights
Information about rights held in and over the resource
Meem Library has been given permission to make this item available online.
Type
The nature or genre of the resource
sound
Format
The file format, physical medium, or dimensions of the resource
mp3
Subject
The topic of the resource
Faraday, Michael, 1791-1867
Electricity
Relation
A related resource
<a href="https://digitalarchives.sjc.edu/items/show/7885" title="What is the Measure of Electricity? Transcript">https://digitalarchives.sjc.edu/items/show/7885</a>
Language
A language of the resource
English
Identifier
An unambiguous reference to the resource within a given context
SF_FisherH_What_is_the_Measure_of_Electricity_2024-02-23
Friday night lecture
-
https://s3.us-east-1.amazonaws.com/sjcdigitalarchives/original/b4c8cf160d212f19ef6557c0ee686648.jpg
f67b7516f61c942e4f98ce66020f6089
Dublin Core
The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/.
Title
A name given to the resource
Photographic Archive—Annapolis
Description
An account of the resource
<p>The Greenfield Library photographic archive houses over 5,000 photographs. The photographs in the collection document the history, academic, and community life of St. John’s College. The Library’s mission is to organize and preserve these unique visual materials, and to provide access to this collection. </p>
To learn more about our photographic use policy or to obtain high resolution images, please see the <strong><a title="Photographic Archive Use Policy" href="http://www.sjc.edu/academic-programs/libraries/greenfield-library/policies/#photographicarchivepolicy" target="_blank" rel="noreferrer noopener">Library’s Photographic Archive Use Policy</a></strong>.<br /><br />Click on <strong><a title="Photographic Archives" href="http://digitalarchives.sjc.edu/items/browse?collection=7">Items in the Photographic Archive—Annapolis Collection</a></strong> to view and sort all items in the collection.
Publisher
An entity responsible for making the resource available
St. John's College
Contributor
An entity responsible for making contributions to the resource
St. John's College Greenfield Library
Coverage
The spatial or temporal topic of the resource, the spatial applicability of the resource, or the jurisdiction under which the resource is relevant
Annapolis, MD
Identifier
An unambiguous reference to the resource within a given context
photographicarchiveannapolis
Still Image
A static visual representation. Examples include paintings, drawings, graphic designs, plans and maps. Recommended best practice is to assign the type Text to images of textual materials.
Original Format
The type of object, such as painting, sculpture, paper, photo, and additional data
Photograph
Physical Dimensions
The actual physical size of the original image
20.5 x 25.5 cm
Dublin Core
The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/.
Title
A name given to the resource
<span>Dwight D. Eisenhower Speaking at a Podium at the Opening of the Francis Scott Key Auditorium and Mellon Hall, St. John's College, Annapolis, Maryland</span>
Description
An account of the resource
<span>Dwight D. Eisenhower speaking at a podium at the opening of the Francis Scott Key Auditorium and Mellon Hall, St. John's College, Annapolis, Maryland, May 22, 1959.</span><br /><br />Eisenhower's speech is reprinted in <a href="https://babel.hathitrust.org/cgi/pt?id=miua.4728423.1959.001&seq=462">Dwight D. Eisenhower, 1959: containing the public messages, speeches, and statements of the president, January 1 to December 31, 1959. Washington: Office of the Federal Register, National Archives and Records Service, General Services Administration, pages 416-419</a>.<br /><br />A recording of Eisenhower's speech is available from the <a href="https://catalog.archives.gov/id/329120284">National Archives</a>.
Creator
An entity primarily responsible for making the resource
Warren, Marion E.
Coverage
The spatial or temporal topic of the resource, the spatial applicability of the resource, or the jurisdiction under which the resource is relevant
Annapolis, MD
Date
A point or period of time associated with an event in the lifecycle of the resource
1959-05-22
Rights
Information about rights held in and over the resource
St. John's College owns the rights to this photograph.
Type
The nature or genre of the resource
Still Image
Format
The file format, physical medium, or dimensions of the resource
jpeg
Subject
The topic of the resource
Eisenhower, Dwight D. (Dwight David), 1890-1969.
Weigle, Richard Daniel 1912-
Identifier
An unambiguous reference to the resource within a given context
SJC-P-2469
Honorary Alumni
Presidents
-
https://s3.us-east-1.amazonaws.com/sjcdigitalarchives/original/0b54541a0fd59f70eb9001f8e04351ed.jpg
ebaa3d5250a35231294d176b5c56f379
Dublin Core
The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/.
Title
A name given to the resource
Photographic Archive—Annapolis
Description
An account of the resource
<p>The Greenfield Library photographic archive houses over 5,000 photographs. The photographs in the collection document the history, academic, and community life of St. John’s College. The Library’s mission is to organize and preserve these unique visual materials, and to provide access to this collection. </p>
To learn more about our photographic use policy or to obtain high resolution images, please see the <strong><a title="Photographic Archive Use Policy" href="http://www.sjc.edu/academic-programs/libraries/greenfield-library/policies/#photographicarchivepolicy" target="_blank" rel="noreferrer noopener">Library’s Photographic Archive Use Policy</a></strong>.<br /><br />Click on <strong><a title="Photographic Archives" href="http://digitalarchives.sjc.edu/items/browse?collection=7">Items in the Photographic Archive—Annapolis Collection</a></strong> to view and sort all items in the collection.
Publisher
An entity responsible for making the resource available
St. John's College
Contributor
An entity responsible for making contributions to the resource
St. John's College Greenfield Library
Coverage
The spatial or temporal topic of the resource, the spatial applicability of the resource, or the jurisdiction under which the resource is relevant
Annapolis, MD
Identifier
An unambiguous reference to the resource within a given context
photographicarchiveannapolis
Still Image
A static visual representation. Examples include paintings, drawings, graphic designs, plans and maps. Recommended best practice is to assign the type Text to images of textual materials.
Original Format
The type of object, such as painting, sculpture, paper, photo, and additional data
Photograph
Physical Dimensions
The actual physical size of the original image
25.5 x 20.5 cm
Dublin Core
The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/.
Title
A name given to the resource
Richard D. Weigle and Dwight D. Eisenhower at the Opening of the Francis Scott Key Auditorium and Mellon Hall, St. John's College, Annapolis, Maryland
Description
An account of the resource
<span>Richard D. Weigle and Dwight D. Eisenhower at the opening of the Francis Scott Key Auditorium and Mellon Hall, St. John's College, Annapolis, Maryland, May 22, 1959.</span><br /><br />Eisenhower's speech is reprinted in <a href="https://babel.hathitrust.org/cgi/pt?id=miua.4728423.1959.001&seq=462">Dwight D. Eisenhower, 1959: containing the public messages, speeches, and statements of the president, January 1 to December 31, 1959. Washington: Office of the Federal Register, National Archives and Records Service, General Services Administration, pages 416-419</a>.<br /><br />A recording of Eisenhower's speech is available from the <a href="https://catalog.archives.gov/id/329120284">National Archives</a>.
Creator
An entity primarily responsible for making the resource
Warren, Marion E.
Coverage
The spatial or temporal topic of the resource, the spatial applicability of the resource, or the jurisdiction under which the resource is relevant
Annapolis, MD
Date
A point or period of time associated with an event in the lifecycle of the resource
1959-05-22
Rights
Information about rights held in and over the resource
St. John's College owns the rights to this photograph.
Type
The nature or genre of the resource
Still Image
Format
The file format, physical medium, or dimensions of the resource
jpeg
Subject
The topic of the resource
Eisenhower, Dwight D. (Dwight David), 1890-1969.
Weigle, Richard Daniel 1912-
Identifier
An unambiguous reference to the resource within a given context
SJC-P-2465
Honorary Alumni
Presidents
-
https://s3.us-east-1.amazonaws.com/sjcdigitalarchives/original/318341d6fcc64e7a8c1d1f0e0cc14f95.jpg
3b2ba80ececc6da62b66be445cc8af27
Dublin Core
The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/.
Title
A name given to the resource
Photographic Archive—Annapolis
Description
An account of the resource
<p>The Greenfield Library photographic archive houses over 5,000 photographs. The photographs in the collection document the history, academic, and community life of St. John’s College. The Library’s mission is to organize and preserve these unique visual materials, and to provide access to this collection. </p>
To learn more about our photographic use policy or to obtain high resolution images, please see the <strong><a title="Photographic Archive Use Policy" href="http://www.sjc.edu/academic-programs/libraries/greenfield-library/policies/#photographicarchivepolicy" target="_blank" rel="noreferrer noopener">Library’s Photographic Archive Use Policy</a></strong>.<br /><br />Click on <strong><a title="Photographic Archives" href="http://digitalarchives.sjc.edu/items/browse?collection=7">Items in the Photographic Archive—Annapolis Collection</a></strong> to view and sort all items in the collection.
Publisher
An entity responsible for making the resource available
St. John's College
Contributor
An entity responsible for making contributions to the resource
St. John's College Greenfield Library
Coverage
The spatial or temporal topic of the resource, the spatial applicability of the resource, or the jurisdiction under which the resource is relevant
Annapolis, MD
Identifier
An unambiguous reference to the resource within a given context
photographicarchiveannapolis
Still Image
A static visual representation. Examples include paintings, drawings, graphic designs, plans and maps. Recommended best practice is to assign the type Text to images of textual materials.
Original Format
The type of object, such as painting, sculpture, paper, photo, and additional data
Photograph
Physical Dimensions
The actual physical size of the original image
25.5 x 20.5 cm
Dublin Core
The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/.
Title
A name given to the resource
Richard D. Weigle Speaking at The Dedication of Francis Scott Key Memorial Auditorium, with Dwight D. Eisenhower Seated on Stage, St. John's College, Annapolis, Maryland
Description
An account of the resource
<span>Richard D. Weigle speaking at the dedication of Francis Scott Key Memorial Auditorium, with Dwight D. Eisenhower seated on stage, St. John's College, Annapolis, Maryland, May 22, 1959.</span><br /><br />Eisenhower's speech is reprinted in <a href="https://babel.hathitrust.org/cgi/pt?id=miua.4728423.1959.001&seq=462">Dwight D. Eisenhower, 1959: containing the public messages, speeches, and statements of the president, January 1 to December 31, 1959. Washington: Office of the Federal Register, National Archives and Records Service, General Services Administration, pages 416-419</a>.<br /><br />A recording of Eisenhower's speech is available from the <a href="https://catalog.archives.gov/id/329120284">National Archives</a>.
Creator
An entity primarily responsible for making the resource
Warren, Marion E.
Coverage
The spatial or temporal topic of the resource, the spatial applicability of the resource, or the jurisdiction under which the resource is relevant
Annapolis, MD
Date
A point or period of time associated with an event in the lifecycle of the resource
1959-05-22
Rights
Information about rights held in and over the resource
St. John's College owns the rights to this photograph.
Type
The nature or genre of the resource
Still Image
Format
The file format, physical medium, or dimensions of the resource
jpeg
Subject
The topic of the resource
Eisenhower, Dwight D. (Dwight David), 1890-1969.
Weigle, Richard Daniel 1912-
Identifier
An unambiguous reference to the resource within a given context
SJC-P-1745
Honorary Alumni
Presidents
-
https://s3.us-east-1.amazonaws.com/sjcdigitalarchives/original/eeebc4c49ff9c81d0917111a7fe60c24.jpg
2264bc37c72da335cb06fb15c4dfdae4
Dublin Core
The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/.
Title
A name given to the resource
Photographic Archive—Annapolis
Description
An account of the resource
<p>The Greenfield Library photographic archive houses over 5,000 photographs. The photographs in the collection document the history, academic, and community life of St. John’s College. The Library’s mission is to organize and preserve these unique visual materials, and to provide access to this collection. </p>
To learn more about our photographic use policy or to obtain high resolution images, please see the <strong><a title="Photographic Archive Use Policy" href="http://www.sjc.edu/academic-programs/libraries/greenfield-library/policies/#photographicarchivepolicy" target="_blank" rel="noreferrer noopener">Library’s Photographic Archive Use Policy</a></strong>.<br /><br />Click on <strong><a title="Photographic Archives" href="http://digitalarchives.sjc.edu/items/browse?collection=7">Items in the Photographic Archive—Annapolis Collection</a></strong> to view and sort all items in the collection.
Publisher
An entity responsible for making the resource available
St. John's College
Contributor
An entity responsible for making contributions to the resource
St. John's College Greenfield Library
Coverage
The spatial or temporal topic of the resource, the spatial applicability of the resource, or the jurisdiction under which the resource is relevant
Annapolis, MD
Identifier
An unambiguous reference to the resource within a given context
photographicarchiveannapolis
Still Image
A static visual representation. Examples include paintings, drawings, graphic designs, plans and maps. Recommended best practice is to assign the type Text to images of textual materials.
Original Format
The type of object, such as painting, sculpture, paper, photo, and additional data
Photograph
Physical Dimensions
The actual physical size of the original image
25.5 x 17 cm
Dublin Core
The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/.
Title
A name given to the resource
Dwight D. Eisenhower Giving an Address at the Dedication of the Francis Scott Key Memorial Auditorium, St. John's College, Annapolis, Maryland
Description
An account of the resource
<span>Dwight D. Eisenhower giving an address at the dedication of the Francis Scott Key Memorial Auditorium, St. John's College, Annapolis, Maryland, May 22, 1959.</span><br /><br />Eisenhower's speech is reprinted in <a href="https://babel.hathitrust.org/cgi/pt?id=miua.4728423.1959.001&seq=462">Dwight D. Eisenhower, 1959: containing the public messages, speeches, and statements of the president, January 1 to December 31, 1959. Washington: Office of the Federal Register, National Archives and Records Service, General Services Administration, pages 416-419</a>.<br /><br />A recording of Eisenhower's speech is available from the <a href="https://catalog.archives.gov/id/329120284">National Archives</a>.
Creator
An entity primarily responsible for making the resource
Warren, Marion E.
Coverage
The spatial or temporal topic of the resource, the spatial applicability of the resource, or the jurisdiction under which the resource is relevant
Annapolis, MD
Date
A point or period of time associated with an event in the lifecycle of the resource
1959-05-22
Rights
Information about rights held in and over the resource
St. John's College owns the rights to this photograph.
Type
The nature or genre of the resource
Still Image
Format
The file format, physical medium, or dimensions of the resource
jpeg
Subject
The topic of the resource
Eisenhower, Dwight D. (Dwight David), 1890-1969.
Weigle, Richard Daniel 1912-
Identifier
An unambiguous reference to the resource within a given context
SJC-P-1510
Honorary Alumni
Presidents
-
https://s3.us-east-1.amazonaws.com/sjcdigitalarchives/original/8df75368ff8aee8317b698ab4609dfcc.pdf
f4e27c629bc287e1425faeb15a20319a
PDF Text
Text
....
Trustees
..
..
NT ER.
�AN
ACCOUNT
OF THE
CEREMON Y OF LAYING
THE
CORNER STONE OF THE NEW BUILDING,
AT
ST. JOHN'S COLLEG E,
PERFORMED BY THE
Hon. JOHN STEPHEN, Judge of the Court of Appeals
WITH AN
ADDRESS DELIVERED ON THE OCCASION,
BY
.JOHN .JOHNSON, Esq., one of the Visitors and Governors
JUNE
18TH,
1635.
WITH A
HISTORICAL NOTICE OF THE INSTITUTION, A CATALOGUE
OF THE OFFICERS AND STUDENTS,
AND .A.
COPY OJ' THE SUBSCRIPTIONS MADE
TO THE
FUNDS
ANNAPOLIS
Published by request of the Board of Trustees
JEREMIAH HUGHES, PRINTER
�E.
ORI GIN OF ST. JOH N'S COL LEG
ide
THE first act of Assembly in Mar ylan d, to provding
for foun
for Collegiate Education, passed in 178 2,
requ ired ,
was
a Seminary on the Eastern Sho re. It
be raised
ld
shou
by the char ter, that a sum of money
£50 0 for
to
l
eqna
by contribution, for its endowment,
s were
year
five
each county on the Eastern Sho re; and.
In an
.
itic,n
cond
allowed for the performance of this
at
ted
prin
,
king
erta
account of the progress of the und
,
a1ly
hatic
emp
d,
urge
Phil adel phia in 1784, it was
D
GOO
hy
e,
mad
be
t
that ''las ting pro1Jisions mus
n of PA•
EDU CA TIO N,fo r trai ning up a successio
for LIB NEs;
D1v1
and
ES
TRJO Ts, LAW GIV ERS , SAG
re her fair
ER TY will not dei~n to dwell, but whe
by her side;
companion KNOWLEDGE flourishes
ered, but
nor can GOVERNMENT be duly administ
, VrnT uE,
w~ere the principles of REL IGIO N, JusT ICE ENC E
SCI
CON
for
CE,
DIEN
SonRrnTY and OBE
people of
SAK E, are uph eld. " Thi s appeal to the
. In less
the Eastern Sho re, was not made in vainsubscribed
e
than.five months, upwards of £10 ,000 wer
that Sho re;
on
ties
coun
ous
vari
the
in
for the College,
to put the
and measures wer e immediately adopted
list of the
Sem inar y inh> operation. An accu rate
count, ~c."
subscribers, is pres erve d in the above "./l.c
sense of its
w'.1ich exhibits, in a strik ing manner, the
shington
Tfla
importance then felt by the people.
, and
own
Colle!fe was accordingly opened at Chestert
erconf
the
held its first Annual Commencement, for
at
rch
Chu
ring of Degrees, May 16th , 1783, in the
aPhil
of
D.
that place. The Rev. W. Smi th, D.
son having
delphia, pres ided on the occa~ion, and his
�4
the
been !ho ugh t ,vo rth, y of
Th e Dfirst honour, spoke the
valedictory oration
egree of Bac hel or of
trt s, was con ferr ed on fiv
men, Alumni oft he
ollege. Copies of the e gen~Je
~tory and salu tato ry
or~ti_ons: are p1·eserved in v;~ed1
_e a ove ",llccount &c "
~n rnd1cate tha t the
were of unco'mm.
i,nterest and effect I exercises 4, the College on
178
ay,
•.. nfM Gen W
was
l,onoured with a v,s1
t rom
, who
ToN
be
I.NG
ASH
•
13
th
of
er
..:ame a memb
e oa rd of Tru stee s ai d •IS
enrolled among th
cent of its ; t l
Th e College Ed'fie most munifi
ns.
was l60 feet in len gth ,a trhoree
stories in hei gh/a bee
ove the b
~
!se me nl, and con tain ed
rooms ior more than 100 St uae
• was
nts. Per h aps 1t
to
an
. err or, ere ct one b ·1d·
of tl~ese dimensions,
t~t ea, f of following the i:u atg l ? of sep ara te Halls
pa
o1 a smaller num ber each o
different par ts of th;
College grounds. In cod n
e of this arra nge ;en t,hw hen the bui ldin g :;~ t~~I e some yea rs sin ce
,
e w ole was red uce d to ru·ms.
A
? err or of more conse
e wa_s committed by
forming the Universitlj of if.uen~
and rn two Bra nch es
one on the Eastern a~d one ar,11
tl~e We ste rn Sho re'
!n_the preamble to the cha rt on
•
'' ashington C II
of
er
it is ~tated tha t ''th •
~i
a17 J_ la~dable und er~ ah:
hat h been reta rde d
ry mcz den ts of a p bl'
nat ure , but chiFjiy b th gre
_u g zc
fi.rin
di.fficulty ot'.
a
~'h oree if at
'J
situ atio n on eit"tter u.
th •
iSem
a
for
te,
Sta
_zsh
'
~biar,1/ of uni ver sal learningo' 'Vmc mig ht b if
•
enefit and c
_~f
::• youth of bothe;ho'J,~tha
~;11wa~ dete;:i.:~"::~•e~
t
circumstances
ze inh abi tan ts of each Sh ese sho
t'
fet't
be
uld
. nce ore
;1 • o con• fi
sui t· the. ir own co nvenze
fre ely
and
g
din
~un
n
:;: ;w i'lg a College or Sem h::t1/I
ng
rni
lea
al
<;r
gen
if
for themselves, und er
p
,;
law
of:'
n
: sanctio
'd
•
er haps the re wer e co 11 s1 cra twn
'J
•
t hat p · d
s m operation at
ex /r1 0 , ren der ing suc h a course necessary or
are
we
r pe ient, of which res :ot now sensible. Inteligen~ men on both Sho
er, ver y generalJy,
question the pol icy of tha~ a:: ::vgem ent , and app ear
tyg;::~
e been far bet ter to
to be convinced tha t it would hav
Sta te at some one
con cen trat e the pat ron age of the establishment of a
the
for
point favourably situ ate d,
n, nuw so fre que ntly
Sta te University. Th is opinio
the people of Ma ryex pressed in eve ry qua rter , b)
effect in the Annual
land, is P.mbodied wit h gre at
the Hon. JoH N B •
Rep ort to the Leg isla ture , by
ted to visit St. Joh n's
MoRRls, of the com mit tee app ni;i
3.
College, De cem ber session, 183
College is dee me d
n's
"T he pro spe rity of St. Joh
t the you th from
tha
a sub jec t of gre at imp ort anc e, so
ns of the Sta te,
isio
div
at
eve ry portion of the two gre
assurance of
ed
und
gro
l
may convene wit h the wel
education, and at the
being able to a1.:.quire a libe ral
riot ic anticipations of
same time, consummate the pat
ion bet wee n the two
the cha rter ; ''th at the connex
by uniformity in
shores, will be gre atly increased
the adv anc em ent of
mannf:!rs and join t efforts for
no way can this paLit era tur e." It is believed in
d as by sustaining
rental aspiration be so well rea lize rnin g at the sea t
Lea
on a liberal scale a Sem ina ry of
chi ld are con ven ed,
and
ent
par
e
her
n-w
of Leg isla tio
me re511latio ns for
the one to aid in devisrng wholeso
oth er to acq uire the
the welfare of So cie ty- the
in the reg uhr coursP.
prin cip les of knowledge, wh ich
n und er the favoraof events is to be put in requisitio
nne rs" and ear ly
ma
ble auspices of "un ifo rmi ty of
associations."
not be chosen to
Language more felicitous could
neous sentiments of
utt er wh at must be the sponta
who knows the story
eve ry true friend of the Sta te,
St. John's, like
.
of this unf ortu nat e institution
sub jec t to calamity
Washi11g/0'1, College , has been
ten ce, almost simuland adv ers ity -ca lled into exis
l action by a wis e
tan eou sly , and set into successfu
, it seems to hav e
gov ern me nt and a liberal peo ple strike the m bot h,
uld
been fate d tha t the paralysis sho
manent vigour and
per
the
in
atta
before eith er could
ma ture d institutions.
efficiency tha t belong to well
�6
e name is
"l'he same wor thy agen t, whose venerabl
ton College,
enrolled in the earl y Hecords of Washing
nt and estabtook the most active part in the endowme
versity. A
lishment of this second bran ch of the Uni
, for the
him
list of the subscriptions obta ined by
the books
on
benefit of St. John 's CoJJege, is pres erve d
equal to
was
of the Board of Trus tees . The amount
ch on
bran
r
othe
that which had been obtained for the
two
sum
ch
whi
of
,
the Eastern Sho re; i. e. £10 ,000
and
tor
Rec
''the
by
thousand pounds wer e subs crib ed
subsc:rip Visit01·s of the .11.nnapolis Scho ol." This
Ann athe
of
tors
Visi
tion secu red to the Rec tor and
tors
Visi
two
g
intin
appo
polis School, the priv ileg e of
also
e
ileg
priv
a
ege;
Coll
and Governors of St. John 's
in the same
exte nde d to tbe othe r class of subscribers,
£10 00
each
for
r
erno
Gov
and
tor
ratio, viz: -on e Visi
Thi s corsubs crib ed and secu red for the College.
Wil liam 's
poration was originally called ''Ki ng
s, the balScho ol," and possessed considerable fund
convey to St.
ance of which, 1t was proposed, also, to
pleted. The
John 's College, after it should be com
to coup le the
Rec tor and Visitors, how ever , proposed
tion, that in
following condition with thei r subscrip
Visitors and
case of a vacancy in thei r number of
enin g, out
happ
Governors, ''to fill up the vacancy so
th £10 00
wor
be
l
of such citizens of Annapolis as shal
not apwas
n
tatio
curr ent money each ," Thi s limi
ernors,
Gov
and
prov ed or acee pted , "the Visi tors
prin the
izn
wit!
rty,
not thinki:ng themselves at libe
ded,
foun
is
ege
Coll
the
ciples of equ ality upo n 'Which
conbe
l
shal
ncy
vaca
that the choice to fill up such
this
from
And
lis."
apo
.fine d to the citiz ens of .llnn
ool,
Sch
the
of
tors
Visi
proposition the Rec tor and
s11hscription
unanimously agre ed to rece de. The ir
Visitors ancl
two
and
e,
mad
of £20 00, was ther efor e
Boa rd.
the
to
rned
retu
and
Gover11ors were elected
7
chosen by subscribers,
The original. members,
were the foll owr ng:WJL LIA ~ WCELsrGgE¥;r ' D. D.
THO MA S J.
NIC HOL AS CARROLL, Esq.
JOH N H . STO NE, Esq.
WIL LIA M BEA NES , Esq.
RIC HAR D RID GEL Y, Esq.
SAM UEL CHA SE, Ellq.
JOHN THO MA S, Esq.
THO MA S STO NE, Bsq: N ' Es q.
ALE XAN DER C. HANSO
THOMAS JEN NIN GS, Esq.
b the Visitors and
en d \ver e the following-:
me1:11bers {bn
The othe rcons
titut e t e oar ,
Governors to
JA~ IES BRI CE,
JOH N ALL EN THOMAS,
GUS TAV US R BROWN,
EDW ARD GAN TT,
CLE MEN T HIL L,
RIC HAR D SPR IGG ,
CHA RLE S CAR ROL L, of C.
JER EM IAH T. CHA SE,
CHA RLE S WA LLA CE,
os h
JOH N CAR ROL L, D. D.
1,; t
.
Feb
held
h Boa rd was
•
fled before A. C.
The first mee tmg oft e
Cou rt, by
178 6. The members wer e fq~~e1 General
thei r beof
ion
arat
Hanson, one of the J ~d.ges o decl
two oaths
the
ng
taki
d
a
repe atin g and_ s?bscr1b~n.~
Laws of
and
n
utio
ti
Can
h10n
lief in the Chr1s.t1an Rehg
ons
e
t
by
of fidelity reqm red
h B ard proc eede d to
this State. .
~·ng the ColJege.
On the 1st of Mar ch 178 6 t
i .llnnanolis and
t1sd
er for es!a
fix upon a place prop
.
r
e , ts wer
1 wer e .nomrna
e give n
. ballo
Two places on Y
latte r plac e.
Upper Mar l borough; wheia1;:~efor the
term s of
the
to
, rdin
for the former, and two.
of four
lot
a
of
•of
acco
is,
Thi s election of Annapol possess1
f
the
ed
use o
the
for
d
base
.
secu r
the Cha rter, with
pure
,
in the city
acre s of land
r
~r
�8
the public, and conveyed, in 1744, by Stephen Bord- .
Iy, Esq. to Thomas Blad~n, Esq. t~en Governor of
Maryland. 1 his lot has smce remarneJ the property
of the College, and is the scite on which the present
buildings stand.
.
.
On the 10th of March 1786, it was resolved to
finish the building, then standing on the ground, for
the purposes of the College, and to add wings on the·
North and South ends, according to a plan furn ished
by Mr. Joseph Clarke. This plan was never executed, and is probably lost. The following gentleme n
composed the Building Committee.
ALEXANDER CONTEE H ANSO K ,
NIC HOLAS CA RRO LL ,
RICH ARD RI DGEL Y, Esquires.
DR.
JoHN
McDoWELL was the first officer chosen
to preside over the College as Professor of Mathe~atics; and he was afterwards promoted to the station
of Principal, which office he discharged with great
ability for many years. The 11th day of Nov. 1789
was selected for the occasion of opening the Institution, and the Rev. Dr. Smith was requested to attend·
as Principal of the College, pro tempore, and to deliver
a sermon. The dedication was performed with much
solemnity, all the public bodies being in attendance,
and forming a long procession from the State House
to the College Hall. In addition to the sermon by
Dr. Smith} an oration, by Mr. Higginbottom, Professor of Ancient Languages, was delivered on the advantages of classical education. And from the account
published by the authority of the Trustees, it is evident
that the high reputation of this College, for its classical course, has been owing, in a great measure, to the
thorough discipline which was then provided, and
which has been preserved to the present time.
The Trustees proceeded to the appointment of
other Professors, as the increase of their funds gave
them the necessary means; and in 1792 the sum of
EJ7·5 was expended for the purchase, in Loadon, of
9
ihe requisite Philosophical apparatus. Most of the
articles are still found in the College, thou_gh $ome
important ones, among which was a th~odolite, have
been lost, At this period there were six l'rofessors
and Teachers, constantly employed in the College;
~nd, for ~nany years, its reputntion was such that. a.
long succession of distinguished scholars took then•
.,
deg rees at its annual Con1me nc'ements,
On Friday, N ov. 2 2d 1805 (a day or singular
fatality and ill -omen to education in Maryland,~ lea~e
was granted in the Ho.use of Delegates to br_mg 1 .
''an act to withdrn:µJ the funds f rom f,flashington
and St. John's Cqtleges." The strongest possiblf!:
influence whi-ch the enemies· of ,the College could
command was concentrated; and brought to bear upon it; but so firm were .;:he convictions of the impolicy
and injustice of the a0t, then felt, that a majority pf
but eight members, unde}• all the exciteme nt of the
ticcasion , could be zll'evaile'd on to take the fatal step.
"{his decision was not had in the House of Delegates
till thy 1st of Ja111rary, 1806. And a strong indication of the dispassionate judgment of the Honse~ on
this important matter, is founi;l in the vote subsequently taken at the s~me s~ssion: upon a r esolution
introduced to restor~ S 1600 per annum from the funds
which had been withdrawn, for the p urpose of enabling _the Trustees to continue the institution. The
question was t~ken upan this resolution on the '27th·
Jan. 1806, and was lost by only a· sing1e vote.
In consequence of this a,ction on part of the Gov~
ernmer;it, tht:: Visitors arid Governors were under the
r!ecessity of passing the following resolufion on tho.
12tQ of May 1806. . "Wherea~, by virtue of an act
of the Legislature of ldaryland, at their last session,
the donationfrom the State to St . .John's College of
£1750 per, 9nnum,. wilt,cease am/ determine on thtJ
1§.t day of J,une next, therefore,-Resolved, that the ,
Principal, Vice Principal, Professors and M aste.rs of
said College, be discontinued on tile 10th day of Au,'.:
~
•
I
�•
11
10
gust, ne:i:t." Such provisions we1·e made, howev:1,
at the same time, as the funds would allow for the mamtenance of a respectable school; but its character as a
College was lost. Yet the Visitors and Gover~ors hav_e
never abandoned the hope under the rnostpressrng period of their necessity, of ultimately fulfilling the designs
of its founders. They have, accordingly, appealed
to the Legislature, at several periods, for a restoration to the enjoyment of their rights, and the justice
of their claim has been repeatedly acknowledged; and
acts of partial indemnity have been passed in theit•
favour. In 1811 an act was passed, appropriating
81000 per annum on the same terms, with similar
sums granted to other county Seminaries. In 1821
a lottery was also granted, v,hich added ~20,000 to
the permanent funds. Finally, in 1833, an act of
compromise was passed, by whic-h 82000 per annum,
in addition to former grants, were secured to the
College forever, which the Visitors and Governors
accepted in full of their legal and equitable claims;
and the deed of release, required by the act, was executed and entered upon the records of the court of
appeals. By the same act, ten of the highest ofti•
cers of the State Government were introduced into
the Board of Trustees. These measures have gone
far to restore to the College the confidence of the
people of Maryland, and the consequent increase of
patronage, has required the addition of another building for the accommodation of students. It was accordingly resolved, Feb. 15, 1835, to solicit funds,
by subscription, for this purpose and for the general
improvement of the library and apparatus. Upwards
of deven thousand dollars have been already subscribed, and a commodious edifice, 80 feet by 40, 3 stories
in height above the basement, has been commenced,
and will be completed by the ensuing spring~
The foundation walls are built of stone, in the
most substantial manner, furnishing one large and
convenient public room, in the basement story, in
addition to a kitchen, ct:llars, &c. of sufficient size
for a public establishment. The walls above the
basement, are of brick, with partitions of the same
material, and will contain twenty-five sepa1·ate rooms,
for the accommodation of fifty Students, besides rooms
for the family of a· Professor of the College. The
Corner Stone was cut from a single block of granite,
in the form of an Octagon, four feet across, corresponding with the form and dimensions of the angular
buttresses.
The ceremony of laying the Corner Stone, was
preceded by Prayer, by the Rev. Dr. Humphreys,
the President of the Coilege. The following inscrip•
tion, enclosed in a sealed gla1s vase, was deposited in
a mcta\\ic box, undt•r the stone:
"This corner stone wits laid on Thursday, the 18th
day of June, A. D., 1835, by the Hon. John iStephen,
Presiding Judge in the Court of Appeals, the Rev.
Hector Humphreys~ D. D. President of St. John's
College, and John Johnson, Esq. one of the Visitors
and Governors, being present and assisting; His
Excellency .11.ndrew Jaclrson, being President of the
United States; His Excellency James Thomas, being
Governor of Maryland, and the Hon. John S. Martin,
Thomas Veazey, Geol'ge C. Washington, .Nathaniel
F. Pftilliams, and Gwinn Harris, being the :Executive Council; and Dr. Dennis Claude, being Mayor
of Annapolis.
Ramsa.1/ Waters,
John Johnson,
Building Committee.
Nicholas Brewer, Jr.
R. C. Long, Architect,
Elijah Welts, Builder."
!
After the ceremony was performed, the following
remarks were m&.de by the presiding Judge, standing
on the Corner Stone.
"The object of erecting the Edifice, of which the
corner stone has just been laid, is one of vital importance to the future happmess, prosperity and welfare
�12
~r .that community of which we are members.
fier~
likewise, is to be laid the corner stone of that mteliectual cultivation, which is to develope the powers
of the youthful mind, and enable it to gather w~alth
from those treasures of antiquity, which have outh~ed
the wreck of Empires, and s?rvived the a!l-moulderrng
hand of time. J;Iere the rising generat10n are te ac~
guire the rudiments of s~ience,_ aud to ~e taught thostl
elemental principles of learmng, which elsewh~re,
:µnder pigher auspices, are to be foster~d and cherished and receive additional culturP, until they expand
in(o full growth and maturity. To the mind ~f the
Patriot, the spectacle which the _ceremony of this day
has exhibited, must bring a tram of thought, o~ t~e
roost gratifying and consoling character. Withm
these walls, the first lessons of that wisdom are to be
taught, which is to guide and control the f~ture ~estinies of this rising Republic, to sway the dehberat1?ns
of its Rulers, and elevate its character to that high
~egree of splendour,· d!gnity and ~enown, to whi~h,
under the benignant smiles of Provi9ence, and a virtuous and enlightened administration of its affair&, it
~eems to be tt:nding with a step as certain as fate, aud
:.ureas the advance of time itself. To the friend and
Jover of his country, 'no human interest can present
stronger claims to patronage and support, than the
cause of science arid literature; by their lights ar.d
influence, the mind is invigorated, the taste refine~,
and the heart warmed with noble and elevated sentiments. But above all, in a Government founded, as
ou1·'s is, upon the virtue and intellig~nce of ~he pe_ople, a gen6ral diffusion of knowledge is essential to its
prosperity and permanent existence. May we not
then, indulge the pleasing, the delightfol hope, that
from within these w . dls, the lights ot science will go
forth and pervade every corner of our land, illumine
the mind() of the rising generation, and impart to
posterity those blessings which learning and virtue
never fail to bestow.
ADDRESS
BY
JOHN JOHNSON, Esq.
l)ELIVERED IN THE HALL OF ST. JOHN'S COLLEGE~
June 18th, 1835.
The occasion which calls us together is one which
~u]dresst>s itself mo,,t powerfully to the best aftections
of the human heart. We are engaged in providing
means tor the education of the rising generation. In
supplying that aliment for the minds of those who are
to fill the places now occupied_ by us, without ;Vhich
the glorious institutions transmitted by our fore1athers
to ourselves, would be but a barren and unprofitable
inheritance.
In vain did the Heroes of the Revolution toil and
bleed to free us from the galling yoke of Colonial
servitude. In vain did the warm currents of their
lives best blood, 8tream over the fields, whose ab~ndance we now enjoy, if we, their sons do not furnish
the future owners of all these blessings, with a full
knowledge of their inappreciable value: . ~t may be
truly said, that the eyes of the whole c1 v1hzed world
are anxiously directed to the career of youthful America. The friends of freedom regard her progress
with exulting anticipations it is true, but with hopes
sometimes overcast with gloomy forebodings of the
future. The advocates of despotic authority, dreading the influence which her bright example may extrt
over those who have so long been the victims of that
authority, watch every indication of degeneraCY,
eagerly longing for _the moment, when. the spectacle
of bleedin~ and dismembered America may be a
warning to ~woid, rather than an example to follow.
,!\nd shall we not employ all the means placed by a
�14
gracious .i.Jrov1oence within our reach, to fulfill the
hopes of our friends, and disappoint the expect ations
of our enemies? Shall we preter mit any effort~ which
may sustain, in all their purity , the be<1utiful fabric of
Repub lican Institutions, purcha sed with the blood of
our glorious ancestors, from a nation whose valor until then, had never been successfully resisted? and
how is this priceless treasu re to be preser ved-th ese
inestimable institutions upheld and defend ed, but by
teachin g their full value to those to whose keepin g
they must ere long be confided? There is no way in
which this can be done, unless education is diffused
widely among the people . To apprec iate a blessing,
its worth must be known, and it can only be known ,
by assiduously cultiva ting the mi.nds of those upon
whom the impression is to be made. A glorious destiny awaits Repub lican Ameri ca if she is faithful to
the principles which led to her indepe ndence . She
has already taken the lead of the older nations of Europe in the science of Government. The votaries of
freedom there, pant in vain for the high prize which
descen ded to us from our venera ted forefa thers- oppressed and borne down as they are with the barbar rous institutions, of barbarous and benigh ted ages;
institutions interw oven with the very web of their
social systems, and which cannot be overth rown, or
even essentially modified, withou t dange r to the
fabricks themselves; ages must roll away before the
same perfec tion in Gover nment is attaine d there, as
exists with us-no ne disput e our superiority in every
thing which relates to political organization. It
is admitted and unquestionable, and if we can likewise outstri p other nations in the cultiva tion of
the sciences and the lessons of practic al wisdom, we
shall prove ourselves deserv ing of the blessings we
enjoy. It is not to be expec ted, or perhap s desire d,
that the same high finish and elegant polish in literature, shall be acquir ed in this countr y, as is to be fount!
in the higher grades of Europ ean society; There the
great accumulation and concentration of wealth, in
15
the hands of a few, enable them to dedica te thcil
whole lives to the cultiva tion of those arts which serve
rather to adorn than benefit niank ind-w ith us, this
can never be the case. 1 he genius of OUl'institutions
is alike opposed to the monopoly of \~e.alth or_kno:V·
ledge. They were framed 111 a sp1_r1t of d1ffus1 vc
philan thropy , and \vhilst the law provides that we.llth
shall not accumulate for ages, the avenues to knowledge are thrown open alike to all. The great object
is to enlighten the mass. The int_elligence_of a nation
consists in the aggreg ate of the wisdom of its people ,
and not in possessing a few dazzling ~uminaries, whos_e
brilliJncy but deepen s the surrounclrng gloom. It ~s
not meant that the minds of all can be equally cultivated. Societ y is a chain of dependencies, and some
are invited to the discha rge of duties, which rtquir e
higher attainments than are necessary. to the parts
which others are called on to play. Whilst therefo re,
the streng th and durabi lity of the Government, and
the happiness and indepe ndence of ~he ~eople, arc
essentially promo ted by the spread of rntelhgence and
education 2 it is of the highes t importance that means
should be liberal ly provid ed, for the more elaborate
instruc tion of those who may be regard ed as the
especial conser vators of the institutions of the countr y,
and upon whose success in the great strugg le for
mental superi ority, th@ fame of the nation must necessarily rest. For this reason, it is the duty of all
who cheris h the honor and welfare of the State, not
only to furnish abund antly the means of improvement
to the mass of the community, to enable them to ap•
precia te truly, the happiness of their condit!on, and
to choose discre etly, those to whom the machi nery of
Government shall be confided, but it is also their imperativ e obligation to supply semina~•ies, _where the
most perfec t cultur e, of which the mmd is capabl e,
may be afforded.
In propor tion as these are multiplied, and society
is filled with a class of men, eminently qualified for
�16
the discharge of its most important duties, the danger
of selecting unfaithful or incompetent trustees of the
public we]fa!'e, is diminished. The conduct and
qualifications of every candidate for the popular suffrage, will be vigilantly and searchingly examined,
and it wiH rarely happen, that ignorance will escape
detection, or presumprion fail of its rebuke. And
should the various States of this happy country, ri val
each oth e1· in the cat1se of education, with the same
zeal which they now display in improving thei r physical condition, in opening avenues to wealth, and
adding new impulses to commer<?e, a degree of pros•
perity may be attained, which the imagination of the
wildest visionary has not yet conceived. Every motive to exertion, which can actuate the human heart,
:must exist in a nation like this. Witlt us, there are no
privileged orders1 Lorn t-o fill the high places in the
State. No sense of conventional inferiority, presses
upon the mind here, deadening its energies, and
smothering its virtuous aspirations, The highest
posts in the State; posts, the possession of which;
might thrill with a palpitating gladness, the bosom of
the loftiest monarch of the world, are accessible to the
humblest iudividual. The staridard of merit in this
nation of 1:epublicans, is virtue, intelligence, integrity
and devot10n to the public welfare. These are qualifications which depend aot, on blood, on wealth, or
adventitious influences of any kind. The son of the
humblest peasant within the wide borders of our almo~t li1~itless territory, 01: !he offspring of the poorest
artisan 1n our numerous C1t1es, may by his merit alone
rise to a height of true glory, whose elevation would
r;nder giddy the head of the proudest potentate of
Europe. He may be placed at the head of a nation
of freemen, whvse selection of him for such a trust
stamps him with ~ perpetual and glorious immortalit/
With these motives to stimulate to exertion, who can
set bou~ds to Am:erican genius, if proper appliances·
are furnished for its careful cultivation.
17
In most of the States of the confederacy, ~his momentous subject is engaging much of _the pubhc attP.?·
tion, and large sums have been contr1bu~ed by pubhc
and private munificence, for the promotion of ed~ca•
tion. In Maryland, a fatal lethargy for ~ long time,
seems to have brooded over the public mrnd. In all
the other elements of greatness, sufficient activity has
been manifested, especially within the compass of the
last few ye11rs. Efforts have been made, and are now
making, to attract within our borders, by stupen~ous
works of internal improvement, the rnexhaustible
riches of the western world.
The lofty Alleghanies are to be pierced o~ scaled,
and a tide of commerce and wealth poured rnto our
lap from fields and vallies, which it was supposed
we;e separated by impassable barriers. T!iese are
achievements to which Maryland enterpr1ze, and
Maryland treasure are freely devoted, and if successful as can scarceli be doubted, will reflect imperishabl~ honor upon those who devised, and ~hose. who
executed them. But whilst we are pressmg vigorously on the heels, if not ontstrippin~ ou_r sister States
in the race of physical and commercial 1mpr?vement,
it is not to be disguised, that we are far bc_hrnd _m~st
of them ' in furnishino-b the means of educat10,1 w1th1,1
Ve have not yet among us, any
our own borders.
great State lnstitu~i~n, affor<l~ng adequate facilit~es to
our y,mth, of acqmrrng the higher branches of intellectual improvement. In consequ_en?e of the.absence
of a liberally endowed and flour1shmg seminary of
learning, our youth are compelled to resort ~o o_ther
States, where feelings and prjnciples may be 1mbibe_d
in opposition to the best interests of the land of their
birth.
It is natural to the human heart, to feel a strong
yearning of affection for the spot_ where the light ?f
wisdom first beamed upon_ the mm?·. The pla~~s m
which we abode "when hfe was m its sprmg, and
which are associated with our freshest recollections-:
3
�IS
where the capacities of the mind were first unfolded
a1!d the Jessons of virtue and wisdom originally in:
~tilled, ~re alw~ys remembered, even to the dying
hour, with fe elings of gratitude and love.
Would it not be wise then to tie the sons of Maryland by these golden cords of affection to the land of
t~e~r birth, a~d not exp?se them to the perils of a
.divided alleg1a?ce? I_t 1s far from the purpose of lhis
_ad~ress to excite sentiments of hostili ty, or even of
md1fference, to the welfare of our sister States. ~Te
all constitute one great family, banded toge1her in
the holy brotherhood of affection and mutual interests
-Jiving un~er one common government; pursuing
the same objects, and Jinked together by a thousand
recollecti?ns of mutual dangers ·and mutual support,
~ha~ed with, a?d afforded to each other. The prosperity .o~ each Is the prosperity of the whole, and may
the brilliancy of the constellation never be dimmed
by the obscuratio n of a solitary star-on the contrarv'
PU; earnest w~sh is~ that they may grow brighter, a~d
bri~hter, until then· rays shall illuminate the farthest
ends o_f the earth: A ll that is urged is, that it is the
true d1c~ate of wisdom to bind the sons of Maryland
to her s01l, by every sympathy which can penetrate to
the recesses of t he human heart. They should be
,t aught_to regard the_land of their birth, as the land
by which every blessmg they enjoy has been bestowed
and to_whose glory and advancement, they are bound
~o dedicate the best e~ergies of their nature. They
..hould not be permitted to reflect, that whilst they
~re Mary~anders, by the _accideut of birth, they owe
to other S~atcs all f~r w?1ch life is worth preserving;
1he educati?n of t heir mrnds, that moral culture which
~nsures. their resp~ct amo~g men, and those religious
1mpressions, on whwh their hopes for eternity are reposed.
In additj?n to these inducements, which are surely
of so?1e _weight~ the effort now making to establish a
!)qur1shrng s~m;nary of learning in Maryland is re-
19
commended by considerations of the truest economy.
. The amount annually expended by our young men,
who are sent abroad for their education, must necessaril y far exceed the interest of the sum, which would
be required to build up a college at home, adequate
for every purpose. Independently of \Vhich, what is
carried abroad is lost, or only returned rn attachmen ts
severed from home; whilst what is expended at home
is promotive of the pnblic good, by being more widely
diffused . It cannot be doubted, that 8100,000 spent
abroad impoverishes the State more than five times
t hat su :U spent among ourselves-whilst the first is so
much taken from the general mass, never to be restored ; the latter after performing a round of circulation, giving employment to the \lOor, and food to th_e
ind ustrious. is returnect to the sources from whence 1t
was contrib'uted, by a thousand channels. Why education has been so long neglected in Maryland it is
difficult to conceive. A-. early as the year 1784 the
attention of the State authorities was called to this
subjec t, in order as the preamble t? the charter of
Wushington College declares "to raise up, and perpetuate a succession of able and honest men, for dis charging the v.irious offices and duties of the commu11ity, both civil and religious, with usefulness and
r eputatio n," and in 1784 an annual donation of £1250
was granted to this College, to be applied to the payment of the salaries of the principal, professors and
tutors. In the same year 1784, an act was passed
for founding a College on the western shore, and constituting the same, together with Washington College
on the.eastern shore, one university, by the name of
'.'the Universi ty of Maryland." This institution was
in orporated by the name of the Visitors and Govern•
ors of St. John's College, and for the purpose of providing a "permanent fund for the further encourage•
ment and establishment of the said College," the sum
of £ 1750 was ''annually and for ever thereafter given
and granted, as a donation by the public, to the US"
�20
'lf_thc_ saicl College on the western shore," to be applied rn the same manner as the donatiou to Washington C~lle 9e, "for. the liberal education of youth in
the prmc1ples of virtue, knowledge, and useful literature."
Thus it will be seen, that our ancestors, those who
fought t_he b_attles_ of the Hevolution, and bequeathed
us the rich_ inheritance _of freedom, were fully sensible of the mcalculable importance of education and
coun_ted not price, in the means of furnishing it. They
had Just emerged from the dangers of a bloody and
f~arful contes}; and "frighted peace had hardly found
time to ]?ant, after the ferocity of the struggle.
The music of the martial trumpet, and "the earth9uake shout of victory," had scarcely ceased to ring
m the1~ cars, when ~he paramount importance of
education arrested their attention and in the circumstanc.e~ in which they were plac~d, the most liberal
prov1si_on ~as ma~~ for it. For not only did the
St~te, rn its political capacity, grant the donation
which has been mentioned, but contributions to the
~m~u~t of upwards of £10,000, were furnished by
md1v1duals, for the same elevated and benevolent
purpose. . Among these contributors, beside a list of
name:-:! "'.h1ch any age or nation might be proud to
exh1b1t, 1s to be found that of Washington himself, the
man, who had not only "filled the measure of his
C()Untry's glory,'' but who had raised the standard of
h~~amty, throughout the limits of the civilized world.
' ' 1th _the means thus supplied, St. John's College was
estabhshed, and pursued for many years a career of
usefulness and honor, dispensing the bles;ings of educat10~ upon hundreds of her sons, and bidding fair
to raise the reputation of the State, which founded
and foste_red her, to an equal height at least with any
'
of her sisters.
In 1805, less enlightened and liberal counsels appear to have prevailed, and the funds which had been
perpetu~lly dedicated to the support of this institution,
were withdrawn. It is not our purpose to speak
21
harshly of the proceedings of that day. It is enough
to say, that they fell heavily upon the hearts of those,
to whom the interests of education were dear, and that
the brightening beams of St. John's were shorn of
their lustre. The University, within whose walls
had been educated many of the most illustrious men
of the age, who had sent forth from her venerable
shades, a number of the States, most distinguished
ornaments, was doomed for a season, to sicken and
languish, from the indifference of the parent, who
had engaged by every sanction, to nurture her to the
last. But may we not indulge the hope, that these
days of neglect are past? That the minds of our fellow
citizens are fully awakened to the vjtal importance of
building up, and sustaining here at home, a high
seminary of learning, commensurate with the progress
of society, and the dignity and honor of the State.
The Legislature of 1832, influenced by enlightened counsels, and stimulated by a sense of justice, restored a portion of the funds withdrawn in 1805, and
incorporated in the Board of Trustees, several of the
chief ufficers of the State, thus clearly impressing
upon it, the characteristics of a State institution.
From that auspicious moment, the progress of the
College has been rapidly onward. The Board of
Trustees had previously @ngag'ed the services of a
gentleman in the capacity of Principal, eminently
qualified for the duties of such a station. To the advantages of much experience, deep and various learning, a character of the most elevated cast, he adds a ·
zeal and devotion which knows no flagging, and a
perseverance and assiduity which has never faltered.
Under his guidance, with the growing interest
manifested by the community for our welfare, the
full realization of our hopes can hardly be doubted. ·
Occupying a position in the confederacy, eminently
favorable to the development of her resources, Maryland cannot fail to become one of its most conspicuous ·
members, if she is faithful to her own best interests.
No apathy on the subject of these interests has been'
�22
displayed, save only with respect to education. In
opening channtls of communication with the distant
and fr uitful west, gigantic efforts have been, and arc
being made, and mil lions of t1·easure unhesitatingly
expended. T o ascertain what hidden treasures lie
buried in the bowels of the land, and contribute our
portion to the cause of science, liberal provision has
been made, and we have the proud consciousness of
knowing, th at with reference to the latter objects, we
have taken the decided lead. The benefictal results
of these wise measures, are already most sensibly
felt. The spirit of commerce, which had begun to
droop beneath the incubus of inactivity, 1s now buoya~t with reno vated life, and whitening every ocean
with h er wings. The farn1er pursues his meritorious
occupation, wit h the well founded assurn11ce of being
amply r em unerate<l for his toil, and the industrious
artiza ns of our towns and villages, partake largely of
the general prosperity. In the midst of this reioicing, this ac t ual fruition of abundant causes of pr~sent
gratulation, and prospects for the future most cheering to the hea r t of the philanthropist; it is our happiness to kn ow, that the hopes of the friends of St. Joh n's
are once more reviviug. In addition to the recent
bounty of the State, already adverted to, and the
steps which ha ve been taken towards placing her in
the footing of a State institution, a considerable accession of fu nds has been derived, from the voluntary
contribution of i ndividuals. With the means thus
acquired, the Ed ifice, the corner stone of which has
just been laid, is to be erected. The object of the
building is, to acco mm odate with board, students from
a· distance, whose paren ts or guardians may wish to
exclude them fro m the city. The want of such an
appenda&'e to the College, has been Jong felt; and
~hen fimshed, we confidently hope, will infuse new
vigour i_nto !ts r~vi ving energies. The appeal however which 1s berng made to the public liberality has
been hut partially r esponded to.
'
23
T o place the institution upon the lofty ground,
which i t deserves to occupy, to ena~le it to f~lfil the
h opes of its friends, and to a~compl~sh the high J?Ur •
poses of the patriotic generat10n which founded it, a
far more generous supply of means is ~ndispeosab)y
necessar y. That they will not be furlllshe~, we_w~ll
not believe- Maryland can, and will maintain w1thm
her bosom one high seminary of learn_ing, where her
sons may drink freely, of those '.ountnrns _of trot~, of
wisdom and of virtue, so essential tf) their happrness
and pro'motive of her aggrandisement. _Why should
not th e pu re and elevating lessons of ph~l?sophy, the
profoun d recesses of science, the beaut~fu\ and cap tivating graces of Grecian and H.omart literature, be
as effectually incukated, explored, and un_folde? here,
as el sew here? The libel, that the ''gemu~ sickens,
and the fancy dies" in A 111erica, has long srnce been
ex ploded. The p1·oductions of our st~tesmeu, and our
orators, our poets, and_ our men of ~cience, arc b0rne
across the broad Atlantic, to be admired_, wond_ercd at,
and imitated, by those who taunted us rn our _infancy.
The profound argument, the deep discuss10n, th e
clear perc eption of the duties of gover~m_ent,. the
flashing wit, the withe:in_g sa:cnsm, the brilliant _ima•
gination, which have d1st111gu1shed our c~ngress10nal
debates, not only demonstr;lte that gemus does not
languish in America, b~t that she has f?und new
worshippers here, to krndle her _flames rnto a ret
brigh ter effulgence. Wl~at _Ame_rican does not i~el
h is bosom swell with patnot1c pn<le, when he hears
the p raises of her sons wafted back from tlie shores of
E urope? What has become now of th_c ~neer, '~w~o
:-ea<l s an American hook?" Where, w1tl~m the hnnts
of the wide world, are such accurate news of (?o·
vern ment ente rtained? Where so pure a morality
inculcated, and such rapid advances in ~II that ca~
adorn and elevate humanity, made, as m youth~ul
America. The nations of Europe, though c~nturies
pefore us in the order of time, :tre nearly distanced
�26
24
in the race of prosperity. In reforming their political constitutions, in tearing down the cumbrous ma~hi~er~ of remote ages, and substituting in their place,
I?stitutions better adapted to the progress of civilization. In ab0lishing complications which oppress, and
supplying simplicity which relieves; in destroying
de_spotism and establishing freedom, the example of
this west_ern Republic is exerting a mighty ard most
salutary influence. In all these important requisites
of human. happiness, the space between us and them,
can har~ly be measured by comparison. We are
young, vigorous and free, full of present e;njoyment
and radiant with hopes of the future. They old
f~eble, and enslaved, Jiving under institutions cr:1mb~
hog be~eath the hand ~f time, and heaving to their
foundat10ns under the billows of popular discontent.
Th_e same shores which received the pilgrim fathers,
flymg from shackles forged for their consciences, are
now t~e. refuge ~o~ the oppressed of every clime.
The victim of political m,urpation, he who is made to
contribute from his scanty means to support a church
whose creed carries no consolation to his bosom; th;
!over ~f freedom, and _the slave of tyranny; the starv1ng Irish, and the exiled Pole, all seek and find an
asyl?m on the shores of happy America. With these
motives to warm our hearts with gratitude towards
our creator, should we not strain every nerve tor the
fulfilment of his holy precepts? And why should not
on_e great Temple to learning be erected here on
~his spo~, associated as it is, with some of the :Uost
rnterestrng events in our history? 'Twas here the
father o[ his ~ountry resigned that sword, which had
waved m trrnmph over the fields, on which the batt~es of inde_pendence ha~ been fought. 'Twas here
he bade adieu to au~hor1ty, suppressing, if he ever
felt them, the promptrngs of ambition, and presenting
to the world a spectacle of sublimity, which never
has been eqq.alled, and never can b~ excelled.
If education is to be fostered in Maryland as its
importance demands, no location more favo.rable for
its cultivation could be selected than this. The
building now existing,_ and th~t in the course of con•
struction are seated m a plam of great extent and
unrivalled beauty. The climate of the place is un•
surpassed for salubrity, and whilst the moral co~taminntion incident to the vicinity of a large Town, 1s not
to be dreaded, the presence of the seat of Government
is full of advantages.
Every thing conspires to render St. John's a favo•
rite of the State. It was built up by the purchasers
of our freedom, whilst the storms of the revoluti~n,
were yet rocking the battlements of the Repuhhc.
It has enrolled among its alumni some of the brightest
ornaments of the nation, and continued its usefulness
to the last, though frowned.upon a~d discouraged ~y
the parent which cre~ted 1t. . It i~ endeared by its
origin; venerable for Its age; 11lustr1ous for the great
minds nurtured within it:i walls, and entitled to our
gratitude for yet striving to do good. Let us then
hope, as we do hope, that the days of its discouragement are past, and that from the walls now about to
rise, a race of virtuous and enlightened men may he
sent, who shall add new lustre to their country's glory,
until the bright star of the Republic shall scatter the
rays of liberty to the uttermost ends of the _Earth.
No maxim is more universally admitted than
that wealth and knowledge are mighty elements
of power. That nation which is possessed of these,
in the largest abundance, not onlyholds her own
liberties impregnable to the _assaults of o~hers, but
the fate of others is generally i!l her kee~rng._ Extensive territory, and a teeming popula~1~n if ~es•
titute of these resources, so far from givmg vigor
to a Government, invite aggression and encourage
rapacity. Points accessible to attack are generally
plUltiplied in proportion to territorial extent; and the
dangers of internal dissentiou are increased by the ex:4
�26
istence of a dei,se, if unenlightened, populatio
n. Iq
every nation spre ad over a large exte nt of
surface,
thr.re must, by the unalterable laws of natu
re, exis t
geographical distinctions, whic h wisdom and
patr iotism can alone appease. If these are wanting,
not only 'Yill actual diversities of inter est impel to
disunion,
~nd ensure weakqess, but inte rests only
seemingly
~onflicting, will be ia:flamed by the designin
g into irreconcilable differences. Wha t was it, but
the sound
good sense of thf' Ame rica n people, the love
of coun try and jts laws, which result from understan
ding thei r
~'Xce11ence, which saved these Unit ed Stat
es ftom
dismemberment, duri ng the rece nt violent
poli
~gitations. It was said, and no doubt believed, tical
by the
pe~ple_ of ~n imp~ rtan t division of the coun
try,
that
thei r r~ghts a~d mter ests were sacrificed
to enri ch
pthe r sections, less favored by natu re than them
selves.
The y were told that the bounties whic h Prov
iden ce
had showereq upon them with a prodigal libe
ralit y,
~ere wr~sted from thei r enjoyment by a
tyra nnic al
~ourse of legislation. Eve ry avenue by whic
h the
~urnan hear t can be appr oach ed, was assa
iled with
maddening an~ soul stirr ing appeals. The
ir
thei r interei:;ts, thei r feelings of Stat e prid e, honor,
the natural in~ignation of a gallant people at oppr
essio n,
~ere all m turn addr esse d by the eloquent
victims of
~ . fearful delus~~n. It is impossible to cont
emp late
with out shud deri ng, the consequences whic
h mig ht
have rei;µltetl fr~m th~se ~auses, if the peop
le of these
Unit ed Stat es haq not felt, and known, the
value of
pheir gove mme nt. The Halls of Congress
would in
vain hay~ rung wjth the eloquent voices of
our unfiV!U~d oratorll. Tpe ir warnings, thei r invo
cations,
the~r deep s~ga~ity, thei r solemn adjuratio
ns,
and
th!11' beseeching appeals, would have been
all, all in
yam, and the same fields on which Green
and How ~r.d had fought for thei r coun try's inde pend
pught have been crimsoned with American bloo ence ,
d shed
~y A~~ ri~a n han~s.
'
27
nd how is 1t that the English nation, for so
many
centuries, has maintained liel' ascendancy amo
ng !he
nations of Europe? Her terri tory and popu
lation
compared with many of them, ~ould, b~t
for othe r
causes plac e her far below them 1a the scale
of grea tness. 'The se causes are, her superior weal
th and
knowledge. By thei r means: s~e has not on!y
and maintained herself on a footing of equa pla~ed
lity, w1t.h
the most powerful of th_em all,_ but has been
~nal>le_d
to interpose her prot ectrn g reg1~, to sa~~ them
rn thei r
extr eme st danger. The warlike spm t of
~ran_ce,
blown into an intx ting uish able flame, by the whir
lwm d
of the Revolution, and guid ed and cont:entrated
by the
matchless genius of N~poleon, threatened the
world
with universal conquest. One _after a?~t
her,
nations of Euro pe yielded to his domuuon . ~he
. I he
Alps and the 1-yrene~s, presen~ed no _obstacle
to the
victorious march of his conquerrng leg10ns,
and deat h
and desolation follo\'Ved resistance to his will.
Italy ,
the seat of th~ once prou d mistress of t_he_
wo:l d,
Spain, unmindful of the glory which ?nee d1st1
~gmshed her atnong the nations, Aust:ia, Prus
~ia, a?d
Russia with theil· countlesg armies and
imperial
scep tr;s, had all quailed before the eagles of
invincible Fran ce. In this full care er of conquest,
however,
ther e was one spot to which thei r victorivus
pinions
could neve r reach, and that was the land of
our forefathers· that island anchored in the deep, who
se wealth
and whose knowledge bid defiance to thei
r flight.
Not only did she preserve_ her own sh?res,
unprofaned by a hostile foot, thougo ever y nat10n of
Euro pe,
at one time, was leagued for her overthro
w,. but
I?ersevered in the struggle, until the star ot
the victo r
pale d before her bann er, and "the arbitP.r
of othe rs'
fates, became a supp liant for his ?Wn." _And
thes e
mig hty efforts were made, and this sple~d1d
consummation accomplished, by the potent engrnes
of wealth
and knowledge, for ''no towers or bulwarks
along the
stee p," ever were deemed necessary to tht
safety of
England.
�28
Whilst however, the power which reswlts from
i!ea]th, ex_erts a treme~dous _influence upon the destmy of _nations, tha~ which arises from superior knowledge, .1~ far more hkely to ensure thei1· happiness and
tranquility. The acquisition of the former not un•
freq~ent1y brings with it, luxuries which vitiate the
pubhc morals, and vices that contaminate the ver)
sour~es of pub]i~ vir!ue; whilst the latter expels cor•
ruphon, where 1t existed before, and purifies, as with
:fire, the foulness which preceded it. In seeking
therefore,. to better our condition, to promote ou:
own happ~ness, and a~vance the power of the nation,
let us not !n the pursuf~ of riches:, overlook the paramount ~la1ms of ed~cation; but rather, let us be doubly desirous to acquire th~ latter, that the vast energies
of the former may be directed to better and holiel'
purposes.
SUBSCR iPTIONS MADS 1'0 THJ_,; FU N.U •
The subscription mentioned in the prefatory re•
marks, was made in three, equal, annual, instalments.
It wa·s carried through the several counties on the
Western Shore. and the amount obtained, was· ten
thousand pounds.
In 1821 , at a meeting of the Alumni, in the Senate Chamber, at Annapolis, a plan of subscription
was drawn up, a condition being inserted that the
whole should be void, unless the sum of ten thousand
dollars should be obtained. Severa\ names were
subscribed upon the spot, but no agent was appointed;
the requisite sum was not obtained, and the subscrip•
tion paper has been lost. The only record of it t~at
remains, is the payment of the following sum, which
was discharged by the donor, though not required to
do so by the terms~
8200.
Isaac McKim,
for the
plan
a
exhibit
s
The following resolution
in the
now
and
1834,
in
same object, undertake n
courie of prosecution.
Resolved, by the Visitors and Governors of St.
John's College, that the Principal be authorised and
requested to collect subscriptions, payable to the
Visitors and Governors, to be applied by them, in the
erection of suitable buildings, for the accommodation
of students, and for improving and extending the
Library and Philosophical Apparatus of the College,
and that the Treasure r be authorised to pay to the
Prinitipal, the expenses he may incur, in carrying
,to effect this resolution.
Resolved, by the Visitors and Governors of St;
John's College, that the Governor of this State, His
Excellency JAMES THoMAs, and the Hon. BENJAMIN
S. FoRREST, and the Hon. THOMAS WRIGHT, 3d.
�31
members of this Board, be a committee to co-operate·
with the Principal, in making all suitable preparations
to carry into effect the resolution of the Board, to
coUect subscriptions for the benefit of this institution:
St. John's College, Feb. 15th, 1834.
COPY OF THE SUBSCRIPTIO N.
We, the subscribers, hereby agree to pay to the
Visitors and Governors of St. John's College, at Annapolis, Maryland, or order, th'e sums of money opposite our names, respectively, in two equal instalments,
to be applied in carrying into effect the foregoing
resolutions: provided, however, that this subscription
shall be void, unless at least ten thousand dollars shall
be subscribed, as aforesaid; and on the completion o{
said subscription, the first instalment above mentioned, shall become due, and the other instalment,
twelve months thereafter.
Sept. 9, 1834.
James Thomas;
William Hughlett;
Robe1·t W. Bowie,
Wm. H. Marriott,
~lexancler C. Magruder,
Henry Maynadier,
H. H. Harwood,
George Mackubin,
Dennis Claude,
Ramsay Waters,
John Johnson,
Nicholas Brewer, Jr.
Alexander Randall,
Thomas S. Alexander,
George "\\'ells,
Brice J. Worthington,
Richard Harwood, of Thos.
Richard I. Jones,
Thomas Oliver,
J. I. Cohen, Jr.
Walter Farnandis,
$500 '
300
.250
250 •·
200
200'
200
200
20()
.200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
lbO
Hector Humphreys,
Robert W. Kent,
Dauiel Clarke,
Gabriel Duvall,
Fielder Cross,
William D. Bowie,
John H. Sothoron,
William Reeder,
Robert Ghiselin,
Samuel Mayn11rd,
Thomas Franklin,
R. M. Chase,
Thomas S. Culbreth,
Hyde Ray,
James Iglehart,
Swann ~ Iglehart,
George F. Worthington,
George G. B~ewer,
John B. Moms,
Andrew McLaughlin,
IJ.'homas B. Dorsey,
William G. Tilghman,
Charles Goldsborough,
John C. Henry,
Joseph E. Muse,
Henry Page,
G. C. Washington,
Benjamin S. Forrest,
J. Nevitt Steele,
Allen Thomas,
Charles W. Dorsey,
R. G. Stockett,
R. W. Dorsey,
Larkin Dorsey,
John C. Weems,
Chas. S. W. Dorsey,
Daniel !v.l urray,
John H. Alexander,
Gwinn Harris,
N. F. Williams,
'!'homas Sappington,
Thomas Snowden,
George Brown,
F. S. Key,
$100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
JOO
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
llJO
100
JOO
JOO
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
�82
v·rga Maxcy,
Joseph Todhunte r
Thos. H. Carroll, ,
.Jonathan Ellicott & Sons,
Francis Thomas,
John S. Sellman,
Robert H. Goldsborough
E. 8. Winder,
'
Andrew Skinner
J:is. B. Steele '
Brice J. Gold;borough
Thomas Hayward
'
William W. Eccle~ton
Chas. J. Kilgour,
'
J. H. W ilkiuson
'l'humas E. Sudl~r
J. Hughes,
'
R. I. Cowman,
John Randall,
George McNeir
Basil Shephard ,,
R..J. Crabb,
Thomas Duckett,
Jo~n. H. Waring,
W Ilham Ghiselin
J. G. Chapman, '
Leonard Iglehart,
Wm. D. Merrick,
Charles H. Steele
Wm. T. Goldsbo:ough
H. W. Evans,
'
Nathan R. Smith
Daniel Randall 2
James Wilson '
David Baruum'
James Carroll J'
Wm. Denny,
R. Potts,
John Tyler,
Benry K, Randall
Thomas J. Dorse'tt
John Iglehart,
,
A~n Iglehart,
ft1chard Marriott,
33
$100
100
100
100
100
100
50
bO
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
pO
50
60
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
The names of future subscribers will be embraced
in the next Annual Report of the College, to the
Legislature, It is proposed to collect at least thirty
thousand dollars, for the above objects. The present
buildings, when completed, will be insufficient for
the purposes of the College. The old building contains all the necessary public rooms for such an establishment, being 80 feet in length, by 60 feet in
width, and three stories high, above the basement.
But a separate building is required, for the exclusive
accommodation of the GRAMMA R ScnooL. And,
should the number of students increase, according to
present prospects, a third CoLLEGE EDIFICE will
J)ecome necessary, at no distant period.
tiO
50
s
�BOA RD OF VISI TOR S AND GOV ERN
O,!IS
OF
ST. JOH N'S CO LLE GE .
His Excellency JAME S THOM AS, ex-officio Presid
ent.
Hon.
,, JOHN BUCHANAN.
JOHN STEP HEN .
" STEV ENSO N ARCH ER.
" THOMAS B. DORSEY.
" EZEK IEL F. CHAM BERS .
" C. ASA SPEN CE.
" THEODORIC IlLAND.
" JOHN G. CHAPMAN.
" WILLIAM J . .BLAKISTONE.
" JOSE PH KEN T.
" RO.BERT W. BOW IE.
ALEX AND ER C. MAG RUD ER, Esq.
SAM UEL RIDOUT, Esq.
JAME S .BOYLE, Esq.
NICHOLAS BREW ER, Esq.
HEN RY MAY NAD IER, Esq.
WILL IAM H. MAR RIOT T, Esq.
THO. MASH . CARROLL, Esq.
THOMAS S. ALEX AND ER, Esq.
JOHN N. WAT KINS , Esq.
THO.MAS FRAN KLIN , Esq.
RAM SAY WAT ERS, Esq.
DR. DENN IS CLAU DE, Esq.
NICHOLAS BREW ER, JR. Eiq.
JERE MIAH HUG HES, Esq.
GIDEON WHI TE, Esq.
ALEX AND ER RAN DALL , Esq.
JOSE PH H. NICHOLSON, Esq.
JOHN JOHNSON, Esq.
TRE ASU RER ,
GEOR GE ~1ACKUBIN, Esq.
SECR ETAR Y.
GEOR GE WELLS, E;11.
FA CU LT Y.
Rev. HEC TOR HUMPHREYS, D. D.,
PRESIDENT AND PROFESSOR OF MORAL SCIEN
CE.
JULIUS T. DUCATEL, M. D.,
PROFE SSOR OF CHEM ISTRY , JIIINER
ALOGY , AND GEOLO GY.
EDW ARD SP ARKS, 1\1. D.,
PROFE SSOR OF .ANCIE NT LANGU AGES,
THOMAS E. SUDLER, A. .M.,
:ilRO.F.ESiOR OF IIIATH EMAT ICS AND
CIVIL ESGIN EERfl' \'O.
WILLIAM B. LEAR Y, A. M.,
PROFE SSOR OF GRAlll MAR.
CHA RLES T. FLUSSER, Esq.,
PROFE SSOR OF .l\ICIDE RN LANG UAGE
S.
�37
JUNIO R CLASS
RESIDEN CE,
NAMES,
CATAL OGUE OF THE STUDE N1'S
OF
ST. JOHN 'S COLL EGE.
1835.
•
George B. Dunkel,
John Buchanan Hall,
John W. Martin,
Joseph Trapnell,
Trueman Tyler,
•
CLASS GRADUATED, FEBRUARY 21st, 1835.
NAlllES.
RESIDEN CE,
THOMAS HOLME HAGNER, A. B.
ABRAM CLAUDE, A. B.
EDWIN BOYLE, A. B.
RICH.A.RD SMtTH CULBRETH, A. B.
RICHARD CREAGH MACKUBIN, A. B.
RICHARD WEEMS, English Diploma,
Washington City.
.llnnapolis.
.llnnapolis,
Caroline County.
.llnnapolis.
.llnne Jlrundel Co,
•
SENIO R CLASS .
NAlllES.
Thomas Granger,
George Grundy ,
William R. Hayward,
Joshua D. Johnson
George F. Johnson',
George Edward Musa,
William I. Reder
John H. Reeder '
' .
Henry W. Thomas
Franklin Weems
' gton,
Nicholas B. Worthin
St. J\fary's County,
Charles County.
Baltimore City.
Washington County.
Cambridge,
Frederick.
Prince George's County .
John M. Bt·ome,
Frederic k S. Brown,
SOPHO MORE CLASS .
RESIDEN CE.
NAMES,
William Tell Claude,
Marius Duvall,
Jlnnapolis.
Do
lJavid Edgar,
Thomas Iglehart,
Charles N. Mackuhin,
Jlnne Jlrimdel Comity.
Baltimore City.
.flnnapolis.
Do
Baltimore County.
William C. Thompson,
Edward Worthington,
•
RESIDEN CE.
FRESH MAN CLASS.
Queen .llnne's County.
Baltimo re City.
Cambri.dge
Frederick.
.fl,mapolis,
Cambridge.
Baltimore City.
no
St. Mctry's County.
Ellcridge.
.llnne .flrundel County,
NAMJ,:S,
RESIDEN CE.
.llrmapolis.
John M. Brewer,
Do
Philip Culbreth,
.
Elkridge
Cale Iii Dorsey,
Do
"William H. G. Dorsey,
Do
John Thomas B. Dor11ey,
.llnnapolis.
John W. Duval!,
Calt•ert County.
Thomas C. Gantt,
Somerset County.
Benjamin Gray,
�38
39
Reverdy Ghisclin,
Jeremiah L. Hughes,
Richard II ughl ett,
Thomas R. Kent,
Absa'om Ridgely,
William C, Tuck,
Prince George's County.
.!lrmapolis.
Talbot County.
.!Jnne .!lrnndel County,
.linnapolis,
Brice J. Worthington,
.!lnne .llrundel County.
Do
B. Thos. B. W orthin 0o-ton.
D<J
•
PARTIAL STUDENTS.
NAMES,
R E SIDE N CE.
WiJli11m R. Goodman
Edwin E. Pratt,
.llnnapolis.
Queen Jlnne's County.
.llnne .llrundet County,
'
Samuel Ridout,
•
STUDENTS
IN THE
NAJIIES.
GRAMMAR SCHOOL.
RESIDENCE,
George Barrott,
John Basil,
Robert Bowie,
Lewellin Boyle,
Jeremiah T. Chase
J0hn Clayton,
1-lenry Duvall,
'
Richard R. Gaither ,
Alexander H. Gambrill
Benjamin H. Hall,
Dennis D. Hart
Benjamin Harwood,
George S. Ilumphrevs,
John T. E. Hyde,
'
Washingto,1 City.
Jlnnapolis.
Prince George's County,
.linnapc,l is.
Do
Do
Do
Do
Do
Jlnne .lirundel County.
.!lnnapolis.
Jlnne .lirundtl Count y,
.IJ,mcipolis .
Do
Edward G, Maynard,
Walter McNeir,
George McNeir,
Amiapolis.
Do
Nicholas Holland,
James McNeir,
Washington City.
Annapolis,
George Miller,
Edward C. Mills,
Thomas McParlin,
Henry M. Murray,
Horatio S. Ridout,
Samuel Ricrout,
Richard Ridgely,
Allred G. Ridgely,
William Ridgely,
Richard H. Schwarar,
Francis H. Stockett,
John T. Taylor,
;)ennis C. Thompson,
James C Welch,
Do
Do
Jlnne .flrundel County.
Jlnnapol is.
Do
Jlnne Jlrundel County,
Jlnnapolis.
Do
Do
Do
Do
Anne .llrundel County.
.finnapolis.
Do
Levin Winder,
James M. Winder,
Charles F. Worthington,
Do
Easton.
Do
.finne .11.rundel County;
Nathan Moore,
John G, Gamble,
Baltimore City.
Weelaunee, Florida.
~dam Smith,
Allan Quynn,
Baltimore City.
.finnapolis.
�41
SOPHOMORE CLA.SS.
FIRST TERM,
f0.URSE ~F STUDIES, EXPENSBS, &c!
Juvenal, ( Leverett's.)
Homer'& Iii ad, (Robinson's.}
Plane Geometry, (Legendre's.)
SECOND TERM,
Pl:tEPARATORY STU;DIES, VIZ:
;English G:rammar; Geography; Arithmetick; Latin Gram'Q
~ar; C?rderms~ lEsop's Fables; Eras ,, us; C~sar's Com~
men~anes, '!r _Sallu~t; Eclogues, and first six books of th~
1En_e1d, of V1rg1l; Cicero's Orations; Mair's Introduction, or
L aun Tutor; Greek Grammar; Greek Delectus; and Jacob's
Greek Reader, and Prosody.
•
Pupils not intending to enter College will als b
• t
h E 1· h '
,
o e rece1v•
e d m o t e , ng 1~ Departm~nt, and will pursue such
·t
~ranches of Education, embraced in the course as
Jheir particular views.
' ' iµay sui
Cicero de Oratore, or Quintilian.
Grreca Majora, (Odyssey and Hesiod.)
Solid Geometry, (Legendre's.)
THIRD TERM.
Rhetorick and Belles Lettres.-(Whateley.)
Grreca Majora.-(Tragedians.)
Logarithms; Plane and Spherical Trigonometry:
Exercises in original Compositidn and Elocution, during
the year.
•
JUNIOR CLASS.
P O ~ L E G I ~ 'I' E
COU R s E .
FRESHMAN CLAS$. ·
FIRST .T ERM.
,olsom's Livy.
Prreca Majora-(Xenophon Herodotus Thucyd' d J
preek and Roman 'Antiquiti;s, History, ~nd Myth~l!;y.
SECOND TERM.
1Jorace, (~des.) 'firgil's Georgicks.
1rreca MaJ?ra, (Lysias, Demosthenes Isocrates )
_ gebra, with Arithmetic revised.
'
• •
FIRST TERM,
Grreca Majora. (Minor Poets.)
Applications of Trigonometry to the Mensuration of Heights
. and Distances, Navigation, Surveying, Levelling, 4-'c.
Moral Philosophy.
Abercrombie's Intellectual Powers.
SECOND TERM ,
Tacitus.-(History.)
Conick Sections.
Chemistry, with Lectures. (Turner's.)
G
,
A
TH!RD TEJ.UI.
Hora~,,, (Satires and Epistles.)
GAlrreca ~ajora, (Xenophon's Memorabilia Plato )
gebra completed.
'
•
raus!at!ons, Them~s, and Declamations du~ing the y~ar,.
'f
THIRD TERM.
Tacitus-(Manners of the Germans, and Life of Agricola.)
Natural Philosophy, with Lectures. (Olmsted's:)
Elements of Criticism, with Lectures on the Frne Arts.. (Karnes')
Debates, Compositions, and Declamations, during the year•
6
�42
43
SENIOR CLASS.
EXPENSE S.
FIRST TERM.
Natural l?hilosophy, finished, with Lectures. (Olmsted's.)
Horace, De Arte Poetica; with Lecturns on Taste, and a
Revision of Latin.
J,qgic, and Philosophy of the Mind. (Whateley's.)
SECOND TERM.
Astronomy-wi th Lectures. (Cambridge.)
Political Economy-with Lectures. (Say's.)
~vidences of Christianity and Natural Theology. (Paley's.)
THIRD TERM.
Laws of Natwns-Consti tution, and Civil and PDlitical
History ot the United States. (Kent.)
Butter's Analogy.
Civil Engineering-(c onstruction of Machines, Bridges,
Roads, Canals, &c.)
Mineralogy and Geology. (Shepard's.)
))ec:amat1ons of Original Pieces, Extemporaneou s Debates,
• and Exercises in Criticism, during the year.
The study of the Modern Languages, shall be so arranged
~snot materially to interfere with the College course.
The officers of instruction, will endeavor to make the
horough as possible; and in no case will
course of study as t_
a Scholar be allowed to pass, to an advanced standin"', till
he _shall _have sustained all the previous examinations, to the
~atisfasllon of the Faculty.
Full Courses of Lectures are delivered to th€' classes on
(;hemistry, Mineralogy and Geology, and on Natural Philosophy and Astronomy.
. The State Cabinet of Minerals, collected by the Geolo~
gist of Mary Ian~, is deposited in the College, anJ may be
us~d, together with the College Cabinet, which ot !!self is
quite respectable, in illustrating the Lectures on Miner.1logy
~nd ~eology.
The College Bills are payable quarterly, in advance, as
ol lows, viz:
$24 per annum.
English Department,
do.
40 do.
Preparatory Classes,
do.
Freshman and Sophomore Classes, 40 do,
do.
50 do.
Senior and Junior Classes,
The above Bills include all extras.
No Commons are established; but board may be had in
.
private families, for $120 per annum.
Parents and Guardians are requested to place all momes
intended for the use of the students, in the hand~ of ~ne ?f
th p ofessors who will exercise a parental discret10n, 10
th:ir ~isburse~1ent; and lhe following ~aw o~ the ~late,
passed December session, 1834, is published for the rntor•
mation of all persons concerned.
Section 1. Be it enacted by the General .lissembly of .Jl,faryland, That no person or persobn~ shall ~'!Ve cre?htt tot atnhy
e
Student of St. John's College, emg a mrn~r, wit ou
consent, in writing, of his Parent or Guarclian, or ?f such
Officer or Officers of the College, as may be authorised by
the government thereof, to act in such cases, except for
.
,,
washing or medical aid,
Sec. 2. .find be it enacted, I hat if any_ person or person$
shall give credit to any minor as afotesa1d, c~ntrary to the
provisions of this act, he or they shall fo~fe1t and pay to
the Treasurer of the H' estern Shore of this State, a sum
not Jess than tv,enty, nor more than three hundre~ doll~rs,
according to the nature of the offence, and at tl!e d1scret1on
of the Court of Anoe Arundel Countr, which may be
recovered in any proper nction, before said Court.
Sec. 3. .!lnd be it enacted, That it s~all be the duty of
the Attorney General of this State, or _his Deputy, on the
complaint of any of the Officers aforesaid, to prosecute for
all violations of this act.
���
Dublin Core
The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/.
Title
A name given to the resource
Speeches, presentations, and other lectures
Description
An account of the resource
Speeches, presentations, and other lectures given at St. John's College. These include convocation addresses delivered in both Annapolis, MD and Santa Fe, NM.<br /><br />Click on <strong><a title="Speeches, presentations, and other lectures" href="http://digitalarchives.sjc.edu/items/browse?collection=15">Items in the Speeches, presentations, and other lectures Collection</a></strong> to <span>view and sort all items in the collection.</span>
Contributor
An entity responsible for making contributions to the resource
St. John's College Greenfield Library
Identifier
An unambiguous reference to the resource within a given context
speechespresentationsotherlectures
Text
A resource consisting primarily of words for reading. Examples include books, letters, dissertations, poems, newspapers, articles, archives of mailing lists. Note that facsimiles or images of texts are still of the genre Text.
Dublin Core
The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/.
Title
A name given to the resource
An Account of the Ceremony of Laying the Corner Stone of the New Building, at St. John's College, Performed by the Hon. John Stephen, Judge of the Court of Appeals, with an Address Delivered on the Occasion, by John Johnson, Esq., One of the Visitors and Governors, June 18th, 1835, with a Historical Notice of the Institution, a Catalogue of the Officers and Students, and a Copy of the Subscriptions Made to the Funds
Description
An account of the resource
An Account of the Ceremony of Laying the Corner Stone of the New Building, at St. John's College, Performed by the Hon. John Stephen, Judge of the Court of Appeals, with an Address Delivered on the Occasion, by John Johnson, Esq., One of the Visitors and Governors, June 18th, 1835, with a Historical Notice of the Institution, a Catalogue of the Officers and Students, and a Copy of the Subscriptions Made to the Funds. The pamphlet was published by the Board of Trustees and printed by Jeremiah Hughes.
Creator
An entity primarily responsible for making the resource
St. John's College (Annapolis, Md.)
Publisher
An entity responsible for making the resource available
St. John's College (Annapolis, Md.)
Coverage
The spatial or temporal topic of the resource, the spatial applicability of the resource, or the jurisdiction under which the resource is relevant
Annapolis, MD
Date
A point or period of time associated with an event in the lifecycle of the resource
1835
Rights
Information about rights held in and over the resource
St. John's College owns the rights to this publication.
Type
The nature or genre of the resource
text
Format
The file format, physical medium, or dimensions of the resource
pdf
Subject
The topic of the resource
Cornerstone laying
College trustees
College students
Language
A language of the resource
English
Identifier
An unambiguous reference to the resource within a given context
LD_4811_A249_S14
Contributor
An entity responsible for making contributions to the resource
Stephen, John, -1844
Johnson, John, 1798-1856
Humphreys Hall
-
https://s3.us-east-1.amazonaws.com/sjcdigitalarchives/original/04be00ccb2c249ddf71040dad58d2320.pdf
6326f830d605aa03fd1d5b7fafddb5e5
PDF Text
Text
Being a Book
I
A book is a small, hard, rectangular object, whose pages are bound
along one edge into fixed covers and numbered consecutively.
This description of a book is not mine. I borrow it from a lecture by tutor Eva
Brann, who borrowed it from an essay by the novelist Paul Scott, who borrowed
it from a talk on the BBC.1
It is better borrowed, I think, than improved upon, at least in clarity. Once
Scott is done with it, this hard rectangular object has become “a canvass that
doesn’t exist.” In other words, “a formless, almost indefinable area of consciousness.” In still other words, “the area of contact for the meeting of minds, the
clash, the confrontation of wills and visions, and of physical and intellectual impressions of reality—the writer’s and the reader’s.”2 Miss Brann is briefer but no
less extravagant about the book’s metamorphosis. In her words it becomes “a
special kind of body made to be inhabited by a curious kind of frozen but fusible
soul, a body fit to mediate its own peculiar life.”3
I will not attempt my own metaphysics of a book tonight. But I do want
to ask why a book admits of metaphysics, and perhaps even requires it. What
makes the being of a book elusive when the book itself is so easy to grasp? We
can pull one off a shelf, as if it belonged to the furniture of the world; yet when
we open it up and begin to read we are carried somewhere else, as if the book
were otherworldly. In one sense it may have remained a small, hard, rectangular
object, with pages bound into covers and numbered consecutively. But all this
has vanished in another sense. And what has taken its place, as the book being
held is now being read, is difficult to describe.
Nor is this the only difficulty. Consider what becomes of the book being read
if read, say, for seminar. Just before the seminar begins there seem to be many
books on the table. Yet once the opening question is asked it is as if there is only
1
Scott’s borrowing of the description appears in “The Architecture of the Arts: The Novel
(1967)” in My Appointment with the Muse: Essays, 1961–75, ed. Shelly C. Reese (Heinemann: London, 1986), 78. Scott credits the description to Bernard Bergonzi. Brann’s borrowing appears in
“What is a Book?” St. John’s Review XLI, no. 1 (1991–2): 78. (Note: the Review sources this to a
lecture given in September 1991, but a reprint of the lecture itself dates it August 30 of that year.)
A version of it is also currently available on the website of the Imaginative Conservative.
2
Scott, 80
3
Brann, 88.
1
�one book on the table. And in the conversation that follows, with a movement
of its own that yet involves the text, perhaps the very idea of a book on the table
is best given up. But given up for what? What happens to a book at this college
every Monday and Thursday night?
Behind this question I have both a hunch and a hypothesis. The hunch is that
St. John’s is less committed to books, even the greatest books, than to the being
of a book—any book. Put a different way: there is no Canon of Great Books at the
College that we read each in turn; there is only the book in front of us, whatever
it may be and wherever it may lead. I will come back to this hunch later in the
lecture. But I begin with the hypothesis: The being of a book becomes elusive
once the book contains words and in some sense is composed of them.
I say “in some sense” because how words compose a book will become the
question of the lecture. But that there are words in a book at all seems already a
source of elusiveness. If we could erase its words, making the book blank, then it
might be but a kind of rectangle. We could count the number of books in seminar
the way we might count the number of chairs and leave it at that. The trouble
starts when the words go unerased: the book’s pages left full of print, giving a
reader something to do. Even the words on its cover, announcing the title and
author, are enough to complicate what a book is. No longer just a book, it is now
the copy of a book, in something like the way the chairs in seminar are copies of
a model. We are all sitting in a Johnnie chair, with Homer’s Iliad in front of us,
even before the opening question is asked.
Yet it would seem strange to say we were all sitting in the same Johnnie chair,
as if there were only one chair in the room. So why is it not so strange to say we
all have Homer’s Iliad in front of us, as if there were only one book in the room?
Especially once the opening question is asked and more words from inside the
book are read out loud? The answer, again, seems to be the words, making one
book out of every copy in the room. And at least this much happens to a book
every seminar night: a rectangle made of pages becomes a more elusive thing
made of words.
II
How elusive is exemplified by the Iliad. Once upon a time the work existed
only in song, and was first written down not in pages but on a scroll. In ironic
recollection of this perhaps some of us prepared for seminar using an e-book or
audiobook on the sly, getting through the work without turning a single actual
page.
2
�Then there is the question of translation. All of us, even tutors, likely read the
Iliad for seminar in translation. The copies in the seminar room are mostly translations, each made of its own words throughout. In one the Iliad begins: “Sing,
goddess, the anger of Peleus’ son Achilleus and its devastation. . . .” In another:
“Rage—Goddess, sing the rage of Peleus’ son Achilles, murderous, doomed. . . .” In
still another: “Goddess, sing of the cataclysmic wrath of Peleus’ son Achilles. . . .”4
These three beginnings, three of many, proceed word-by-word to their respective
ends; yet they are all taken up in our conversation about the Iliad as if they were
the Iliad. But what in that case is the Iliad? Or any book in translation? It
would seem to be certain words in a certain order, without having to be only
these words in this order. The same book might be made of different words in a
different order. But how? How can a book be made of words in more than one
way?
Perhaps we should insist, against this question, that translations of a book
are merely translations. They are translations, that is, of some original text, composed of those words in that order. The first word of Homer’s Iliad, then, is not
“sing” or “rage” or “Goddess,” nor indeed any word in English, no matter how
well-chosen. The first word is μῆνιν, as we learn soon enough in the language
tutorial. We also likely learn how some translations of a text are more literal than
others—translations that sound like translations—and even learn to prefer them
when the language of the original is out of reach. A good translation puts the
original in reach, which is a different thing from replacing it. And translations,
then, can be made of words in many ways, but the original only in one.
Even so, is this original what we mean, what we ought to mean, by the book?
Or can a book still exist, and even thrive, in translation? The question put this
way can sound almost rhetorical, as if books flourished in translation as a matter
of course—across our Program’s reading list. Where would we be if the translation of a book could never become the book? And in calling it a “translation”
we distinguish it not simply from some original text, but from any paraphrase
of that text. We distinguish it, that is, from any series of words merely about
the text. The series we deem a translation, even if it differs from the text, has
somehow become the text. Or at least become as close to the text, as joined to
the text, as “at one” with the text, as words that differ from the text allow.
In translations, then, we confront just how elusive the being of a book can be.
We also encounter one way—to recall my hunch—that St. John’s is committed to
4
The first is from the Lattimore translation, the second from the Fagles, and the third from
the recent Emily Wilson translation.
3
�this being, in its commitment to translations as books. Our copy of the Iliad can
have the name of a translator on its cover; yet the author, we believe, remains
Homer. The word “μῆνιν” can be replaced by “sing”; yet the book, we believe, is
still Homer’s Iliad rather than becoming Lattimore’s. A book, so our Program
claims, can be made of words in many ways, even if first made in one.
The word “first” in this formulation could also be questioned if we take a
different view of good translations. On this view, translations should not sound
like translations, lest they put the original forever out of reach. For the original
presumably sounds original. Not that we could know what words in what order
would compose the Iliad, say, in English, if this were Homer’s native tongue. But
we could guess, I think, that this Iliad would not sound like a literal translation
from the Greek. And this suggests that good translations sound original. If so,
then it seems a book can be made of words in many ways, where every such way
is like the first.
III
Yet even this much elusiveness in a book can seem a special matter of translation.
Consider the seminar night in several weeks, just after spring vacation, when
juniors will walk in the room and put their copies of Jane Austen on the table.
It is a truth universally acknowledged that a single man in possession of a good fortune must be in want of a wife.
These words in this order will begin the book in every copy, followed by the same
words in the same order until the end. What could be elusive about that? The
pagination might differ from copy to copy, but there seems nothing to trouble us
in the words. And the words are enough to make every copy identical. In this
case, where none of the copies are translations, it seems that a book is made of
words in only one way.
But I think we can question even this. We can ask how a book is made of
words even in one way, given something that just happened in my lecture. I
quoted the first sentence of Pride and Prejudice. The quotation, too, is made of
those words in that order. So what is the one way the sentence in the book
is made of them? Or if this sentence depends on the rest of the book, let the
quotation be as long as the book, made of all those words in just that order. What
is the one way the book is made of them, to distinguish it from its quotation?
Why is a quotation of the book not the book?
4
�There are two reasons, I think, to consider this question more significant
than it might seem at first. One harks back to my hunch about St. John’s, and
its commitment to the being of a book. The commitment, in this context, is to
the way that any book escapes its own quotation. For where would we be if the
quotation of a book could ever become the book? For us, the difference between
unquoted words and quoted ones is the difference between the texts we read and
the texts we don’t. In the latter texts—call them secondary texts—the books we
might read are merely quoted. So read them we do, to see for ourselves what
they say. For us, therefore, the quotation of a book is definitively not the book.
Yet why this is so is also hard to say—a second reason to think the question
significant. The question even becomes paradoxical if we frame it in light of our
commitment to books in translation. For what is it about a book that allows it
to become its translation but never its quotation? What prevents the book from
being made of the same words in the same order, if it can be made of different
words in a different order?
To make this question easier on myself, I revert to the form it took at first:
why is a quotation of the book not the book? Even in this form I find the question
hard to answer; I make three attempts in the rest of this lecture before giving up.
Attempt number one. A quotation of the book is not the book because the words
in the quotation are borrowed from the book, while the words of the book belong
to it. So much do they belong that if words are taken from the book without
quotation we consider it an act of theft. This is another way we credit the book
with being original: a source for the quotation like the source for any translation.
Yet unlike translations, and the way they can seem original, quotations seem
derivative. Quotation marks announce as much, as do the other ways we have—
like indentation—to frame the quotation as derivative. Erase the frame and let
the words go unquoted; it is now as if we have a copy of the text itself. And
perhaps in this we find the one way a book is made of its words. The words can
go unquoted in the book because they are original to the book. They have their
origin in the book. They come from the book.
But something in this answer has gone awry. For how can words come from a
book if it is made of them, and therefore comes from them? The words in a book
must come from somewhere else if the book is to be made at all. And in one
respect this somewhere else is prosaic. A book is made of words that separately
come from the dictionary and together from the rules of grammar. In another
5
�respect—at least for books that transcend the prosaic—the somewhere else is a
mystery. If we believe the first line of the Iliad, the words in such books come
from a goddess—and only after pleading. Even the greatest book has to beg for
its words when none are good enough to borrow or steal. To seem original is to
be inspired.
And while it might take a muse to write such a book, to print the book only
takes a typesetter. The somewhere else in this direction is less a mystery and
more a certainty. A series of words becomes a sequence of symbols: the letters
of the alphabet and a handful of punctuation marks. What is possible in a book
is thus reduced from something uncountable in words to thirty symbols or so.
And this reduction effectively determines what the book can be in advance. If
we count the symbols, assigning to each a different number, we have a way of
counting their sequence in the book; and can translate the book into a number.
There is no printable book that is not, in this sense, already a number. And one
of them is a copy of Pride and Prejudice. So while in another direction its words
come from who knows where, in this direction its words come from a counting
number. There is nothing original left for the book to be, despite how it seems.
But what then explains how it seems? The quotation of a book still looks
made of borrowed words and the book made of words that belong. And this
sense of belonging, again, is especially strong at St. John’s. Let the words in all
our books come from somewhere else; they still go into the books unquoted, as if
there the words had found their home, and could only pay visits to other books
in quotation. In this sense, we might say that the quotation of a book always
belongs to a different book. But why? Or again: what makes the quotation of a
book not the book?
Here is my second attempt to answer the question. If we read a book to see
for ourselves what it says, perhaps what it says can never be quoted. There is
another use of quotation to suggest as much. To begin with a simple example,
compare the following sentences:
1. Annapolis is the capital of Maryland.
2. Annapolis is nine letters long.
In the second sentence, a copy-editor would want me to put quotation marks
around “Annapolis,”
2. “Annapolis” is nine letters long,
6
�to distinguish the name of the city, which is nine letters long, from the city, which
is not nine letters long. But quoting a word, in that case, is not a way of saying
the word; it is rather a way to speak of the word.
This use of quotation is not limited to single words. We can, for example, put
all the words from the first sentence between quotation marks,
“Annapolis is the capital of Maryland”
and now speak of the sentence rather than say it. Since the sentence is six words
long, we can say that of it:
3. “Annapolis is the capital of Maryland” is six words long.
Or in a less contrived example, I might speak of the sentence as something that
amused me when I heard one of my daughters say it:
4. “Annapolis is the capital of Maryland,” my five-year old explained, as if she
were a tour-guide during our walk downtown.
Or to move from the invented to the actual in a last example, consider the first
use of quotation in Pride and Prejudice:
5. “My dear Mr. Bennet,” said his lady to him one day, “have you heard that
Netherfield Park is let at last?”
Mr. Bennet replied that he had not.
Austen quotes the question but not the reply, artfully turning the reply into a
kind of comment on the question, leaving the impression of a knowing husband
and unknowing wife.
None of these examples involves the quotation of one text in another text, but
the abstraction from speech in textual quotation is arguably the same. The quoted
words are never said, only spoken of. Perhaps the clearest example of the effect
at St. John’s is in a seminar paper too full of quotations. The quoted passages
start to look like filler, saying nothing, even when the unquoted passages are
central to the book, saying everything. Another example of the effect is in the
typical Friday Night lecture that includes quotations. It is tempting to put the
quotations on a handout, or even on a screen—as if a quotation were meant to
be seen rather than said.
In light of this account, we can revisit Pride and Prejudice and distinguish the
book from its quotation definitively. Consider the first sentence again.
7
�It is a truth universally acknowledged that a single man in possession of a good fortune must be in want of a wife.
In the book, those words in that order are not just a sentence but an utterance.
In quotation, however, the sentence is separated from the utterance, allowing
us to carry the sentence out of the book. There is no difference, then, between
quoting the first sentence and calling it the first sentence: in neither case is the
sentence said; it is only spoken of. Similarly, there is no difference between
quoting every sentence in the book and calling the book by its title: the title is
another way, if briefer way, to speak of every sentence in turn. Only in the book
is every sentence in turn not spoken of but said, in an act of narration rather than
quotation.
We can generalize this difference to encompass any book. The quotation of
a book is not the book in the same way the title of a book is not the book. In
both, the book has yet to speak. This is why we have to read the book to see
what it says. This is also why a book can become its translation but never its
quotation. The one way a book is made of its words is in being made of words
that can speak. These might become different words that can speak—the goal of
any good translation—but quotation renders the words speechless.
Yet something in this answer too has gone awry. For one thing, it is hard not
to read quoted words as spoken words, especially in a narrative like the novel.
Consider again the first use of quotation from Pride and Prejudice, but lengthened
to include the quoted words of Mr. Bennet—as if he were finally forced to speak
in reply to his importunate wife:
“My dear Mr. Bennet,” said his lady to him one day, “have you heard
that Netherfield Park is let at last?”
Mr. Bennet replied that he had not.
“But it is,” returned she; “for Mrs. Long has just been here, and she
told me all about it.”
Mr. Bennet made no answer.
“Do not you want to know who has taken it?” cried his wife, impatiently.
“You want to tell me, and I have no objection to hearing it.”
This was invitation enough.
Not only do the quoted words seem to speak, they seem to speak in the voices of
Mr. and Mrs. Bennet. It is as if quotation made speech possible in a written text.
8
�This is underlined by the final line of narration—“this was invitation enough.”
For this is an invitation to speak but in the form of quotation: wife replying to
husband as husband has replied to wife. To speak in reply, moreover, is to speak
of what was said. At least in conversation, then, to speak of what was said is not
an abstraction from speech; it is a condition of speech.
The abstraction from speech in this example rather lies in the unquoted words
of narration. For in what sense is the narrator invited to speak? Who is the
narrator, and where, to speak of what either spouse has said? At what place or
time, for that matter, and by whom, are the unquoted words in a book ever said?
It seems they need no speaker to say them; they need only be written down and
read. But in that case perhaps the unquoted words in a book are never said. A
book would then be made of words that can never speak, in being liberated, once
inside the book, from every circumstance of speech.
Consider, too, how if the words in a book could speak—literally speak—there
would be no point in learning to read. Every book would be an audiobook as soon
as we opened it. It is because the opened book is silent that reading becomes a
need. And learning it, for most of us, is not like learning to speak. The task is
difficult enough to need schooling and important enough to seem liberating. In
these respects, learning to read is arguably the first form a liberal education takes.
It may even be the only form, if a liberal education is made of books. But books,
in turn, are made of words that have to be read to be heard. In this sense, at least,
a book does seem made of unspoken words.
We might identify these words with the silence on the St. John’s campus
as a seminar book is being read, before it can be discussed. In discussion, by
contrast, the book is not read but quoted. This again suggests something gone
awry, even backwards, in my second attempt to distinguish quotation from book.
For quotation now looks like a kind of speech, leaving the book in a kind of
silence. But what kind of silence? And distinguished from what kind of speech?
Or again: what makes the quotation of a book not the book?
We come to my third attempt to answer the question. This time I return to where
I began the lecture:
A book is a small, hard, rectangular object, whose pages are bound
along one edge into fixed covers and numbered consecutively.
Words go unmentioned in this description of a book, as if it were blank. Yet the
book is not blank: its pages are numbered consecutively. It is as if a book were
9
�made of numbers rather than words. But is it not made of words—my hypothesis
all along?
Perhaps not. Consider what a book can become in the act of quotation:
“Reason is, and ought only to be, the slave of the passions, and can
never pretend to any other office than to serve and obey them.”
Mr. Harrell, where are you quoting from?
Oh. This is Hume. His Treatise. Page 266.
Mr. Harrell, I don’t have your edition.
Oh. Let’s see. I’m quoting from Book 2, Part 3, Section 3; the secondto-last sentence of paragraph . . . 4.
Something like this happens every time we quote from a book in seminar. We
take words out of the book to form the quotation, and what is left in the book
is their location. In this sense, a book does seem made of numbers. The quotation, in turn, is not made of numbers. It is made of only words—the words that
quotation has dislocated from the book. Could this be why the quotation of a
book is not the book? The quotation is made of words, while the book is made
of numbers.
This answer to the question is more plausible, I think, than it might sound
at first. For one thing, it makes sense of a book’s silence, in the unspoken but
countable order of its words. For another thing, reading is arguably an act of
counting. What else explains the puzzling thing that happens in every seminar?
Sooner or later someone will read words from the book out loud. And while the
rest of us could just look up and listen, many of us do not. We try to find the
words in the book and read them for ourselves, even as they are being read to
us by someone else. And the numbers in a book get us only so far. Page 266;
or for those with a different edition: Book 2, Part 3, Section 3, Paragraph 4—the
numbers allow us to reach the page of the words, even the paragraph. But to get
any closer, we have to stop counting by number and start counting by letter. Yet
what is counting by letter but reading the words the letters form? And once we
reach the words being quoted, counting by letter means reading those words for
ourselves. A book would then be made of numbers even when made of words.
Could this be the one way a book is made of its words? It is made of words we
count—those words in that order, from a first word to a last.
As much as I like this answer, it too arguably goes awry by having lost the
plot. True, the letters printed in a book may come in countable order to form
the words, just as the words come in countable order to form the sentences; as
10
�do the sentences to form the paragraphs, the sections, the chapters—and finally,
the book. Nonetheless, when we read all those words in just that order, it is not
to count them but to understand them. Or at least try to understand them; for it
is possible not to understand them, or to misunderstand them, prompting us to
read them again. But we read them again to understand them better.
We even have a word—interpretation—for the act of understanding that reading involves. The two are so close that “reading” has become almost a synonym
for “interpretation.” In this sense, reading a book elicits a reading of the book.
And reading a book at St. John’s means having a reading of the book to talk about.
Or even readings, plural—the one way, perhaps, there remain many books on the
seminar table. Here is how we put it in our Statement of the Program:
The books speak to us in more than one way. In raising the persisting questions, they lend themselves to different interpretations that
reveal a variety of independent yet complementary meanings.5
Notice too, on this account, how the books are able to speak. A speaking
book, even if we take it metaphorically, suggests something else gone awry in
my answer, where it was the quotation that speaks, leaving the book in a kind
of silence. But is there any difference between silence and speech when it comes
to understanding the book? Those words in that order remain the same, written
or spoken. And our understanding of them might well be improved if someone
else is doing the reading, allowing us to close the book and truly listen to what
it says. What else explains why we call the audiobook a book, and even use it
to get our seminar readings done? Or how we fell in love with certain books as
children, even before we learned to read?
But where does this leave us, then, with the book’s quotation? Perhaps it is
not really different from the book, after all. At least if by “quotation,” we mean
anything in the book that can be read out loud, and more or less understood. Let
our act of quotation remove all of this from the book. What is left for the book
to be? Perhaps nothing.
IV
Even if there were something, I am not, given the time, about to make a fourth
attempt to distinguish the quotation of a book from the book. It is also true that
5
Statement of the St. John’s College Program, 2. The current statement is available on the
St. John’s College website.
11
�the quotation of a book, like its translation, can seem like a special case. What
could be elusive about a book if we leave it unquoted, as well as untranslated?
Think again of those copies of Jane Austen that juniors will put on their seminar
table in several weeks, every copy having the same words in the same order. In
this identity, it seems we can tell the one way a book is made of its words, from
a first word to a last, before this way gets obscured by the book’s translation or
quotation.
Even so, there is also the book’s interpretation, which is not a special case. It
happens as soon as we read the book, and make any sense of what it says. And
we can ask what reading does to the book. In one sense, clearly nothing; the
words remain unchanged. This is why we can predict that every copy of Austen
will be identical, and why we can call it a copy of Austen, as if the words of Pride
and Prejudice belonged to the writer of the book.
But in another sense, reading the book does something to it—something so
radical that Pride and Prejudice will soon belong to its readers among the juniors. And copies on the seminar table—at least the copies not borrowed from
the library—will likely bear the marks of this ownership, even before the conversation starts. Certain sentences underlined; a whole paragraph bracketed; a
page-number circled; the page itself bookmarked. Then the marks in the margins:
a question mark, a check mark, an exclamation point; even a word or phrase written out, a whole sentence crowded in, possibly several at the page’s top or bottom.
On a blank page in the front or back, we might even find an outline.
To this legible extent, we could say that reading the book thickens the book,
at least by every reader with a pen in hand. But this is only prelude to how
reading the book lengthens the book, once the opening question is asked. For
at that point, we each put our reading of the book into words of our own. And
unlike the words of the writer, which come in order from first to last, there is
no such order from first to last in the words of the reader. Not that the outcome
is chaos; the outcome is conversation. And after that, perhaps an essay on the
book, followed by more conversation in the oral.
But this, then, is another way that the reader’s words differ from the writer’s:
for the writer has the last word in a way that the reader never will. The book
is lengthened by the reader to some indefinite point. We could even call it an
infinite point—at least for any book about which there is always more to write,
more to say, more to think. And with a book like Pride and Prejudice, we can
make the difference in length precise. The words of the writer make this book
about twelve hours long, using the average running time of an audiobook. But
the book has been lengthened, since its publication date, by the words of every
12
�reader, to make it two hundred and ten years long—and counting.
If we accept this difference in length as real—and I only have time enough
left in the lecture to run with it—then it looks as if a book is always made of its
words in two ways rather than one. One way is by the writer, whose words make
the book a finite thing. But the other way is by the reader, whose words make
the book an infinite thing.
This difference seems to hold even if the reader remains silent. For what
happens, exactly, when we pull the book off a shelf, open it up, and begin to read?
Are we carried somewhere else—my earlier way of putting it? Or are we glued
to a chair with our nose in the book—which is how it would look to anyone else?
And what of the book itself? Does it remain a small, hard, rectangular object,
with pages bound into covers? Or does it become like a canvass that doesn’t
exist? The dichotomy in these questions is essentially between the finite and
the infinite. Or if you prefer: between the bound and the unbound. And the
difference is made by the words. Do they bind the book to its pages, and the
reader in turn? Or do they free the book from its pages, and the reader in turn?
Suppose the answer is “yes” to both. Could this be how the words of a book
make its being elusive—to recall my hypothesis? The elusive, in this case, would
involve a contradiction in the words, and the way they limit the book at the same
time they liberate the book. My hypothesis, put this way, also allows me to recast
my hunch. Perhaps St. John’s is committed to the contradiction in a book—the
contradiction, more exactly, that is a book. If so, there ought to be signs of how
we live in the contradiction.
Here are two, I think. One is the conversation of a seminar, which at our
college replaces the lecture given by a professor nearly everywhere else. What
makes this kind of conversation possible? What is it about a book that can
prompt a discussion of what it means, in place of any account? One thing—to
recall a claim I quoted from our Statement—is that the books speak to us in more
than one way. We seem to rely on this in seminar. For what if a book could only
say the same thing to every reader in the room? The conversation would be at
best a quoting of the book back and forth.
But consider a second claim we make in our Statement—a claim that seems
to contradict the first—to explain the point of seminar:
The books can only repeat what they have to say, without furnishing
the clarifications that we desire. To overcome this limitation is the
goal of the St. John’s seminar.6
6
Statement, 2.
13
�We also seem to rely on this in seminar. For what if a book could only say a
different thing to every reader in the room? The conversation would be at best
a trading of translations by sight. It can only be a conversation, then, if the
book says the same thing to every reader in the room at the same time it says
a different thing to every reader in the room. And we live in this contradiction
every Monday and Thursday night.
But not only those nights. For a second sign of our life in contradiction comes
from the book itself. This replaces the lecture of a professor even before the
conversation begins. We read the book to see for ourselves what it says, with no
need to hear it from anyone else. So peculiar is our commitment to the book in
this respect that there exists in nearly every book we read an introduction we
skip. But what makes this kind of reading possible? What is it about a book that
can prompt a discovery of what it means, in place of any account? If we are not
to read such an account, then it seems the book has to answer the question of
what it means—completely. Yet if we are not to write such an account, then it
seems the book has to raise the question of what it means—perpetually. Perhaps
this explains the difference between the writer’s words and the reader’s. In the
answer of what is meant, there is a last word in the writing of the book. But in
the question of what is meant, there is no last word in the reading of the book.
And when we are not living in this contradiction through conversation about the
book, we are living in it through the book itself.
V
Or so the idea I have been running with would suggest of our commitment, if a
book is always made of its words in two ways at once. There is no time left for me
to question this final part of my lecture. But I do have time, I think, to question
the whole of it—by way of conclusion. For have I really said anything about the
being of a book? A book, that is, rather than a text? What is the difference, for
example, between the books we read for seminar and the manuals we use for
tutorial or laboratory? One answer is that the books are great—great in a way
that our manuals, being manuals, will never attain. But if my hunch is right,
calling our books “great” is no real answer. What then is the answer?
There is perhaps only one place in my lecture where I address books in their
being as books: at the beginning, in fourth-hand words.
A book is a small, hard, rectangular object, whose pages are bound
along one edge into fixed covers and numbered consecutively.
14
�Much of this description could apply a manual—or for that matter a senior essay.
They are somewhat small and rectangular; and they can be at least as hard as
a book in paperback. The pages are numbered consecutively; and we can bind
them along one edge with rings, or a spiral, or staples.
But the pages, thus bound, are not fixed in covers. In this respect, one page
remains separated from the next. In particular, the last page is separated from
the first, by all the pages in between. Not so with a book. The last page forms a
cover with the first, to contain all the words in between. In this respect, the first
and last page are one rather than two. In practice, from the use of signatures, this
only holds for the front and back cover of a book. But we can use these covers to
imagine the perfectly-bound book, where the first page forms a cover with the
last, the second with the second-to-last, the third with the third-to-last, and so
on.
Perhaps you can see where I am going. The book is like any text insofar as
the first page leads to the last; and this makes it finite. But in a book, and only a
book, the last page leads to the first; and this makes it infinite. It starts to look
as if the binding of a book allows the being of a book to be embodied. This being
may remain elusive, even contradictory, if the book is finite and infinite at once.
But the way a book is bound seems to allow the infinite to emerge from the finite.
When we read the book once, as if it were finite, we are invited by the book to
read it again, making the finite infinite. It is as if books were built to be read
again, bound to be unbound.
In one sense, “books to be read again” can sound like a platitude, especially if
we think the books in question are great. Those books are obviously built to be
read again. But even here I think the platitude is really a paradox. Let the books
be great—at a school where books are not simply what we read, but how we learn
and come to know. It may still make sense that we can read a book once, then
read it again. But what could it mean to learn something once, and then—as if we
unlearned it—learn it again? Or know something once, and then—as if we forgot
it—know it again? Even the greatest book we read on this question, Plato’s Meno,
leaves the answer—recollection—at the level of myth. Could being a book make
it the truth?
Daniel Harrell
St. John’s College, Annapolis
Friday Night Lecture
February 23, 2024.
15
�
Dublin Core
The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/.
Description
An account of the resource
Items in this collection are part of a series of lectures given every year at St. John's College. During the Fall and Spring semesters, lectures are given on Friday nights. Items include audio and video recordings and typescripts.<br /><br />For more information, and for a schedule of upcoming lectures, please visit the <strong><a href="http://www.sjc.edu/programs-and-events/annapolis/formal-lecture-series/" target="_blank" rel="noreferrer noopener">St. John's College website</a></strong>. <br /><br />Click on <strong><a title="Formal Lecture Series" href="http://digitalarchives.sjc.edu/items/browse?collection=5">Items in the St. John's College Formal Lecture Series—Annapolis Collection</a></strong> to view and sort all items in the collection.<br /><br />A growing number of lecture recordings are also available on the St. John's College (Annapolis) Lectures podcast. Visit <a href="https://anchor.fm/greenfieldlibrary" title="Anchor.fm">Anchor.fm</a>, <a href="https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/st-johns-college-annapolis-lectures/id1695157772">Apple Podcasts</a>, <a href="https://podcasts.google.com/feed/aHR0cHM6Ly9hbmNob3IuZm0vcy84Yzk5MzdhYy9wb2RjYXN0L3Jzcw" title="Google Podcasts">Google Podcasts</a>, or <a href="https://open.spotify.com/show/6GDsIRqC8SWZ28AY72BsYM?si=f2ecfa9e247a456f" title="Spotify">Spotify</a> to listen and subscribe.
Contributor
An entity responsible for making contributions to the resource
St. John's College Greenfield Library
Title
A name given to the resource
St. John's College Formal Lecture Series—Annapolis
Identifier
An unambiguous reference to the resource within a given context
formallectureseriesannapolis
Text
A resource consisting primarily of words for reading. Examples include books, letters, dissertations, poems, newspapers, articles, archives of mailing lists. Note that facsimiles or images of texts are still of the genre Text.
Original Format
The type of object, such as painting, sculpture, paper, photo, and additional data
pdf
Page numeration
Number of pages in the original item.
15 pages
Dublin Core
The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/.
Title
A name given to the resource
Being a Book
Description
An account of the resource
Typescript of a lecture delivered on February 23, 2024, by Daniel Harrell as part of the Formal Lecture Series.
Mr. Harrell describes his lecture: "When the so-called New Program was established at St. John’s College in 1937, conversation was to play no essential role—at least if you believe the first statement of the program, written by Scott Buchanan. Where you would expect the word 'conversation' you find 'instruction' instead, as in this brief description of the seminar:
Meetings of seminar groups will occur twice a week with any additional meetings that special circumstances or difficulties may indicate. There will be two instructors in charge, and the instruction will make use of a wide range of devices from explication de texte to analysis of intellectual content and the dialectical treatment of critical opinion.
When I read this description, I like to think that the importance of conversation to our endeavor emerged over time: a matter of discovery rather than dictate.
Has something similar happened with the importance of books to our endeavor? We have always stated this importance in terms of what makes certain books great; but what makes them books, I have come to think, is even more central to our experience of reading them, discussing them, and learning from them. Perhaps there is no way to dictate by 'great' how we come to find ourselves in these books, just as there was no way to dictate by 'instruction' how we came to find ourselves in a conversation about these books.
But what makes books books? What does it mean to be a book? This is the question of my lecture. And my hope—despite the St. John’s frame I use here—is that the lecture will be of interest to any reader of books, even if it fails, by my lights, to make full sense of a book."
Creator
An entity primarily responsible for making the resource
Harrell, Daniel
Coverage
The spatial or temporal topic of the resource, the spatial applicability of the resource, or the jurisdiction under which the resource is relevant
Annapolis, MD
Date
A point or period of time associated with an event in the lifecycle of the resource
2024-02-23
Rights
Information about rights held in and over the resource
A signed permission form has been received stating, "I hereby grant St. John's College permission to: Make an audio recording of my lecture, and retain copies for circulation and archival preservation in the St. John's College Greenfield Library. Make an audio recording of my lecture available online. Make a typescript copy of my lecture available for circulation and archival preservation in the St. John's College Greenfield Library. Make a copy of my typescript available online."
Type
The nature or genre of the resource
text
Format
The file format, physical medium, or dimensions of the resource
pdf
Subject
The topic of the resource
Books
Definition (Philosophy)
Meaning (Philosophy)
St. John's College (Annapolis, Md.)
Language
A language of the resource
English
Identifier
An unambiguous reference to the resource within a given context
LEC_Harrell_Daniel_2024-02-23
Friday night lecture
Tutors
Deprecated: Directive 'allow_url_include' is deprecated in Unknown on line 0